HomeMy WebLinkAboutReport 1UP2019 . 00059
16200 S)1 Pact C/c
c H'6 /J 3
COM check Software Version 4.1.1.0
Mechanical Compliance Certificate
RECEIVED
Section 1 : Project Information MAR 7 2019
Energy Code:2014 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code Cil TIGARD Project Title: Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR
Project Type:Alteration BUILDING DIVISION
Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:
16200 SW Pacific Hwy Starbucks Coffee Company GPD Engineering and Architecture
Suite#Z-3 2401 Utah Avenue South Professional Corporation
Tigard,OR 97224 Seattle,WA 98134 520 South Main St
(206)318-1575 Suite 2351
Akron,OH 44311
330.572.2100
Section 2: General Information
Building Location(for weather data): Tigard,Oregon
Climate Zone: 4c
Section 3: Mechanical Systems List
Quantity System Type&Description
1 RTU-1 (Single Zone):
Heating: 1 each-Duct Furnace,Gas,Capacity= 120 kBtu/h
Proposed Efficiency=80.00%Ec,Required Efficiency: 80.00%Ec
Cooling: 1 each-Single Package DX Unit,Capacity=92 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser,Air Economizer
Proposed Efficiency= 12.60 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.00 EER +11.2 IEER
Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 1 I RTU-1 --Compliance(Motor nameplate HP method):Passes
Fans:
FAN 1 Supply,Constant Volume,3000 CFM,2.8 motor nameplate hp
1 RTU-2(Single Zone)
Heating: 1 each-Duct Furnace,Gas,Capacity= 120 kBtu/h
Proposed Efficiency=80.00%Ec,Required Efficiency: 80.00%Ec
Cooling: 1 each-Single Package DX Unit,Capacity=92 kBtu/h,Air-Cooled Condenser,Air Economizer
Proposed Efficiency= 12.60 EER, Required Efficiency: 11.00 EER +11.2 IEER
Fan System: FAN SYSTEM 2 I RTU-2--Compliance(Motor nameplate HP method): Passes
Fans:
FAN 2 Supply,Constant Volume,3000 CFM,2.8 motor nameplate hp
1 Water Heater 1:
Gas Storage Water Heater,Capacity:50 gallons, Input Rating:40 kBtu/h
Proposed Efficiency:0.67 EF,Required Efficiency:0.58 EF
Section 4: Requirements Checklist
In the following requirements,blank checkboxes identify requirements that the applicant has not acknowledged as being met. Checkmarks
identify requirements that the applicant acknowledges are met or excepted from compliance. 'Plans reference page/section'identifies where in
the plans/specs the requirement can be verified as being satisfied.
Requirements Specific To: RTU-1 :
7 1. Equipment meets minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace(Gas): 80.00%Ec
✓ 2. Equipment meets minimum efficiency: Single Package Unit: 11.00 EER +11.2 IEER
✓ 3. Energy recovery ventilation systems. Individual fan systems that have both a design supply air capacity of 5,000 cfm or greater and a
minimum outside air supply of 70 percent or greater of the design supply air quantity have an energy recovery system.
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:O:\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne Square-
Tigard.cck Page 1 of 5
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 4. Hot Gas Bypass Limitation.Cooling systems does not use hot gas bypass or other evaporator pressure control unless the equipment is
designed with multiple steps(or continuous)capacity modulation.
Plans reference page/section:
• 5. Supply air economizers shall be provided on each cooling system and are capable of providing 100-percent outdoor air,even if
additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the cooling load of the building.Systems provide a means to relieve excess outdoor
air during economizer operation to prevent overpressurizing the building.
Plans reference page/section:
Requirements Specific To: RTU-2 :
• 1. Equipment meets minimum efficiency: Duct Furnace(Gas): 80.00%Ec
• 2. Equipment meets minimum efficiency: Single Package Unit: 11.00 EER +11.2 IEER
✓ 3. Energy recovery ventilation systems. Individual fan systems that have both a design supply air capacity of 5,000 cfm or greater and a
minimum outside air supply of 70 percent or greater of the design supply air quantity have an energy recovery system.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 4. Hot Gas Bypass Limitation.Cooling systems does not use hot gas bypass or other evaporator pressure control unless the equipment is
designed with multiple steps(or continuous)capacity modulation.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 5. Supply air economizers shall be provided on each cooling system and are capable of providing 100-percent outdoor air,even if
additional mechanical cooling is required to meet the cooling load of the building.Systems provide a means to relieve excess outdoor
air during economizer operation to prevent overpressurizing the building.
Plans reference page/section:
Requirements Specific To: Water Heater 1 :
• 1. Newly purchased equipment meets the efficiency requirements. Gas Storage Water Heater efficiency: 0.58 EF
✓ 2. Service water-heating equipment performance efficiency.Water heating equipment efficiency has been verified through data furnished
by the manufacturer or through certification under an approved certification program.
✓ 3. Temperature controls.Service water-heating equipment have controls to allow a setpoint of 110°F for equipment serving dwelling units
and 90°F for equipment serving other occupancies.The outlet temperature of lavatories in public facility rest rooms is limited to 110°F.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 4. Heat traps.Water-heating equipment not supplied with integral heat traps and serving noncirculating systems have heat traps on the
supply and discharge piping associated with the equipment.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 5. Pipe Insulation.For automatic-circulating hot water and externally heated(such as heat trace or impedance heating)systems,piping is
insulated in accordance with the specifications of this section.
✓ 6. Hot Water System Controls.Systems designed to maintain usage temperatures in hot water pipes is turned off automatically when
the hot water system is not in operation and has demand sensing controls that turn off the system when there is no demand when the
system is operational.A check valve or similar device is installed per requirement details.
Plans reference page/section:
Generic Requirements: Must be met by all systems to which the requirement is applicable:
1. Calculation of heating and cooling loads.Design loads are determined in accordance with the procedures described in the
ASHRAE/ACCA Standard 183.Alternatively,design loads have been determined by an approved equivalent computation procedure.
✓ 2. Packaged Electric Equipment.Specified packaged electrical equipment has a heat pump as the primary heating source.
Requirement is not applicable.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 3. Equipment and system sizing.Heating and cooling equipment and systems capacity do not exceed the loads calculated in accordance
with Section 503.2.1.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 4. HVAC Equipment Performance Requirements. Reported efficiencies have been tested and rated in accordance with the applicable test
procedure.The efficiency has been verified through certification under an approved certification program or,if no certification program
exists,the equipment efficiency ratings are supported by data furnished by the manufacturer.
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:O:\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne Square-
Tigard.cck Page 2 of 5
✓ 5. Thermostatic Controls.The supply of heating and cooling energy to each zone is controlled by individual thermostatic controls that
respond to temperature within the zone.
Plans reference page/section:
1 6. Heat pump supplementary heat.Heat pumps having supplementary electric resistance heat have controls that,except during defrost,
prevent supplementary heat operation when the heat pump can meet the heating load.
Plans reference page/section:
• 7. Set point overlap restriction.Where used to control both heating and cooling,zone thermostatic controls provide a temperature range
or deadband of at least 5°F(2.8°C)within which the supply of heating and cooling energy to the zone is capable of being shut off or
reduced to a minimum.
Plans reference page/section:
• 8. Optimum Start Controls. Each HVAC system has controls that vary the start-up time of the system to just meet the temperature set
point at time of occupancy.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 9. Off-hour controls.Each zone is provided with thermostatic setback controls that are controlled by either an automatic time clock or
programmable control system.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 10.Shutoff damper controls. Both outdoor air supply and exhaust are equipped with not less than Class I motorized dampers.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 11.Freeze Protection and Snow melt system controls. Freeze protection systems,such as heat tracing of outdoor piping and heat
exchangers,including self-regulating heat tracing,include automatic controls capable of shutting off the systems when outdoor air
temperatures meet code criteria.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 12.Separate air distribution systems.Zones with special process temperature requirements and/or humidity requirements are served by
separate air distribution systems from those serving zones requiring only comfort conditions;or shall include supplementary control
provisions so that the primary systems may be specifically controlled for comfort purposes only.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 13.Humidity control. If a system is equipped with a means to add or remove moisture to maintain specific humidity levels in a zone or
zones,a humidity control device is provided.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 14.Humidity control.Where a humidity control device exists it is set to prevent the use of fossil fuel or electricity to produce relative
humidity in excess of 30 percent.Where a humidity control device is used for dehumidification,it is set to prevent the use of fossil fuel
or electricity to reduce relative humidity below 60 percent.
Plans reference page/section:
• 15.Humidity control.Where a humidity control device exists it is set to maintain a deadband of at least 10%relative humidity where no
active humidification or dehumidification takes place.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 16.Ventilation.Ventilation,either natural or mechanical,is provided in accordance with Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code.
Where mechanical ventilation is provided,the system has the capability to reduce the outdoor air supply to the minimum required by
Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code.
Plans reference page/section:
• 17.Demand controlled ventilation(DCV). DCV is required for spaces larger than 500 ft2 for simple systems and spaces larger than 150 ft2
for multiple zone systems.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 18.Kitchen hoods. Kitchen makeup is provided as required by the Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code.
Plans reference page/section:
• 19.Enclosed parking garage ventilation controls. In Group S-2,enclosed parking garages used for storing or handling automobiles employs
automatic carbon monoxide sensing devices.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 20.Duct and plenum insulation and sealing.All supply and return air ducts and plenums are insulated with the specified insulation.When
located within a building envelope assembly,the duct or plenum is separated from the building exterior or unconditioned or exempt
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:O:\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne Square-
Tigard.cck Page 3 of 5
• spaces by a minimum of R-8 insulation.All ducts,air handlers and filter boxes are sealed.Joints and seams comply with Section 603.9
of the International Mechanical Code.
✓ 21.Low-pressure duct systems.All longitudinal and transverse joints,seams and connections of low-pressure supply and return ducts are
securely fastened and sealed with welds,gaskets,mastics(adhesives),mastic-plus-embedded-fabric systems or tapes installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
Plans reference page/section:
22.Medium-pressure duct systems.All ducts and plenums designed to operate medium-pressure are insulated and sealed in accordance
with Section 503.2.7.Pressure classifications specific to the duct system are clearly indicated on the construction documents.
Plans reference page/section:
• 23.High-pressure duct systems.Ducts designed to operate at high-pressure are insulated and sealed in accordance with Section 503.2.7.
In addition,ducts and plenums are leak-tested in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Plans reference page/section:
• 24.Air system balancing.Each supply air outlet and zone terminal device is equipped with means for air balancing in accordance with the
requirements of IMC 603.17.Discharge dampers intended to modulate airflow are prohibited on constant volume fans and variable
volume fans with motors 10 horsepower.
Plans reference page/section:
• 25.Manuals.The construction documents require that an operating and maintenance manual be provided to the building owner by the
mechanical contractor.See long description for specifications.
Plans reference page/section:
26.Air System Design and Control. Each HVAC system having a total fan system motor nameplate hp exceeding 5 hp meets the provisions
of Sections 503.2.10.1 through 503.2.10.2.
Plans reference page/section:
• 27.Allowable fan floor horsepower.Each HVAC system at fan system design conditions does not exceed the allowable fan system motor
nameplate hp(Option 1)or fan system bhp(Option 2)as shown and calulated in requirement details.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 28.Motor nameplate horsepower.For each fan,the selected fan motor is no larger than the first available motor size greater than the brake
horsepower(bhp).
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 29.Large Volume Fan Systems.Fan systems over 8,000(7 m3/s)cfm without direct expansion cooling coils that serve single zones reduce
airflow based on space thermostat heating and cooling demand.A two-speed motor or variable frequency drive reduces airflow to a
maximum 60 percent of peak airflow or minimum ventilation air requirement as required by Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical
Code,whichever is greater.
Plans reference page/section:
• 30.AII air-conditioning equipment and air-handling units with direct expansion cooling and a cooling capacity at ARI conditions greater than
or equal to 110,000 Btu/h that serve single zones have their supply fan operation controlled according to code specific requirements.
Plans reference page/section:
• 31.Series fan-powered terminal unit fan motors.Fan motors for series fan-powered terminal units are electronically-commutated motors
and have a minimum motor efficiency of 70 percent when rated in accordance with NEMA Standard MG 1-2006 at full load rating
conditions.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 32.Hot Gas Bypass Limitation. For cooling systems<=240 kBtu/h,maximum hot gas bypass capacity is no more than 50%total cooling
capacity.
Plans reference page/section:
• 33.All service water heating requirements are listed in requirements section specific to the system.
Section 5: Compliance Statement
Compliance Statement: The proposed mechanical alteration project represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,
specifications and other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed mechanical alteration project has been designed
to meet the 2014 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code,Chapter 8,requirements in COMcheck Version 4.1.1.0 and to comply with the
mandatory requirements in the Requirements Checklist.
Project Title: Tigard Towne Square -Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:O:\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne Square-
Tigard.cck Page 4 of 5
Name-Title Signature Date
Section 6: Post Construction Compliance Statement
HVAC record drawings of the actual installation,system capacities,calibration information,and performance data for each equipment
provided to the owner.
HVAC O&M documents for all mechanical equipment and system provided to the owner by the mechanical contractor.
Li Written HVAC balancing and operations report provided to the owner.
The above post construction requirements have been mpleted
�os�,vA Fat^rs r''`' /,/a 6 l 9
Principal Mechanical Designer-Name Signi Date
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date:02/12/19
Data filename:O:\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne Square-Tigard.cck Page 5 of 5
r
COMcheck Software Version 4.1.1.0
Interior Lighting Compliance RECEIVED
Certificate
MAR 7 2019
Section 1: Project InformationCITY OF TIGART9
BUILDING DIVISION
Energy Code: 2014 Oregon Energy Efficiency Specialty Code
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR
Project Type:Alteration
Construction Site: Owner/Agent: Designer/Contractor:
16200 SW Pacific Hwy Starbucks Coffee Company GPD Engineering and Architecture
Suite#Z-3 2401 Utah Avenue South Professional Corporation
Tigard,OR 97224 Seattle,WA 98134 520 South Main St
(206)318-1575 Suite 2351
Akron,OH 44311
330.572.2100
Section 2: Interior Lighting and Power Calculation
A B C D
Area Category Floor Area Allowed Allowed Watts
(ft2) Watts/ft2 (B x C)
Common Space Types:Dining Area-Bar Lounge/Leisure(Ceiling Height 0 ft.) 1835 1.31 2404
Total Allowed Watts= 2404
Section 3: Interior Lighting Fixture Schedule
A B C D E
Fixture ID: Description/Lamp/Wattage Per Lamp/Ballast Lamps/ #of Fixture (C X D)
Fixture Fixtures Watt.
Common Space Types:Dining Area-Bar Lounge/Leisure(1835 sq.ft.)
LED 1:Can Lights:Other: 1 99 11 1089
LED 2: 100W PP:Other: 1 2 100 200
LED 3:sconces/lamp:Other: 1 3 20 60
Total Proposed Watts= 1349
Section 4: Requirements Checklist
In the following requirements,blank checkboxes identify requirements that the applicant has not acknowledged as being met. Checkmarks
identify requirements that the applicant acknowledges are met or excepted from compliance. 'Plans reference page/section'identifies where in
the plans/specs the requirement can be verified as being satisfied.
Lighting Wattage:
• 1. Total proposed watts must be less than or equal to total allowed watts.
Allowed Wattage:2404 Proposed Wattage: 1349
Complies:YES
Mandatory Requirements:
✓ 2. Exit signs. Internally illuminated exit signs shall not exceed 5 watts per side.
Plans reference page/section: E-1104
• 3. Daylight zone control.All daylight zones are provided with individual controls that control the lights independent of general area lighting
in the non-daylight zone. In all individual daylight zones larger than 350 sq.ft.,automatic daylight controls is provided.Automatic
daylight sensing controls reduce the light output of the controlled luminaires at least 50 percent,and provide an automatic OFF control,
while maintaining a uniform level of illumination.Contiguous daylight zones adjacent to vertical fenestration may be controlled by a
single controlling device provided that they do not include zones facing more than two adjacent cardinal orientations(i.e.,north,east,
south,west).Daylight zones under skylights shall be controlled separately from daylight zones adjacent to vertical fenestration.
Plans reference page/section:
Project Title: Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:\\AKRN04-2016.gpdco.com\DATA\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne
Square - Tigard.cck Page 1 of 3
1
'L -
• 4. Interior lighting controls.At least one local shutoff lighting control has been provided for every 2,000 square feet of lit floor area and
each area enclosed by walls or floor-to-ceiling partitions.The required controls are located within the area served by the controls or are
a remote switch that identifies the lights served and indicates their status.
Plans reference page/section:
• 5. Sleeping unit controls.Master switch at entry to hotel/motel guest room.
Plans reference page/section:
ti 6. Egress lighting.Egress illumination is controlled by a combination of listed emergency relay and occupancy sensors to shut off during
periods that the building space served by the means of egress is unoccupied.
Exception applies: Building exits as defined in Section 1002 of the Oregon Structural Specialty Code.
Plans reference page/section:
• 7. Additional controls.Each area that is required to have a manual control shall have additional controls that meet the requirements of
Sections 505.2.2.1 and 505.2.2.2.
Plans reference page/section:
• 8. Light reduction controls.Each space required to have a manual control also allows for reducing the connected lighting load by at least
50 percent by either
1)controlling(dimming or multi-level switching)all luminaires;or
2)dual switching of alternate rows of luminaires,alternate luminaires,or alternate lamps;or
3)switching the middle lamp luminaires independently of other lamps;or
4)switching each luminaire or each lamp.
Plans reference page/section:
• 9. Buildings larger than 2,000 square feet are equipped with an automatic control device to shut off lighting in those areas.This automatic
control device shall function on either:
1)a scheduled basis,using time-of-day,with an independent program schedule that controls the interior lighting in areas that do not
exceed 10,000 square feet and are not more than one floor;or
2)an occupant sensor that shall turn lighting off within 30 minutes of an occupant leaving a space;or
3)a signal from another control or alarm system that indicates the area is unoccupied.
Plans reference page/section:
• 10.Occupancy sensors in rooms that include daylight zones are required to have Manual ON activation.
Plans reference page/section: E-1104
• 11.An occupant sensor control device is installed that automatically turns lighting off within 30 minutes of all occupants leaving a space.
Plans reference page/section:
• 12.Additional controls.An occupant sensor control device that automatically turns lighting off within 30 minutes of all occupants leaving a
space or a locally activated switch that automatically turns lighting off within 30 minutes of being activated is installed in all storage and
supply rooms up to 1000 square feet.
Plans reference page/section:
• 13.Occupant override.Automatic lighting shutoff operating on a time-of-day scheduled basis incorporates an override switching device
that: 1)is readily accessible,2)is located so that a person using the device can see the lights or the area controlled by that switch,or
so that the area being lit is annunciated,3)is manually operated,4)allows the lighting to remain on for no more than 2 hours when an
override is initiated,and 5)controls an area not exceeding 2,000 square feet.
Plans reference page/section:
• 14.Holiday scheduling.Automatic lighting shutoff operating on a time-of-day scheduled basis has an automatic holiday scheduling feature
that turns off all loads for at least 24 hours,then resumes the normally scheduled operation.
Plans reference page/section:
• 15.Exterior lighting controls. Lighting not designated for dusk-to-dawn operation shall be controlled by either a combination of a
photosensor and a time switch,or an astronomical time switch.Lighting designated for dusk-to-dawn operation shall be controlled by
an astronomical time switch or photosensor.
Plans reference page/section:
✓ 16.Tandem wiring.The following luminaires located within the same area shall be tandem wired:
1.Fluorescent luminaires equipped with one,three or odd-numbered lamp configurations,that are recess-mounted within 10 feet
center-to-center of each other.
2.Fluorescent luminaires equipped with one,three or any odd-numbered lamp configuration,that are pendant-or surface-mounted
within 1 foot edge-to-edge of each other.
Exception applies:Where electronic high-frequency ballasts are used.
Project Title:Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:\\AKRN04-2016.gpdco.com\DATA\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne
Square - Tigard.cck Page 2 of 3
Plans reference page/section:
17.Medical task lighting or art/history display lighting claimed to be exempt from compliance has a control device independent of the control
of the nonexempt lighting.
Plans reference page/section:
18.Each dwelling unit in a building is metered separately.
Plans reference page/section: E-1001
Interior Lighting PASSES
Section 5: Compliance Statement
Compliance Statement: The proposed lighting design represented in this document is consistent with the building plans,specifications and
other calculations submitted with this permit application.The proposed lighting system has been designed to meet the 2014 Oregon Energy
Efficiency Specialty Code requirements in COMcheck Version 4.1.1.0 and to comply with the mandatory requirements in the Requirements
Checklist.
Steven P. Schaub, P.E. _.` 02/28/19
Name-Title Si Date
P
k.
44/
1NE s'o
cc
88390PE
OREGON
\`'D
c'S'T SOT 10.2Q Jq)
'SEN P. SGNP
EXPIRES:
•
Project Title: Tigard Towne Square-Tigard, OR Report date: 02/12/19
Data filename:\\AKRN04-2016.gpdco.com\DATA\2016\2016355\42_Tigard Town Square_Tigard OR\COMcheck\2016355.42 Tigard Towne
Square - Tigard.cck Page 3 of 3
N1'52919-0(.2)59
I IwZOosvl! Pee, fiAii 23
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I UCTUçq GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS PR
Op. ..
, 'T's
. OFFS
�es0 PROFFS
I -57
I C.) ��INE s°ti
(.. V- N�F� °� TIGARD TOWN SQUARE �g9 p8PE
ak86692PE 16200 SW PACIFIC HWY #Z3 i
TIGARD, OR 97224 - 411.
( � G _ `
i • 46
`!REGON c
-44-13,2c)‘tk STORE # 418 .9/�p 9'2°1 ckV
1 J�yN N KP�P�
02/28/19 cio ,M.MP
: 12/31/02/28/19
1 EXPIRES: 06/30/19
I
���,D P_op
I ����DAkC, «N ��G ��� °�
7
' , �� ` 8:390
C MARh S.SAI,OPEK Cn
I
AKRON. OH C 1.R' 40
• NO. 6036 • S \�
�i'T 10.2 JO
��"f 6'2' i)7..
P. SGNP
1 iii
t ! �y 62/28/19
C y`- fYN IA EXPIRES:06/30/2020
I 02/28/19
IRECEIVED
I MAR 7 2019
TY OF TIGARD
BUILDING DIVISION
1
I
GPD Engineering and Architecture
111
Professional Corporation
I
I
' 2016355.42
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 000010—TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
' 011000 - Summary
012300 -Alternates
013113- Project Coordination
013119- Project Meetings
013233 - Photographic Documentation
013300 - Submittal Procedures
013544 - Construction Indoor Air Quality Management
' 013546 - Sustainable Design Requirements
014500- Quality Control
015000 -Temporary Facilities And Controls
016000- Product Requirements
017329 - Cutting and Patching
017421 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal
017700- Closeout Procedures
' DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 - Selective Demolition
DIVISION 03 -CONCRETE
' 030100- Concrete Slab Repair and Resurfacing
033000- Cast-In-Place Concrete
033015- Concrete Slabs on Grade
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
042113 - Brick Masonry
042200 - Concrete Masonry Units
DIVISION 05- METALS
051200 - Structural Steel Framing
053100 - Steel Decking
055000 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 -WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES
061000- Rough Carpentry(Wood Framed)
064000-Architectural Woodwork
' DIVISION 07 -THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 -Thermal Insulation
072700 -Weather Resistive Barriers
' 075423 -Thermoplastic Membrane (TPO) Roofing
076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
TEMPLATE 000010-1 10/12/18
I
2016355.42
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 000010—TABLE OF CONTENTS
077200 - Roof Accessories
079200 - Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 -OPENINGS '
081113- Hollow Metal Doors And Frames
081400-Wood Doors
084000-Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and Windows
087100- Door Hardware
087300- Door and Hardware Installation
088000- Glazing
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092200 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing
092843 - Gypsum Sheathing
092900 - Gypsum Board 111093000-Tiling
095113-Acoustical Panel Ceilings
097200-Wall Coverings
097733- Reinforced Plastic Panel Wall Coverings
098100—Acoustic Insulation
099013- Exterior Painting
099023- Interior Painting '
DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES
104400- Fire Protection Specialties ,
DIVISION 22- PLUMBING
220500-Common Work Results for Plumbing '
220503-Submittals for Plumbing
220523-General Duty Valves
220529- Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
220548 -Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment
220719 - Plumbing System Insulation
220800- Plumbing Commissioning Specification
221116- Domestic Water Piping
221119- Domestic Water Piping Specialties
221123- Recirculation Domestic Water Pump
221316-Sanitary, Waste and Vent Piping System
221319 -Sanitary Waste Interceptors
221319- Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
221613- Natural Gas Piping Systems
223000-Commercial Water Heaters
223001 - Point of Use Thermostatic Mixing Valves
224000- Plumbing Fixtures
TEMPLATE 000010-2 10/12/18
1I
I
I 2016355.42
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 000010—TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23- HVAC
I 230501 -Common Work Results for HVAC
230503- Submittals for HVAC Systems
230529- Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Ducts
I 230548-Seismic Control For HVAC
230593-Testing,Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
230713- Duct Insulation
230719- HVAC Piping Insulation
I 230800-Commissioning of HVAC Systems
230993-Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls
232113-Aboveground Hydronic Piping and Specialties
I 232123- Hydronic Pumps
233113- Metal Ducts
233423- HVAC Power Ventilators
233433-Air Curtains
I 233713- Diffusers, Registers and Louvers
237200 -Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Equipment
237433- Packaged Unit HVAC
I 238126-Split System HVAC
238129-Ductless Split System HVAC
238239- Unit Heaters
Il
DIVISION 26- ELECTRICAL
260501 -Common Work Results for Electric
I 260502-Common Electrical Materials and Methods
260503- Submittals for Electrical Systems
260519- Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
I 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
260533- Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems
260537-J-Hook Pathways for Electrical Systems
I 260543- Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
260544-Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling
260548-Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems
260553- Identification for Electrical Systems
I 260584 - Mechanical Equipment
260590- Electrical Specialties
260800-Commissioning of Electrical Systems
I 260919- Enclosed Contactors
260923- Lighting Control Devices
262113- Low-Voltage Overhead Electrical Service Entrance
262116- Low-Voltage Underground Electrical Service Entrance
I 262200- Low-Voltage Transformers
262416- Panelboards
262713- Electricity Metering
I 262726-Wiring Devices
262813- Fuses
TEMPLATE 000010-3 10/12/18
I
1
2016355.42
TIGARD TOWN SQUARE
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 000010—TABLE OF CONTENTS
262816 - Enclosed Switches 1
264313 - Surge Protection for Low-Voltage Electrical Power Circuits
265100 - Lighting 1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TEMPLATE 000010-4 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sustainability requirements.
2. Special work requirements.
3. Owner-furnished Contractor installed products.
4. Coordination.
5. Reference standards.
t 6. Applicable codes.
7. Field engineering.
8. Applications for payment
9. Request for information
B. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS
A. This Project has been designated to achieve sustainability goals set forth by the Owner. Provide
services, documentation, and materials to obtain the required rating. Refer to Owner-requirements for
further requirements.
1.3 SPECIAL WORK REQUIREMENTS
A. Limit use of premises to allow for construction operations, and to allow for Owner occupancy and
Work by other Contractors.
B. Smoking is prohibited on site, except for areas designated by the Contractor. No smoking is allowed
within enclosed areas.
' C. Owner Occupancy:
1. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Construction Manager.
2. Perform no utility shutdowns unless approved by the Construction Manager.
D. Noise Producing Activities:
1. Unless approved otherwise, limit excessive noise producing activities to daylight hours.
Coordinate with local jurisdictional authorities.
2. Comply with Section 015000 requirements for sound levels and noise control.
' E. Select materials, utilize personnel, perform preparatory work, and sequence work in an area as
required so that the work may be completed in the least amount of time possible.
F. All work shall be performed in a manner to maintain a normal business environment to the greatest
' extent possible.
1.4 OWNER-FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS
' A. Coordinate work to facilitate installation of products furnished by the Owner for Installation by the
Contractor, as directed, and as indicated "FOIC," on the Drawings.
B. Owner's Responsibilities:
' 1. Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. Upon delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage.
5. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
6. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties, inspections, and service.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
' 1. Provide quantity take-offs to Owner allowing sufficient time for ordering, delivery and handling.
2. Indicate submittal and delivery dates for each product in the Progress Schedule.
111 TEMPLATE 011000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY '
3. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples.
4. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness, for damage,jointly with
Construction Manager.
5. Handle, store, install and finish products.
6. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work of the various Sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of
installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work
of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in
service, such equipment.
C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated
diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits, as closely as
practical; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility
for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
D. In finished areas, except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
E. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of Work, uncover ill-timed, defective, and non-
conforming work, provide openings for penetrations of existing surfaces, and provide samples for
testing. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, and ceilings.
1.6 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. For products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of the standard,
except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
B. The date of the standard is that in effect as of the Bid date, or date of Owner-Contractor Agreement
when there are no bids, except when a specific date is specified, or when a specific date is required
under the applicable building code.
C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. Maintain copy at jobsite during
progress of the specific work.
1.7 APPLICABLE CODES 1
A. Conform to the codes listed on the Drawings.
1.8 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Provide field engineering services; establish grades, lines, and levels, by use of recognized
engineering survey practices.
B. Control points are those shown on Drawings. Locate and protect control and reference points. Notify
the Construction Manager if reference points cannot be located.
1.9 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A. Complete and submit Applications for Payment in compliance with General Contractor Contract
Administration Handbook
1.10 REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION
A. A Request for Interpretation (RFI) is a request from the Contractor directed to the Construction
Manager for clarification, interpretation, or direction regarding the Work as described by Contract
Documents.
B. Coordinate and submit in timely manner so as not to impede delivery, work, and other conditions that I
may be detrimental to construction progress
C. Use "Request for Interpretation"form as approved by the Construction Manager.
D. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for Architect's response to the RFIs.
TEMPLATE 011000-2 10/12/18 1
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 011000 -SUMMARY
' END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEMPLATE 011000-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 012300 -ALTERNATES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Identification and description of Alternate work.
B. Related Sections:
1. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation into the Work.
2. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate.
C. This Section supplements the General and Supplementary Conditions.
1.2 PROCEDURES ,
A. Alternates will be exercised at the option of Owner.
B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required to complete the Work, including
changes under each Alternate, when acceptance is designated in Owner-Contractor Agreement.
1.3 ALTERNATE DESCRIPTIONS
A. ALTERNATE NO. 1 — FLOOR TREATMENT
1. Under Basic Bid: Floor tile#18113 ("Grey Textured Stripe" 12x24)throughout store totaling
approximately 2,052 square feet.
2. Under Alternate: Polyvinyl Floor Tile#19794 ("Eco-Grip" Slate)throughout backbar and back of
house, totaling approximately 801 square feet, thereby reducing floor tile#18113 to approximately
1,251 square feet.
B. ALTERNATE NO. 2—DRIVE THRU LANE PAVING
1. Under Basic Bid: (2) 216 square foot 6"thick concrete pads at order point and pickup window,
with approximately 1,850 square feet full depth asphalt paving between per civil drawings.
2. Under Alternate: Replace 1,850 square feet of full depth asphalt paving with 6"thick concrete
paving, for a total of 2,282 square feet of concrete paving.
END OF SECTION
1
I
TEMPLATE 012300-1 10/12/18 I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013113 -PROJECT COORDINATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
t 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General coordination provisions.
2. Requirements for coordination of space.
3. Use of coordination drawings.
B. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
1.2 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS
A. Coordinate work of various specification sections to assure efficient and orderly sequence of
installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and installation
of work. Promptly advise Construction Representative of any error, inconsistency, omission, or
apparent discrepancy discovered.
C. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Construction Representative and Architect.
Establish procedures for handling queries and clarifications. Use Contractor's standard "Request for
' Information"form to initiate clarifications. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for Architect's
response to the request.
D. In addition to meetings specified in Section 013119, hold coordination meetings and conferences with
personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of the work.
E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of various specification sections to ensure efficient and
orderly sequence of installation of independent construction elements.
' F. Verify that characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and services.
G. Verify characteristics of elements of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate work
of various specification sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to,
and placing in service, such equipment.
H. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, conduit and wiring in the construction.
Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
' I. Execute cutting and patching to integrate elements of work, uncover ill-timed, defective, and non-
conforming work, provide openings for penetrations of existing surfaces, and provide samples for
testing. Seal penetrations through floors, walls, and ceilings.
1.3 COORDINATION OF SPACE
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the actual layout of plumbing, fire protection,
HVAC, electrical, and other similar elements, as necessary to avoid interference, maintain the
configurations of architectural elements, maintain minimum ceiling and clearance heights as required
' by code, and accommodate existing obstructions which are to remain.
B. Layouts shown on the Drawings are diagrammatic. Follow routings shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit as closely as practical. Where routing changes are required in exposed locations within public
t spaces, or will affect architectural elements, verify modifications with the Construction Representative
prior to proceeding.
C. Develop coordination drawings, and other preinstallation coordination methods as necessary to
' coordinate layouts prior to installation. Coordination drawings shall be based on the approved
structural steel framing shop drawings, and shall consist of overlay drawings, or other similar methods
to graphically indicate plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, electrical, and other similar elements in a
single location in order to identify conflicts.
1
TEMPLATE 013113-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013113 - PROJECT COORDINATION 1
D. Where coordination drawings, or other preinstallation coordination methods show that available space
is inadequate or that modifications will affect architectural elements, request information from the
Construction Representative before proceeding with work. No additional payment will be made for
installation conflicts which could have been identified by coordination drawings or other preinstallation
coordination methods.
E. Provide clear access to control points, clean-outs, valves, strainers, control devices, and specialty
items of every nature to such systems and equipment to obtain maximum head room. Provide
adequate clearances as necessary for operation and maintenance.
F. Make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
A. Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Not Used.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
TEMPLATE 013113-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Contractor participation in pre-construction conferences.
' 2. Contractor administration of progress meetings and pre-installation conferences.
B. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 GENERAL MEETING REQUIREMENTS
A. Make physical arrangements for meetings; notify participants, prepare agenda with copies for each
attendee.
B. Take meeting minutes, and distribute copies within 2 days to the Construction Manager, Architect, and
all attendees. Distribute copies to other parties as appropriate.
C. All representatives attending meetings shall be authorized to act on behalf of the entity each
represents.
1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCES
A. The Construction Manager will administer pre-construction conference for execution of Owner-
Contractor Agreement and exchange of preliminary submittals.
B. The Construction Manager will administer site mobilization conference at Project site for clarification of
Owner and Contractor responsibilities in use of site and for review of administrative procedures.
1.4 SUSTAINABLE PRACTICES INTRODUCTION MEETING
A. Prior to commencing construction, schedule and administer a meeting to review the sustainable
design and construction requirements for the project as specified in Section 013543—Sustainable
Design Requirements.
B. Attendance: Job superintendent, subcontractors and suppliers responsible for construction and
' submittals related to sustainability requirements, Owner's Construction Manager, Owner's consultant,
and others as appropriate to the meeting agenda.
C. Agenda:
1. Review goals targeted for the Project
2. Review submittal requirements related to sustainable practices.
3. Substitution limitations sustainable practices.
4. Request suggestions for construction practices or materials in keeping with Contract
requirements which would lessen the environmental impact of the Project.
D. Additional Sustainable Practices Meetings:
1. Schedule additional sustainable practices meetings for subcontractors and suppliers responsible
for sustainability goals, which are added to the construction team after the initial sustainable
practices meeting. Additional meetings shall include the Job superintendent, Owner's
Construction Manager, Owner's consultant, and others as appropriate to the meeting agenda.
2. Schedule meetings prior to construction or ordering of materials by the additional subcontractors
and suppliers.
3. Coordinate and subcontract the work so there are a maximum of 2 additional meetings.
1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS
I A. Schedule and administer progress meetings throughout the Work at interval determined by Owner's
Construction Manager.
B. Attendance: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Construction Manager, and
others as appropriate to the meeting agenda.
C. Suggested Agenda:
TEMPLATE 013119-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013119 - PROJECT MEETINGS
1. Review of Work progress.
2. Status of progress schedule and adjustments.
3. Delivery schedules.
4. Submittals.
5. Maintenance of quality standards.
6. Pending changes and substitutions
7. Status of sustainable practices.
8. Other items affecting progress of Work.
1.6 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES
A. Where required in a specification Section, schedule and administer a pre-installation conference prior
to commencing work of the Section.
B. Unless otherwise required, notify the Construction Manager a minimum of 7 calendar days prior to
each scheduled meeting.
C. Require the attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, the work of the Section. t
D. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related
work.
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
r
1
1
i
TEMPLATE 013119-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1. Preconstruction photographs.
I 2. Periodic construction photographs.
B. Related Requirements:
1. 017700 -Closeout Procedures: Submitting photographic documentation as Project Record
Documents at Project closeout.
I1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files.
I 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.
2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:
a. Name of Project.
b. Name and contact information for photographer.
I c. Date photograph was taken.
d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation
or story of construction.
I 1.3 USAGE RIGHTS
A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of
photographic documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA
IA. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS
A. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly
show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.
B. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without
alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.
I 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.
2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,
available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to
Construction Representative.
I C. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs weekly, with timing adjusted to coincide with
the progress meetings specified in Section 013119. Select vantage points to show status of
construction and progress since last photographs were taken.
I D. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take minimum 20 color photographs after date of
Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Construction Representative
will inform photographer of desired vantage points.
I E. Additional Photographs: Construction Representative may request photographs in addition to periodic
photographs specified.
1. Three days' notice will be given, where feasible.
2. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the
I following:
a. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses.
IlTEMPLATE 013233-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013233 -PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION '
b. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site.
c. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work.
d. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance.
I
END OF SECTION
I
1
1
1
I
I
r
w
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 013233-2 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Submittal form requirements.
' 2. Submittal schedule.
3. Contractor responsibilities.
4. Requirements for each type of submittal.
B. Related Sections:
1. 007200 - General Conditions of the Contract: Additional submittal requirements.
2. 013546—Sustainable Design Requirements: Sustainability submittals.
3. 016000 - Product Requirements: Substitution submittals.
4. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Closeout submittals.
C. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
' 1.2 SUBMITTAL FORM REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide the following, as applicable, on each submittal:
1. The Project name and number.
2. Present and Previous submittal dates.
3. Contractor's submittal number.
4. Subcontract identification.
5. The names of:
a. Contractor.
b. Supplier.
c. Manufacturer.
6. Identification of revisions on resubmittals.
7. For each product, reference corresponding specification section and paragraph number.
8. A 3 x 2 inch blank space for Contractor and Architect stamps.
B. Deliver submittals to the Construction Manager. Include name of contact person identified at the time
of Agreement.
C. Transmit submittals under AIA form G810 or other transmittal form as accepted by the Construction
Manager.
D. Submittals in graphic form shall be clear readable copies with Contractor's original stamp. Facsimile
submittals will not be accepted.
1.3 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Make submittals to the Construction Manager as required, causing no delay in the work.
B. Allow a minimum of 3 working days from receipt, for the Construction Manager to review each
submittal. Allow additional time for large and complex submittals representing major portions of the
Work, such as fire protection, structural steel, or curtain wall.
C. Schedule submittals to allow sufficient time for possible revision and resubmittal of the rejected
submittals, without affecting the construction schedule.
D. Make the following submittals to the Construction Manager prior to starting construction and within 10
working days of the Notice to Proceed:
1. Certificates of insurance.
2. List of subcontractors and suppliers.
3. Construction schedule.
4. Submittal log/schedule.
5. Products list.
E. Submit Schedule of Values prior to first application for payment.
TEMPLATE 013300-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTALS '
A. Make submittals to the Construction Manager with 3 copies directly to the Architect, unless otherwise
directed.
B. Review submittals prior to submittal to the Construction Manager. Verify specified requirements for
products, field measurements, and field construction requirements.
C. Stamp and sign each submittal as certification that the submittal has been reviewed by the Contractor.
Submittals not stamped and signed by the Contractor will be returned by the Construction Manager
without review for resubmittal.
D. Notify the Construction Manager in writing, at time of submission, of all deviations in the submittals
from requirements of the Contract Documents. I
E. Make additional copies of approved submittals as necessary to implement the Work.
F. Review and approval of a submittal by the either the Construction Manager or the Architect shall not
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for the proper fitting, finishing, quantities, and erection of the
work in strict accordance with the Contract requirements.
G. Review and approval of a submittal by the Construction Manager or the Architect shall not relieve the
Contractor from the responsibility for providing work not indicated on the submittal, but otherwise
required for the completion of the work.
H. Do not fabricate or erect work prior to approval of the submittals.
I. Should discrepancies become evident, immediately notify Construction Manager for resolution before I
proceeding with shop work.
J. Incorporation of substitutions into submittals will be considered cause for rejection of the submittal.
K. Submittals will be reviewed by the Architect for conformance to the design concept, only. Architect's
review of vendor designed items shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with
specified performance requirements.
L. If the Contractor fails to review Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples to determine their
responsiveness to the Contract Documents, or fails to substantially respond to Architect's review
comments prior to resubmittal, or if the Contractor makes submittals which substantially alter the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the charges of the Architect for
extra services required to review such submittals.
1.5 SUSTAINABILITY SUBMITTALS
A. Make sustainability submittals to the Construction Manager with 3 copies directly to the Architect. ,
B. Sustainability submittals are specified in Section 013546 and in the various technical sections.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A. Prepare schedule in the form of a network planning system (CPM)for scheduling and controlling the
work. Note the critical path.
B. Show commencement and completion dates proposed for each subdivision of work.
C. Update and submit monthly. Indicate actual start and completion of all completed activities.
Graphically indicate changes from previously issued schedule.
D. Incorporate remedial construction into schedule when remedial work is required. 1
E. Show submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, and samples, and product delivery
dates, including those furnished by Owner.
F. Coordinate with the Owner's schedule, showing all Contract activities to be performed by the Owner I
including their start, duration, completion, float and critical path.
1
TEMPLATE 013300-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
111 1.7 SUBMITTAL LOG/SCHEDULE
A. List each type of submittal, and the date that the submittal will be made. Indicate Architect review time
proposed.
r1.8 PRODUCTS LIST
A. Complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model
number of each product.
1.9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Submit Schedule of Values prior to first Application for payment.
B. Submit schedule on AIA Form G703. Contractor's standard form or media-driven printout will be
considered on request.
C. Format: Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number and title of the
major Specification Sections.
D. Include in each line item a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
E. Revise schedule to list change orders, for each application for payment.
1.10 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Submit Shop Drawings required by individual Sections of the Specifications, and as otherwise required
for proper performance of the work.
B. Illustrate fully the requirements of the Specifications and the Contract Drawings, and accurately show
quantities, kinds of materials, methods of assembly, and all data required for fabrication, erection, and
installation.
C. Show the relationship of adjoining work, relevant field conditions and dimensions; coordinate with
affected subcontractors and suppliers if in conflict. Where specific items such as field dimensions,
clearances, adjacent construction, mounting configurations, access requirements, structural
calculations, etc. are required by the technical specification Sections, failure to provide such
information on the shop drawings may be cause for rejection without review.
D. Submit to the Construction Manager with a direct copy to the Architect one electronic copy for review.
E. Shop drawings will be reviewed for conformance to the design concept, only.
F. The Construction Manager will return an electronic copy to Contractor with corrections, notations and
I reviews stamp indicating action to be taken.
G. In the case of rejected Shop Drawings, the Construction Manager will return the electronic copy to the
Contractor for his use in the preparation of revised drawings for resubmittal.
H. Should discrepancies become evident, immediately notify Construction Manager for resolution before
proceeding with shop work.
I. CADD generated drawings may be obtained from the Owner only for use in preparation of shop
' drawings for this Project.
1. Release of CADD information will be restricted to the following categories:
a. Architectural floor plans.
b. RCP's.
c. Casework drawings.
2. The CADD drawings will contain only the background information; reference symbols, and other
similar data will not be included.
3. The CADD files are generated on PC hardware with AUTOCAD software. Architect and Owner
have the capability to develop CADD output of the following file formats:
a. AutoCAD (.dwg)
b. Drawing Interchange Format(.dxf)
c. Revit (.rvt)
4. When requesting CADD drawings, specify the output form required.
TEMPLATE 013300-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013300 -SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES '
5. Request documents by submitting an executed copy of the Architect's "Agreement Concerning
Use Of Electronic Media." Example of the form is bound in this manual following this Section.
Use of such documents implies Contractor's and subcontractors' agreement to the terms
described on the form. Fully describe requirements for each request.
6. CADD exchange shall only occur one time and will include the architectural floor and ceiling
plans.
7. Contractor shall maintain a log of requests and shall submit the final log for review at Project
Closeout.
1.11 PRODUCT DATA
A. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Include
manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
B. Number of copies: One electronic copy. The Construction Manager will return an electronic copy to
Contractor with corrections, notations and review stamp indicating action to be taken.
C. Modify product data and installation instructions to delete information which is not applicable to the
work.
D. Supplement standard information to provide information specifically applicable to the work.
1.12 SAMPLES
A. Submit samples as specified in the technical Sections.
B. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.
C. Submit the number of samples specified in the technical Sections. Where quantity is not specified,
submit 3 samples. One will be retained by the Construction Manager and one by the Architect.
D. Unless specified otherwise, submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns
for Owner's selection.
E. Submit samples to illustrate functional characteristics of the product, with integral parts and
attachment devices. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.
END OF SECTION
I
I
1I
1
1
1
TEMPLATE 013300-4 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013544—CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Description of the Construction Indoor Air Quality(IAQ) Management Plan
2. IAQ Construction Requirements to meet the sustainability requirements for the Project.
B. Related sections:
1. 013300—Submittals
2. 013546—Sustainable Design Requirements: Sustainable practices requirements.
C. Construction Indoor Air Quality Requirements:
1. The Owner has set indoor air quality goals for job site operations on project, within the limits of
the construction schedule, contract sum, and available materials, equipment, products and
services. These goals include:
a. Protect workers on the site from undue health risks during construction.
b. Install low-VOC materials as specified in Part 2— Products.
c. Prevent residual problems with indoor air quality in the completed building.
D. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
E. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
' A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA):
1. IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3.
1.3 SUSTAINABILITY SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300—Submittals.
B. Indoor Air Quality Management Plan:
1. Develop and submit a written construction indoor air quality management plan to meet the
sustainability goals of the Project.
2. Submit within fourteen days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and prior to beginning any work on
the site.
3. The IAQ management plan shall comply with the five requirements of SMACNA IAQ Guideline
for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1995, Chapter 3: HVAC protection, source control,
pathway interruption, housekeeping, and scheduling and shall include:
a. List of IAQ protective measures to be instituted on the site:
1) HVAC system protection during construction.
2) Source control through specification and installation of low-toxic or non-toxic materials.
3) Pathway interruption to isolate work areas where emitting materials are being installed.
4) Housekeeping to protect materials that are stored before installation and to avoid
spreading contamination through the Project.
5) Sequencing installation of materials to avoid contaminating absorptive materials during
construction.
b. Schedule for inspection and maintenance of IAQ measures.
C. IAQ Documentation: Provide letter declaring that the requirements of IAQ Plan have been met. See
Section 013546 for these submittal requirements.
' PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Low emitting products have been specified in appropriate sections.
TEMPLATE 013544-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013544—CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
B. If air handlers must be used during construction, filtration media with a Minimum Efficiency Reporting
Value (MERV) of 8, as determined by ASHRAE 52.5-1999, must be used at each return air grille.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ALL PHASES
A. Meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National
Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 1995,
as applicable to new buildings. As a minimum, this means:
1. Protect the ventilation system components from contamination:
a. Store HVAC equipment in a clean, dry location.
b. Seal all HVAC inlets and outlets.
c. Seal HVAC components during installation.
d. Use a temporary ventilation system during construction.
e. Use temporary filtration media.
1) Filtration media shall have a Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value [MERV] of 8 as
determined by ASHRAE 52.2-1999) on any return air systems operational during
construction. For air intakes into rooms that are very sensitive to dust contamination,
such as computer rooms, filtration media should be the best that the HVAC systems
fans can handle, up to an MERV rating of 17.
2) Replace all filtration media immediately prior to occupancy.
f. Clean air plenums before closing them in.
g. Inspect filters regularly.
2. Provide pollution source control:
a. Protect on-site stored and installed absorptive materials (such as insulation, drywall, and
wood)from moisture damage and from contamination by construction dust, debris, and
fumes during all phases of construction, both before and after installation.
b. Do not install moisture-damaged materials.
c. Ensure that construction detailing will not result in moisture intrusion.
d. Use low-emitting products (specified in appropriate sections).
e. Provide strategies to avoid tracking pollutants into the work areas.
f. Allow high-VOC materials to off-gas prior to installation. For example, all dry furnishing and
materials (such as carpet, floor tile, acoustical tile, textiles, office furniture, wood shelving,
etc.)shall be allowed to"air-out" in clean environments prior to installation in a building.
g. Use the least amount of"wet" materials (such as adhesives, sealants, glazes, caulks,
paints, etc.)during construction and product applications while still maintaining installation
protocol required to meeting for manufacturer's warrantee requirements.
3. Provide interruption of pollutant pathways:
4. Use an air barrier or pressure differential to isolate areas at different stages of completion.
5. Practice healthy housekeeping.
a. Minimize accumulation of dust and other contaminants. 111b. Confine dust-generating activities.
c. Suppress dust.
1) Use wet sanding for gypsum board assemblies. Exception: Dry sanding allowed
subject to Construction Representative approval of the following measures:
a) Full isolation of space under finishing
b) Plastic protection sheeting is installed to provide air sealing during the sanding
c) Closure of all air system devices and ductwork
d) Sequencing of construction precludes the possibility of contamination of other
spaces with gypsum dust
e) Worker protection is provided
d. Clean up dust.
e. Clean up spills.
f. Keep work area dry.
g. Seal containers of volatile liquids.
6. Schedule construction activities to reduce exposure to VOCs.
a. Install porous materials only after closing in the building.
TEMPLATE 013544-2 10/12/18 1
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 013544—CONSTRUCTION INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT
I b. Account for curing time and off-gassing when scheduling construction activities.
c. Allow wet-spray cellulose to dry before covering.
d. Install carpeting, acoustical panels, and furnishings after interior finishes have been allowed
I time to cure/dry in accordance with other good building practices.
e. Provide adequate ventilation during curing period.
1) Provide supplemental (spot)ventilation for at least 72 hours after work is completed.
Preferred HVAC system operation uses supply air fans and ducts only; exhaust
I provided through windows. Use exhaust fans to pull exhaust air from deep interior
locations. Stair towers and other paths to exterior can be useful during this process.
B. Use safety meetings, signage, and subcontractor agreements to communicate the goals of the
I construction indoor air quality management construction plan.
C. Conduct regular inspection and maintenance of indoor air quality measures including ventilation
system protection, and ventilation rate.
D. Require VOC-safe masks for interior and exterior workers installing VOC-emitting products (products
that contain 150 g/L or more VOCs).
E. Use low-toxic cleaning supplies for surfaces, equipment, and worker's personal use. Options include
I several soybean-based solvents and cleaning options and citrus-based cleaners. (SoySolv provides
several soy-based solvents and cleaning options. Phone 1-800-231-4274 or www.soysolv.com.)
F. Smoking is prohibited inside the building once the building is closed in by any means or absorptive
Imaterials are located within the structure.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMPLATE 013544-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013546 -SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 111
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with the sustainable
design and construction practices required by this Project.
B. Related sections:
1. General Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.
2. Related Sections include the following:
a. 013119 - Project Meetings
b. 013300- Submittal Procedures111
c. 013544- Construction Indoor Air Quality Management
d. 016000—Product Requirements: Product options and substitution procedures
e. 017421 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal
f. Sustainable criteria as noted in Division 2 through 48, including but not limited to other
Sections listed in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Certificates of Chain-of-Custody: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that all tropical
woods used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-Accredited certification
body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria." Certificates shall include evidence that mill is
certified for chain-of-custody by an FSC-Accredited certification body.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Sustainability Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for the
notice to proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met.
1. Construction Waste Management: Waste management plan complying with Division 01 section
"Construction Waste Management."
2. Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction: Proposed revisions to the
construction IAQ Plan Template complying with SMACNA IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings
Under Construction, 1995.
B. Sustainability Documentation Submittals:
111
1. Construction Waste Management: Comply with Division 01 section "Construction Waste
Management."
2. Construction IAQ Management Plan, During Construction:
a. Product data for temporary filtration media.
b. Product data for filtration media used during occupancy.
c. Construction documentation: six photographs at three different occasions during
construction along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed,
documenting implementation of the IAQ management measures, such as protection of ducts
and on-site stored or installed absorptive materials.
3. Low-Emitting Materials, Adhesives and Sealants: Product data for adhesives and sealants used
inside the weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC
content in g/I calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
4. Low-Emitting Materials, Paints and Coatings: Product data for paints and coatings used inside
the weatherproofing system indicating [chemical composition and] VOC content of each product
used. indicate VOC content in g/I calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
5. Low-Emitting Materials, Composite Wood: Product data for products containing composite wood
or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.
6. Low-Emitting Materials, Ceiling and Wall Systems: Product data for all gypsum board, insulation,
acoustical ceiling systems and wall coverings installed in the building interior showing low
emitting certification.
7. Low-Emitting Materials, Flooring Materials: Product data for the following flooring materials
indicating that products comply with the California Department of Public Health Standard Method
TEMPLATE 013546-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 013546-SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
v1.1-2010, using CA Section 01350, Appendix B. Compliance is indicated by certification under
the following third-party certification programs:
a. Resilient flooring— FloorScore
b. Carpet systems—CRI Green Label Plus.
C. Certified Tropical Wood:
1. Submit a copy of a letter provided to all wood products suppliers containing the following:
a. A statement that the builder's preference is to purchase products containing tropical wood
ONLY if it is Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)certified or USGBC-approved equivalent;
b. A request for the country of manufacture of each wood product supplied;
c. A request for a list of the FSC-certified tropical wood products the vendor can supply
2. If tropical wood is intentionally used (i.e. specified in the construction documents), submit FSC
Chain of Custody declaration for any tropical wood products. Reused or reclaimed materials are
exempt.
3. Provide FSC Chain of Custody and other documentation to demonstrate that any tropical woods
(other than reused or reclaimed) are FSC certified.
1.4 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate and assist with sustainability documentation.
B. Coordinate with all subcontractors per Section 017421.
1. Coordination shall include review of this Section 013546 and related sections.
2. Include subcontractors in related meetings per Section 013119.
C. Designate a Sustainability Representative, responsible for:
1. Implementation, coordination, and documentation of specified sustainability requirements.
2. Attend sustainability related meetings during construction.
3. Be present on site during times that sustainability related work is in progress.
D. Submit sustainability information and Final Submittal in electronic format.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Comply with sustainability requirements as noted in Technical Sections. Any Substitution requests
must state whether or not proposed change impacts sustainability requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUSTAINABILITY COMPLIANCE -GENERAL
A. Meet sustainability requirements as identified in the Contract Documents.
B. Prior to beginning Work of this Contract, verify construction conditions as acceptable to achieve
sustainability goals.
1. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected in a manner acceptable to
Sustainability Consultant, Construction Representative, and Architect.
C. Correct non-conforming work failing to meet sustainability requirements at Contractor's expense.
1. Submit documentation as necessary to show conformance of corrected work.
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 013546-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
1
SECTION 014500 -QUALITY CONTROL
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements.
2. Workmanship.
3. Special installation procedures
4. Manufacturer's instructions.
5. Manufacturer's certificates.
6. Mock-ups.
7. Manufacturers'field services.
8. Testing laboratory services.
9. Contractor tests and inspections.
B. Related Sections: 1
1. 011000 - Summary: Applicability of specified reference standards.
2. 013300- Submittal Procedures: Submittal of manufacturer's instructions.
3. 017421 - Construction Waste Management And Disposal: Mock-Ups.
C. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 GENERAL QUALITY CONTROL
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
1.3 WORKMANSHIP 1
A. Comply with industry standards, except when more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements
indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship.
B. Perform work with persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
1
C. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, and racking.
1.4 SPECIAL INSTALLATION PROCEDURES
A. Make no attachment to structural concrete or steel members in the building in such a way as to
overload or impair the structural integrity of the member.
B. Steel Decking:
1. Where fastening into bottom of steel decking is required, fasten only into lower flutes.
2. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch.
3. Do not use powder driven fasteners into steel roof deck. Where anchorage to structural framing
members is impractical, supports for items such as suspended ceiling systems, ductwork, and
aluminum conduit 1-1/2 inches or less may be supported from steel roof decking by sheet metal
screws, screwed into the bottom flute of the roof deck, and in sufficient quantity to adequately
support the load. Equipment supports, hangers for mechanical piping and other items requiring
more than incidental support, shall not be secured to the roof decking.
1.5 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Unless specified otherwise, comply with instructions in full detail, including each step in sequence.
Should instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Construction Manager
before proceeding.
1.6 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES
A. When required by individual Specifications Section, submit, in duplicate, manufacturer's certification
that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
TEMPLATE 014500-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 014500 -QUALITY CONTROL
1.7 MOCK-UPS
A. Provide mock-ups as specified in the individual specification sections. When the initial mock-up is
unacceptable to the Construction Manager, provide additional mock-ups until approval is obtained.
IB. Unless specified or approved otherwise, schedule mock-ups for completion a minimum of 10 working
days prior to actual commencement of the work represented by the mock-up.
C. Notify the Architect and Construction Manager a minimum of 5 working days prior to mock-up.
D. For each mock-up, provide conditions which will replicate the conditions of the actual installation,
including lighting, to the greatest reasonable extent.
E. Approved mock-up shall be the standard of workmanship and materials for the remainder of the
r related work.
F. Contractor may proceed with the work upon Construction Manager's approval of the mock-up
G. Obtain Construction Manager's written approval for each mock-up.
1. Allow access to the mock-up for Architect's and Construction Manager's review and for review by
manufacturer and trade representatives as the Construction Manager deems appropriate.
2. Proceed with the work upon Construction Manager's approval of the mock-up. Each approved
mock-up shall represent the standard of workmanship and materials for the remainder of the
related work.
3. Modify and correct mock-up as necessary to obtain Construction Manager's approval; allow time
in construction schedule for adjustment or reconstruction of mock-up to obtain approval. Claims
for delays due to unacceptable field samples will not be considered.
H. Maintain mock-up in approved condition, until directed otherwise.
I. Disposition of Mock-Ups:
1. Rejected mock-ups shall be selectively demolished to accommodate new mock-ups, or
completely removed as appropriate.
2. Mock-ups constructed as part of the proposed work, and which have been approved by the
Construction Manager, may be incorporated into the work.
3. Unless specified or directed otherwise, approved mock-ups which are not incorporated into the
work shall be removed upon project completion.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified, require product manufacturer to furnish qualified personnel to observe field conditions
and quality of workmanship, and to provide recommendations, certifications, and other specified
services.
B. Representative shall submit written report to Construction Manager listing observations and
recommendations.
1.9 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
A. The Construction Manager will arrange for the services of an Independent Testing Laboratory to
inspect and test the Work in accordance with regulatory requirements and to verify compliance with
the contract documents.
B. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Cooperate with Testing Laboratory personnel, and furnish access, tools, samples, certifications,
test reports, design mixes, equipment, storage, and assistance as requested by the Testing
Laboratory.
2. Notify Construction Manager and Testing Laboratory 48 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring inspection and testing. When tests or inspections cannot be performed,
through the fault of the Contractor, reimburse the Owner for the additional costs incurred.
3. Remove and replace all work found not complying with the Contract Documents. Remedies shall
be in accordance with the Contract Documents and code requirements.
4. If initial tests and inspections indicate deficient work, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for
the costs of all subsequent tests and inspections related to the deficiency.
TEMPLATE 014500-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 014500 -QUALITY CONTROL
1
5. All damage which may occur to the work as a result of normal testing operations shall be repaired
to match surrounding surfaces.
6. Schedule testing and inspection so that the work of testing and inspection personnel will be as
continuous and brief as possible.
7. Reimburse the Owner for travel and lodging expenses incurred for testing and inspection services
performed outside a radius of 100 miles of the site.
C. The Owner may have the tests and inspections performed as listed below: I 1. Water testing.
2. HVAC balancing and controls.
3.
D. Tests and inspections shall be in accordance with code requirements and as otherwise required to
verify conformance to Contract requirements.
1.10 CONTRACTOR TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
A. Contractor's Convenience Testing: Inspection and testing performed exclusively for the Contractor's
convenience shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 014500-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
rSECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements.
2. Electricity, lighting.
3. Heat, ventilation, cooling.
4. Telephone service.
5. Water.
6. Sanitary facilities.
7. Barriers.
8. Closures.
9. Protection of installed work.
10. Security.
11. Safety.
12. Site water control.
13. Cleaning during construction.
14. Project identification.
15. Field offices and sheds.
16. Removal.
B. Related Sections:
1. 011000- Summary: Work sequence. Contractor use of premises.
2. 013544 - Construction Indoor Air Quality Management: Indoor air quality management plan and
post construction flush-out.
3. 013546—Sustainable Design Requirements: LEED certification requirements.)
4. 017421 —Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Construction waste management
plan.
5. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Final cleaning.
C. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Temporary facilities and controls shall conform to the requirements of the jurisdictional code
authorities.
1.3 ELECTRICITY, LIGHTING
Use the next 3 paragraphs for New Construction
A. Provide service required for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes located
to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type power cords.
B. Provide lighting for construction operations.
C. Permanent lighting may be used during construction. Maintain lighting and make routine repairs.
1.4 HEAT,VENTILATION
Use the next 7 paragraphs for New Construction
A. Provide temporary heating and cooling as necessary to maintain specified conditions for Construction
operations, to protect materials and finishes from damage due to temperature or humidity.
B. Provide temporary ventilation of enclosed areas to cure materials, disperse humidity, and prevent
accumulations of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases in accordance with the Construction Indoor Air Quality
Management requirements specified in Section 013544..
C. Prior to operation of permanent facilities for temporary purposes, verify that installation is approved for
operation, and that filters are in place.
TEMPLATE 015000-1 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS r
D. For any piece of HVAC equipment used during construction, clean or replace system filters in
compliance with Section 013544 immediately prior to Substantial Completion.
E. Owner will pay costs of energy used. Provide and pay for maintenance costs during life of
construction contract.
F. Take measures to conserve energy.
1.5 WATER
Use the next paragraph for New Construction
A. Provide service required for construction operations. Extend branch piping with outlets located so that
water is available by use of hoses.
B. The Owner will pay the costs for all water used. Conserve water use whenever possible.
1.6 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide and maintain required portable facilities and enclosures. I
1.7 BARRIERS
A. Provide as required to prevent public entry to construction areas to provide for Owner's use of site,
and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with
locks. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.
C. Provide barricades and covered walkways as required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way
and for public access to existing building.
D. Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect against vehicular traffic, stored
materials, dumping, chemically injurious materials, and puddling or continuous running water. 111
E. Provide barricades around openings in floors and roof decks.
1.8 CLOSURES
A. Exterior Closures:
1. Provide temporary weather-tight closures as necessary to create proper interior environmental
conditions, protection of materials, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons.
2. Where doors are necessary for access by construction personnel, provide self-closing hardware
and locks.
3. Except as necessary for construction access, do not remove exterior closures until permanent
construction is ready to be installed and made weathertight.
4. Enclosures shall be constructed to prevent blow off during inclement weather, and shall be sealed
to prevent water penetration and excessive air infiltration.
5. Conform to Construction Indoor Air Quality Management requirements specified in Section
013544.
B. Interior Closures:
1. Provide temporary closures to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into occupied areas
separate from work areas, damage to operating systems and components, and to create
environmental conditions necessary for the proper installation of materials and systems.
The following subparagraph is written for remodels in mall or other multiple tenant settings. Revise for
stand-alone construction.
2. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections
with existing surfaces; STC rating 35 in accordance with ASTM E90; Flame Spread Rating of 25
in accordance with ASTM E84; paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.
3. Conform to Construction Indoor Air Quality Management requirements specified in Section
013544.
C. Installed construction which has been damaged due to lack of protection shall be replaced or restored
to original or new condition. This includes construction required to be protected under Construction
Indoor Air Quality Management requirements specified in Section 013544.
TEMPLATE 015000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
1.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A. Provide temporary protection for installed work, including protection from impact, water, dust
contamination, overspray, and similar damage. Conform to Construction Indoor Air Quality
Management requirements specified in Section 013544.
B. Secure temporary protections as necessary to prevent blow off during inclement weather.
C. Provide protective coverings at exposed exterior walls and horizontal surfaces, projections, and
window and door openings.
D. Protect finished surfaces from damage caused by traffic, movement of heavy objects, and storage of
materials. Where necessary, control traffic in immediate area as necessary to minimize the risk of
impact damage.
E. Prohibit traffic and storage on waterproofed and roofed surfaces, on lawn and landscaped areas.
F. Installed construction which has been damaged due to lack of protection shall be replaced or restored
to original or new condition.
1.10 SECURITY
A. Provide security program and facilities to protect Work, materials stored off-site, existing facilities, and
Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft. Coordinate with Owner's security
program.
1.11 SAFETY
A. Furnish safety program and facilities to protect the safety of workers and other persons affected by the
Work.
The following article is for New Construction.
1.12 SITE WATER CONTROL
A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide and operate pumping equipment.
1.13 TEMPORARY CONTROLS
A. Fire Sprinkler Supervision/Control:
1. Prior to the time of installation of finish materials such as carpet, wall panels, delivery of case
work to the site, and other similar conditions, provide temporary tamper and water flow
supervision monitoring of the fire sprinkler system.
2. System shall be monitored, via temporary telephone lines, by a UL listed central station.
Contractor shall be responsible to make arrangements for monitoring the system.
3. Perform temporary monitoring up to time of building acceptance by the Owner, or building turn-
over, whichever is later.
B. Dust Control:
1. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
construction operations, and provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into
the atmosphere.
2. Provide temporary dust-proof partitions to protect public areas, occupied spaces, and adjacent
mall areas.
C. Water Control:
I1. Comply with applicable jurisdictional requirements regarding water usage, conservation,
detention, pollution, and permits.
2. Provide methods to control surface water to prevent damage to the Project, the site, or adjoining
properties.
3. Control fill, grading and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits, tunnels
and other construction areas; and to direct drainage to proper runoff.
4. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment of adequate capacity to control surface water,
including water accumulated during excavation operations, below grade.
5. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, or other damage to any
portion of the site or to adjoining areas.
TEMPLATE 015000-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
D. Construction Waste Control:
1. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of debris.
2. Initiate and maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site,
storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes.
3. Schedule periodic collection and disposal of debris to a legal off-site location.
4. Provide additional collections and disposals of debris whenever the periodic schedule is
inadequate to prevent excessive accumulation.
5. Clean interior areas prior to start of the finish work. Maintain the areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
6. Construction Waste Management: In compliance with Section 017421.
E. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means and facilities required by law to prevent contamination of
soil, water or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
F. Noise Control:
1. Construction operations must be performed in accordance with local regulations, ordinances, and
jurisdictional Code authorities.
2. Use of private radios and other similar portable sound equipment is prohibited.
G. Smoking, Eating, and Drinking: These activities shall be permitted only in designated locations
selected by the Contractor; these activities are not permitted in interior spaces after carpeting and
fixtures arrive on site.
1.14 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish on a daily basis, and dispose of off-site or in a
designated container on site. Conform to Construction Waste Management and Disposal
requirements specified in Section 017421.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants
during finishing operations.
C. Remove excess debris from cavities which are to be concealed in the finished Work.
D. Work areas to remain accessible to the public shall have tools, materials, and construction debris
removed, broom cleaned, and prepared to receive floor mopping or other cleaning performed by the
Owner's maintenance personnel.
1.15 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
Coordinate with Project Construction Manager for signage requirements. Delete either Paragraph A or B
below as applicable.
A. [No project identification signs are allowed.]
B. [Provide project signage only as allowed by Construction Manager.]
C. Allow no other signs to be displayed.
1.16 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS
The following paragraph is for New Construction or very large remodels
A. Field Office:
1. Office: Weather-tight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling, and ventilating equipment,
and equipped with furniture. Provide, in addition, space for Project meetings, with table and
chairs to accommodate 6 persons.
2. Equipment: 111
a. Copier: Contractor's option; 11 x 17 inch size capability.
b. Communication Service
1) Minimum one dedicated telephone line with instrument.
2) Minimum one dedicated telephone line for facsimile machine.
3) An Internet Service Provider(ISP) account.
4) Corn ISDN LAN modem or Office Connect
5) Remote Dual Analog Router(analog or ISDN depending on telephone company
service), or approved, for use and communication with Internet Service Provider(ISP).
TEMPLATE 015000-4 10/12/18111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 015000 -TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
c. Computer: Minimum one dual core processor with minimum 8 GB of RAM, including the
following.
1) Windows Vista and Microsoft Office 2010, or later; Internet Explorer V6.0 or later.
2) Adobe Acrobat Exchange 6.0, or later, at least one station for initiating documents.
3) Adobe Acrobat Reader.
d. Printer: Minimum one with 11x17 inch graphics capability.
e. Sheet-feed or flatbed scanner and related software.
B. Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weather-tight, [with heat and ventilation for
Products requiring controlled conditions,]with adequate space for organized storage and access, and
lighting for inspection of stored materials.
1.17 CONTRACTOR DESIGNATED AREAS
A. The Construction Representative will designate interior and exterior areas of the site which will be
available to the Contractor for staging and storage of materials. Exterior storage areas shall be
enclosed by a construction chain link fence with a vision barrier.
B. The Construction Representative will designate areas of the Site for Contractor and employee parking.
C. Exterior Storage Sheds for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Weather-tight, with adequate space for
organized storage and access, and lighting for inspection of stored materials.
1.18 REMOVAL
A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required.
Conform to Construction Waste Management and Disposal requirements specified in Section 017421.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities. Remove underground
installations to a depth of 2 feet; grade site as indicated. Restore existing facilities used during
construction to specified, or to original, condition.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
TEMPLATE 015000-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Products.
2. Transportation and handling.
3. Storage and protection.
4. General installation requirements.
5. Product options.
6. Substitutions.
B. Related Sections:
1. 011000 - Summary: Owner-furnished products.
2. 013546 - Sustainable Design Requirements
3. 014500 -Quality Control: Submittal of manufacturers' certificates.
4. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Systems demonstration, operation and maintenance data,
warranties and guarantees, spare parts and maintenance materials.
C. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplementary Conditions.
1.2 PRODUCTS
A. Products include material, equipment, and systems. I
B. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified, unless otherwise approved in writing by the
Construction Manager. Specifications and referenced standards are minimum requirements.
C. All components required to be supplied in quantity shall be identical, whether furnished under one or
several Sections of the specifications.
D. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, materials employed for construction purposes, such as
formwork, scaffolding, and temporary lighting, shall not be incorporated into the work.
E. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, all products incorporated into the Work shall be of the most
suitable grade of their respective kinds for the intended use.
F. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing structure, except as specifically required,
or allowed, by Contract Documents.
1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Transport by methods to avoid product damage.
B. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and
legible. Where options exist, select container or packaging systems that can be recycled or reused. I
C. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage.
D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,
and products are undamaged.
E. Immediately replace non-conforming products with new conforming products, at no additional cost to
the Owner.
1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.
B. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures. Maintain within temperature and humidity ranges
required by manufacturer's instructions, and as otherwise required to prevent damage.
C. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. Protect from
soiling or staining through ground contact. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet covering; provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
TEMPLATE 016000-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 016000 -PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
D. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent mixing with foreign
matter.
E. Arrange storage of products to furnish convenient access for inspection and inventory.
1.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, install each product in accordance with the product
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Distribute copies of manufacturer's instructions to parties involved in the installation.
C. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during installation and until completion.
1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A. Product Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide product meeting those
standards.
B. Product Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with an "or approved" provision: Use
specified product or submit a request for substitution in accordance with the specified substitution
requirements. When approved a substitute product may be used.
C. Product Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers, without a provisions for Substitution: No
substitution will be allowed, except as specified under the Article on Substitutions.
1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Timing: Substitution requests will be considered by the Construction Manager until 10 working days
prior to bid opening. Substitution requests received less than 10 days prior to bid opening will be
considered at the Construction Manager's option. Subsequent substitutions will be considered only for
the following reasons:
1. A product becomes unavailable due to no fault of the Contractor.
2. Subsequent information or changes indicate that the specified product will not perform as
I intended.
3. A substitute product will be in the Owner's best interest.
4. A substitute product will improve the likelihood of meeting the sustainability requirements for the
Project.
B. Substitution requests shall be submitted only through the General Contractor.
C. Documentation:
1. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
2. Requests for substitution shall be made on a form acceptable to the Construction Manager.
3. Limit each request to one proposed product or system.
4. For substitutions prior to Agreement, signature and projected cost data are not required.
5. Submit product data and other supporting documentation necessary to verify that the proposed
product meets the sustainability requirements for the Project.
6. Submit Substitution Request to Construction Manager with direct copy to the Architect.
M D. Request for substitution constitutes a representation that the proposer:
1. Certifies that the proposed substitute item has been fully investigated and has been determined
to be equal or superior to that specified in all respects.
2. Certifies that the same or greater warranty will be furnished
3. Certifies that required maintenance service and source for replacement parts are available
4. Certifies that incorporation of the proposed substitute item will not affect functional clearances.
5. Warrants that coordination, installation, and changes to the project as necessary to
1 accommodate the proposed substitution shall be the Contractor's responsibility, that use of the
substitute item(s)will not delay project completion
6. Warrants that claims for additional costs related to its incorporation which may become
subsequently apparent will be borne by the Contractor.
7. Has verified that the specified product will not adversely affect the LEED rating requirements for
the Project.
TEMPLATE 016000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS1111
COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product
data submittals.
F. Review: The Owner will be the judge of the acceptability of the proposed substitution; in the judgment
of Owner the product shall meet the following criteria:
1. It is equal or superior in quality and serviceability to the specified product.
2. Its use will not entail unacceptable changes in details and construction of related work.
3. Its design and artistic effect complies with design concept.
G. The Construction Manager will review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness, and
request additional information, documentation, or samples, as necessary for evaluation of the request.
Within two weeks of receipt of the completed request, the Construction Manager will take one of the
following actions.
1. If the substitution is allowed by the Owner prior to the cutoff date, an Addendum to the Bid
Documents will be issued by the Construction Manager.
2. If the substitution is allowed by the Owner after the cutoff date, the Construction Manager will
notify the General Contractor and issue the appropriate Construction Change Authorization,
Supplemental Instruction, or Proposal Request.
3. If the request for substitution is denied, the proposer will be notified of the rejection. If a decision
on the substitution request cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the
specified product.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 016000-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 017329—CUTTING AND PATCHING
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Patching of existing construction.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. 011000 -Summary: Cutting and patching to remove ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming work.
2. 015000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures, protection of installed work;
cleaning during construction.
3. 024119- Selective Demolition: Removal and storage of products to be reinstalled.
IC. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions,
and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.
I 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless indicated otherwise, patching, extending, or matching shall be performed as necessary to
make the Work complete, with all components matching and consistent.
IB. Patching materials shall meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities.
C. Major patching procedures shall be reviewed with the Construction Representative, prior to
proceeding.
IPART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Patching Materials: Match the existing construction, unless approved otherwise.
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that demolition is complete and that existing surfaces are ready for patching.
IIB. Coordinate installation of new materials with the patching and repair of existing construction.
C. Beginning of restoration work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
I D. Determine type and quality of existing products by inspection or non-destructive testing. Destructive
testing may be performed when approved by the Construction Representative. Patch all test locations.
3.2 PREPARATION
I A. Cut, move, or remove items as necessary for access to alterations and renovations work; replace and
restore at completion.
B. Contact the Construction Representative when unsuitable materials not marked for removal -such as
Irotted wood, rusted metals, and deteriorated concrete and masonry are discovered.
C. Provide additional construction and materials as required to support patching.
I D. Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
E. Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and new
finishes.
I 3.3 PATCHING
A. Patch and refinish existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, missing, or showing other
localized imperfections directly or indirectly caused by work under this contract. Patched work shall
Imatch existing adjacent work in texture and appearance.
1 TEMPLATE 017329-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017329—CUTTING AND PATCHING
B. When existing finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections. Finish
patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area.
C. Provide a neat and smooth transition to new construction. Where finished surfaces are cut so that
smooth transition to new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a
natural line of division. Review condition with the Construction Representative.
D. Trim existing doors as necessary to clear new floor finishes; refinish trimmed areas.
E. Where existing items are indicated as cut or reconfigured, cap and finish all exposed edges to match
the existing construction to remain. Provide new or relocated supports spaced to be consistent with
the installation.
F. Patching of Concrete Slabs on Grade: In accordance with Section 030100. 1
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 017329-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 017421 —CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Construction waste management requirements.
B. Incorporate the work of this section into the Project when the construction waste handlers in the
I Project area have sufficient capability to implement the specified requirements for the Project.
Confirm construction waste management goals with the Construction Manager.
C. Related Sections:
I 1. 013546—Sustainable Design Requirements.
2. 015000—Construction Facilities and Controls.
D. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
I Supplementary Conditions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Commingled or Off-site Separation: Collecting all material types into a single bin or mixed collection
I system and separating the waste materials into recyclable material types in an off-site facility.
B. Construction, Demolition and Land Clearing Waste (CDL): For purpose of this section, includes all
non-hazardous solid wastes such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris and rubble
I resulting from construction, remodeling, alterations, repair, deconstruction, demolition and land
clearing.
C. Deconstruction; The process of removing existing building materials from renovation and demolition
I projects for the purposes of reuse, and recycling, in as efficient and safe manner as possible.
D. Hazardous Waste: As defined by the state where the Project is located.
E. Proper Disposal: As defined by the jurisdiction receiving the waste.
I F. Recyclable Materials: Products and materials that can be recovered and remanufactured into new
products.
G. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleaning, treating and reconstituting materials for the purpose of
I using the material in the manufacture of a new product. Can be conducted on site (as in the grinding
of concrete for reuse on site).
H. Recycling Facility: An operation that can legally accept materials for the purpose of processing the
I materials into an altered form for the manufacture of a new product. Recycling facilities have their own
specifications for accepting materials.
I. Salvage and Reuse: Existing usable product or material that can be saved and reused in some
I manner on the project site. Materials that can be salvaged and reused on site must comply with the
applicable technical specifications.
J. Salvage for Resale: Existing usable product or material that can be saved and removed intact (as is)
I from the project site to another site for resale to others without remanufacturing.
K. Source-Separated Materials: Materials that are sorted at the site for the purpose of reuse or recycling.
L. Sources Separation: Sorting the recovered materials into specific material types with no or a minimum
I amount of contamination on site.
M. Time-Based Separation: Collecting waste during each phase of construction or deconstruction that
results in primarily one major type of recovered material. The material is removed before it becomes
I mixed with the material from the next phase of construction.
N. Trash: Product or material unable to be salvaged for resale, salvaged and reused, returned, or
recycled.
I O. Waste: Excess materials generated by the construction and demolition operations of the Project that
are produced on site or brought to the site. Waste includes, without limitation, packaging materials
ITEMPLATE 017421-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017421 —CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
such as banding, crates, pallets, plastic film, polystyrene, and cardboard. Waste does not include
excavated soils, rocks, vegetation, and hazardous waste removed from the site
1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. Salvage, recycle, and reuse a minimum of[75] [501% of construction and demolition waste material I
generated by the Project.
B. Minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the job site. Minimize factors that
contribute to waste, such as excess packaging, improper storage, ordering errors, poor planning,
breakage, mishandling, and unnecessary contamination.
C. Targeted Salvage Materials: The following existing materials shall be reused in the Project:
1. Existing concrete foundations and masonry shall be broken up and reused as compactible fill
material.
2. [Edit for the project].
D. The following waste materials may be diverted from landfill to the greatest extent possible to meet the
specified requirements:
1. Clean dimensional wood, pallet wood, plywood, OSB, and particleboard
2. Asphalt.
3. Concrete
4. Concrete masonry units
5. Brick
6. Ferrous and non-ferrous metals
7. Gypsum products.
8. Acoustical ceiling tile.
9. Glass, both window and bottle.
10. Plastics, including plastic film.
11. Carpet and pad.
12. Cardboard, paper, paper-based packaging
13. Insulation
14. Batteries.
15. Doors, windows frames, relites, hardware, millwork.
16. Equipment and appliances]
17. Non-asbestos roofing]
18. Paint.
E. Hazardous materials such as paints, solvents, adhesives, batteries, and fluorescent light bulbs and
ballasts which cannot be reused shall be disposed of at authorized hazardous waste outlets.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN I
A. Develop and submit to the Construction Manager a Construction Waste Management Plan narrative in
accordance with the sustainability requirements for the Project. Revise and resubmit the Plan until
approval is obtained.
B. Unless approved otherwise, no waste generating construction work may proceed until the
Construction Waste Management Plan is approved. Approval of the Contractor's Construction Waste
Management Plan will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for meeting the waste management
goals specified.
C. The Construction Waste Management Plan shall include the following:
1. A list of waste materials that will be salvaged for resale, salvaged for reuse, recycled, and
disposed.
2. Estimated quantities of each waste material.
3. Description of waste handling methods to be used, including one or more of the following:
a. Requiring subcontractors to take their waste to a recycling facility.
b. Contracting with diversion/recycling hauler to haul recyclable waste to an approved recycling
or material recovery facility.
c. Processing and reusing materials on-site.
d. Self hauling to a recycling or material recovery facility.
TEMPLATE 017421-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017421 —CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
4. Name, address and phone number and qualifications of each proposed diversion/recycling hauler
that will be used in the Project.
5. Identification of each recycling or material recovery facility to be utilized.
6. Description of the method to be employed in collecting, and handling, waste materials, including a
description of the methods that will be used to protect recycled materials from contamination.
7. Description of the means of transportation of waste materials.
8. Description of methods to communicate waste management plan to personnel and
subcontractors.
D. Calculation shall be done by weight(tons)or by volume (cubic yards) but shall be consistent
throughout.
E. Include the Construction Waste Management Plan with the Submittal Template to obtain the LEED
credits specified below.
F. Implement procedures to communicate the construction waste management plan to personnel and
subcontractors.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRESS REPORTS
A. Submit a Construction Waste Management Progress Report with each Application for Payment.
Failure to submit this report renders the Application for Payment incomplete and is grounds for
delaying the Progress Payment.
B. Use the Construction Waste Management Progress Report Form attached at the end of this Section.
C. The Waste Management Progress Report shall list the following for the time period covered by the
Application for Payment:
1. Each waste material recycled, salvaged, or reused from the Project.
2. Quantities for each waste material.
3. Total quantity of waste removed from the site.
4. Name of each diversion/recycling hauler or the location and name of each recycling or material
recovery facility as appropriate.
D. Calculations shall be done by weight (tons) or by volume (cubic yards) but shall be consistent
throughout.
E. Attached manifests, weight tickets, receipts or invoices which validate the calculations.
1.6 SUSTAINABILITY SUBMITTALS
A. Make sustainability submittals as specified in Section 013300.
B. Construction Waste Management Letter:
1. Submit a final accounting of activities and procedures taken, as necessary to support successful
compliance with construction waste management goals specified.
2. Include copies of all manifests, weight tickets, receipts or invoices which validate the percentage
calculations for waste management.
C. Submit specified Construction Waste Management Plan.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the jurisdictional authorities, local
ordinances and regulations concerning management of construction waste, clearing, and inert
materials.
B. Preconstruction Meeting:
1. Prior to beginning work at the site, schedule and conduct a meeting to review the Waste
Management Plan and discuss procedures, schedules, coordination and specific requirements
for waste materials recycling and disposal.
2. Discuss coordination and interface between Contractor, sub-contractors, architect, engineers,
project manager, Construction Manager, and other C&D activities. Identify and resolve problems
of compliance with requirements.
TEMPLATE 017421-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017421 —CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL I
3. Record minutes of the meeting, identifying conclusions reached and matters requiring further
resolution. Maintain waste management as an agenda item at future construction meetings.
4. Attendees: Contractor and related contractor personnel associated with work of this section,
including personnel in charge of the waste management program; C&D Quality Manager;
architect; engineers; material and equipment suppliers where appropriate; Construction Manager
and such additional Owner personnel as Owner deems appropriate.
5. Plan Revision: Make revisions to C&D Waste Management Plan agreed upon during the meeting
and incorporate resolutions agreed to be made subsequent to the meeting. Submit revised plan
to the Construction Manager.
C. Progress Meetings: Waste management goals and issues shall be discussed at regularly scheduled
progress meetings as specified in Section 013119 Project Meetings.
D. Disposal Site, Recyclers and Waste Materials Processors: Use only facilities properly permitted in the
State where the Project is located, and/or by local authorities where applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WASTE CONTAINERS
A. Durable, covered, secured, reusable container for each category or waste. I
B. All recycling containers shall be clearly marked and shall list the materials which can be recycled as
well as appropriate materials which cannot.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Use construction methods that reduce construction waste. When possible:
1. Order materials precut to required size.
2. Order exact quantity required.
3. Use temporary materials and facilities that will be reused at other projects.
B. Field Measurements: Contractor is to verify that field measurements are as indicated on construction
and/or shop drawings before confirming product orders or proceeding with work, in order to minimize
waste due to excessive materials.
C. Protect products from damage during storage, installation and in-place. Materials that become wet,
damp or unusable for any reason due to improper storage shall be replaced at the Contractor's
expense.
D. Request or require products delivered to the Site with packing materials that can be returned to
sender, reused by others, or easily recycled.
E. Use detailed take-offs to identify location and uses in structure to reduce risk of unplanned and
potentially wasteful cuts.
3.2 PACKING AND SHIPPING
A. Shipping: Coordinate the schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to I
minimize site storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B. Packing: Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically
feasible.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Use on-site waste as primers, sealers, underlayments, supports, backing, blocking, furring,
suspension systems, and accessories as required for any purpose in patching existing work.
B. Provide environmentally benign non-hazardous or recycled content materials for cutting and patching.
1
TEMPLATE 017421-4 10/12/18 1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017421 -CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
END OF SECTION
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
i
I
t
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 017421-5 10/12/18
STARBUC KSCOFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Closeout procedures.
2. Final cleaning.
3. Project record documents.
4. Operation and maintenance data.
5. Operation instruction.
6. Manufacturer's warranties.
7. Guaranties.
8. Spare parts and maintenance materials.
9. Closeout sustainability documentation.
B. Related Sections: 1
1. 011000 -Summary: Partial Owner occupancy.
2. 013544 -Construction Indoor Air Quality Management: Indoor air quality management plan and
post construction flush-out.
3. 013546—Sustainable Design Requirements: Sustainable practices goals for the Project.
4. 015000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Cleaning during construction.
5. 017421 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal: Construction waste management plan.
6. Division 23 and 26 for special closeout requirements for mechanical and electrical systems.
C. This Section applies to all Technical Specification Sections, and supplements the General and
Supplemental Conditions.
1.2 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES I
A. Comply with procedures stated in General Conditions of the Contract for Substantial and Final
Completion.
B. Certain areas may be subject to partial occupancy or use as specified in Section 011000. I
C. Submit all certificates of approval issued by the governing authorities, including, without limitation, the
following:
1. Certificate of occupancy.
D. Prior to final payment, submit the following affidavits using the forms listed below:
1. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA Document G706.
2. Consent of Surety to Final Payment AIA Document G707.
3. Contractor's lien release, and lien releases from each subcontractor; Contractor's Affidavit of
Release of Liens AIA Document G706A
E. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted contract sum, previous payments, and
sum remaining due.
F. Submit building permit documents and building inspection signoff sheets to the Construction Manager.
1.3 FINAL CLEANING 1
A. Execute prior to final inspection.
B. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition.
D. Clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.
E. Clean roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean other surfaces.
G. Power wash hard surfaces and trash enclosure.
TEMPLATE 017700-1 10/12/18 1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
I H. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the Project and from the
site. Conform to Construction Waste Management and Disposal requirements specified in Section
017421.
1 I. Cleaning procedures shall be in accordance with Indoor Air Quality Management Plan specified in
Section 013544.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
I A. Maintain a complete set of record documents which clearly and neatly indicate all changes from the
Contract Documents, and all uncovered existing conditions which will be subsequently concealed.
B. Record documents shall include:
I 1. Contract drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples
I C. Record documents shall be used for no other purpose and shall be stored separate from those used
for construction.
D. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been
I recorded.
E. Mark specifications legibly and record at each Product section a description of actual products
installed. Include the manufacturer's name and product model and number.
I F. Drawings shall indicate exact installed locations and dimensions of all concealed work, including,
without limitation, conduit, piping, ducts, mechanical and electrical equipment, and foundations.
Indicate all changes to details which involve concealed construction.
I G. Prior to approving each Payment Request, the Construction Manager reserves the right to inspect the
Record Documents. The Payment Request may not be approved until the record documents are
current to the Date of the Payment Request.
I H. At Contract Closeout, submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project title,
Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
I A. Furnish published operation and maintenance (O&M) information covering all equipment and finish
materials installed on the project. Whether specified or not, furnish published information whenever
special maintenance procedures are required to assure the proper operation and durability of project
material, equipment, and finishes.
IB. Organize O&M information into sections that correspond to the applicable specification sections.
Include a Table of Contents summarizing O&M information listed in CSI order.
I C. Number of copies: Unless otherwise specified, submit four of each at time of project substantial
completion.
D. Submit operation data and maintenance data bound in a three ring binder. Include divider tabs to
separate data for each component. Include name of Project, Contractor, and the Construction
IManager.
E. Information shall be submitted by the General Contractor to the Construction Manager.
I 1.6 OPERATION INSTRUCTION
A. Prior to Final Completion, instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of
products, equipment and systems. Provide instruction at mutually agreed upon times.
I B. Use experienced personnel trained and experienced in the operation and maintenance of the building
equipment or system involved.
C. Use operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of equipment or system as the basis of
Iinstruction. Review contents in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.
ITEMPLATE 017700-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 017700 -CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES I
D. Refer to the individual technical Sections for additional requirements for instruction of Owner's
personnel.
1.7 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES
A. Furnish original and duplicate copies of each manufacturer warranty executed to the Owner. I
B. Execute Contractor's submittals to the manufacturers, and assemble documents executed by the
manufacturers.
C. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover.
D. Submit material prior to final application for payment in accordance with Section 013300. For
equipment put into use with Construction Manager's permission during construction, submit warranty
within 10 days after first operation. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, furnish warranty within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of
warranty period.
1.8 GUARANTIES I
A. Furnish written guaranty, executed to the Construction Manager, from each subcontractor performing
work covered by the additional guaranty requirements specified in the technical sections. The guaranty
shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion or the Owner's acceptance of that portion of
the work whichever is first.
B. Transmit through the Construction Manager in accordance with Section 013300.
1.9 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS I
A. Furnish products, spare parts, and maintenance materials in quantities specified in each Section, in
addition to that used for construction of Work. Coordinate with Construction Manager, deliver to
Project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
B. Unless specified otherwise, deliver materials in manufacturer's original factory cartons or containers.
C. Materials shall be clearly labeled, and shall include designations used in the Contract Documents.
1.10 KEYS
A. Deliver properly identified and tagged keys and hardware maintenance tools to the Construction
Manager, including those specified in Sections other than 087100.
B. Obtain itemized receipt for all keys and tools.
1.11 CLOSEOUT LEED DOCUMENTATION
A. Submit all required sustainability documentation prior to Final Payment. Allow sufficient time for
review and approval of documentation. Incomplete documentation is grounds for delay of Final
Payment.
B. Obtain required sustainability documentation submittals from each subcontractor prior to final payment
to each subcontractor.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 017700-3 10/12/18 I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 024119 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Demolition and removal from the site of existing construction to accommodate the new
construction.
2. Removal of existing components for reinstallation.
3. Salvaging of existing materials.
4. Capping and identification of utility lines.
5. Contractor design of shoring and bracing.
B. Related Sections:
1. 011000 - Summary: Contractor's use of the site; Owner occupancy requirements; Special work
requirements.
2. 015000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures, guardrails, barriers,
barricades, lighting and dust control.
3. 017329 - Cutting and Patching.
4. 017700 -Closeout Procedures: Project record documents.
5. [312000 - Earth Moving: Backfilling and grading of site. ]
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, unless specified otherwise.
B. Submit certification that temporary shoring, support, and restraining systems have been designed by a
structural engineer licensed to practice in the State of the Project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the applicable health and safety regulations of the jurisdictional authorities.
B. Obtain and pay for all permits required for the demolition work.
C. Obtain approval of demolition procedures which affect the normal operation of Owner occupied
spaces.
D. The design of shorings, temporary supports, and restraining systems shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Such elements shall be designed and stamped by a Structural Engineer licensed to
practice in the State of the Project.
E. Pre-bid Inspection: Visit the Site to determine existing conditions, and as much as possible to
determine the extent of demolition required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect existing conditions and verify that the work of this Section may
properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
TEMPLATE 024119 -1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 024119 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION I
B. Do not begin demolition until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective demolition caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, structural or other elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and ascertain the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Perform no further demolition in such areas, unless
approved by the Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION I
A. Provide and maintain all temporary barriers and security devices necessary for the demolition work.
Conform to requirements of Section 015000.
B. Provide protection to all surrounding public spaces. Perform work and provide temporary construction
as approved by the local jurisdictional code authorities.
C. Protect existing construction which will not be subject to demolition.
3.3 DEMOLITION
A. Perform demolition as indicated and as required to accommodate the new work. Demolish in an
orderly and careful manner. Where demolition exceeds that indicated, verify such demolition with the
Architect prior to proceeding.
B. Protect existing structural members. Contact the Architect prior to modifying structural members
beyond the extent indicated. Cease operations and notify the Architect immediately if continued
demolition operations might endanger the existing structure.
C. Notify the Owner of hazardous materials discovered during demolition operations.
D. Provide Contractor designed temporary shoring as required to support existing construction against
movement or overload during demolition operations, until permanent supports are in place.
E. Except where noted or specified otherwise, take possession of materials being demolished, and
immediately remove from site. Do not overload existing construction to remain with demolished
materials. Demolished materials which cannot be recycled or reused shall be disposed of at a legal
dump site.
F. If relics, antiques, corner stones and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, or other
similar items are discovered, they shall remain the property of the Owner. Notify the Architect prior to
removal, and obtain approval on method of removal.
G. Carefully remove, store, and protect all materials and components to be reused.
H. Where removal of materials indicated to remain is necessary to facilitate new construction, carefully
remove, store, and protect such materials for future reinstallation.
I. Carefully remove, protect, and turn over as directed, materials and components claimed by the Owner
for salvage. Prior to demolition, contact the Owner to determine which items will be claimed.
J. Where cut edges of the existing construction will be visible in the completed work, cut in uniform
straight lines. Concrete and masonry shall be sawcut or coredrilled.
K. Coring into post-tensioned beams or slabs is not allowed unless x-ray surveying, scanning, or another
submitted and approved method has been performed to accurately locate post-tensioned tendons.
X-ray surveying at coring locations may be performed by the testing and inspection agency or by
another testing agency under the General Contractor's direction. Trades requesting the coring shall
pay surveying costs. No coring operations shall commence without the prior written approval of the
Structural Engineer of Record.
L. Repair all demolition performed in excess of that required, at no additional cost to the Owner. I
M. Remove all disconnected utility lines. Cap remaining ends. Place markers to indicate location of
disconnected utilities. Indicate location of disconnected utilities on the Project Record drawings as
specified in Section 017700.
TEMPLATE 024119 -2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 024119 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
N. Pay for and coordinate the work performed by public utilities. Notify the affected utility company well in
advance of the scheduled work.
O. Dust producing demolition operations shall be sprinkled in areas not subject to water damage.
Provide other approved means of controlling dusting in areas subject to water damage.
P. Electrical Demolition Requirements:
1. Remove electrical system components as indicated on the electrical drawings
Q. Plumbing Demolition Requirements:
1. Abandoned underslab piping shall be cut off flush with the floor line and sealed. Patch flush with
the floor.
2. Abandoned piping which is exposed and readily accessible shall be removed.
3. Leave abandoned piping which is concealed in existing construction to remain.
R. Leave site in a condition acceptable to the Owner at all times. Remove demolished materials from site
daily as work progresses. Do not overload existing structure with demolished materials.
3.4 CLEANUP
A. After each demolition phase, leave the area broom clean and ready for the work of other Sections.
B. Occupied spaces which receive demolition work shall be thoroughly and completely cleaned prior to
Owner's daily operations. Cleaning shall include: vacuuming, dusting, stain and dirt removal.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 024119 -3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATION
SECTION 030100 -CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND RESURFACING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: I
1. Repairing of existing slab surfaces.
2. Sanding or grinding of existing concrete slab.
3. Application of cementitious underlayments.
4. Application of concrete sealer.
B. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, including bonds and certificates, the General Conditions,
and Division 1 specification sections apply to all work of this Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 033015-Concrete Slabs on Grade: Replacement of portions of existing concrete slab.
B. 033514— Polished Concrete Flooring System
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. I
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each product listed.
C. Sustainability Submittals:
1. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013546.
2. Low Emitting Paints and Coatings: Submit product data for interior concrete sealers and curing
compounds. Include MSDS sheets.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide materials for system produced by one manufacturer. I
B. Materials and methods used in patching, repair or resurfacing of concrete slab shall be approved by
manufacturer of polished flooring system.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I
A. Deliver material to the jobsite in the manufacturer's original, new, unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label in good condition.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at ambient air temperature range of 40
to 90 degrees F. Storage area should be clean, free of contamination, and in accordance with Data
Sheet compliance.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Where ambient air temperature does not fall within the range of 40 to 90
degrees Fahrenheit, or in conditions with extremely high relative humidity, special application products
and methods may be required. Contact manufacturer for specific job conditions and technical
support.
B. Installer is required to visit site and verify conditions prior to bidding.
C. Permanent lighting shall be in place and operational prior to commencement of the work of this
Section.
D. Variations in conditions may require modification to preparation and installation requirements; failure
to verify modifications may result in an unacceptable finish.
I
TEMPLATE 030100-1 10/12/18 I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATION
SECTION 030100 -CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND RESURFACING
' 1.7 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer's two-year warranty against failure of the concrete stain system by use of a
defective product, in accordance with Section 017700.
1.8 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE
A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Patching Compounds:
1. Ardex Inc. "SD-P" Fast-Setting Underlayment.
2. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with "Laticrete 3701 Latex
' Mortar Admix."
3. Mapei Corporation "Mapacem 100"or"Planitop 10".
4. CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp. (Garden Grove, CA; 800-929-3030)"Rapid Set Cement All" or
"CR Concrete Resurfacer" depending on color desired; fast-setting, high-strength, multi-purpose,
non-shrink grout.
B. Self Leveling Underlayment System: Self-leveling, pourable, cement based material, minimum 28 day
compressive strength 2,000 psi; minimum bond strength 200 psi; one of the following.
' 1. Ardex Inc. "K-15" Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete
2. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 86 LatiLevel Thin Pour Underlayment."
3. Mapei Corporation "Ultraplan 1".
4. CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp. "TRU Self-Levelling"fast-setting, high-strength underlayment.
C. Trowelable Underlayment System:
1. Ardex Inc. "SD-P" Fast-Setting Underlayment.
2. Laticrete International, Inc. "Laticrete 220 Medium Bed Mortar mixed with "Laticrete 3701 Latex
I Mortar Admix."
3. Mapei Corporation "Mapacem 100"or"Planitop 10".
4. CTS Cement Manufacturing Corp. "CR Concrete Resurfacer"fast-setting, high-strength
trowelable underlayment.
D. Primers: As recommended by cement materials manufacturer for conditions.
E. Penetrating Sealer: Water-based penetrating sealer meeting VOC limits of 100g/L or less.
1. "Consolideck Concrete Protector WB" by Prosoco Inc. (Lawrence, KS; 800-255-4255).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which concrete resurfacing will be performed for
compliance with requirements for applications of flooring materials. Do not proceed with application
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of any of the resurfacing work will be
construed as the Applicator's acceptance of the floor and environment conditions.
B. Condition of Substrate: Verify that all jobsite conditions are within the sealer product manufacturer's
Data Sheet parameters. Report discrepancies to the Architect.
1. Surface temperature of slab must be at least 40 degrees F. and no more than 90 degrees F. for
crack and joint fillers and coating.
' 2. If there are any indications of a moisture problem, contact the Architect.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with the concrete coating manufacturer recommendations and as follows: Prepared surface
' shall be smooth and free of ridges and irregularities including those occurring in concrete and from
mastics.
TEMPLATE 030100-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATION
SECTION 030100 -CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND RESURFACING
B. Initial Concrete Slab Preparation: Provide initial preparation of concrete surface as follows.
1. Remove dirt, oil, soap, grease, mastic, and other bond-breaking contaminants.
2. Surface shall be smooth and free of unwanted ridges from by either mastics or concrete.
C. Surface Repair: Fill holes, spalls, cracks, voids and joints as recommended by the system
manufacturer with minimal residue on surrounding surface and as required to provide a smooth, level
and even substrate.
1. Spalls 1 to 3 inches in diameter shall be struck flush with patching compound.
2. Spalls larger than 3 inches in diameter and areas requiring leveling or resurfacing shall be filled
with trowelable or self-leveling compound.
3. Fill cracks of 3/16 inch in width or wider with patching compound. Strike flush.
4. Cracks between 1/16 to 3/16 inch in width shall be filled with joint sealant specified in Section
079200 following the completion of the Work of this Section.
5. Cracks less than 1/16 inch in width will not be filled.
D. Final Preparation: Surfaces to be treated shall be clean, dry and absorbent. Confirm surface
absorbency with a light water spray. If surface does not wet uniformly, use the appropriate surface
preparation method from approved mock-up to remove remaining surface contaminants.
3.3 SANDING/GRINDING
A. At slabs with glass fiber reinforcing, prepare slab as follows:
1. Prepare slab with a three-step grind process.
a. Step 1: Use 150-grit metal or 100-grit puck resin tooling.
b. Step 2: Use 200-grit resin pads. 1
B. At slabs not glass-fiber reinforced:
1. Sand concrete using an orbital sander with 220-grit.
C. Remove extraneous materials which could become unbonded during normal traffic, such as gypsum I
board compound, and other similar materials.
D. Clean subfloor and ensure that surfaces are dry, hard, and sound.
E. Provide 2 sanding/grinding passes with each grit, perpendicular to each other.
F. Sand entire area including inside corners an around columns where trowel-applied or self-levelling
underlayments are indicated. Use hand sanders/grinders where necessary to access all areas.
G. The finished surface shall be clean and porous with abraded roughness of light grit sandpaper.
H. The sanded floor shall be swept using a fine-bristled push broom. After brooming, vacuum entire floor
to remove all dust and debris.
I. Damp mop and/or wet vacuum as necessary to attain a properly cleaned surface.
J. Maintain slab free of traffic between sanding and application of concrete coatings.
3.4 APPLICATION OF REPAIR AND RESURFACING MATERIALS
A. Install trowelable underlayment at locations where slopes are indicated and at other locations as
appropriate to installation conditions; install self leveling underlayment at other locations as necessary
to correct slab flatness and levelness.
B. Set screeds, markers, and reference blocks. Set screeds at all construction and control joints to
establish weakened plane joints in underlayment.
C. Install patching compounds in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Where
subsequent finishing of the material is required, float to level surface. Do not trowel.
D. Apply primer to all areas to receive underlayment; repeat application if necessary to achieve proper '
build.
TEMPLATE 030100-3 10/12/18 I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATION
SECTION 030100 -CONCRETE SLAB REPAIR AND RESURFACING
i E. Mix materials and pour or pump and squeegee into place to achieve appropriate thickness. At areas
to receive cork tile flooring, provide fill thickness as necessary to align cork flooring with adjacent floor
surfaces.
' F. Finish to a smooth level surface within tolerances specified for concrete floors.
G. Cure in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
H. Tolerances: As specified in Section 033000.
' 3.5 APPLICATION OF SEALER
A. Do not apply sealer to slabs or portions of slabs indicated to receive polishing system or a finished
' flooring material.
B. Remove all dirt, debris, or curing compounds using surface preparation cleaners as recommended by
manufacturer for conditions. Allow cleaning waters used in surface preparation to dry.
' C. Application:
1. Apply a single coat of sealer using a low pressure sprayer fitted with a 0.5 gpm spray tip.
2. On most surfaces, apply in a single saturating application.
3. Even out puddles with a microfiber applicator before material has a chance to fully dry.
i 4. If needed, an additional coat can be applied after material has dried for at least 1 hour. The
second coat will require less material.
5. For optimum stain repellency on porous surfaces, apply a saturating coat and allow to dry
' thoroughly before applying a second saturating coat. Less material will be required on the
second application. Over-application may change surface appearance.
D. Allow treated surfaces to dry.
E. Remove any dried powder residue using stiff broom, power sweeper or floor scrubbing machine.
F. Do no subsequent buffing or burnishing of slab.
3.6 CLEAN-UP
A. During progress of work, remove from site discarded materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each
work day.
' B. Upon completion of work, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coating by proper method of
washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect completed concrete coating work against damage.
B. Close application area after completion of each stage for a minimum of 48 hours and longer if
required by the manufacturer.
C. Protect coatings from general construction when tack-free with 1/4 inch tempered hardboard, smooth
side down. Remove prior to completion of Project.
D. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and refinishing, as acceptable to the Architect.
END OF SECTION
i
i
i
' TEMPLATE 030100-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete.
2. Concrete accessories.
3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
4. Concrete reinforcement.
5. Underslab vapor retarder.
6. Concrete sealer.
B. Related Sections:
1. 003152 -Testing and Inspection Services: Owner paid testing and inspections.
2. 013546-Sustainable Design Requirements:
3. 079200 -Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers.
4. 312000 - Earth Moving: Fill under slabs on grade.
5. 321313-Concrete Paving
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete: Formed Concrete elements which are exposed to view as an exterior or
interior surface in the completed structure. Areas indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): I
1. 117-Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
2. 301-05- Specifications for Structural Concrete.
3. 315- Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. C33- Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C94 - Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete.
4. C132-Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
5. C150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
6. C156-Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
7. C171 -Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
8. C260 - Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
9. C309- Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Compounds.
10. C494- Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
11. C618 - Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete.
12. C939 -Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete
13. C1107 -Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
14. C1315 - Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for
Curing and Sealing Concrete.
15. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
16. E1155 - Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the
"F Number" System.
C. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: CRD-C-621-83 - Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout.
TEMPLATE 033000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
' SECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
' 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
' B. Product Data: Submit data for each accessory, admixture, and curing material proposed for the work.
C. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval.
2. Test Results: Submit test results per ASTM C311 performed less than 6 months prior to use for
approval by Architect.
3. Certifications: Submit mill certificates for cement, aggregates, and reinforcing.
D. Sustainability Submittals:
' 1. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013546.
2. Low Emitting Paints and Coatings: Submit product data for interior concrete sealers and curing
compounds. Include MSDS sheets.
' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Concrete work is subject to special testing and inspection as specified in 003152. Notify Architect at
' least 48 hours before concrete is poured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
' 2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to ACI 301.
B. Plywood:
1. Architectural Concrete: APA rated High Density Overlay or Medium Density Overlay, Plyform
' Class 1. EXT.
2. Other Concrete: APA B-B Plyform Class 1, EXT
C. Form Ties:
1. Concrete not exposed to public view: Snap-off metal;
t 2. Concrete exposed to public view: Cone ends or metal washer ends; coordinate with drawings.
D. Chamfers and Rustication Strips: Wood or plastic; fabricate to the shapes indicated.
' 2.2 REINFORCING
A. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Types as indicated on the structural drawings.
2. ASTM A615, grade 60], unless indicated otherwise.
' B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.
' C. Fibrous Reinforcing:
1. Reinforcing Fibers: Virgin polypropylene reinforcing fibers, designed and manufactured
specifically for use in concrete; one of the following.
a. Forta Corporation "FORTA CR"
' b. Fibermesh, Inc. "Fibermesh Fibers"
2. Furnish fibers in lengths as approved for the application.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal -Type 1 Portland, grey color.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F; loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 1 percent. Use fly ash from
one single source for the whole Project.
' C. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; severe weather exposure.
' TEMPLATE 033000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
D. Water: ASTM C94, para. 5.1.3
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C 260; Master Builders Inc. "Micro-Air"or"MBVR", Euclid Chemical Co. "Air
Mix,"or approved.
B. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C 494, Type A; Master Builders Inc. "Pozzolith/Polyheed," Euclid
Chemical Co. "Eucon WR 75," or approved.
C. High Range Water Reducer(Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G and shall be of the second
or third generation type. Shall be batch plant added, extend plasticity time, reduce water 20 to 30
percent. Master Builders Inc. "Rheobuild," Euclid Chemical "Eucon 37," or approved.
D. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, non-corrosive, non-chloride; Master Builders "Pozzutech 20,"
Euclid Chemical Co. "Accelgard 90," or approved.
E. Set Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B.
F. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: Eclipse by W.R. Grace Company.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C", Euclid Chemical
Co. "Flex-con", or approved.
B. Non-Shrink Grouts: ASTM C1107, Grade B; non-shrink non-catalyzed natural aggregate grout;
minimum compressive strength of 7000 PSI at 28 days; 25 to 30 second flow when tested in
accordance with ASTM C939 at 45 to 90 degrees F; cement gray in color; Master Builders Inc.
"Masterflow 928," Euclid Chemical Co. "HiFlow Grout,"or approved.
C. Form Release Coating: Water based type; VOC <150g/I; Nox-Crete "Utility Release," Cresset
Chemical Company"Crete-Lease 20-VOC," or approved; non staining.
D. Curing Materials:
1. Waterproof Sheet Material: Waterproof paper in accordance with ASTM C171; reinforced
waterproof kraft paper; white color at exterior applications; Burke Kraft Curing Paper Type I-SK-
30, or approved.
2. Mats and Burlap: Fabric covering composed of quilted polyethylene sheeting laminated to outer
covering of burlap, cotton, or other approved fabric; outer covering shall weigh not less than 6 1
ounces per square yard.
3. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear or translucent with fugitive dye; moisture loss not more
than 0.055 gr./sq.cm. when tested in accordance with ASTM C156 and applied in a single coat at
the manufacturers recommended rate; maximum VOC content 100 g/L Curing compounds shall
be proven compatible with subsequently applied floor finishing systems including waterproof
membranes or removed in its entirety prior to flooring installation.
4. Curing/Sealing Compound: ASTM C309; water based curing compound; maximum VOC content
100 g/L. W. R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire IL (800/342-5976); "Sealtight 100-Clear" or approved.
E. Underslab Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A; one of the following:
1. "Stego Wrap 15 Mil Vapor Barrier" by Stego Industries, LLC (877-464-7834).
2. "Vapor Block 15" by Raven Industries (800-635-3456).
3. "Griffolyn 15 Mil Green" by Reef Industries, Inc. (800-231-6074).
4. "Perminator 15 Mil" by WR Meadows, Inc. (847-214-2100)
5. "Florprufe 120" by WR Grace (866-333-3726).
F. Prefabricated Slab Construction Joints: Burke by Edoco "Keyed Kold Joint,"with splice plates, stakes,
and driving accessories, or approved; depth 1/2 inch less than slab thickness, galvanized sheet metal
tongue and groove joint form, with knockouts for passing reinforcing bars through.
G. Preformed Joint Fillers:
1. Non-extruding type; ASTM D1751; Sonneborn "Expansion Joint Filler," WR Meadows "Sealtight
Fiber", " Burke by Edoco "Fiber expansion Joint," or approved.
2. Joint Cap: Strippable plastic type; W.R. Meadows "SealTight Snap-Cap", Burke by Edoco"Joint
Cap", or approved; width to match expansion joint filler material.
TEMPLATE 033000-3 10/12/18
ISTARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
I H. Finishing Aid: Evaporation retardant for preventing rapid drying during hot windy weather, Master
Builders "Confilm."
2.6 CONCRETE MIX
I A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, and in accordance with the requirements indicated on the
structural drawings.
B. Admixtures:
I
1. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing or high range water reducing admixture,
except[architectural concrete, jand concrete with a required water/cement ratio of 0.45 or lower
shall contain a high range water reducing admixture.
I 2. All concrete required to be air entrained shall contain air entraining admixture to produce 4% to
6% air.
3. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures from 40 degrees F to 20 degrees F, and all slab
concrete placed in ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, shall contain an accelerator at the
I manufacturer's required dosage.
4. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or above, shall contain a set
retarder at the manufacturer's required dosage.
I C. Provide 28 day compressive strengths as indicated on the Structural Drawings. Where not indicated
on the Structural Drawings, provide minimum 3000 psi compressive strength unless indicated
otherwise.
I D. Fly Ash: A maximum of 50 percent by weight of cementitious materials.
E. Fibrous Reinforcing:
1. Add fibrous reinforcing in concrete for installation in locations as indicated on the Structural
Drawings.
I 2. Add fibers at the rate recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated, but not
less than lbs per cu. yard of concrete.
3. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I 2.7 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate as indicated and in accordance with ACI 315.
IPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
I A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
I B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION
IA. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints.
B. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by the Architect.
I C. Use form coating on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form
coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments.
D. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
I sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117.
I
ITEMPLATE 033000-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
F. Architectural Concrete Forms:
1. Construct forms of high density overlay plywood.
2. Use coned form ties at an even spacing as approved by the Architect.
3. Additional Tolerance Requirements: In accordance with the additional requirements of ACI 301.
Form surfaces at the joints between each panel shall be flush within a tolerance of plus or minus
1/16 inch.
4. Form Joint Seal for"Architectural" Concrete: Apply double face tape, not more than 1/16th inch
thick to edges of form panels holding back from form surface at least 1/16 inch; apply continuous
bead of silicone sealant for the length of the joint; tool sealant smooth and flush with adjoining
contact surfaces. Wipe off all excess sealant. Fill flush all holes and imperfections in forming
surface with sealant.
5. Rustication Strips: Glue or nail to form surfaces; set and fill nail holes; seal to surface of forms.
6. Form Reuse: Clean forms and repair all holes and damage; obtain approval of form for each
reuse; formwork with patches and repairs affecting the appearance of concrete surfaces will not
be accepted.
G. Where earth forms are used, hand trim sides and bottoms of earth forms. Remove loose dirt.
3.3 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written
instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade.
B. Lap and seal all seams a minimum of 6 inches, seal around all penetrations, lap and seal against
foundation walls and footings with manufacturer's recommended sealing tape or mastic.
3.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress. 1
C. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the Drawings.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
A. In accordance with ACI 301.
B. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not
use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while
bonding agent is still tacky.
3.6 SUBSEQUENT TREATMENT FOR FORMED SURFACES
A. Provide smooth form finish for concrete to remain exposed in the finished work; rough form finish for
concrete to remain concealed in the finished work.
B. Sandblast architectural concrete surfaces. Remove surface mortar only for paint adherence. Exact
degree of bite shall be determined by the Architect.
C. Where waterproofing or dampproofing is scheduled or indicated, grout fill all rock pockets, tie holes,
and other surface imperfections to create a smooth surface ready to receive the membrane. Grind
concrete fins and other surface projections flat with adjacent surfaces.
3.7 SLABS
A. Expansion Joints for Slabs on Grade:
1. Place expansion joints at locations indicated and where exterior slabs abut concrete walls, the
building perimeter, and other fixed objects abutting or within the slab area.
2. Form joints 1/2 inch wide x full depth of slab.
3. Form expansion joints with preformed joint filler. Install strippable joint at joints to receive sealant
specified in Section 079200.
4. Tool expansion joints to 1/4 inch radius.
5. Discontinue reinforcing at the expansion joint or use sleeved dowels in accordance with the
Structural Drawings. '
TEMPLATE 033000-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033000 -CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
' B. Control Joints for Slabs on Grade:
1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate.
2. Control joints shall be saw cut, or tooled, unless indicated otherwise.
' 3. Radius tooled control joints to match expansion joints.
4. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab and shall be
3/16 inch in width minimum.
5. Space control joints at the locations indicated, except when not indicated locate in at 32 times the
slab thickness.
6. Align joints with column lines when ever possible. Joints shall form rectangular panels with the
long side less than 1-1/2 times the length of the short side. Provide circular or diamond shaped
joint lines around columns. Locate control joints at reentrant corners. Coordinate with placement
' of joints in tile flooring.
C. Tooled Joints for Slabs on Grade: Provide tooled joints to match control joints. Tooled joints shall to
penetrate the slab no more than 1/4 the depth of the slab.
D. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations for slab on grade construction.
E. Curing:
1. Moisture cure all concrete for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved or specified otherwise.
2. Use curing/sealing compound on concrete slabs scheduled to receive sealer.
3. Use waterproof sheet material or mats and burlap at surfaces to receive subsequent bonded
finish materials. A curing compound may be used on surfaces to receive subsequent bonded
finish materials, provided the curing compound is approved in writing by the manufacturer of the
adhesive or the bonding finish material. Curing compound may also be used on surfaces to
receive subsequent bonded finish materials, provided the curing compound is removed with shot
blasting or other approved method prior to installation of bonded materials.
' 4. Apply curing compounds and curing/sealing compounds in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
5. Maintain concrete temperatures above 50 degrees F.
F. Finishes:
1. Full Trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise.
2. Light steel trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces scheduled to receive tile or other similar
bonded materials.
' G. Curing/Sealing Compound: Apply a second coat of curing/sealing compound to concrete slabs
scheduled to receive sealer. Clean floor and apply just prior to substantial completion. Apply in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
H. Slab Tolerances: Provide Random Traffic floor tolerances as follows, when measured in accordance
with ASTM E1155, including those floors to receive subsequent finishes.
1. Slab on Grade at Exposed Architectural Slabs: FF 40, FL 30, over test area; FF 30, FL 24,
' minimum local value.
2. Slabs on Grade to receive thinset flooring and resilient floor covering : FF 35, FL 25, over test
area; FF 24, FL 17, minimum local value.
3. Slabs on Grade to receive carpet : FF 25, FL 20, over test area; FF 17, FL 15, minimum local
' value.
4. Slabs on Grade at non-public areas, subfloors under concrete topping, and thickset: FF 20,
FL 15, over test area; FF 15, FL 10, minimum local value.
' 5. Slopes And Pitches To Drain: FF 15, minimum local value at each discreet plane as indicated on
the Drawings; free from areas subject to puddling.
' END OF SECTION
I
TEMPLATE 033000-6 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033015-CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place concrete slabs on grade
2. Concrete accessories.
3. Formwork, shoring, bracing, and anchorage.
4. Concrete reinforcement.
5. Underslab vapor retarder.
6. Concrete sealer.
B. Related Sections:
1. 003152 -Testing and Inspection Services: Owner paid testing and inspections.
2. 018100-Sustainable Design Requirements: LEED requirements.
3. 033514-Polished Concrete Flooring System
4. 079200-Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 117 - Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
2. 301-10- Specifications for Structural Concrete.
3. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A615- Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. C33- Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C94-Specifications for Ready Mixed Concrete.
4. C132-Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete.
5. C150- Specification for Portland Cement.
6. C156-Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials.
7. C171 - Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
8. C260 -Specifications for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
9. C309-Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Compounds.
10. C494 - Specifications for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
11. C618 - Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete.
12. C939 -Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete
13. C1107- Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink)
14. C1315- Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for
Curing and Sealing Concrete.
15. D1751 - Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction.
16. E1155- Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the
"F Number" System.
C. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers: CRD-C-621-83 - Specifications for Non-Shrink Grout.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit data for each accessory, admixture, and curing material proposed for the work.
TEMPLATE 033015-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
' SECTION 033015—CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Reinforcing:
a. Detail reinforcing in accordance with ACI 315. Indicate reinforcement sizes, spacings,
locations and quantities of reinforcing, bending and cutting schedules, splicing, and
supporting and spacing devices.
b. Indicate embedded items.
2. Slab Layouts: Dimension locations of control, expansion, and construction joints. Relate to
' building grid lines.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Mix Designs: Prior to concrete work, submit mix designs for approval.
' 2. Test Results: Submit test results per ASTM C311 performed less than 6 months prior to use for
approval by Architect.
3. Certifications: Submit mill certificates for cement, aggregates, and reinforcing.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B. Concrete work is subject to special testing and inspection as specified in 003152. Notify Architect at
least 48 hours before concrete is poured.
C. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. At least 35 days prior to start of concrete work the Contractor shall hold, in accordance with
Section 013119, a meeting to review the detailed requirements of the concrete design mixes and
to determine the procedures for producing proper concrete construction.
2. Required in attendance:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Owner's construction manager
c. Testing Laboratory representative.
d. Concrete subcontractor.
e. Ready-mix producer.
f. Admixtures manufacturer's representative.
g. Architect/Engineer
h. All subcontractors with work to be installed in, or affected by, concrete work.
3. Notify Architect 10 days prior to the scheduled date of the meeting.
' 4. Agenda: Include the following.
a. Installation scheduling and coordination; scheduling of mock-up construction and review.
b. Classes of concrete required; mix designs; applicable references.
' c. Formwork.
d. Reinforcement and placement.
e. Climatic conditions; hot and/or cold weather concreting procedures (as appropriate); unusual
placing conditions.
f. Substrate preparation; placement methods; construction joints.
g. Flatwork; flatness and levelness requirements; finishing; criteria for acceptance; remedies.
h. Curing and protection procedures
i. Site quality control; inspection and testing requirements.
j. Sealers; locations and coverage rates.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
' 2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Unless specified otherwise, conform to ACI 301.
' B. Plywood: APA B-B Plyform Class 1, EXT
2.2 REINFORCING
A. Reinforcing Steel:
1. Types as indicated on the structural drawings.
TEMPLATE 033015-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033015—CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, and Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete.
2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C150, normal -Type 1 Portland, grey color.
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F; loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 1 percent. Use fly ash from
one single source for the whole Project.
C. Normal Weight Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C33; severe weather exposure.
D. Water: ASTM C94, para. 5.1.3
2.4 ADMIXTURES
A. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C 260; Master Builders Inc. "Micro-Air"or"MBVR", Euclid Chemical Co. "Air
Mix,"or approved.•
B. Water Reducer Normal: ASTM C 494, Type A; Master Builders Inc. "Pozzolith/Polyheed," Euclid
Chemical Co. "Eucon WR 75," or approved.
C. High Range Water Reducer(Superplasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or G and shall be of the second or
third generation type. Shall be batch plant added, extend plasticity time, reduce water 20 to 30 percent.
Master Builders Inc. "Rheobuild," Euclid Chemical "Eucon 37,"or approved.
D. Accelerator: ASTM C 494, Type C or E, non-corrosive, non-chloride; Master Builders "Pozzutech 20,"
Euclid Chemical Co. "Accelgard 90," or approved.
E. Set Retarder: ASTM C494, Type B.
F. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: Eclipse by W.R. Grace Company. '
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic type; Sonneborn "Sonnocrete", W.R. Grace "Duraweld C", Euclid Chemical Co. 1
"Flex-con", or approved.
B. Non-Shrink Grouts: ASTM C1107, Grade B; non-shrink non-catalyzed natural aggregate grout;
minimum compressive strength of 7000 PSI at 28 days; 25 to 30 second flow when tested in
accordance with ASTM C939 at 45 to 90 degrees F; cement gray in color; Master Builders Inc.
"Masterflow 928," Euclid Chemical Co. "HiFlow Grout," or approved.
C. Form Release Coating: Water based type; VOC <150g/I; Nox-Crete "Utility Release," Cresset Chemical
Company"Crete-Lease 20-VOC,"or approved; non staining.
D. Curing Materials:
1. Waterproof Sheet Material: Waterproof paper in accordance with ASTM C171; reinforced
waterproof kraft paper; white color at exterior applications; Burke Kraft Curing Paper Type I-SK-
30,
or approved.
2. Mats and Burlap: Fabric covering composed of quilted polyethylene sheeting laminated to outer
covering of burlap, cotton, or other approved fabric; outer covering shall weigh not less than 6
ounces per square yard.
3. Curing Compound: ASTM C309; clear or translucent with fugitive dye; moisture loss not more
than 0.055 gr./sq.cm. when tested in accordance with ASTM C156 and applied in a single coat at
the manufacturers recommended rate; maximum VOC content 100 g/L Curing compounds shall 111be proven compatible with subsequently applied floor finishing systems including waterproof
membranes or removed in its entirety prior to flooring installation.
4. Curing/Sealing Compound: ASTM C309; water based curing compound; maximum VOC content
100 g/L. W. R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire IL (800/342-5976); "Sealtight 100-Clear" or approved.
E. Underslab Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A; one of the following:
1. "Stego Wrap 15 Mil Vapor Barrier" by Stego Industries, LLC (877-464-7834).
2. "Vapor Block 15" by Raven Industries (800-635-3456).
3. "Griffolyn 15 Mil Green" by Reef Industries, Inc. (800-231-6074).
TEMPLATE 033015-3 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033015—CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
' 4. "Perminator 15 Mil" by WR Meadows, Inc. (847-214-2100)
5. "Florprufe 120" by WR Grace (866-333-3726).
F. Prefabricated Slab Construction Joints: Burke by Edoco"Keyed Kold Joint,"with splice plates, stakes,
' and driving accessories, or approved; depth 1/2 inch less than slab thickness, galvanized sheet metal
tongue and groove joint form, with knockouts for passing reinforcing bars through.
G. Preformed Joint Fillers:
' 1. Non-extruding type; ASTM D1751; Sonneborn "Expansion Joint Filler," WR Meadows"Sealtight
Fiber", " Burke by Edoco "Fiber expansion Joint," or approved.
2. Joint Cap: Strippable plastic type; W.R. Meadows "SealTight Snap-Cap", Burke by Edoco "Joint
Cap", or approved; width to match expansion joint filler material.
H. Finishing Aid: Evaporation retardant for preventing rapid drying during hot windy weather, Master
Builders "Confilm."
2.6 CONCRETE MIX
A. Mix concrete in accordance with ASTM C94, and in accordance with the requirements indicated on the
structural drawings.
' B. Concrete at slabs on grade shall have a maximum water/cement ration of 0.45.
C. Admixtures:
1. All concrete shall contain the specified water reducing or high range water reducing admixture,
except concrete with a required water/cement ratio of 0.45 or lower shall contain a high range
water reducing admixture.
2. Provide air entraining admixture to produce air entrainment percentage specified in the structural
drawings where required.
' 3. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures from 40 degrees F to 20 degrees F, and all slab
concrete placed in ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F, shall contain an accelerator at the
manufacturer's required dosage.
4. All concrete placed in ambient temperatures of 90 degrees F or above, shall contain a set
' retarder at the manufacturer's required dosage.
D. Provide 28 day compressive strengths as indicated on the Structural Drawings. Where not indicated on
the Structural Drawings, provide minimum compressive strength specified in the structural drawings
' unless indicated otherwise.
E. Fly Ash: Maximum of 20 percent by weight of cementitious materials.
t 2.7 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION
A. Fabricate as indicated and in accordance with ACI 315.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in writing
of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
' B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 FORMWORK ERECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurement before proceeding with formwork. Align form joints.
B. Use plywood forms, unless other systems are approved by the Architect.
TEMPLATE 033015-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 033015—CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
C. Use form coating on forms in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Verify that form
coatings will not affect the bond of subsequent concrete surface treatments.
D. Coordinate with work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
E. Tolerances: Comply with ACI 117.
F. Where earth forms are used, hand trim sides and bottoms of earth forms. Remove loose dirt.
3.3 UNDERSLAB VAPOR RETARDER
A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written
instructions under all interior slabs-on-grade.
B. Lap and seal all seams a minimum of 6 inches, seal around all penetrations, lap and seal against
foundation walls and footings with manufacturer's recommended sealing tape or mastic.
3.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement.
B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on the drawings at points of minimum stress.
C. Provide laps and concrete cover as indicated in the Drawings.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE
A. In accordance with ACI 301.
1
B. Bonding Agent: Mix thoroughly and apply strictly in accord with the manufacturer's instructions; do not
use when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees F. Place concrete in contact immediately while
bonding agent is still tacky.
3.6 SLABS
A. Expansion Joints for Slabs on Grade:
1. Place expansion joints at locations indicated and where exterior slabs abut concrete walls, the
building perimeter, and other fixed objects abutting or within the slab area.
2. Form joints 1/2 inch wide x full depth of slab.
3. Form expansion joints with preformed joint filler. Install strippable joint at joints to receive sealant
specified in Section 079200.
4. Tool expansion joints to 1/4 inch radius.
5. Discontinue reinforcing at the expansion joint or use sleeved dowels in accordance with the
Structural Drawings.
B. Control Joints for Slabs on Grade:
1. Make joints straight; perpendicular or parallel to building lines and slab edges, as appropriate.
2. Control joints shall be saw cut or tooled, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Radius tooled control joints to match expansion joints.
4. Control joints shall penetrate the slab a minimum of 1/4 the thickness of the slab and shall be
3/16 inch in width minimum.
5. Space control joints at the locations indicated, except when not indicated locate in at 32 times the
slab thickness.
6. Align joints with column lines when ever possible. Joints shall form rectangular panels with the
long side less than 1-1/2 times the length of the short side. Provide circular or diamond shaped
joint lines around columns. Locate control joints at reentrant corners. Coordinate with placement
of joints in tile flooring.
C. Tooled Joints for Slabs on Grade: Provide tooled joints to match control joints. Tooled joints shall to
penetrate the slab no more than 1/4 the depth of the slab.
D. Construction Joints: Place at either expansion or control joint locations for slab on grade construction.
TEMPLATE 033015-5 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 033015—CONCRETE SLABS ON GRADE
I E. Curing:
1. Preferred: Moisture cure all concrete for a minimum of 7 days, unless approved or specified
otherwise.
l 2. Alternate: Curing/sealing compound on concrete slabs may be used where specified finish is
polished concrete, provided the product is compatible with the polishing process. When required
by the manufacturer, remove curing compound with shot blasting or other approved method prior
to polishing.
I 3. Use waterproof sheet material or mats and burlap at surfaces to receive subsequent bonded
finish materials..
4. Apply curing compounds and curing/sealing compounds in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
I 5. Maintain concrete temperatures above 50 degrees F.
F. Finishes:
Full Trowel finish interior floor slab surfaces, unless specified otherwise.
I1.
G. Curing/Sealing Compound: In accordance with specification section 033514.
H. Slab Tolerances: Slabs: Class B in accordance with ACI 301.
I I. Tolerance: Provide Random Traffic floor tolerances as follows, when measured in accordance with
ASTM E1155, including those floors to receive subsequent finishes.
1. Slab on Grade at Exposed Architectural Slabs: FE 40, FL 30, over test area; FF 30, FL 24,
I minimum local value.
2. Slabs on Grade to receive thinset flooring and resilient floor covering : FF 35, FL 25, over test
area; FE 24, FL 17, minimum local value.
I 3. Slabs on Grade to receive carpet : FF 25, FL 20, over test area; FF 17, FL 15, minimum local
value.
4. Slabs on Grade at non-public areas, subfloors under concrete topping, and thickset: FE 20,
I FL 15, over test area; FF 15, FL 10, minimum local value. END OF SECTION
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMPLATE 033015-6 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Face brick.
2. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories.
3. Related flashing.
B. Related Sections:
1. 033000- Cast-In-Place Concrete: Structural backing. 1112. 042200 - Concrete Masonry Units: CMU, coordination of installation with exterior brick veneer.
3. 051200 - Structural Steel Framing: Relieving angles.
4. 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural stud supports.
5. [071900 -Water Repellents: Requirement for cleaning and installation of coatings under brick
masonry subcontract.]
6. 072700—Weather Resistive Barriers: Air barriers; wall underlayment; flexible flashing.
7. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim: Sheet metal receivers furnished for installation under
this Section; requirements for metal flashing provided under this Section.
8. 079200-Joint Sealants: Backer rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
9. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Metal frames to be built in.
10. 092843 - Gypsum Sheathing
11. Division 22 - Plumbing: Pipe penetrations.
12. Division 26- Electrical: Conduit penetrations.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000. Requests for substitution of brick/manufacturer shall be accompanied by samples
representative of proposed color, listing of projects of type and scope similar to that of this project,
and production schedule information sufficient to demonstrate plant capacity to meet project
scheduling requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C91 - Masonry Cement.
2. C216 - Facing Brick.
3. C270 - Mortar for Unit Masonry.
4. C476 - Grout for Reinforced and Non-reinforced Masonry.
B. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAWC): Recommended Practices and Guide
Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. '
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit for all accessory components, mortar mixes, and additives.
2. Submit for attachment system, anchorage devices, fasteners, and reinforcing wire.
C. Shop Drawings: As necessary to completely describe shapes and configurations of brick veneer
system, including the following:
1. Brick schedule, including special shapes not indicated on the Drawings
2. Complete facade elevations, minimum 1/8" = 1'-0" scale, showing coursing patterns and
locations, and referenced and annotated as necessary to identify locations of special conditions.
3. Elevations of openings and special conditions, minimum 1/4" = 1-0" scale, as necessary to
describe coursing details at edges and terminations.
TEMPLATE 042113-1 10/12/18
' STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY
I 4. Section, minimum 3/4" = 1.-0"scale, of typical relieving angle, support provisions for flashing,
special brick, sealant, weep holes, back-up and anchorage.
5. Sections through brick veneer, minimum 3/4" = 1'-0" scale, to completely describe the following.
I a. Locations and configurations of sealant joints.
b. Special conditions at relieving angles.
c. Corners and changes in plane.
d. Opening head jamb and sill details.
I e. Anchorage (including special tie configurations and orientations) at soldier courses,jambs,
control joints, and atypical wall cavity conditions.
f. Expansion joint covers at brick veneer.
6. Requirements for field cuts.
D. Samples:
1. Bricks: Minimum 6 samples of each brick type and color proposed for the work.
a. Furnish samples from proposed supply source.
I b. Submit quantity of bricks as required to represent extreme range of color and finish of brick
to be furnished.
c. Maintain approved samples which have been returned to the Contractor at the site for
comparison purposes.
I 2. Mortar
a. Three cured samples of mortar proposed for the work.
b. Furnish cured sample of approved exterior masonry veneer mortar to Section 079200 for
I color matching.
E. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certifications:
I a. Concurrent with initial sample submittals, submit manufacturer's certificate that masonry,
and reinforcing, meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Submit manufacturer's certification that mortar and grout meet the specified requirements.
c. Certification that blast furnace slag, if proposed for use under this Section, is free from
I unacceptable content of hazardous materials.
2. Mortar and Grout Mix Designs: Submit mix designs; include 28 day compressive strength for
grout.
I 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with applicable Building Code and recommendations of IMIAWC for cold weather masonry
construction.
I B. Work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 003153.
C. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. In accordance with Section 013119, schedule and administer a pre-installation meeting minimum
I of 7 calendar days prior to commencement of work of this Section.
2. Require in attendance the following parties:
a. Owner's representative.
b. Architect.
I c. Contractor's superintendent.
d. Masonry installer.
e. Water repellent installer.
Other parties as appropriate or affected by work of this Section.
If.
3. Agenda:
a. Review composite masonry mock-up.
b. Review climatic conditions, including procedures and protection for wet weather, cold
I weather, and hot weather construction.
c. Review coordination, sequence, and installation procedures with adjacent work.
d. Review masonry tolerances, rough openings,joint sizes,joint tooling, and clearances to
adjacent components.
I e. Review relieving angle placement and layout.
f. Review layout and locations of anchorage/tie systems and associated gaskets.
ITEMPLATE 042113-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY '
g. Review masonry flashing requirements, including proper installation of flexible flashings and
metal receiver/flashing systems furnished from Section 076200.
h. Review methods and procedures to keep cavities free of mortar droppings.
i. Review control joint locations and construction.
j. Review installation procedures for building paper, including sealing of penetrations and
sealing of rips, tears, and other similar defects.
k. Review cleaning procedures and application of water repellent treatment.
I. Review quality control and mixing procedures for mortar and grout.
m. Review testing and inspection procedures.
1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE
A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
B. As bricks are unloaded and made ready for use, compare units with job samples for appearance and
quality. Reject and return broken, damaged, battered or non-conforming brick.
C. Store masonry units off ground to prevent contamination by mud, dust, or materials likely to cause
staining or other defects.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Wet Weather: Provide suitable cover over work exposed to weather, protect materials. Maintain
cover over finished work for 48 hours after completion.
B. Cold Weather: When outside temperature is below 40 degrees F, or is expected to fall below freezing
within 48 hours (Weather Bureau forecast), heat materials and provide suitable enclosures to maintain
temperatures above 40 degrees F for masonry work in-place and for 48 hours after completion.
Obtain approval of methods of protection before proceeding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EXTERIOR FACE BRICK
A. Approved Manufacturers, subject to the specified requirements:
1. Glen Gery Corp., Wyomissing, PA; 610-374-4011.
2. Mutual Materials Company, Bellevue WA; 206-455-2869.
3. The Belden Brick Company, Canton OH; 216-456-0031.
4. Acme Brick Company, Fort Worth TX; 800-792-1234.
B. Standard: Conform to ASTM C216 Type FBS, Grade SW.
C. Sizes:
1. Furnish 3-1/2"x 3-1/2"x 11-1/2" (4"x12" nominal face size), 3-5/8"x 3-5/8"x 11-5/8' not
acceptable.
2. Furnish special shapes as indicated.
D. Color and Finish: Match color and finish listed in the Exterior Finish Schedule.
E. Fabricate each brick type in one continuous operation with the exact same materials, equipment, and
conditions to assure uniformly matching brick.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Mortar: One of the following:
1. ASTM C270, Type M unless indicated otherwise; portland cement-lime type with pigments
B. Coloring Pigments: As manufactured by Davis Colors (Los Angeles, CA; 800-356-4848), LM Scofield
Co. (Los Angeles, CA; 800-800-9900), Solomon Grind-Chem Service Inc. (SGS) (Springfield, IL; 800-
624-0261), or approved; color match as selected by the Architect from approved manufacturer's
standard line.
TEMPLATE 042113-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY
C. Grout: In accordance with ASTM C476; 2000 psi compressive strength.
D. Attachment System:
1. Basis of Design:
a. For Attachment to Steel Framed Walls: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. "DW-10 Seismiclip
Interlock System," including 12 gage "X-Seal" attachment anchor with "X-Seal Tape" gasket,
3/16 inch "Byna-Tie," "Seismiclip," and 9 gage wire; hot dip galvanized.
b. For Attachment to Concrete Walls: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. "305 Dovetail Slot"for
embedment in concrete walls; or"315-BT Flexible Dovetail," and "Seismiclip," and 9 gage
reinforcing wire; hot-dip galvanized. Furnish dovetail slot to Section 033000 for embedment.
E. Reinforcing Wire: Continuous 9 gage wire.
F. Fasteners:
1. For Steel Framed Walls: No. 12 minimum galvanized self drilling type with neoprene washers,
for attachment of anchors through sheathing into metal framing.
' 2. For Concrete Walls: Hilti Fastening Systems Item No. 661397 "Metal Hit," Rawlplug Co. "Rawl
Zamac Nailin" or approved; 1/4 inch diameter x length required for minimum 3/4" embedment;
galvanized.
3. Finishes: Hot dip galvanized.
G. Plastic Weeps: Rectangular type; 3/8 inch width x brick height; louvered or honeycombed.
H. Cavity Drainage Insert: Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; castellated "Mortar Net;"thickness equal to depth
' of cavity.
I. Flashing:
1. Concealed Flashing: Bonded copper; minimum 3 oz/sf copper sheet, bonded on both sides by
asphalt to heavy waterproofed creped kraft paper; York Manufacturing, Inc. "Cop-R-Tex Duplex,"
or Afco Products, Inc. "Cop-A-Bond Duplex."
2. Embedded Flashing/Receivers, Partially Exposed: Stainless steel, as furnished from
Section 076200.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify adjacent work is ready to accept the work of this Section; verify that items provided by other
Sections are properly sized and located. Commencement of masonry work constitutes acceptance of
adjacent and underlying construction. Immediately notify Architect of all deficiencies.
B. Verify that weather resistive barrier and flashings are installed correctly and ready to receive masonry
work.
C. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
D. Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work. Maintain in place until building structure
provides permanent bracing.
3.2 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXING
A. Thoroughly mix mortar and grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance
with the referenced standards.
B. Add approved admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix
and coloration.
C. Do not use alcohol or chloride-based anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar or
grout.
D. If water is lost by evaporation, retemper mortar within 2 hours of mixing. Do not retemper mortar after
2 hours of mixing.
E. Use no lime in grout.
TEMPLATE 042113-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY I
3.3 INSTALLATION '
A. Anchorage System:
1. Coordinate with installation of flashing materials and relieving angles.
2. Install attachment system as indicated. Where not indicated, place each attachment anchor at
16 inches on center vertically along each stud for steel studs at 16 inches on center.
3. Steel Stud Framed Walls:
a. Install gasket over sheathing and building paper in continuous vertical strips at each stud
location to receive anchors.
b. For steel studs 16 inches o.c., place each attachment anchor at maximum 18 inches o.c.
vertically along each stud, as necessary to correspond to masonry coursing, and to special
conditions, as indicated. Space anchors for support of maximum 2 sf veneer area per
anchor. Where anchor channel is used in lieu of individual anchors, fasten channels to
studs, maximum 16 inches o.c., with self drilling fasteners at maximum 12 inches o.c.
4. CMU Back-Up: As specified in Section 042200.
5. Relieving Angles: Install anchors as necessary to permit placement of tie in mortar joint between
second and third courses above relieving angles and other veneer support structures, and in first
joint below each angle, regardless of distribution otherwise required.
6. Furnish additional anchors at top courses, openings, corners, at each side of expansion joints,
and at other special conditions, as necessary to provide secure anchorage of the veneer. Install
anchors at Anchors at openings and at expansion joints shall be installed in horizontal joints at 8
inches on center vertically at brick running bond and maximum vertical spacing of 12 inches on
center at soldier courses, at horizontal spacing of 16 inches on center in vertical joints at soldier
courses not stabilized by mortar set masonry above (immediately below relieving angles and
copings).
7. Dovetail anchors which are not embedded in concrete shall be spaced 16 inches on center
horizontally, attached to concrete with 1/4 inch galvanized expansion anchors at 12 inches o.c.
maximum.
B. Placing and Bonding:
1. Lay masonry elements in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of
joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted.
2. Do not use units which are allowed under ASTM C216 to exceed chippage, distortion, or size
variation limits for brick type specified, except in areas where such defects are concealed from
view.
3. Select brick to maintain a uniform distribution of colors across the veneer surface, without
obvious patterns, repeats, or color concentration in any area.
4. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be
made, remove mortar and replace.
5. Remove excess mortar.
6. Bonding fresh masonry to set, or partially set, masonry:
a. Remove loose mortar. Keep drainage cavity free of mortar droppings.
b. Clean and lightly wet exposed surface of set masonry prior to laying fresh masonry.
7. Except as otherwise indicated, tool mortar joints to a uniform concave profile where exposed in
the finished work; cut joints flush at concealed locations, including joints concealed in the
cavities.
C. Ties:
1. Install ties and anchorage clips in sequence with masonry installation.
2. Provide continuous 9 gage reinforcing wire engaged into the anchorage clips. Lap 9 gage wire
as recommended by the anchorage system manufacturer.
3. Set ties and reinforcing wire in a bed of mortar and cover with mortar for secure and complete
embedment.
D. Coursing:
1. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated.
2. Maintain masonry courses to uniform height.
3. Lay brick masonry units in patterns indicated on the Drawings to modular dimensions indicated.
TEMPLATE 042113-5 10/12/18
ISTARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY
IE. Provide cleanouts at each course support as necessary to maintain cavities free of droppings.
F. Cutting and Fitting:
1. Cut and fit masonry units to form the configurations indicated, and as required to fit the work of
I other sections. Saw masonry units requiring cutting with a masonry saw. Coordinate fully with
other sections of work to ensure correct size, shape and location.
2. Cut or block out chases for other trades as directed by other trades at time of masonry work.
I 3. Obtain Architect's review prior to cutting or fitting any area which is not indicated on drawings, or
which may impair appearance or strength of masonry work.
4. Do not cut faces exposed to weather.
G. Flashing:
I
1. Coordinate with requirements of Sections 072700 and 076200.
2. Clean contact surfaces of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or
otherwise damage flashing material.
I 3. Install sheet metal flashing at locations where daylighted through-wall flashing is indicated.
Position flashing accurately to within 1/8 to 1/4 inch of face of brick.
4. Metal Flashing:
a. Lap flashing a minimum of 4 inches; interlock joints in deformed flashing to the greatest
I reasonable extent. Use lap sealant at lap joints.
b. Punch flashing neatly and seal at all penetrations.
c. Dam flashing at expansion and control joints and at ends of lintels, by turning up the flashing
a minimum of 4 inches.
I d. Set masonry over flashing in a thin bed of mortar.
5. Flexible Flashing:
a. Prior to installation of flashing, apply manufacturer's primer over gypsum sheathing,
I concrete, masonry and all other substrates as recommended by manufacturer and in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
b. Except where metal flashing is required, install flexible flashing at relieving angles by
adhering flashing toe edge 1/4 to 3/8 inch from the face of the brick in order to expose
I sufficient brick surface for adherence of sealants specified in Section 079200. Extend
flashing back to adhere to relieving angle and up onto substrate a minimum of 1-1/2 inches
above top of relieving angle vertical leg. Extend under"building paper" at steel stud framed
walls. At dampproofed walls, adhere directly to dampproofing and terminate top edge of
I flashing with a troweled bead of mastic.
c. Where relieving angles are bolted in place, form flashing over bolts.
d. Dam flashing at expansion and control joints and at ends of lintels, by turning up the flashing
a minimum of 4 inches.
I e. Set brick over flashing in thin a bed of mortar. Do not bridge joint between bricks above and
below the relieving angle.
H. Weepholes:
I 1. Provide weep openings in head joints in first course immediately above all flashing.
2. Install plastic weeps at locations indicated.
3. Maximum spacing: 2'-0" o.c.
4. Keep weepholes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings.
II. Mortar Net: After installation of first course of brick above flashing, fill cavity above flashing with cavity
drainage insert.
I J. Expansion/Control Joints:
1. Provide expansion/control joints as indicated.
2. Keep joints clear of mortar.
3. Provide expansion joints directly below relieving angles; clean joints in sequence with
I construction to prevent mortar bridges between angle and top of brick.
4. Provide vertical joints at all inside corners in brick veneer and at other locations as indicated on
the Drawings.
5. Joint Width: Match typical mortar joint.
1 6. Installation of backer rod and sealant are specified in Section 079200.
ITEMPLATE 042113-6 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 042113— BRICK MASONRY I
7. Do not continue masonry reinforcing across expansion/control joints. I
K. Masonry Lintels: Contractor shall have the option to prefab units and hoist into place, of fabricate in-
place. Refer to the Structural Drawings for steel reinforcing and concrete fill requirements.
L. Double-Wythe Grouted Walls: Install ladder ties at every third course. '
M. Build-in Work:
1. As work progresses, build-in hollow metal frames, window frames, steel lintels, shelf angles,
nailing strips, anchor bolts, plates, and other similar items supplied by other trades.
2. Build-in items plumb and true.
3. Bed anchors of hollow metal frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with mortar. Fill
masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
N. At the end of each days work, stop off horizontal runs by stepping back each course; toothing is not
permitted, except at toothed control joints where indicated.
O. Tolerances:
1. Maximum Variation From Plumb:
a. In lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arrises:
1) 1/4 in. in 10 ft.
2) 3/8 in. in any story or 20 ft. maximum.
3) 1/2 in. in 40 ft.
b. For external corners, expansion and control joints and other conspicuous lines:
1) 1/4 in. in any story or 20 ft. maximum.
2) 1/2 in. in 40 ft.
2. Maximum variation from level or grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves,
and other conspicuous lines: 1/4 in. in any bay or 20 ft.
3. Maximum variation of linear building line from an established position in plan and related portions
of columns, walls and partitions:
a. 1/2 in. in any bay or 20 ft. maximum.
b. 3/4 inch in 40 ft.
4. Head Joints: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
3.4 POINTING AND CLEANING
A. Cut out defective joints and holes in exposed masonry and repoint with mortar.
B. Dry brush masonry surface after mortar has set at end of each day's work and after final pointing.
C. Final cleaning is specified in Section 071900.
D. Leave work area and surrounding surfaces clean and free of mortar spots, droppings, and broken
masonry.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 015000. 1
B. Protect face materials, sills, ledges, and offsets from mortar drippings or other damage during
construction.
C. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction
activities.
D. At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration.
3.6 Delete the following Article of water repellant coating is not used.
3.7 WEATHERPROOFING
A. Water repellent coating is specified under Section 071900. 1
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 042113-7 10/12/18 1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 051200 -STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
I1. Elements indicated on the Structural Drawings, including the following:
a. Structural steel.
b. Structural welding.
c. Baseplate grouting.
2. Priming of structural steel.
B. Related Sections:
1. 014500 - Quality Control: Requirements for testing and inspection.
2. 033000-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Placement of structural steel to be embedded in concrete.
3. 053100 -Steel Decking.
4. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications not indicated on the Structural Drawings.
5. 099000 - Painting: Field painting of structural steel elements.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement Conditions of the Contract, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC):
1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings, 2010.
2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 2010.
3. Manual of Steel Construction, 14th Edition 2010.
4. Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, 2014.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A36-Structural Steel.
I 2. A108- Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished, Standard Quality.
3. A569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip, Commercial Quality.
4. A572 - High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality.
5. A992 - Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes For Use in Building Framing
1 6. A1085-Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel Hollow Structural
Sections (HSS)
7. C1107 - Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink).
C. American Welding Society(AWS): D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and
Specifications."
M 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data:
I1. Shop applied primers.
2. Non-shrink grout.
C. Shop Drawings:
' 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments,
fasteners, cambers, loads.
2. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.
3. Indicate types and locations of field welds.
4. Indicate members to be shop primed.
TEMPLATE 051200-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 051200 -STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certifications: Submit certification of materials with copies of mill reports for each heat of steel
used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 014500.
B. Use only certified welders approved by the jurisdictional code authorities.
C. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, work shall comply with AWS and AISC Standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL 111
A. Types as indicated on the Structural Drawings.
2.2 ACCESSORIES I
A. Non-Shrink Grout: BASF "Masterflow 713 Plus," Sonneborn "Sonogrout,"or approved; non-shrink,
non-metallic grout in compliance with ASTM C1107; minimum compressive strength 5,000 psi. 111B. Welding Electrodes: E-70 series, low hydrogen, appropriate for use.
C. Interior Primer: Modified alkyd type; lead and chromate free; gray or white color; one of the following
unless approved otherwise.
1. "Azeron Primer Series 88HS" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
2. "Amercoat 5105" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951).
3. "Carbocoat 150HG" by Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645).
D. Exterior Primers: Two-coat priming for exterior structural steel exposed in the finish work: I
1. First Primer: One of the following; provide product from same manufacturer selected for finish
systems specified in Section 099000.
a. "Series 394 PerimePrime" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
b. "Carbozinc 859" by Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645); 111
organic zinc-rich epoxy primer.
c. "68HS" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951); organic zinc-rich epoxy
primer.
d. "Catha-Coat 302H" by ICI Devoe; "reinforced" inorganic zinc-rich epoxy primer.
2. Epoxy Tie-Coat Primer: One of the following; provide product from same manufacturer selected
for first primer specified above:
a. "Hi-Build Epoxoline II" Series N69 by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-
3400).
b. "Carboline 888 " by Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645);
organic zinc-rich epoxy primer. '
c. "Amercoat 385." by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951); organic zinc-rich
epoxy primer.
d. "Devran 224HS," "Bar-Rust 231,"or"Bar-Rust 233H." by ICI Devoe; "reinforced" inorganic
zinc-rich epoxy primer.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate structural steel items in accordance with AISC and AWS Standards and in accordance with
approved shop drawings. Properly mark and match-mark all materials for field assembly. Fabricate
for delivery sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling.
B. Shop Assembly: Fabricate units in as large a part or section as practicable.
C. Standard Shop Primer Application:
1. Preparation: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal
in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide
commercial blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP6.
TEMPLATE 051200-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 051200 -STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
II 2. Application: Spray apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, mil
minimum dry film thickness.
3. Shop Primer: Shop prime all steel except:
a. Steel encased in concrete.
b. Surfaces to be field welded.
c. Contact surfaces at high-strength bolts.
d. Members which will be concealed by interior finishes.
e. Surfaces to receive other special shop primers.
D. Special Shop Primer Application:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and as specified
below.
2. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1; near white blast ungalvanized ferrous metal
surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
3. Spray apply one coat organic zinc primer and one intermediate coat epoxy primer in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primers to receive field application of finish
coats as specified in Section 099000.
4. Both primer coats shall be mill or shop applied.
5. Maintain condition of primers at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged
coatings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 ERECTION
' A. Embedded Items: Provide anchor bolts and templates, and other items as indicated, to other Sections
for installation prior to placement of cast-in concrete.
B. Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide as required with connections of sufficient strength to bear
imposed loads. Remove temporary members when permanent members are in place and final
connections are made.
C. Erect structural steel in accordance with approved shop drawings and AISC "Code of Standard
Practice," Section 7.
D. Welds shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. Cut holes by drilling only.
F. Tolerances: Maximum deviation from plumb, level, and alignment shall not exceed 1 to 500.
G. Base Plate Grouting: Set on leveling nuts to accurate elevations and grout solid with non-shrink grout.
H. Cleaning and Touch-Up:
1. Clean steel of oil or other contaminants as specified under Fabrication.
2. Columns, beams, girders, and other members which are to receive sprayed-on fireproofing shall
be cleaned free of loose rust, heavy mill scale, oil, dirt or other foreign substances prior to
application of fireproofing materials.
I
TEMPLATE 051200-3 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 051200 -STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING I
3. Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch-
up factory primed surfaces with same primer as used in shop; touch-up galvanized surfaces with
zinc-rich primer.
END OF SECTION 1
1
1
1
1
I
1
I
1
1
I
1
1
I
TEMPLATE 051200-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 053100 -STEEL DECKING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Steel deck and accessories.
B. Related Sections
1. 051200 -Structural Steel Framing: Support framing.
2. Division 22 - Plumbing: Sleeves for conduit and pipe penetrations.
3. Division 26- Electrical: Sleeves for conduit and pipe penetrations.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Galvanized
Process, Structural (Physical Quality).
2. A780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized
Coatings.
B. American Welding Society(AWS): D1.3- Structural Welding Code Sheet Steel.
C. Steel Deck Institute (SDI): Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks.
D. International Code Council (ICC)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Product literature and recommended installation instructions for metal decking,
including verification of gravity load and shear capacities.
C. ICC-ES report, confirming compliance of metal deck with regulatory fire-resistance requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Work of this Section is subject to testing and inspection as specified in Section 014500.
B. Erector Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience on comparable steel deck installations.
C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Metal deck shall be fabricated and installed to meet
requirements of the International Building Code as amended by the local jurisdiction.
D. Roof deck system shall be capable of resisting shear loads noted on the structural drawings.
E. Welders: Approved by the local jurisdictional authorities.
F. Refer to Structural Drawings for loads and additional requirements.
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000, and as follows:
1. Store off ground with one end elevated for drainage.
2. For storage over extended periods of time, cover deck with waterproof material.
r
I
TEMPLATE 053100-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 053100 -STEEL DECKING
PRODUCTS 1
1.6 COMPONENTS
A. Steel Deck:
1. Unless otherwise specified on the Structural Drawings, provide, as a minimum, ASTM A653, SS
Grade 33. Galvanized coatings as follows
a. Concealed locations: A40 or G60, minimum.
b. Deck with surfaces to be permanently exposed to view in exterior locations (surfaces to be
painted): A60, minimum.
2. Fabricate deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual.
3. Furnish deck of depth and profile indicated on the structural drawings. Where gage of deck is not
shown, furnish deck capable of supporting design loads indicated on the structural drawings with
detailed support conditions. Maximum deflection L/360, unless otherwise indicated.]
B. Accessories:
1. Cover Plates and Closures: Fabricate from same material as metal deck. Configure to match
contour of deck units, for tight fitting closure of sides and ends of decks.
2. Weld Washers: Per manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Galvanizing Touch-up Paint:
1. Meeting the Green Seal GS-11 requirements and compatible with subsequent field applied paint
coating systems.
2. Approved ZRC Chemical Products Company"ZRC Zero VOC," or approved.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal deck units as indicated, and in accordance with the deck manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install deck with minimum 2 inch bearing unless indicated otherwise. Install roof deck with minimum
end laps of 2 inches, centered over the supports.
C. Place deck units flat and square; secure to framing without warp or deflection.
D. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.3. 1
E. Cutting and Fitting: Cut deck units for all penetrations. Make cuts neat, square, and trim.
F. Install closures at open ends and sides of deck units as indicated, and as required to retain concrete
fill.
G. Touch-up Painting: Retouch field welds and scratched or damaged galvanizing with galvanizing repair
paint, in accordance with ASTM A780 and the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 053100-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fabricated metal items indicated on the Architectural Drawings.
B. Related Sections:
1. 033000 -Cast-In-Place Concrete:: Embedment of metal fabrications; fill at pipe bollards.
2. 042000 - Concrete Unit Masonry: Building in of metal fabrications.
3. 099000 - Painting: Field painting of metal fabrications shop primed in this section.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
' D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section
016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A36- Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A53- Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe.
3. A123- Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
4. A143- Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot Dipped Galvanized Structural Steel Products
and Procedures for Detecting Embrittlement.
5. A153- Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware.
6. A167- Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
7. A269- Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
8. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
9. A312 - Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe.
10. A366 - Specification for Carbon Steel Cold Rolled Sheet.
11. A384 -Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel
Assemblies.
12. A385- Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip).
13. A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes.
14. A501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing.
15. A569- Specification for Commercial Quality Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip Carbon (0.15 Maximum
Percent) Steel.
16. A570- Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality.
' 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Literature: Submit product literature for all prefabricated products.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Show details of fabrication and installation; indicate materials, thicknesses, dimensions, methods
of reinforcement and embedment, attachments, shop finishes, provisions for work of other trades,
and other pertinent information as requested by Architect.
2. Indicate sizes and locations of holes or lifting lugs and air vent holes required for hot dip
galvanizing.
' D. Closeout Submittal:
1. In accordance with Section 017700.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
' A. Fabricator Qualifications: Experienced and regularly engaged in producing metal fabrications of the
type specified; must employ only skilled personnel using proper equipment to produce work.
TEMPLATE 055000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS $
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Carbon Steel:
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Sheet: ASTM A366.
3. Pipe: ASTM A53, seamless, Type S, plain end; schedule 40 unless indicated otherwise.
4. Tubing: ASTM A500 or A501, seamless.
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 Type 302 or 304.
C. Fasteners: Types as indicated, specified, or required for the assembly and installation of fabricated
items.
1. Bolts: ASTM A307, unless indicated otherwise; include nuts and plain hardened washers.
2. Drilled-In Concrete Anchors: Ramset"Trubolt Stud Anchor," Hilti Fastening Systems "Kwikbolt,"
or approved.
D. Interior Shop-Applied Primer: Modified alkyd type (VOC compliant); lead and chromate free; gray or
white color; one of the following unless approved otherwise.
1. "Azeron Primer Series 88HS" by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
2. "Amercoat 5105" by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951).
3. "Carbocoat 150HG" by Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645).
E. Exterior Special Shop-Applied Primer:
1. "Hi-Build Epoxoline II" Series N69 by Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
2. "Carboline 888 " by Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645); organic
zinc-rich epoxy primer.
3. "Amercoat 385." by Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951); organic zinc-rich
epoxy primer.
4. "Devran 224HS," "Bar-Rust 231,"or"Bar-Rust 233H." by ICI Devoe; "reinforced" inorganic zinc-
rich epoxy primer.
F. Powder Coating: Polyester-urethane resin.
G. Galvanizing Touch-up Paint:
1. Meeting the Green Seal GS-11 requirements and compatible with subsequent field applied paint
coating systems.
2. Approved ZRC Chemical Products Company"ZRC Zero VOC,"or approved.
H. Miscellaneous Materials: Furnish incidental accessory materials, tools, and equipment as necessary
for fabrication and installation of miscellaneous metal items as indicated on the Drawings.
1. Non-Shrink Grout: Master Builder's "Master Flow 713," Sonneborn "Sonogrout," or approved.
2.2 PREFABRICATED COMPONENTS
A. Unistrut: Unistrut Corporation (Wayne, MI), or approved. Furnish manufacturer's standard
components corresponding to "P" numbers indicated on the drawing. Include 1/4 inch thick steel
connecting hardware, and 1/2" diameter bolts, nuts, and lock washers.
2.3 FABRICATION - FERROUS METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate as follows, unless specified or indicated otherwise.
1. Verify all dimensions and fabricate to detail with accurate sizes and shapes, straight lines, smooth
curves, and sharp angles.
2. Welds shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads applied.
3. For items exposed to view or subject to contact, grind welds smooth and level with adjacent
surfaces; remove all burrs from cut edges. Fill imperfections with body putty at painted or
powder-coated fabrications as necessary for a smooth even finish.
4. Bend curved sections to a smooth radius free from buckles and twists.
5. Fabrications in exterior locations shall be fabricated to shed water.
B. Fabrication of Elements to Receive Galvanized Coatings:
1. Fabricate in accordance with the applicable requirements of ASTM A143, A384, and A385.
TEMPLATE 055000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
2. Remove welding slag and burrs prior to galvanizing.
3. Avoid fabrication techniques which could cause distortion or embrittlement of the steel.
2.4 SHOP FINISHES
111 A. Hot Dip Galvanizing:
1. Steel fabrications shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Bolts, nuts, washers, and
other hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with A153.
2. Surface Finish: The galvanized coatings shall be continuous, firmly adhered, smooth, and free
from defects.
3. Locations: Provide hot dip galvanizing for all metal fabrications in exterior or moist conditions,
unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise approved by the Architect, plug and cold galvanize
ventilation and lifting holes which will be exposed to moisture penetration in the finished work.
B. Interior Primed finish:
1. Preparation: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1. Remove rust and scale by wire
1 brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3.
Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide commercial blast cleaning in accordance
with SSPC-SP6. Immediately apply specified prime coat.
2. Shop-apply interior primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Locations: Provide at all interior metal fabrication exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
Do not prime surfaces to be embedded in concrete, and surfaces to be field welded.
A. Clear Steel Finish:
1. Use handling methods to preserve hot rolled mill scale texture and blue-gray patina.
2. Do not cut steel with a torch; cut steel with a blade.
3. If the metal is scratched or has a poor patina do the following:
a. Heat metal to 150° F to eliminate any water.
b. Allow to cool. Remove any surface rust with a Scotch Brite pad or steel wool.
4. Apply two coats of clear urethane.
B. Blackened Steel Finish:
1. Materials:
a. Blackening Agent: Electrochemical Products Inc, (New Berlin WI; 262-786-9330)
"Insta-Blak 333" (available through Chemithon, Seattle, WA; 206-937-9954).
b. Urethane: Clear satin sheen urethane.
2. Finishing Process:
a. Clean steel with denatured alcohol.
b. Sandblast the steel.
c. Use rubber gloves (clean)to handle steel after sandblasting.
d. Heat metal to 150° F to eliminate water.
e. With a plastic spray bottle, evenly spray on blackening agent (slightly diluted with water). Do
not brush on.
f. Allow blackening agent to sit a couple of hours, then rinse/wash the metal with a sponge.
g. Allow to dry. Remove surface rust with a Scotch Brite pad or steel wool.
h. For surfaces with low surface touching, apply two coats of clear urethane.
i. For surfaces with high surface touching and abuse, heat metal slightly to allow wax to melt,
and rub wax on with a clean cloth. To reduce wax build-up, slightly rub with steel wool or
Scotch Brite pad.
j. Blacken exposed fasteners as specified for other steel members.
C. Exterior Special Primed Finish:
1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the finish coat manufacturer's recommendations, and as
specified below.
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean per SSPC SP1; abrade galvanized surfaces with a metal
preparation pad..
3. Spray apply epoxy primer in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply primer
to receive field application of finish coats as specified in Section 099000.
4. Except for surfaces indicated to be field welded, coat all surfaces of fabrication, whether or not
exposed to view in installed position.
TEMPLATE 055000-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 055000 -METAL FABRICATIONS111
5. Maintain at least one coat of primer at all times during installation. Immediately patch damaged
coatings.
6. Finish coat shall be free of dirt, flow lines, sags, blisters, pinholes, and other surface
imperfections.
7. Locations: Provide at all exterior galvanized steel fabrications exposed to view, and other111
fabrications as scheduled. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded.
D. Powder Coated Steel:
1. Prepare steel by solvent cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP1. Remove rust and scale by wire
brushing, scraping, and sanding down to bare metal in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3.
Where SP2 and SP3 measures are insufficient, provide commercial blast cleaning in accordance
with SSPC-SP6.
2. Spray apply powder coating and cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
E. Stainless Steel: #4 finish in accordance with the NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual."
2.5 PROTECTION
A. For metal in contact with concrete, masonry, and other dissimilar materials, coat contact surfaces with
zinc-rich primer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is 1
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal fabrications in accurate locations shown. Unless indicated otherwise, fabrications shall
be installed plumb and level.
B. Provide all anchorage devices as indicated and required for a secure installation.
C. Touch-up all surfaces damaged during installation. Patch all welds and damage marks with matching
primer.
D. Coordinate with Section 033000 for foundations, installation, and concrete fill at pipe bollards.
3.3 SCHEDULE
A. The following list includes, without limitation, the principal metal fabrications and finishes in the Work.
1. Steel Corner Guards: Stainless steel; #4 finish.
2. Steel Bollards; Galvanized finish with special exterior primer for field finishing under 099000.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 055000-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous sheathing.
2. Blocking, nailers, and curbing.
3. Plywood terminal back boards.
B. Related Sections:
1. 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural lightgage metal framing.
2. 075423—Thermoplastic Membrane (TPO) Roofing
3. 076200 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
4. 092200—Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Support framing; metal backing.
5. 092900 -Gypsum Board:
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Plywood Association (APA)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D2898 -Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant Treated Wood for Fire
Testing.
2. E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
C. American Wood Preservers'Association: Book of Standards (AWPA).
D. National Lumber Grading Authority of Canada (NLGA).
E. Product Standard (PS): PS-20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard,
F. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).
G. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB): Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber.
H. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit complete technical and product data on the following:
1. Preservative and fire retardant wood treatments.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Work shall conform to the requirements of the currently enforced
International Building Code as adopted by the jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 016000.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DIMENSION LUMBER
A. Lumber shall be manufactured in accordance with PS 20, and shall be stamped and graded in
accordance with WWPA, WCLB, NLGA, or SPIB grading rules.
I
TEMPLATE 061000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKSCO FFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
B. Moisture Content: Kiln dried to 19% maximum moisture content, except for material whose least
dimension is 4 inches thick or greater.
C. Species: Hem-Fir, Spruce-Pine-Fir(SPF), or Douglas Fir Larch, unless indicated or specified
otherwise.
D. Structural Lumber Grades: As indicated on the Structural Drawings.
E. Architectural Lumber Grades: Unexposed non-structural wood framing and blocking indicated on the
Architectural Drawings shall be graded as follows: 111
1. Blocking and Nailers: "Utility- Light Framing,"or better.
2.2 PANEL MATERIALS
A. Miscellaneous Sheathing: APA Rated Sheathing; Structural I; CD grade; Exterior; unless approved r
otherwise; thicknesses as indicated.
B. Terminal Backboards: APA AC grade exterior; fire retardant treated.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners:
1. Hot-dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity, and fire treated wood locations.
2. For Use With Preservative Treated Wood: 300 Series stainless steel.
3. Screws: Self tapping; countersunk or low profile head.
2.4 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment):
1. Preservative treat all exterior lumber, including roofing nailers, curbs and other wood in contact
with concrete, masonry, and moist conditions.
2. For above ground use, use AWPA certified Ammonium Copper Quaternium (ACQ)or Copper
Hydroxide Sodium Dimethyldithiocarbamate (CDDC)waterborne preservative with 0.25 pounds
per cubic foot of wood retention.
3. Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%; treated plywood shall
be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%.
4. Treated lumber shall bear the quality stamp of an inspection agency approved by the jurisdictional
code authorities.
B. Fire Retardant Treatment:
1. Fire retardant treat all interior concealed lumber and plywood, and other wood as indicated or
specified. Provide exterior fireproofing at rooftop blocking, nailers, curbs, sheathing, and other
locations subject to wetting during construction operations.
2. All fire retardant treated wood materials shall bear a UL"FR-S" label, or a label from an approved
inspection agency certifying that the material meets the requirements of AWPA C-20 Type A for
lumber and AWPA C-27 Type A for plywood.
3. Treated lumber shall be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 19%; treated plywood shall
be kiln dried to a maximum moisture content of 15%.
4. Exterior fire retardant treated wood shall be treated by means of a system which has been
demonstrated to exhibit no increase in fire hazard classification in accordance with ASTM E84
test after having been subjected to accelerated weather conditioning in accordance with ASTM
D2898.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
TEMPLATE 061000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 061000 -ROUGH CARPENTRY
3.2 SHEATHING
A. Install sheathing as indicated.
B. Secure sheathing with edges on firm bearing. Provide solid edge blocking between sheets.
3.3 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND CURBS
A. Provide blocking, nailers, and curbs for sheathing, roof construction, metal flashing, and other
construction as indicated, and as necessary for firm support. Unless otherwise indicated, solid wood
backing shall be minimum 2 inch nominal thickness; plywood shall be minimum 3/4 inch thick, except
that sloped parapet caps may be 1/2 inch thick.
t B. Blocking: Install wood blocking to receive mechanical fasteners for support of plumbing and electrical
fixtures and equipment, shelving, cabinets, door stop plates, millwork, wainscots, coat hooks, toilet
and bath accessories, kitchen equipment, and all other wall and ceiling mounted components.
C. Screw fasten wood components to metal framing and support elements.
D. For attachment of plywood backing, kerf plywood 1/4" (3/8", maximum if required for heavy gage
studs)to receive flange return (or crimp the return closed); provide supplementary sheet metal angle
attached to back of stud where necessary to support backing. Screws into edge of plywood are
unacceptable.
3.4 PLYWOOD TERMINAL BACKBOARDS
A. Provide a fire retardant treated plywood terminal backboard for telephone systems and data racks
where indicated on the drawings.
B. Mechanically apply directly over gypsum backing board.
END OF SECTION
r
I
I
I
r
I
TEMPLATE 061000-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 064000 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Installation of Owner furnished casework and millwork.
2. Statements of required quantities of Owner-furnished millwork.
3. Transportation of casework and millwork from warehouse to jobsite.
4. Substrate preparation.
5. Coordination and installation of carpeted base to display casework.
6. Accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. 061000- Rough Carpentry: Blocking for finish carpentry.
2. 081400-Wood Doors: Flush doors.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000. 111
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards (ANSI)
1. ANSI A208.1 - Standard for Particleboard
2. ANSI A208.2- Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF)
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. C1036 Standard Specification for Flat Glass
2. E84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. American Plywood Association (APA)
D. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide
Specifications and Quality Certification Program (Current Edition).
E. Business Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association (BIFMA) I
F. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLB): Standard Grading Rules No. 16.
G. U.S. Product Standard (PS) PS 1 Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.3 QUANTITY STATEMENTS
A. Casework and millwork, including pertinent installation information will be furnished by Owner.
B. Quantities of millwork purchased will be based on the approved Quantity Statement furnished by the I
Contractor for the exact amount required for the installation. Overage quantities will be added
separately by the Owner for each type of millwork.
C. Types and locations of each type of casework and millwork shall be as scheduled and indicated on the111
Owner's Purchase Order; base bid on special requirements for each woodwork type, including
requirements for special veneer and pattern matching.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for accuracy of quantity statements. In the event that insufficient
quantity is discovered after order has been placed, proceed as follows:
1. Immediately notify the Owner in writing of the additional quantities required, whereupon the
Owner will, at his cost, obtain the additional quantities.
2. Install additional quantities at no additional cost to the Owner.
3. Pay for unusual transportation costs incurred in obtaining additional materials.
I
TEMPLATE 064000-1 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 064000 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Portions of Casework: Those surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, including
edges of doors and drawers, edges of cabinet boxes visible between doors and drawers, backs of
hinged doors, interiors behind glass doors, and interiors in open cabinets.
B. Semi-Exposed Portions of Casework: Those areas not defined as exposed, but visible when solid (not
glazed)doors and drawers are opened.
C. Concealed Portions of Casework: All remaining areas not defined as exposed or semi-exposed.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submittals Prior to Sub-bid:
1. List of proposed bidders.
2. For each proposed bidder, include evidence of compliance with installer qualification
requirements.
C. Submittal With Sub-Bid:
1. Submit preliminary quantity statements for millwork from each prospective subcontractor. Base
quantity statements on Drawings. Do not include overages in Quantity Statement.
2. Architect will return acceptable quantity statements to the Contractor. Only sub-bidders with
acceptable quantity statements shall be considered for subcontract.
D. Submit following within 30 days after award of architectural woodwork subcontract:
1. Quantity statements indicating proposed adjustments.
E. Guarantee Drafts: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit draft of installers guarantee
for Architect's review.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator: A minimum of 5 years experience in the fabrication of custom architectural woodwork of
the type specified.
B. All Architectural Woodwork shall be under the responsibility of a single fabricator.
C. Qualifications of Installers: Use only journeyman finish carpenters who are thoroughly trained and
skilled in the work, and who are completely familiar with the materials and quality standards specified.
No allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen.
D. Conform to AW I Custom grade standards except use premium grade standards for clearances and
tolerances, unless specified or indicated otherwise.
E. Solid Surfacing Fabricator Qualifications: Certified by the solid surfacing materials manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with provisions of Section 016000.
B. Owner furnished materials will be delivered to the Owner's warehouse facility; refer to Section 015000.
Transport materials from the warehouse to the site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Finished Millwork Lumber: Furnished by Owner.
B. Panel Products:
1. Finished Millwork Paneling: Furnished by Owner.
2. Accessory Panel Products:
a. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1; 3/4 inch thick AC exterior grade unless indicated or specified
otherwise; touch sanded where plastic laminate veneers are to be applied
TEMPLATE 064000-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 064000 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
b. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood):
1) HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive containing no urea formaldehyde.
2) Wood Veneer Flitches: AWI Grade AA; American Black Walnut; plain sliced; hand
selected for limited sapwood.
C. Pre-finished Board: Low pressure melamine over particle board, MDF, or hardboard core;
formaldehyde free; colors as selected from manufacturer's standard.
D. Plastic Laminate:
1. Brands and colors as scheduled on Drawings.
2. Exposed: NEMA LD-3; general and vertical grade,
3. Backing Sheets: NEMA LD-3; backing grade; undecorated.
E. Solid Surfacing:
1. Product as listed in the Finish Legend.
2. Fabricate solid surface elements to the configurations indicated in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Cabinet Hardware: As scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Closet Hardware:
1. Closet Rod: Knape&Vogt#770 5; 1-5/16 inch diameter; chrome finish.
2. End Flanges: Knape &Vogt#764/766; chrome finish.
C. Wall Shelf Hardware:
1. Brackets: Knape &Vogt# 185 Anochrome finish; length as appropriate for shelving indicated.
2. Standards: Knape&Vogt#85 Anochrome finish.
D. Counter Support Brackets:
1. Manufacturer/Source
a. Oodles of Parts Plus (Patchogue, NY; 800-286-5471)
b. A&M Hardware Inc. (Manheim PA; 888-647-0200)
c. Steelcase
d. Herman Miller
2. Bracket: "Work Station Bracket"; 1/8" steel; 24"x 24" size unless otherwise indicated;prime paint
finish.
E. Hanging Hardware: Brooklyn Hardware LLC (Portland OR; 888-232-1151) "Panelclip," Doug Mockett
and Company(Manhattan Beach CA.; 800-523-1269)ZC3 "Z-Clips,"or approved; interlocking
aluminum clip.
F. Contact Bond Adhesive: Water based low VOC.
G. Plastic Laminate Faced Countertops:
1. Fabricate to AWI Custom grade.
2. Fabricate countertops from particle board and general purpose grade plastic laminate in the
shapes indicated.
3. Where countertops are indicated with sinks, use moisture resistant MDF in lieu of particle board.
H. Wall and Closet Shelf Fabrication:
1. Fabricate from prefinished board; edge banded with matching PVC edging unless indicated
otherwise.
2. Provide minimum 3/4 inch thick shelves, except provide thicker shelves as required to support the
loads and spans indicated without significant deflection.
I. Hardware:
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, all drawers shall be equipped with standard full extension
slides.
2. Install hardware straight and true and in perfect alignment horizontally and vertically with adjacent
casework and hardware.
TEMPLATE 064000-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 064000 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
3. Carefully fit and securely attach cabinet hardware in accordance with manufacturers' printed
instructions, and exercise caution not to mar or injure finish surfaces.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
111 A. Coordinate the installation of blocking and other supports required for the installation of architectural
woodwork elements.
3.3 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Jointing: Make all joints to conceal shrinkage; miter all exterior corners; cope all interior corners, miter
or scarf all end-to-end joints; install all trim pieces as long as possible,jointing only where solid support
is obtained. Make no joints closer than 4 feet to corners.
B. Lengths of Material: Use random lengths and show typical joint locations on shop drawings. The
minimum length shall be 8 feet, except where short lengths are required by installation conditions.
C. Fastening:
1. Install all items straight, true, level, plumb, and firmly anchored in place; where blocking or
backing is required, coordinate as necessary with other trades to ensure placement of all required
backing and blocking in a timely manner.
2. Fasten trim with finish nails or screws of proper dimension to hold the member firmly in place
without splitting the wood.
3. On exposed finish work, set all nails and screws.
4. Align exposed fasteners for uniform pattern; random or"shotgun" patterns will not be accepted.
D. Select and arrange standing and running trim so that abutting members have a similar grain and color
match to the greatest extent possible
3.4 VENEER PANELING
A. Install paneling as indicated in accordance with AWI Section 500C Premium grade standards.
B. Install wood paneling over wall surfaces by concealed clips, hangers, or blind fasteners, unless
approved otherwise.
C. Cut and fit each panel to it particular position including cutting around items which cannot be
remounted to panel face, and predrilling for holes for wire access for electrical devices to be mounted
on the panel face.
3.5 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate casework installation with work of other trades for final electrical and mechanical
connections.
B. Install all casework accurately, plumb, square, and level, and permanently secured in precise position
as indicated on the Drawings. Casework shall be scribed to adjacent surfaces as follows:
I1. Countertops and splashes to wall surfaces.
2. Cabinet endwalls and other exposed surfaces to walls.
3. Cabinet bases to floors.
1 C. The casework installation shall be made complete with all required fastenings, clip angles, braces,
anchors, and other fittings as required to render the work rigid and secure.
TEMPLATE 064000-4 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 064000 -ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
D. All fasteners securing casework shall be in concealed or semi-concealed locations, unless approved
otherwise.
E. Avoid damaging finished surfaces. Repair or replace all damaged materials and surfaces in a manner
approved by the Architect. 1�
F. Upon completion of work, demonstrate hardware to work freely as intended.
3.6 CLEANING UP
A. Keep the premises in a neat, safe, and orderly condition at all times during execution of this portion of
the work, free from accumulation of sawdust, cut-ends, and debris.
B. At the end of each working day, or more often if necessary, thoroughly sweep and/or vacuum
surfaces. Remove the refuse to the area of the job site set aside for its storage.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 064000-5 10/12/18 1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermal batt insulation with separate vapor barrier.
2. Rigid board wall insulation.
3. Rigid board perimeter insulation.
4. Continuous cavity insulation.
B. Related Sections:
1. 098100-Acoustic Insulation.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C518-Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission
Properties by means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
2. C578 - Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
3. C612 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
4. C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
I Housing.
5. D1621 -Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
6. E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals under provisions of Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each type of
insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Unfaced Batt and Blanket Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; preformed unfaced glass fiber roll; flame
spread of 25 or less and smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84;
formaldehyde free, Johns Manville Corp. "Unfaced Formaldehyde-free Thermal and Acoustical Fiber
Glass Insulation;" or approved; oversize widths for friction-fit between metal framing.
B. Rigid Extruded Polystyrene Board:
1. Standard: ASTM C578, Type IV; extruded cellular polystyrene.
2. Thermal Resistance: Minimum "R" per inch of 5 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518 at
75 degrees F. mean temperature.
3. Compressive Strength: Minimum 25 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D1621.
4. Water Absorption: 0.10 to 0.15 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C272.
5. Thickness/R-value: 1 inch, R-5.
6. Size: 24 inch width, 96 inch length, with square edges.
7. Approved Products:
a. Styrofoam by The Dow Chemical Company(Midland, MI; 800-441-4369)
b. Foamular 250 by Owens Corning, (Toledo, OH; 800-438-7465).
C. Continuous Cavity Insulation:
Ii. Standard: ASTM C612, Types I through IV as applicable; preformed mineral fiber batt; unfaced;
minimum 4 lbs/cf density.
TEMPLATE 072100-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION
2. Width and Thickness: As required for application indicated.
3. Installation Accessories: Installation "Z" Clips; size and spacing as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
4. Approved Products: One of the following:
a. Thermafiber"Rain Barrier HD" by Owens Corning (Wabash, IN; 888-834-2371).
b. "Cavity Rock" by Roxul (Milton, ON; 800-265-6878)
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Separate Vapor Barrier for Batt Insulation: Foil scrim kraft FSK 25; flame spread of 25 or less and a
smoke developed of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Tape: To match foil scrim kraft face of vapor barrier; 2 inch minimum width.
C. Impaling Pins: 12 gage pins; length as required with mounting plates for welding or adhesive
mounting; include retainer shields.
D. Screw and Washer Fasteners:
1. Polymer coated self-tapping screws; lengths as required to penetrate through metal support
framing members.
2. Plastic or Metal Washers: Minimum diameter 2 inches.
3. Ramset"Insulfast" or similar; type as approved by insulation manufacturer.
E. Adhesive:
1. Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application; compatible with insulation and
substrate.
2. For interior applications, adhesives shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South 111
Coast Air Quality Management District(SCAQMD) Rule 1168 using the method of dividing the
weight of the solvent in the adhesive by the volume of the material, less water).
F. Related Accessories: Provide other accessories, not specifically described, as required for a
complete installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within spaces to insulated have been installed and tested.
C. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
D. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION
A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.Install insulation without gaps or I
voids.
B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage.
C. At metal stud framing, insert the insulation edges tightly into the stud channels for a friction fit.
Provide additional supports as necessary to prevent sliding of batts in the stud cavity.
D. Mechanical Fastening:
1. At locations where no support framing is present, provide metal impaling pins and retainers.
2. Mechanically or adhesively bond the retaining pins to the substrate in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Space pins at maximum 24 inches on center along the edges and within the field of the batt.
Place edge pins within 6 inches from the edge of the batt.
TEMPLATE 072100-2 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION
E. Pack batt insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of window assembly to maintain continuity of thermal
barrier.
F. Separate Vapor Barrier Installation:
1. Install separate vapor barrier over unfaced insulation.
2. Install vapor barrier toward warm side of building spaces.
3. Vapor barrier shall be continuous.
4. At locations where insulation is mechanically fastened by impaling pins, place vapor retarder
over impaling pins and hold in position with additional retainers. The installation shall present a
tight, continuous, and wrinkle free appearance.
5. At lightgage support framing, secure to studs with double stick tape or spray adhesive.
6. Lap joints in vapor barrier 2 inches, except provide tape sealed joints at locations where vapor
barrier will remain exposed in the finished work.
7. Tape seal vapor barrier to adjacent construction at perimeter edges.
8. Tape and seal tears or cuts in vapor barrier.
G. R value Schedule:
1. Provide batt insulation in sufficient thickness to provide the following minimum R-values:
a. Walls and Floors: R-11.
b. Ceilings: R-19.
3.3 RIGID BOARD INSULATION AT WALLS, SOFFITS, AND UNDER SLABS
A. Install rigid extruded polystyrene insulation where rigid board insulation is indicated at walls.
B. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install all insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's
current installation instructions.
C. Trim insulation to tightly fit between the furring and framing and to fit around penetrations.
3.4 CONTINUOUS CAVITY INSULATION
A. Install insulation boards horizontally. Fasten evenly to support framing with approved fasteners at
fastener spacing recommended by insulation manufacturer but in no case less than 5 fasteners per
board.
B. Conform to requirements of UL System No. CW-S-2001 Firespan. Coordinate with fire rated
construction joint assembly components provided in Section 078500.
C. Coordinate with ork of Section 072700.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 072100-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 072700-WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 111
1. Sheet air, moisture and weather barrier systems at framed walls.
2. Filler and membrane systems required to seal joints and penetrations to form a continuous
weather-resistive barrier assembly.
3. Related weather-resistive barrier accessories and components.
B. Related Sections:
1. 061000— Rough Carpentry: Plywood sheathing.
2. 076200- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flexible flashing provided with separate sheet metal
flashing systems.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section
016000.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Weather-Resistive Barrier: A weather-resistive barrier is an assembly of interconnected components
within the exterior envelope of a building which prevents air flow across the assembly, and which is
intended to prevent excess moisture transfer across the assembly driven by air pressure differentials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. All voids within weather-resistive barrier systems shall be closed to prevent air flow across the
assembly.
B. The following elements provided under the work of other Sections shall be considered integral parts of
the weather-resistive barrier assembly:
1. Concrete foundation.
2. Roof membrane. Plumbing vents and roof drains shall not be considered penetrations.
3. Exterior windows and doors.
C. For the work of this Section, weather-resistive barrier systems shall consist of the following:
1. Weather-resistive sheet membrane over solid substrates on the exterior building enclosure.
2. Connective seal from foundation wall to the weather-resistive sheet membrane layer.
3. Connective seal of weather-resistive sheet membrane to roof membrane.
4. Sealing of penetrations in the building envelope, including windows, doors, plumbing elements,
electrical elements, and mechanical components, including duct penetrations at rooftop
mechanical unit.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for specified manufactured products. I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Work of this section shall be performed by a single applicator, unless specifically approved
otherwise by the Architect.
B. Pre-Installation Conference:
1. Administer pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 013119.
2. Schedule meeting prior to installation of weather-resistive barrier components.
3. Discuss weather-resistive barrier components and sequence of installation.
4. Discuss all joints and penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.
5. Identify and discuss all special conditions.
TEMPLATE 072700-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 072700 -WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
I 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 015000.
IPART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
I A. Air/Moisture Barrier System: Vaproshield, LLC (Gig Harbor, WA; 866-731-7663);
1. Weather Resistive Barrier: "Wrapshield SA".
2. Flashing:
a. Liquid Flashing: "VaproLiqui-Flash".
I b. Sheet Flashing: VaproFlashing
3. Alternative Self-Adhered Flexible Flashing (SAF):
a. DuPont Company"Tyvek FlexWrap"
b. W.R. Grace "Vycor Plus.".
c. Henry Company"Blueskin"40 mil thickness.
4. Tape: VaproShield "VaproTape," single or double sided, as applicable.
5. Adhesive: VaproShield "VaproAdhesive."
I 6. Manufacturer and product are specified for construction, quality, performance and/or
appearance. Provide specified product or approved equal. Alternate products shall meet or
exceed the following requirements:
Construction Triple layer spunbond polypropylene
IWater Vapor Transmission 308.9 grams/m2/24hrs (50 perms)
Air Permeability 0.0095 L/s/m2 or 0.0019 cmf/ft2
I B. Flexible Seal: Ethylene Propylene Diene Terpolymer( EPDM ) black membrane, reinforced or non-
reinforced, nominal 0.045 inch thick; complete with manufacturer's recommended splicing materials.
C. Weather-Resistive Barrier Sealant: Single component urethane gun grade sealant.
I D. SPF (Sprayed Polyurethane Foam) Sealant: Furnish one-or two-component, foamed-in-place,
polyurethane foam sealant with the following characteristics:
1. Density: 1.5 to 2.0 pcf.
I 2. Flame Spread (ASTM E162): 25 or less.
3. Acceptable Materials: Flexible Products.
E. Sheet Metal Closures:
1. Minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel.
2. Custom fabricated to fit the conditions.
F. Accessories: Provide surface conditioners, primers, mastic, tape, and other accessories as specified
by or acceptable to the manufacturer of each product.
IG. Fasteners: Copolymer coated galvanized steel, or stainless steel.
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
I complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
I acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
I
ITEMPLATE 072700-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 072700 -WEATHER RESISTIVE BARRIERS
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate work with other trades as necessary to form a continuous weather-resistive barrier
envelope for the building.
B. Weather-resistive Barrier Installation:
1. Apply single layer of weather-resistive barrier over solid exterior substrates in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Tape seal all joints and penetrations with manufacturer's recommended tape.
3. Coordinate installation of windows, metal head and subsilll flashings lapped into flexible flashings,
and other wall penetrations with the installation of flexible flashing and weather-resistive barrier.
4. Secure with staples as recommended by manufacturer.
5. Sequence with installation of flexible flashing and metal flashing elements as shown and as
necessary to form a continuous air and moisture barrier. 111
C. Flexible Flashing:
1. Install flexible flashing as indicated and as specified below.
2. Trim flexible flashing so that it will not be exposed in the finished work.
3. Coordinate installation of flexible flashing with installation of building weather-resistive barrier and
sheet metal flashing elements.
4. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations for each condition.
5. Provide flexible flashing as indicated and in the following locations to seal joints and penetrations
between building weather-resistive barrier base layer and the following:
a. Concrete foundation walls.
b. Roof membrane.
c. Pipe, conduit, and electrical box penetrations.
d. Window and door frames.
6. Provide flexible flashing at parapet tops as necessary to link to the weather-resistive sheet
membrane layers on both sides of the parapet walls.
7. Provide flexible flashing to seal the joint between sheet metal closure angles and building
weather-resistive barrier base layer.
8. Provide materials separation where required and do not lap or place flexible flashing in direct
contact with roofing membrane. 111
D. Foam Sealant:
1. Seal holes in electrical boxes, including around wire openings.
2. Seal penetrations which cannot be sealed with flexible flashing.
3. Provide lightgage sheet metal angle edge trim at gypsum board edges to receive sealant.
E. Special Construction:
1. Provide custom fabricated sheet metal enclosures around recessed light fixtures and similar
elements which penetrate building weather-resistive barrier weather-resistive barrier assemblies.
2. Mechanical Curbs:
a. Rigid insulation boards at equipment curbs are installed as a part of the roofing subcontract.
b. Foam seal joints between rigid insulation boards. Cut boards as necessary to allow foam
penetration between the boards.
c. Foam seal joints between rigid insulation board and adjacent curb construction.
d. After installation of rooftop mechanical unit and ducts, foam seal the joint between the rigid
insulation boards and the ducts.
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 072700-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Mechanically fastened thermoplastic membrane roofing system.
I 2. Roof insulation and cover board.
B. Related Sections:
1. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Non-coated flashings.
I C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual"for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the
IA.
passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to
weather without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under
I conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer
based on testing and field experience.
C. Performance: Roofing system shall conform to the following:
I 1. Wind Uplift For Mechanically Anchored Roof System: Equivalent to Factory Mutual 1-90.
2. Fire: Minimum Underwriter's Laboratory Class B.
3. Thermal: System shall have a maximum thermal conductance of C = .026 Btuh, averaged over
all surfaces to which it is applied. Use averaged C value, not averaged R value.
ID. Roofing membrane system shall be an "Energy Star" roofing system as listed by the Environmental
Protection Agency.
I 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: For each type of product and component proposed, including membrane, insulation,
I fasteners, and accessories.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Details for base flashings, membrane terminations, and penetration details.
I 2. Tapered insulation patterns, including slopes, insulation thickness, cricket layouts.
3. Insulation fastening patterns for mechanically anchored roof assembly.
4. Layouts for flexible traffic walkways and traffic pavers.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved,
authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system.
2. Guarantee Draft: Concurrent with initial product data submittal, submit a draft of roof warranties.
I 3. Manufacturer's installation specifications.
E. Contract Closeout Submittals:
1. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
2. Warranties: Submit specified warranties.
ITEMPLATE 075423-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFINGI
3. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing 1
installation.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system I
manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system from or approved by roofing
membrane manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with
manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing
and mixing with other components.
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and
within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material
from direct sunlight. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its
stated shelf life.
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of
deck.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions
permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty
requirements.
1.8 WARRANTY 1
A. Manufacturer's Guarantee: Prior to acceptance of work, furnish manufacturer's written 10 year no
dollar limit guarantee executed to the Owner. Guarantee shall include workmanship and materials,
and shall cover roofing, flashing, and insulation. I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOPLASTIC ROOFING MEMBRANE I
A. Approved Membrane Manufacturers:
1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
2. Firestone Building Products Company.
3. Johns Manville (800) 654-3103.
4. GAF Materials Corporation (973)628-3000.
5. Stevens Roofing Systems; Div. of JPS Elastomerics.
B. Membrane Description: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO)or ethylene propylene (EP) sheet; uniform
thickness; flexible; fabric or scrim reinforced.
C. Thickness: 60 mils nominal thickness.
D. Exposed Face Color: White.
E. Physical Properties:
1. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf(1 kN); ASTM D 751, grab method.
2. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751.
3. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf(245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B.
4. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F (30 deg C).
I
TEMPLATE 075423-2 10/12/18
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING
5. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- (75-mm-) diameter
mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone level
of 100 pphm (100 mPa); ASTM D 1149.
6. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at
break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573.
7. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F
(70 deg C); ASTM D 471.
8. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General:
Ii. Accessory materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and
compatible with membrane roofing.
2. Liquid-type accessory materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin or ethylene propylene
sheet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent based bonding adhesive for membrane, and
solvent-based bonding adhesive for base flashings.
D. Cut Edge Sealant: Manufacturer's standard solvent based caulk to seal cut edges.
E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.
G. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,
approximately 1 inch (25 mm)wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.
H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane
roofing system manufacturer.
I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips,
1 seam cleaners, and other accessories.
2.3 ROOF INSULATION
A. Underlayment Board: ASTM C79; 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch type X; maximum permissible lengths; ends
square cut; square edges; water resistant core; water repellent paper faces.
B. Foam Board Insulation: One of the following.
1. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core with a hydrocarbon
blowing agent; integrally laminated to heavy coated glass fiber facers; conform to ASTM C 1289,
Type II; FS HH-I- 1972/2, Class 1; UL 790 (ASTM E 108) Class A; FM 4450/4470 Class 1 fire
rating.
' C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12
inches, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated
for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. Provide roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and
' compatible with membrane roofing.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance
provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing
system manufacturer.
TEMPLATE 075423-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING
C. Cover Board: One of the following:
1. Gypsum Cover Board: ASTM C1177; glass-mat; water-resistant gypsum substrate; 1/4 inch
thick; "Dens-Deck" by Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
2. HP Recovery Board: 1/2 inch thick; type as approved by the roofing manufacturer.
2.5 FLEXIBLE WALKWAYS
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting, surface-
textured walkway rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system
manufacturer.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Carefully examine substrate and adjacent construction, and verify that conditions are suitable for
installation of the work as indicated and specified. Inspection shall ascertain that:
1. All surfaces to be covered by roofing are properly pitched to drain, suitable for installation of
roofing system free from susceptibility to puddling.
2. Work of other trades is complete, including installation of blocking and grounds, vents, drains,
curbs, and other projections.
3. Substrate surface is clean and free from lumps, foreign matter, surface spalling or flaking, and
excessive amounts of dust.
4. Penetrations through the roof deck are properly configured and are a minimum of 16 inches
between their closest edges.
5. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains
are securely clamped in place.
6. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations
and terminations.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating
onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when
rain is forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering
completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and '
discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install underlayment board with edges tightly butted. Arrange the boards perpendicular to the direction
of the roof deck.
B. Install with facing paper towards the exterior.
C. Use sufficient fasteners to hold each layer of underlayment firmly in position. Fasten sheathing as
required to meet the fire rating and wind uplift requirements for the roof assembly.
3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where
overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.
TEMPLATE 075423-4 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING
I E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not
restrict flow of water.
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered
I between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.
G. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.
I H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation
to deck type. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
I. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints
I staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each
direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. Fasten to resist uplift pressure
at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
I 3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's
written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow to relax before installing.
I B. Accurately align roofing membranes and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and
I perimeter of roofing.
D. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
E. Seams:
I
1. Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing
membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
I 2. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of
roofing membrane.
3. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.
4. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements.
I F. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing
membrane in place with clamping ring.
G. In-Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates or metal battens
I centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field-
splice seam.
H. Install roofing membrane and accessory materials to tie in to existing roofing.
I3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
IB. Apply solvent-based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate
and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing.
I C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing.
D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end
laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
IE. Run membrane up and over parapets to form a watertight barrier under copings.
U
ITEMPLATE 075423-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 075423—THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING ,
3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION 1
A. Flexible Walkways at Mechanically Anchored Roof: Install walkway products in locations indicated.
Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform
roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
B. Final Roof Inspection:
1. Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on
completion and submit report to Architect.
2. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection.
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or
inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.
D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance
of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING I
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.
When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements,
repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 075423-6 10/12/18 1
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 076200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Sheet metal flashing and trim.
1 2. Requirements for flashing and sheet metal provided in other Sections.
B. Related Sections:
1. 042113- Brick Masonry: Flashing provided as part of the masonry system; installation of
receivers furnished in this Section.
2. 061000- Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking, nailers, and grounds.
3. 075423—Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing: Coordination.
4. 084313 -Aluminum-Framed Storefronts and Windows: Flashing provided as part of the window
and storefront system.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
' D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section
016000.
t2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A167- Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2. A653- Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process.
3. B32 - Solder Metal
4. B209 -Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
B. Federal Specifications (FS): FS SS-C-153- Cement, Bituminous, Plastic.
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet
Metal Manual, Sixth Edition 2003.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
1 A. Provide flashing and trim systems to prevent water leakage to the building interior.
B. Fastening systems shall allow for the thermal movement of the materials without buckling, loosening,
and leakage.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
' B. Product Data: Catalog cuts and installation instructions for manufactured products.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, gages, profiles,jointing patterns,jointing details, fastening
methods, and installation details. Include schedule of each type and profile of flashing to be furnished
' for instillation under Section 042113.
D. Samples: Submit three samples representative of finish and color of prefinished flashing materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in sheet metal flashing work with 5 years minimum experience.
B. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with the recommendations of
SMACNA.
C. Pre-Installation Conference: Attend pre-installation conference as specified in Division 07 Roofing
section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
TEMPLATE 076200-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 076200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
B. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation.
C. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration, staining, or damage.
1.7 GUARANTEE
A. Submit in accordance with Section 017700.
B. Furnish guarantee from the installer of each system that metal flashings will properly shed water to the
roof or to the building exterior, under all weather conditions, for a minimum period of two years from
the date of Substantial Completion. Leaks due to failure of flashing materials, and due to improper
installation shall be promptly repaired at no expense to the Owner, and that watertightness of the
repair will be demonstrated to the Owner.
C. For coil-coated sheet metal materials, furnish from the coatings installer non-prorated 20-year
warranty against failure of film integrity, and against fade and chalking.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Prefinished Galvanized Steel Sheet:
1. ASTM A653 steel sheet with G90 galvanized coating or ASTM A792 steel sheet with AZ60
aluminum/zinc coating; 24 gage unless noted otherwise; factory prefinished with 70 percent resin
Following manufacturers have coil coated steel (PVDF) steel in 20 gage as well as 24 gage:
2. Manufacturers:
a. AEP-Span, Dallas TX; (214-827-1740; 800-527-2503).
b. Centria, Moon Township PA(800-759-7474).
c. Copper Sales, Inc., Minneapolis, MN (612-545-1604; 800-426-7737).
B. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167; Type 302 or 304.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Curbs:
1. One of the following:
a. Roof Products and Systems Corporation (RPS) (Bensenville, IL; 800-624-8642)."EC-2A."
b. ThyCurb (Farmers Branch, TX; 800-777-2872) "TC-3."
2. Description:
a. Box section design, constructed using minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel, with fully mitered
and welded corners.
b. Internally reinforced on any side longer than 3'-0"with factory internal base plate.
c. Curbs shall be insulated with 1 1/2"thick 31b. density fiberglass insulation, and shall have
factory installed wood nailers fastened from underside. Height to be 8" above the finished
roof or as detailed.
3. Flashing, Packing And Sealant: Provided under Division 23.
B. Fasteners:
1. Furnish bonded stainless steel/neoprene sealing washers for exposed applications.
2. Finish exposed fasteners to match material being fastened.
3. Material:
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Use galvanized steel or stainless steel.
b. Aluminum Sheet and Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel.
4. Use screws when fastening into wood or sheet metal.
5. Use expansion anchors or drive pins when fastening into concrete or masonry.
C. Sealants:
1. Bedding Sealant: Butyl Rubber Type- One of the Following:
a. "Butyl Sealant" by Tremco, Inc. Sealant/Weatherproofing Division; Beachwood, OH;
800-321-7906; 216-292-5000)
b. "BP-400" by Adco Global, Inc. (800-248-4010).
I
TEMPLATE 076200-2 10/12/18 1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 076200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
2. Lap and Joint Sealant: Polyurethane Sealant- One of the Following:
a. "Chem-Calk 900" by Bostik Construction Products (Huntington Valley, PA; 800-221-8726;
215-674-5600).
b. "Dynatrol I" by Pecora Corp. (Harleysville, PA; 800-664-7903; 215-799-7528).
c. "Sonolastic NP I" by Sonneborn/ChemRex (Shakopee, MN; 800-433-9517; 952-496-6000).
D. Reglets:
' 1. Fry Reglet Co or approved; configurations as indicated.
2. Galvanized steel with factory applied Kynar coating.
3. For reglets to be embedded in concrete provide covered ends to prevent infiltration.
E. Solder: ASTM B32.
F. Cold Galvanizing Compound: ZRC Worldwide, "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound," or approved
product meeting the requirements of FS DOD-P-21035.
1 G. Flexible Boot Pipe Flashing: Portals Plus (708/766-5240; 800/774-5240) "Alumi-Flash"with EPDM
boots, or approved; sized to match pipe diameter; split type with sealing hardware where necessary for
installation at penetrating items which cannot be disconnected for top access. Furnish stainless steel
draw bands, adapters, connection hardware, and sealants as necessary for a complete and weather
tight installation.
H. Flexible Flashing: "Grace Ultra," by W.R. Grace (800-354-5414), or approved.
I. Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
J. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Type I-asphaltic base cement.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. General Requirements:
1. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.
2. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
3. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet; interlockable with sheet.
' 4. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except as limited by expansion joint requirements.
5. Non-Moving Joints: Shop fabricate to the greatest practical extent.
a. Solder all non-moving shop fabricated joints in steel and stainless steel flashing;
' b. Prefinished Galvanized Steel: Lap joints 1 inch, minimum; accurately cut and fit as
necessary to maintain profile; embed contact surfaces in sealant; rivet with stainless steel or
color matched coated steel pop rivets at 3 to 4 inches o.c.
6. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
' 7. Shop fabricate corner sections with non-moving corner joints and 18 inch long legs.
8. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip.
9. Form seams lapped in the direction of water flow.
B. Fabricate all flashing to detail, in accordance with referenced SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal
Manual details, and as specified below. Use minimum 24 gage prefinished galvanized steel sheet
unless indicated or specified otherwise.
1. Parapet Caps (Copings): Fabricate with slotted holes at 24 inches on center for fastening at the
' back; standing seam (design J8);joints per Table 3-1; 22 gage for copings wider than 18 inches.
2. Counterflashing and Receivers: Removable type; SMACNA Fig 4-4 snaplock or screw-retained
configuration; shop fabricated corners; crimped ends to permit lapping at end-to-end joints; 1 Inch
at receivers; 3 inches at counterflashing.
' 3. Gutters: Prefinished galvanized steel; SMACNA Figure 1-2, Style A or F; 4 inch width unless
indicated otherwise; provide straps or ferrules at 36 inches on center per Fig 1-14; expansion
joints at maximum 50 feet in accordance with Figure 1-5.
4. Downspouts: Prefinished galvanized steel; SMACNA Figure 1-32; 3"x 4" rectangular(Figure 1-
132B).
5. Lead Drain Flashing: Dimension for minimum 12 inches between edge of drain and edge of
flashing, all around; furnish in one continuous piece, including at drain/overflow locations. Furnish
to roofer for installation in the roofing system at the drains.
TEMPLATE 076200-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 076200 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1
6. Pipe Penetrations: SMACNA plate Fig 4-15, B or C as applicable; provide two piece flashing at 4-
15B. Provide flexible boot pipe flashing at the locations indicated. Furnish to roofer for
installation in the roofing system.
7. Embedded Flashing: Fabricate embedded flashing with provisions for removable counter
flashing (SMACNA Figure 4-4 snaplock or screw-retained configuration; shop fabricated corners).
Fabricate all receivers and flashings which are built into brick veneer, precast concrete, cement
plaster, and other similar construction, of 24 gage stainless steel. Fully exposed and removable
counter flashing which is connected to embedded flashing may be 24 gage prefinished
galvanized sheet. Supply embedded flashing to the appropriate installers for installation as a part
of their Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION '
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate and sequence flashing installation with the work of other Sections. Furnish flashing to
other trades as necessary for installation as a part of the work of other Sections.
B. Use flexible flashing in locations indicated, and under all copings and curb flashings.
C. Install starter and edge strips, and continuous cleats before starting installation.
D. Fastening:
1. Secure flashings using continuous cleats whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners only at the
backside of copings, and at other locations not exposed to public view, unless otherwise
approved by the Architect.
2. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
3. Insert counterflashings into receivers to form tight fit; where snap fit is not provided, secure in
place with stainless steel sheet metal screws, 16" o.c., maximum. Stagger counterflashing joints
with receiver joints
4. Insert flashings into reglets to form tight fit; secure in place.
E. Make watertight connections between scuppers and adjacent roofs, walls, and flashings. Seal all laps.
F. Joints:
1. Install metal flashings (including embedded flashings and reglets)with provision for plus or minus
1/16 inch thermal movement at each end; provide expansion joints at 12'-0"o.c., maximum.
2. Seal concealed lap joints in with two parallel beads of butyl sealant; use butyl sealant where
bedding sealant is indicated or required. ,
3.3 FIELD TESTING
A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate that installation is completely watertight by hosing with
water as directed.
END OF SECTION '
TEMPLATE 076200-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Roof access hatches.
' 2. Retractable safety post.
3. Safety railing system.
B. Related Section:
' 1. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Access ladders.
2. 075423SB THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE (TPO) ROOFING: Coordination.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
' 1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product data.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
' A. Verify that deck openings, supports, and other items affecting the work of this Section are complete
and positioned correctly.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
' A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated. Coordinate with
installation of metal deck and concrete fill, roofing, flashing, and other trades as necessary to ensure
secure and watertight installation.
B. Mount safety post to access ladder beneath roof hatch in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
C. Mount safety railing system to roof hatch in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
' END OF SECTION
1
TEMPLATE 077200-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Cleaning and preparation of joint surfaces.
2. Sealant and backing materials.
3. Sustainable design requirements.
B. Related Sections:
1. 013546 - Sustainable Design Requirements.
2. 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sealants, furnished and installed as part of flashing
and sheet metal work.
3. 078400 - Firestopping: Fire penetration sealants.
4. 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants.
5. 093000-Tiling: Grout color samples; mock-up.
6. 098100 -Acoustic Insulation: Acoustical sealant.
7. 321313 - Concrete Paving: Expansion joint fillers.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C1193 - Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit for each sealant material used. Include manufacturer's surface preparation,
priming, and installation instructions for each proposed sealant.
C. Samples:
1. Submit cured samples of each sealant type and color proposed for the work.
2. For each sealant type indicated for"color as selected," or for which no color is indicated, submit
color card indicating available stock colors from manufacturer's complete line of pre-formulated
colors for each type of sealant.
3. For custom colors, request color selection from the Architect prior to sample submittal. Custom
colors to match grout joints in tile shall match the sample submitted from the tile installer as
specified in Section 093000.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Schedule of sealant types, colors and respective locations.
E. Sustainable Design Submittal:
1. MSDS Sheets: Submit MSDS sheets for interior sealant systems to meet submittal sustainable
design requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers:
1. Use only skilled workmen specially trained in the techniques of sealing, and familiar with the
published recommendations of the manufacturers of the sealants being used.
B. Verify that sealants are compatible with the substrates and accessory materials provided under other
Sections.
TEMPLATE 079200-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS
' 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Unless recommended otherwise by the manufacturer, install sealant systems as follows:
1. Do not apply sealant when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, or expected to fall
' below 40 degrees F before sealant cure is complete.
2. Do not apply sealant to substrates or accessories that are moist.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Furnish guarantees in accordance with Section 017700.
B. Furnish a 2 year installer's guarantee covering defects in installation.
C. Furnish Type S sealant manufacturer's 20 year material guarantee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Type S - Neutral Cure Silicone Sealants:
1. Dow Corning, 790 Silicone Building Sealant, or"795 Silicone Structural Glazing and
' Weatherproofing Sealant."
2. Pecora "890 Architectural Silicone Sealant."
3. Spectrem 3 by Tremco Incorporated.
' B. Type P: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25; Tremco "Dymeric," Chem-Calk 500, Pecora
"Dynatrol II," Sonneborn "Sonalastic NP-II", PRC "Permapol RC-2," or approved.
C. Type PT: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, class 25; Tremco "THC 900", Sonneborn/ChemRex
"Sonolastic SL 2", Pecora "Urexpan NR-200", or approved; standard colors as selected.
D. Type PTNS: ASTM C920, Type M, grade NS, Class 25, Use T; Pecora "Dynatred,"Tremco
"THC901,"Sika "Sikaflex-2c NS TG," or approved; custom colors to match the Architect's samples.
' E. Type A:
1. Sealants shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South Coast Air Quality
Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250 grams/liter)
' 2. "AC2O+Silicone" by Pecora (800-523-6688). Select standard color to match adjacent finishes as
close as possible.
F. Type SM: Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant:
1. Sealants shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South Coast Air Quality
' Management District(SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250 grams/liter)
2. "898 Silicone" by Pecora (800-523-6688), or approved. Select standard color to match adjacent
finishes as close as possible; clear color, except use white at white fixtures.
' 2.2 COMPRESSIBLE FOAM TAPE
A. Precompressed self-adhesive open cell polyurethane foam tape; grey or black color; "Greyflex" by
Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd., "Will-Seal" by Illbruck., or approved.
' B. Furnish tape in thickness recommended by the manufacturer for widths of joints to be filled.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Primer:
1. Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
2. Primers for interior sealants shall meet the requirements of the Southern California South Coast
Air Quality Management District(SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of 250
' grams/liter for non-porous surfaces; 750 grams/liter for other surfaces)
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
' C. Backer Rod: Closed or open cell foam as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the
application; round profile; thickness approximately 130 percent of joint width.
TEMPLATE 079200-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. Verify joint dimensions and conditions are acceptable to receive the work of this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean and prepare joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove any loose materials
and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Apply masking tightly around joints to protect adjacent surfaces from excess sealant.
C. Prime as required for proper bond to substrate materials.
D. Backing Materials:
1. Place backer rod to achieve proper sealant width/depth ratios and to prevent sealant sag.
2. Use bond breaker where there is insufficient depth to use joint filler.
3. Do not use backer rod and bond breaker at joints to receive Type PTNS sealant.
3.3 COMPRESSIBLE FOAM TAPE INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install sufficiently deep to accommodate the installation of the Type S sealant.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C1193, unless specified otherwise or recommended
otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.
B. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges.
C. Joint Profile:
1. Sealant beads shall have a sectional width to depth ratio of 2 to 1, unless specified otherwise or
recommended otherwise by the sealant manufacturer.
2. Install Type PTNS sealant full depth in tile expansion joints with no backer rod.
D. Tooling:
1. Tool joints concave, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Finish to uniform profile and depth,
free of air pockets, embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
2. Tool type PTNS sealant to match grout joint profile.
3.5 CLEANUP
A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of excess sealant as the work progresses. Use cleaning agents
recommended by the sealant manufacturer.
B. Upon completion, remove and dispose of masking.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect sealant in joints subject to dirt, moisture, and traffic during the sealant curing process.
Protection shall be able to resist traffic while remaining securely in position.
t
TEMPLATE 079200-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 079200 -JOINT SEALANTS
3.7 SCHEDULE
A. Type S: Provide at all exterior joints, unless specified otherwise; colors as selected from
manufacturer's complete line for each type of sealant.
IB. Type P: Provide at all exterior joints in concrete or masonry, unless specified otherwise; standard
colors as selected from manufacturer's complete line of pre-formulated colors.
I C. Type PT: Provide at all exterior and interior horizontal joints subject to traffic and abrasion, unless
specified otherwise; standard colors as selected from manufacturer's complete line of pre-formulated
colors.
D. Type PTNS: Provide at all expansion joints in tile; custom colors to match grout samples submitted by
Ithe tile installer.
E. Type A: Provide at all interior joints, unless specified otherwise.
F. Type SM: Provide at joints around countertops in kitchen or coffee areas.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMPLATE 079200-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES '
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rolled steel doors and frames.
2. Accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. 081400-Wood Doors: Doors for metal frames.
2. 087100 - Door Hardware.
3. 087300- Door and Hardware Installation: Installation of doors and related hardware.
4. 088000- Glazing: Glazing in doors and frames.
5. 092200 - Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Bracing for frame installation.
6. 099013— Exterior Painting and Coating: Field painting of doors and frames.
7. 099023— Interior Painting and Coating: Field painting of doors and frames.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1. A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
2. A366 - Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality.
3. A569- Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot Rolled Sheet and Strip,
Commercial Quality.
4. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.
C. International Building Code (IBC)
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
E. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-105- Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Literature: Submit manufacturer's published literature for doors and frames. '
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Frames: Indicate configuration, anchor types and spacings, location of cutouts for hardware,
reinforcement, and finish.
2. Doors: Indicate elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cutouts for hardware,
glazing and louvers.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to requirements of ANSI A250.8.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated.
2. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies
labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code
authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. Assemblies shall meet IBC requirements for
positive pressure.
TEMPLATE 081113-1 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 081113 -HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
I 3. Where a hollow metal frame is used as a glazed opening in an interior fire rated wall assembly,
the frame shall be labeled to match the fire rating required for a door assembly in the fire rated
wall, except in a 1 hour rated exit corridor wall assembly, the glazed frame shall be labeled to a
45 minute rating. In a 1 hour fire rated corridor wall assembly, where the door frame is integral
with the glazed frame, the frame shall have a 45 minute rating.
4. Include "S" label on fire rated door assemblies which are located at 1 hour rated exit corridors.
5. Fire rated assemblies shall comply with local jurisdictional requirements.
I
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
I B. Protect doors and frames with factory installed protective packaging. Maintain protective packaging
until installation commences.
I PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Members of the Steel Door Institute and of the National Association of Architectural Metal
I Manufacturers, subject to compliance with the specified requirements.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Cold rolled ASTM A366, or hot rolled pickled and oiled sheet conforming to ASTM A569,
Iexcept ASTM A167, Type 304 stainless steel at locations scheduled.
2.3 DOORS
I A. ANSI A250.8; Seamless.
B. Minimum 18 gage face sheets for interior doors; minimum 16 gage face sheets for exterior doors.
C. Core:
I 1. Interior Doors: Vertical steel stiffeners with sound deadening fill between stiffeners, or resin
impregnated kraft paper honey comb core.
2. Exterior Doors: Polystyrene or polyurethane foam core.
D. Provide continuously welded seamless edges.
E. Close top edges of exterior doors flush with steel filler cap; seal joints watertight.
F. Cut mortises for butts using appropriate templates; universal non-handed preparation of doors is not
I acceptable.
2.4 FRAMES
I A. Design: Double rabbet, unless indicated otherwise; fully welded. Fabricate frames with throat
dimensions as indicated. Provide 1 inch returns at exterior frames as detailed.
B. Gages:
1. Exterior Frames: Minimum 14 gage.
2. Interior Frames: Minimum 16 gage for frames of door openings up to and including 4 feet in
width; 14 gage for frames greater than 4 feet in width.
C. Provide mortar guard boxes at masonry construction.
I2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style
I tamperproof screws.
2.6 FINISH
A. Exterior Units:
I 1. A60 hot dip galvannealed coating conforming to ASTM A653; factory un-primed.
2. Include reinforcing and other internal components.
TEMPLATE 081113-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES '
3. Use zinc rich primer to touch-up galvanized coatings damaged during fabrication or handling.
4. Shop prime galvanized surfaces with Sherwin Williams "DTM Wash Primer B71Y00001 "; self-
crosslinking acrylic primer; color similar but not identical to finish coat. One coat in compliance with
manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation and application.
5. Shop finish primed surfaces with Sherwin Williams "Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane"; 2
coats in compliance with manufacturer's instructions
B. Interior Units: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer.
C. Stainless Steel Frames: No. 4 satin finish. 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF FRAMES
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and in accordance with labeling requirements.
B. Coordinate with wall construction for anchor placement.
C. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing.
D. Install accessories.
E. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and
floor.
F. Installation Tolerances; Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner
to corner.
G. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 087300.
1
END OF SECTION
1
I
TEMPLATE 081113-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
e GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 081400 -WOOD DOORS
PART 1 -GENERAL
' 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wood doors.
2. Door accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Steel frames.
2. 087100 - Door Hardware.
3. 088000 -Glazing: Vision lites.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI): Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Guide
Specifications, and Quality Certification Program; current edition.
B. International Building Code (IBC)
C. NFPA 80- Fire Doors and windows.
D. Window and Door Manufacturing Association (WDMA): Industry Standard I.S.1-A current edition.
I1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. In accordance with Section 013300.
' B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type of door.
C. Shop Drawings: Indicate door sizes and thickness, materials, stile and rail reinforcement, internal
blocking for hardware attachment, cutouts for glazing and louvers, louver details and glazing stops.
D. Samples: Submit two 8 x 10 inch samples of each transparent finish species and finish combination
proposed.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Installed frame and door assembly shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated.
2. Where doors are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide door and frame assemblies
' labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or any other testing laboratory approved by the local code
authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted. Assemblies shall meet IBC requirements for
positive pressure.
3. Include "S" label on fire rated door assemblies which are located at 1 hour rated exit corridors.
B. Urea-Formaldehyde Free: All materials used to manufacture the door shall be urea-formaldehyde
free.
' 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
B. Package, deliver, and store doors in accordance with AWI requirements.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty under provisions of Section 017700.
I
TEMPLATE 081400-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 081400 -WOOD DOORS 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS
A. Solid Core Flush Doors:
1. Approved Manufacturers: One of the following.
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. (Algoma, WI; 920-487-5221; 800-678-8910).
b. Marshfield Door Systems (Marshfield,WI 800-869-3667).
c. Eggers Industries (Two Rivers, WI; 920-793-1351).
2. AWI Section 1300, PC-5 or PC-7 (5 or 7 ply construction; bonded core); Premium grade.
3. Core: Solid particleboard, unless required otherwise for fire labeling requirements; formaldehyde
free.
4. Furnish labeled doors as required to meet the hourly fire rating indicated.
5. Face Veneer:
a. For Transparent Finish: AWI Grade AA; Yellow Birch, Select White; rotary cut; minimum
1/50"thickness for panels; minimum 1/8 inch thick at stiles and rails; slip matched at panels.
b. Paint Grade Veneer: Medium density overlay or paint grade birch. .
6. 1-3/4 inch thick, unless scheduled otherwise.
7. Where intumescent seals are required to meet positive pressure labeling requirements, provide
concealed edge sealing system built into the door edge.
8. At transparent finish doors, edges shall be wood to match face veneer; no finger joints will be
permitted except at paint grade doors.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Glass Stops: Wood type, except as required to conform to labeling requirements; finished to match I
door finish.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors to the configurations indicated, in accordance with the AWI standards specified, and
to fire rated labeling requirements. Attach fire and smoke rating labels.
B. Bevel lock and hinge edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches on single acting doors. '
C. Bond edge banding to solid core with hot melt or RF cured adhesive.
D. Prefit and premachine doors in accordance with AWI 1300-S-6. Premachine for hardware specified in
Section 087100.
E. Doors shall be factory prefinished as scheduled to match Architect's sample; AWI Premium Grade U-
V Cured Polyurethane.
F. Factory pre-glaze doors.
G. Flush Door Blocking: For flush doors, provide solid lock blocks and special blocking as required for
the hardware components specified elsewhere. Blocking for fire rated doors shall meet the door
manufacturer's labeling requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Door and hardware installation is specified in Section 087300.
B. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and the fire rated labeling requirements. '
3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
TEMPLATE 081400-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 081400 -WOOD DOORS
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
' END OF SECTION
I
I
I
r
1
I
0
I
I
' TEMPLATE 081400-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS 1
PART 1 -GENERAL I
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stick framed exterior aluminum storefront system.
2. Aluminum and glass entrances.
3. Aluminum and glass windows.
4. Stick-framed interior storefront system
B. Related Sections:
1. 079200-Joint Sealants: Perimeter sealants.
2. 088000- Glazing: Glass and glazing.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES I
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A123-Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
2. B209 -Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate.
3. B221 -Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes.
4. E283 - Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
5. E330 -Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static
Air Pressure Difference.
6. E331 -Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtainwalls, and Doors by
Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
1. 2605-02 -Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior
Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance:
1. System shall provide for expansion and contraction caused by a cycling temperature range of-
20°F to +160°F without causing detrimental effects to components, sealing systems, and
surrounding construction.
2. Design system with provisions to drain moisture to the exterior of the system.
3. Air Infiltration:
a. Fixed Glazing: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cfm/sf of assembly surface
area, measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as
b. Swing Door: Limit to 1 cfm/ft of perimeter crack around pair of doors, measured at a
reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf, as measured in accordance
with ANSI/ASTM E283.
4. Water Infiltration; Storefront System: No water penetration at a test pressure of 6.24 lb/sf when
measured in accordance with ASTM E331.
B. Thermal Transmittance (Exterior Storefront): Maximum U=0.38 when tested in accordance with
NFRC requirements. Provide curtain wall systems with certification stating that they have been tested
in accordance with NFRC to meet the specified requirements using glass which matches the glass to
be used in the Project.
C. System Structural Design:
1. Design and size members and anchorages to withstand positive and negative wind loads as
required by the jurisdictional code authorities, and to resist pivot and closer reaction forces.
TEMPLATE 084000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
2. Limit mullion deflection to 1/175, or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials,
whichever is less.
D. Dynamic Movement: System shall accommodate the following without damage to system
' components or performance.
1. Movement within the system.
2. Application and release of design live loads.
' 3. ±5/8" maximum deflection of structural support framing between head and sill.
E. Profiles: Framing member profiles, as indicated in the Drawings, indicate proportions and intent.
Minor variations in profiles, assemblies, and connections which are indicated on the shop drawings
will be accepted, provided that, in the opinion of the Architect, they do not substantially alter the
' intended appearance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
' A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include wall opening dimensions, component dimensions, tolerances required, anchorages and
' fasteners, operator and electrical coordination requirements, relationship to adjacent
construction, threshold configurations, installation details, flashings, and sealant locations.
C. Samples:
1. Finish Sample: Submit three samples, minimum 2"x4", of aluminum finished with system and
' color proposed for the finished work.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Submit either of the following to verify that the proposed systems meet the structural
performance requirements specified.
a. Shop drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State where
the Project is located.
b. Certified test report data verifying structural compliance of systems similar to those to be
provided.
2. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports which verify that each aluminum framed glazing
system meets the air and water infiltration performance requirements specified.
E. Closeout Submittal
1. In accordance with Section 017700.
2. Submit designing engineer's certification that products and installation comply with design
requirements.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company authorized by system manufacturer, one installer for total system.
B. Structural design of framing system and anchorages shall be performed under the supervision of a
professional structural engineer, licensed to practice in the State where the Project is located.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
1.7 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY
A. Furnish in accordance with Section 017700.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish three year written warranties executed to the Owner, from the
manufacturers of the storefront and aluminum window systems, against defects in materials and
' workmanship.
C. Installer's Guarantee: Furnish three year written guarantee against defects in installation.
TEMPLATE 084000-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STOREFRONT SYSTEMS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Kawneer Co. Inc, Arcadia, Vistawall, US Aluminum Corporation, or
approved.
B. Exterior Framing System: Storefront Framing: Kawneer VG 451T, Arcadia AG451T, Vistwall Series
FG-3000T, US Aluminum Corporation IT 451, or approved; 2 x 4-1/2 inch extruded aluminum section;
center set; flush design; thermally broken.
C. Framing System: Storefront Framing: Kawneer Trifab 450, Arcadia A450, Vistwall Series FG-2000,
US Aluminum Corporation 450, or approved; 2 x 4-1/2 inch extruded aluminum section; center set;
flush design. r
D. Furnish spacers and adapters as necessary for a complete installation.
2.2 DOORS
A. Swinging Entry Doors: Kawneer Company, Inc. "350 Heavy Wall Door"; Heavy duty aluminum/glass
type; outswinging.
1. As Specified: Kawneer Company, Inc. "350 Heavy Wall Door"; aluminum door system.
2. Acceptable Substitution: United States Aluminum Corporation "Durafront Series 800"door;
aluminum door system.
3. Configure with 10 inch high bottom rail.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ANSI/ASTM B221; 6063-T5 Alloy and Temper.
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209, minimum .019 inch thickness for flashings, minimum .062 inch thick
for brake formed trim applications.
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, or zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM A164.
D. Glazing: Furnished under Section 088000. Provide shop glazed units at Contractor's option.
E. Miscellaneous Accessories: Furnish reinforcing, attachment hardware, aluminum flashings, and other
items as necessary.
2.4 DOOR HARDWARE I
A. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, and as follows.
1. Weatherstripping: Hard-backed poly pile in door and/or frame. Meeting stile of each leaf shall
have a double line of hard-backed poly-pile astragal.
2. Threshold: Extruded aluminum with ribbed surface
3. Sill Sweeps: Brush strip, concealed.
4. Pivoting/Hinging: Offset pivot; top and intermediate.
5. Closers: Dorma BTS 80 NHO; concealed floor closer; single acting; offset pivot.
6. Latches/Strike: Adams-Rite MS1830 with provisions for keyed cylinders on interior face only;
mount to bottom rail. Furnish keyed cylinders as directed by the Owner.
7. Push/Pulls: Arcadia Radius Push-Pull Set; straight pull option; clear finish.
8. Cylinder Guard.
9. Exit Indicator.
10. Transom Decal: ("THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS" )
B. Low Energy Operator:
1. The following manufacturer's are approved, subject to the specified requirements:
a. Horton Automatics Division of Overhead Door Corporation.
b. Stanley.
c. Dor-O-matic.
2. Operator: Low energy electro-mechanical swing operator; overhead concealed transom mount
door configurations as indicated on the Drawings; aluminum housing with clear anodized
aluminum finish.
3. Pushbutton Switches:
TEMPLATE 084000-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
a. Jamb Mounted Pushbutton Switches: Recessed configuration for mounting in cutout in
adjacent jamb; narrow profile black cover plate with handicap logo, red push button, and text
to read PRESS TO OPEN; white enamel paint filled engraving.
b. Wall Mounted Pushbutton Switches: Recessed configuration in 4x4 junction box;
6" diameter stainless steel push plate with engraved handicap logo and message "PRESS
TO OPEN." Provide blue enamel filled engraving.
c. Provide 2 switches per opening.
d. Provide weatherproof design for exterior installations.
4. Remote Power Switches:
a. Model 1200MC (maintained contact)with key operated switch, labeled ON and OFF by
Folger Adam Security, Lemont, IL (630/739-3900).
' b. Bronze cover plate with oil rubbed finish similar to US10B.
c. Keyed cylinders are furnished under Section 087100 for installation by this Section.
5. Low energy doors shall conform to the currently enforced edition of ANSI A156.19.
C. Threshold for Swinging Doors: Rixson 4x800 or approved; extruded aluminum, modified as
necessary to suit conditions; mill finish aluminum; undrilled, furnish stainless steel Phillips flathead
screws and shields or expansion anchors as appropriate for attachment of threshold. Machine
minimum openings as required to receive deadlock bolt.
' D. Locks, Pulls, and Indicators: Furnished under Section 087100.
2.5 FABRICATION
' A. Field verify openings prior to fabrication.
B. Fabricate frames allowing for shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation.
C. Rigidly fit joints and corners. Accurately fit and secure corners tight. Make corner joints flush,
hairline, and weatherproof. Seal joints with sealant.
D. Provide drainage holes to allow water to flow to exterior.
' E. Prepare components to receive anchorage devices. Fabricate anchorage items.
F. Form bent components accurately to line, without deformation of component profiles. Fabricate in
lengths consistent with finisher's capacity to handle bent shapes. Prefit all clips and mating
' components to ensure secure fit at time of assembly.
G. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with members to maintain rigidity. Provide reinforcing at all
door strike jambs.
' H. Fabricate storefront system to accommodate hardware using templates furnished from
Section 087100.
I. Furnish thermally broken backing plates at head and jambs to receive sealant and backing rod;
provide partial closures at ends of jambs and mullions to receive sealant.
J. Fabricate custom extrusions, closures, and sheet materials to the shapes indicated; fabricate for
attachment with concealed fasteners to the greatest possible extent.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Finish for Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Minimum 70 percent resin Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 PVDF
system complying with AAMA 2605; custom non-exotic color as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ANSI/ASTM A123 to minimum 1.7 oz/sf.
C. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section.
TEMPLATE 084000-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS I
B. Notify Architect of unacceptable conditions, prior to installation. Do not install window units until such
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1
B. Storefront Framing:
1. Sill Flashing:
a. Provide color matching aluminum back angle and drip flashings in the configuration
indicated.
b. Provide continuous flexible flashing seal of the rough opening sill. Adhere the flexible
flashing up the back of the angle and up the jamb at the end dams. Seal all joints. Do not
expose the flexible flashing.
c. Install under-sill aluminum drip flashings. Seal all frame joints, and penetrations in flashings.
Coordinate with other Section when drip flashing is furnished under separate section.
Provide canted solid blocking or shims to ensure that the sill pan is sloped to drain.
d. Prepare for installation of the sub-sill assembly over.
2. Sub-Sills:
a. Provide extruded aluminum sub-sills in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions and as specified below.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard end dams and splice plates sealed into position. End
dams and splice plates shall match the height of the sub-sill back.
c. Seal joint between end dam and jamb.
d. Fasten the sub-sill securely to the sill construction. Cap seal tops of fasteners.
e. Fasten the storefront framing into the sub-sill. Use manufacturer's standard interlocking
anchors which engage the sub-sill and allow fastening of the storefront without penetrating
the horizontal pan of the sub-sill.
3. Install water diverters.
4. Compensation Heads:
a. Provide compensation channels at head conditions in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and as specified below.
b. Provide manufacturer's standard end caps sealed into position. End caps shall match the
height of the compensation channel and shall be pre-finished to match the framing at
exposed locations.
1
c. Provide interlocking mullion anchors at vertical tubes.
C. Where compensating head channels are used, screw channels to structure with center of channel
fixed and other fasteners through slotted holes.
D. Screw attach end dams to sub-sill ends; seal joints between dam and sub-sill. Fasten the sub-sill ,
securely into the openings. Cap seal tops of fasteners.
E. Install sealant to vertical leg of sub-sill and to end dams and set framing into sealant. Fasten the
storefront framing into the sub-sill. Use manufacturer's standard interlocking anchors which engage
the sub-sill and allow fastening of the storefront without penetrating the horizontal pan of the sub-sill.
F. Install preformed gasket at top of sub-sill against back of storefront sill.
G. Align frames plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with
adjacent work.
H. Install under sill aluminum flashings and water diverters. Seal all frame joints, and penetrations in
flashings.
I. Doors:
1. Install closers and doors for uniform clearances and smooth operation.
2. Coordinate with Division 16, and other trades as necessary for installation of barrier free
entrance operators.
J. Low Energy Operators:
TEMPLATE 084000-5 10/12/18 '
1 STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 084000—ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES, STOREFRONTS AND WINDOWS
I 1. Install operators and controls in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI
requirements.
2. Coordinate electrical service, wiring and connections with work of Division 26- Electrical.
IK. Perimeter sealant is provided under Section 079200.
3.3 ADJUSTING
I A. Set clearances and adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
B. Closers:
1. Set manual closers at exterior entrances to pounds spring tension at the pull handles.
I 2. Set initial opening force to 5 pounds and time delay at barrier free entrances to 15 seconds,
unless otherwise directed.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I A. The aluminum framing manufacturer's design engineer or his authorized representative shall visit the
site to inspect the work. Verity and certify that framing sizes and materials are as required, that
connections are properly executed, and that reinforcing, where required, has been properly installed.
I B. After completion of all glazing and sealing work, hose test all exterior glazed storefront and window
systems. Notify Architect a minimum of 72 hours prior to hose testing.
C. All areas which exhibit water penetration to the inside of the building shall be repaired, resealed, and
l retested until watertightness can be demonstrated.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces.
I B. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft,
clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C. Retouch damage to PVDF finish with matching air-dry material as recommended by the finish coating
I manufacturer.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
I A. The structural design engineer or an authorized representative shall visit the site to inspect the work.
Verity and certify that the installation has been installed in accordance with the structural
requirements.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
I
ITEMPLATE 084000-6 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087100 -DOOR HARDWARE
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Finish hardware requirements.
2. Requirements for bidder-supplied hardware schedule.
B. General Requirements:
1. Contractor shall provide complete hardware schedule including all pieces of hardware required at
each opening as specified herein and indicated in the Drawings.
2. Allowed hardware manufacturers shall be as directed by Owner. Where specific model numbers
are provided, it is for the purpose of establishing basis for quality and design only. Contractor
shall provide alternate products or functions as necessary to meet requirements of Drawings and
specifications.
3. Manufacturer substitutions are not permitted.
4. Obtain each type of hardware from single manufacturer.
5. Review Drawings, Door Schedule, and requirements of this Section thoroughly and provide
required hardware for all openings, including openings which may have been inadvertently
omitted from Door Schedule.
6. Should an opening be omitted or an opening not indicated in Door Schedule, provide hardware of
same quality, design and function as specified for similar openings.
7. Furnish hardware complete with brackets, plates, fittings, and other accessories required for
installation.
8. Provide screws, nuts, bolts, through-bolts, washers, grommets, and other fastening devices
necessary for proper installation of hardware; match finish of hardware being attached. Non-
ferrous or corrosion resistant type required where exposed to exterior atmosphere.
C. Related Sections:
1. 017700 - Closeout Procedures: Submittal of keys.
2. 081113- Hollow Metal Frames.
3. 081400-Wood Doors.
4. 083100—Access Doors and Panels
5. 084228—All-Glass Partition Systems
6. 087300 - Door and Hardware Installation.
D. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
E. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 SUBMITTALS I
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Manufacturer's Data: Submit 3 copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware.
C. Samples: Within 35 days after award of the Contract, submit 3 samples each of Push Plates and Kick
Plates in colors as selected for approval.
D. Schedules: Upon award of hardware contract, submit 3 copies of the finish hardware schedule,
organized into"hardware sets"and indicating complete designation of every item required for each
door or opening. List in vertical form. Review of hardware schedules does not fulfill project
requirements in accordance with Contract Documents.
E. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to door and frame fabricators, and hardware installers. Upon
request, check shop drawings of such other work to confirm that adequate provisions were made for
the proper installation of hardware.
I
TEMPLATE 087100-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supplier Qualifications: Finish hardware shall be supplied by recognized builders' hardware supplier
who has been furnishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less than two
years. The supplier's organization shall include a member of the American Society of Architectural
Hardware Consultants who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work to meet
with the Owner, Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Conform to requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities.
2. Where openings are noted with an hourly fire resistance rating, provide hardware components
labeled by Underwriter's Laboratory, or other testing laboratory approved by the local code
authorities, to meet the hourly fire rating noted.
3. Hardware shall conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated.
4. Comply with provisions of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), including ADA Accessibility
Guidelines and ANSI A117.1, and additional accessibility requirements of the jurisdictional code
authorities.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver all hardware in manufacturers' original unopened undamaged packages, clearly
identifying manufacturer, brand name, and contents.
B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary.
' C. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location of installation in accordance with approved
hardware schedule.
D. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the finish on hardware before, during and after
installation.
1.5 GUARANTEES
A. Furnish 5-year unconditional guarantees for all door closers, under provisions of Section 017700.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Factory representatives for door closers, exit bolts, and locksets shall be available during the
construction to instruct the Contractor on the proper method of installation of their materials. They
shall inspect and adjust their materials at the completion of the work, and supply proper maintenance
manuals to the Owner.
B. Furnish two (2) sets of special tools for installation and maintenance of hardware. Tools for
maintenance and adjustments are to be delivered to the Owner upon completion of the work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HARDWARE
A. Furnish hardware items as scheduled in approved bidder-supplied hardware schedule.
B. Except as listed in the following paragraphs, no substitutions of materials will be allowed unless
approved by the Architect.
2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Furnish fasteners for installation with each hardware item. Furnish Phillips head fasteners,
countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head as appropriate for material to be installed. Furnish door
closers and exit devices applied to wood composite or mineral core doors with sex bolts sized to the
' thickness of the door.
B. Compatibility: Provide fasteners which are compatible with both unit fastened and substrate, and
which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of hardware, base material, or fastener.
TEMPLATE 087100-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087100 -DOOR HARDWARE
2.3 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. General: Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Landlord's "Tenant's Design and Construction
Manual", provide architectural hardware in the following finishes.
1. General: US26D, Satin Chrome Plated, except:
2. Push Plates, Door Pulls, Kickplates: US32D, Satin Stainless Steel
3. Door Closers: 689/Sprayed Aluminum.
2.4 KEYING
A. All locksets and deadbolts shall be keyed as directed by the Owner.
B. Construction master-key all locksets and cylinder items; provide 12 construction masterkeys.
C. Locksets, exit devices, deadlocks, padlocks, and cylinders (all standard cylinder items)shall be:
1. Grand masterkeyed and/or masterkeyed in sets as required.
2. Individually keyed in strict accordance with Owner's instructions.
3. Keying shall be established specifically for the Owner by the manufacturer.
2.5 HARDWARE GROUPS
A. As indicated on Drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of doors and hardware is specified in Section 087300.
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
r
i
I
t .
1
1
TEMPLATE 087100-3 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087300 - DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Installation of hardware specified in Section 087100.
2. Installation of wood doors.
3. Installation of hollow metal doors.
B. Related Sections:
' 1. 081113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
2. 081400 -Wood Doors.
3. 083100 -Access Doors and Panels.
4. 083326- Overhead Coiling Grilles.
5. 084000-Aluminum-Framed Entrances, Storefronts and Windows.
6. 087100- Door Hardware.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
•
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Hollow Metal Manufacturer's Association (HMMA): 840 - Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal
Doors and Frames.
B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
D. The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
E. The Door and Hardware Institute (DHI): Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installers of doors and finish hardware shall be skilled mechanics experienced in this type of work.
B. Fire rated doors and hardware shall be installed in accordance with the labeling requirements.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Do not subject wood doors to abnormal heat, dryness, or humidity, or sudden changes thereof.
Condition doors to average prevailing humidity prior to hanging.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOORS, FRAMES, AND HARDWARE
A. Doors, frames and hardware are specified in other sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
TEMPLATE 087300-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087300 -DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION
3.2 DOOR INSTALLATION '
A. Install doors in accordance with the door manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Install doors plumb and square in associated frames maintaining specified clearances.
C. Except where specified otherwise in the respective door sections, maintain clearances of 1/8 inch at
jambs and heads, 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors, and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top
of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4-inch
clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
D. Install hollow metal doors in accordance with ANSI A250.8 and HMMA 840.
E. Install fire rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80.
F. Install doors to operate freely, but not loosely, free from hinge bound conditions, sticking or binding.
Do not install in frames which would hinder operation of doors.
G. Ensure doors are free from rattling when in latched position. I
3.3 FINISH HARDWARE INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware plumb, level and true to line in accordance with manufacturer's templates, printed
instructions and Project conditions.
B. Install fire rated hardware in accordance with NFPA 80.
C. Where cutting and fitting is required on substrates to be field painted or similarly finished, install, fit,
remove and store hardware prior to finishing. Reinstall hardware after finishing operations are
completed.
D. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate.
E. For substrates which are not factory prepared for hardware:
1. Mortise work to correct size and location without gouging, splintering or causing irregularities in
exposed finish work.
2. Fit faces of mortised components snug and flush without excessive clearance.
F. Coordinate installation of electronic hardware with electrical service and fire alarm system as
applicable.
G. Hardware Locations: The following is a general listing and may contain items which do not apply to
this Project.
1. Butt Hinges:
a. Top: 5 inches from inside head of frame down to top of hinge.
b. Bottom: 10 inches from finish floor to bottom of hinge.
c. Intermediate: Equally spaced between top and bottom hinges.
2. Pivots:
a. Top and Bottom: According to manufacturer's templates.
b. Intermediate: Equally spaced between top and bottom pivots.
3. Locksets and Latchsets: 38 inches from finish floor to centerline of knob or lever.
4. Dummy Trim: Backset and height to match locks and latches.
5. Deadlocks and Deadlatches: 48 inches from finish floor to centerline of cylinder.
6. Push/Pull Latches: 45 inches from finish floor to centerline of latchbolt.
7. Exit Devices: 38 inches from finish floor to centerline of cross bar or touch bar.
8. Emergency Access Door Stops: 60 inches from finish floor to centerline to stop.
9. Door Closers:
a. Degree of door swing as indicated in Hardware Schedule approved by Architect, or if not
indicated, locate to permit maximum door swing.
b. Locate on interior side of exterior doors.
c. Locate on stair side of doors at stairways.
d. Locate on room side for doors in public areas, corridors and other similar areas.
1
TEMPLATE 087300-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 087300 -DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTALLATION
10. Push/Pull Bar Sets:
a. Horizontal push bar centered at 42 inches above finish floor, extending full width from
centerline to centerline of door stiles.
b. Vertical pull bar centered on door stile centerline at 4 inches from door edge with top
mounting at 45 inches above finish floor and equipped with stud to pass through door for
concealed set screw mounting of push bar on opposite side.
11. Push Plates and Pulls (Back to Back): Centerline 42 inches above finish floor. Center plate
between door edge and glazed opening, or 2 inches from plate edge to door edge if door is not
glazed. Pull centered in relationship to plate size.
12. Door Pulls (Mounted Independently): Centerline of grip at 42 inches above finish floor, centered
between door edge and glazed opening, or centerline of pull 3 inches from door edge if door is
' not glazed.
13. Push Plates (Mounted Independently): Centerline 45 inches above finish floor, centered
between door edge and glazed opening, or 2 inches from plate edge to door edge if door is not
I glazed.
14. Combination Push/Pull Plates: Bottom edge 40 inches above finish floor, centered between door
edge and glazed opening, or 2 inches from plate edge to door edge if door is not glazed.
15. Wall Stops: Place on adjacent wall at height to contact knob, lever or pull.
16. Wall Stop/Holders: Place on adjacent wall immediately above base materials positioned such
that door will strike bumper and prevent door hardware from hitting wall. Place within 3 inches of
latch edge of door.
17. Floor Stops and Floor Stop/Holders: Place to permit maximum swing of door and to prevent door
hardware from hitting wall. Place within 3 inches of latch edge of door, and out of foot traffic.
18. Kick Plates and Armor Places: Mount on push side, 1/8 inch above bottom edge and centered.
19. Stretcher Plates: Mount on push side, top edge 36 inches above finish floor and centered.
20. Mop Plates: Mount on pull side, 1/8 inch above bottom edge and centered.
21. Existing Frames: Hardware locations to match existing conditions where new doors are installed
in existing frames.
3.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation of
function of every unit.
B. Lubricate moving parts with graphite type lubricant unless otherwise recommended by the hardware
manufacturer.
C. Ensure weather-stripping and seals do not inhibit closing and positive latching of door.
D. Replace defective materials or units which cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Reinstall items
found improperly installed.
E. Replace or re-hang doors which are hinge bound and do not swing or operate freely.
F. Remove and replace doors which are warped, twisted or which are not in true planes.
G. Replace factory finished doors damaged during installation.
H. Prior to date of Substantial Completion, readjust and relubricate hardware items as necessary.
3.5 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Wherever hardware installation is made more than 30 calendar days prior to date of Substantial
Completion of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy
and make a final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean and
lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment,
spring power, back check, closing and latching speeds, and handicap requirements.
B. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment of hardware during the final adjustment of hardware.
END OF SECTION
1 TEMPLATE 087300-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 088000 -GLAZING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Glass and glazing for aluminum entrances, storefronts, and windows.
2. Glass for wood and hollow steel doors.
3. Glazing schedule at the end of the Section.
B. Related Sections:
1. 084000- Entrances, Storefronts, and Windows,: Metal framing and glazing materials.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standard (ANSI): Z97.1 - Performance Specifications and Test Methods for Safety
Glazing Materials in Buildings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
2. C1048- Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass, Kind HS, Kind FT (Coated and
Uncoated).
3. E773-Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
4. E774 - Specifications for Sealed Insulating Glass Units.
C. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 80- "Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, 1999
Edition."
E. National Fenestration Rating Council Inc. (NFRC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submittals specified in this Section may be incorporated into submittal specified in other Sections,
where glass is to be provided in those Sections.
C. Product Data: Submit product data on glass, glazing materials, and insulating glass system.
D. Shop Drawings: Show size and thicknesses of glass, proposed "bites" in frames, sizes and locations
of blocking, spacers, beads, stops, and edge treatments. Note quality, type, and strength of each
light.
E. Warranty: Submit draft of manufacturer's and fabricator's warranty for Architect's review.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with pertinent recommendations in the GANA"Manual of Glazing."
B. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with code applicable IBC requirements.
C. Qualifications of Glass Manufacturer: Provide glass produced by a nationally recognized
manufacturer of high efficiency glass.
D. Qualifications of Glazers: Provide personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the skills required,
and at least one person completely familiar with the referenced standards and the requirements of this
Work, who shall personally direct installation of glazing materials.
1
TEMPLATE 088000-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 088000 -GLAZING
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 016000.
B. Provide cushions at edges of glass to prevent impact damage during shipment and storage.
C. Keep vacuum cups free from foreign material that could scratch glass.
D. Comply with insulating unit fabricators requirements for limits on exposure to reduced barometric
pressure during shipment.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Submit warranties under provisions of Section 017700.
B. Replacement Guarantee:
1. Provide new conforming glass units to replace glass units which break for a period of one year.
2. Units broken by impact, fire, earthquake, or similar events which exceed the design loads and
conditions are not subject to this requirement.
3. Include all labor and materials for replacement of failed unit(s). Replacement shall include
coordination with the Owner, immediate provision for maintaining openings secure and
weathertight, timely ordering and fabrication of replacement items as required, installation, and
cleaning.
C. Reflective Coating Warranty: Furnish ten year warranty from the glass manufacturer agreeing to
' replace glass units which have defective reflective coating. Defective coating is defined as peeling,
discoloration, or other forms of deterioration to the reflective coating.
D. Insulating Glass Unit Warranty:
1. Furnish ten year manufacturer's warranty, including coverage of units for seal failure, interpane
dusting or misting, and replacement of same, under provisions of Section 017700.
2. Furnish manufacturer's warranty, including coverage of units against seal failure, or interpane
dusting or misting; term of warranty as follows.
a. Vertical Applications: Ten years.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GLASS
A. Furnish the following glass in combinations as scheduled at the end of this Section:
1. Clear Glass: ASTM C1036, Type I, class 1 (clear), quality Q3 glazing select.
2. Low Iron Glass: Guardian Industries Corp. "UltraWhite,"or PPG Industries "Starphire."
3. Fire Rated Laminated Glass: 5/16 inch thick laminated fire-rated and impact safety-rated glazing
material; one of the following.
a. Technical Glass Products (Kirkland, WA; 800-426-0279) "FireLite Plus."
b. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain North America, Inc. (Auburn WA; 253-333-0660; 888-803-9533)
"SGG Keralite FR-L."
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene; 70-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4 inches long x 1/4 high x width as
required for application indicated.
B. Weather Glazing Sealant: Compatible with insulating glass seal.
111 C. Glazing Tape (Interior): Norton "V-980," PTI "303," or approved. Size: 1/8 inch by 1/2 inch. .
D. Glazing Gaskets for Existing Storefronts: "Santoprene,"silicone, or EPDM glazing beads, for a
complete weatherproof seal; premolded or welded corners; Furnish shapes compatible with existing
storefront systems.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Insulating Glass Units:
1. Dual lite units fabricated from glass as scheduled; 1/2 inch nominal airspace; dual seal system.
TEMPLATE 088000-2 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 088000 -GLAZING
2. Twin seals; polyisobutylene primary seal and silicone secondary seal. Outer seal shall be
compatible with glazing system.
3. Spacer Bar: Mill finish aluminum; fill with desiccant; corners shall be partially miter cut and bent
(not cut through), or formed with corner keys ultrasonically soldered in place.
4. Certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) in accordance with ASTM
E773 and E774; certified to level CBA.
5. Each piece shall bear certification number, date, and manufacturer's identification mark.
6. Assembly of insulating units shall be by a fabricator approved by the glass materials
manufacturer.
B. Tempered and Heat Strengthened Glass:
1. Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, FT; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen glass in
bending to not less than 4 times the annealed strength; certified safety glass in accordance with
ANSI Z97.1.
2. Heat Strengthened Glass: ASTM C1048, HS ; glass which has been heat treated to strengthen
glass in bending to not less than 2 times annealed strength.
3. Fabricate tempered and heat strengthened glass units so that principle distortion will be in the
horizontal direction in the finished installation.
4. Unless otherwise approved by the building official, provide manufacturer's label on each light,
indicating type and thickness of glass.
5. Comply with IBC requirements for identification and labeling of safety-glazing materials in
hazardous locations subject to human impact loads.
6. Fabrication Process: Horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom
edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Laminated Glass (PVB):
1. Two layers of glass as scheduled with a minimum .030 inch thick vinyl interlayer.
2. Film:
a. Manufacturer: Solutia Inc. (St. Louis, MO; 877-674-1233; 314-674-1000).
b. Type: Polyvinyl butyral sheets, uniform in color, specifically manufactured for use in
fabrication of laminated glass sheets, ultraviolet stabilized, uniform thickness as specified.
D. Low E Coating: High performance type; applied by using sputtered deposition technology.
1. Basis of Design: PPG (Pittsburgh PA; 412-434-2858) "Solarban 60."
2. Acceptable Substitution: Viracon (Otawana MN; 800-533-2080) "Solarscreen 2000."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of
this Section.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces and wipe dry.
B. Seal frame corner joints, and other leakage points with sealant. At insulating glass units the sealant
shall be compatible with the seal of the unit. Do not plug weep holes.
C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant, unless otherwise recommended by the sealant
manufacturer.
I
TEMPLATE 088000-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 088000 -GLAZING
111 3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks in frames for support of glass. Place at quarter points unless
approved otherwise.
IB. Set glass tightly in position with proper clearances in accordance with the referenced standards.
C. Perimeter glass clearances within setting frame shall be in accordance with GANA recommendations,
I and as required by the glass manufacturer to provide for wind, earthquake drift, and thermal
expansion.
D. Unless specified otherwise, glaze units with gaskets furnished with the framing systems specified in
I other sections.
E. Glazing for Interior Non-Rated Doors and Windows, Where Gaskets Are Not Furnished:
1. Glaze with glazing tape.
2. Pre-measure and cut tapes to required lengths; adhere to fixed stops, setting horizontal tape at
I
heads and sills before vertical tape.
3. Install tape with tight butt joints; no overlaps will be accepted. Set tape with straight lines level
with frame sight line.
4. Position glass, uniformly sealing against tape. Install inside removable stops and place tape in
stops forming a uniform seal against glass, level with sight lines.
F. Glazing for Fire Rated Doors and Windows: Glaze in accordance with NFPA 80, unless required
1 G. otherwise by the labeling requirement of the frame.
Adjust glazing materials to form a uniform sight line.
3.4 CLEANING
IA. Clean excess glazing materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
B. Remove labels after work is completed.
I 3.5 GLASS TYPE SCHEDULE
A. The following are the glass types as indicated on the Drawings:
1. GL-1:
a. Insulating glass unit with 1/2 inch air space between two panes of glass as follows:
I 1) Exterior Pane: 1/4 inch clear glass with low e coating on#2 surface.
2) Interior Pane: 1/4 inch clear glass.
b. Performance as follows:
I 1) Visible Light Transmittance: 70%
2) Winter U value: .29
3) Shading Coefficient: .44.
4) SHGC: .38
I 2. GL-2: Minimum 1/4 inch thick clear glass.
3. GL-3: Minimum 5/16 inch thick fire-rated laminated glass.
4. GL-4: Minimum 1/4 inch thick laminated clear glass.
I B. Provide tempered glass in hazardous locations to meet the requirements of the jurisdictional code
authorities.
3.6 GLASS LOCATION SCHEDULE
I A. GL-1: All exterior glazing unless scheduled otherwise.
B. GL-2: All interior glazing, unless scheduled otherwise.
1 C. GL-3: Interior glazing at fire rated openings.
D. GL-4: Interior glazing at locations indicated.
IEND OF SECTION
ITEMPLATE 088000-4 10/12/18
r
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092200— LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING
PART 1 -GENERAL I
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior partition framing.
2. Steel backing.
3. Ceiling and soffit framing.
4. Furring and resilient channels.
B. Related Sections:
1. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Partial height wall bracing.
2. 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking; [framing and sheathing].
3. 072100-Thermal Insulation: Insulation between framing members.
4. 095113—Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Proprietary overhead framing system.
5. 098100 -Acoustic Insulation: Insulation between framing members.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A641 -Zinc-Coated Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.
2. C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
3. C645 - Non-Loadbearing Steel Studs, Runners, and Rigid Furring Channels.
4. C754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard,
Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Standard 2079 -Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. I
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Structural Design:
1. Select framing systems, gages, supports, bracing, and connections as necessary to meet the
structural requirements specified.
2. Partition framing shall conform to the widths indicated, unless approved otherwise. Provide
thicker gages and decreased stud spacing as necessary to meet the design requirements.
3. Select framing members based on the manufacturer's published span tables.
B. Design Loads:
1. Interior Ceiling Assemblies: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live load, plus dead loads.
2. Exterior Soffit Assemblies: 30 psf positive and negative uniform live load, plus dead loads.
3. Interior Partitions without Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral
load.
4. Interior Partitions with Wall Mounted Casework: 5 pounds per square foot uniform live lateral
load, casework dead load, and casework live load of 25 PSF of shelf area.
5. Seismic Loads: Conform to the requirements of currently enforced edition of the jurisdictional
code authorities.
C. Deflection Requirements:
1. Maximum deflection of 1/240 for flexible finish materials such as gypsum board and veneer
plaster.
2. Maximum deflection of 1/360 for rigid finish materials including gypsum plaster, cement plaster,
ceramic tile, maximum 3/8"thick stone tile, or mirrors.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. 1
TEMPLATE 092200-1 10/12/18111
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 092200—LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate typical and special framing sections and details. Indicate fastening systems, gages,
framing spacing, bracing configurations and locations, anchorage to acoustical ceiling grid, metal
I backing, attachment to overhead structure, and similar conditions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Unless indicated or specified otherwise, perform work in accordance with ASTM C754.
B. Code Requirements:
1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall
been tested in accordance with ASTM E119, and shall be approved by the local jurisdictional
I code authorities. Coordinate installation of other materials which are a part each assembly.
2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the
event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the
conflict has been resolved.
3. Provide calculations, drawings, product data, and other verification as required by the
I jurisdictional code authority to obtain approval of the lightgage metal framing installation.
C. The work of this Section is subject to special fire rated construction joint assembly requirements
I specified in Section 078500.
D. System components shall be in compliance with requirements of local jurisdictional authorities for
lightgage metal support framing and ceiling suspension systems, as applicable
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NON-LOAD BEARING LIGHT GAGE METAL FRAMING:
IA. Base Steel (all stud types):
1. ASTM C645; G40 galvanized; non-compliant materials will not be accepted.
I B. General:
1. Furnish "C" shaped studs, depth as scheduled, with return lip and not less than 1-1/4 inch
flanges; prepunched openings for the installation of stiffening channels and mechanical and
electrical items.
I 2. Furnish U shaped tracks (runners), hat and "Z" shaped furring channels, and other sizes and
shapes as indicated on the Drawings, and required by the referenced standards.
3. Minimum 25 gage unless indicated or specified otherwise; and as follows:
a. Furnish gages as necessary to meet deflection requirements, unless indicated or specified
I otherwise.
b. Top runner for partitions extending only to the acoustical ceiling grid shall be 20 gage.
c. Provide minimum 20 gage for full height partition framing extending from structure to
structure.
I
d. Provide minimum 20 gage studs at jambs of doors and interior relites.
4. Fire Rated Track: As specified in Section 078500.
5. Partition Head Compensating Channel (Non-Fire Rated): Design for minimum ±1/2 inch
I deflection. Profiles as indicated; one of the following.
a. 20 gage deep leg track; 2 inch legs.
b. Proprietary compensating channel system; Contractor's option.
C. Standard Gage Metal Framing:
1. Formed from minimum 36 KSI steel.
D. "EQ Stud"Type Metal Framing:
1. Formed from minimum 50 KSI steel.
I2.2 OTHER FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Channels: Hot or cold rolled channels; rust inhibitive paint coating; sizes in accordance with
IASTM C754.
ITEMPLATE 092200-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092200— LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING
B. Proprietary Ceiling Suspension System:
1. Manufacturer:
a. As specified: Chicago Metallic (Los Angeles CA; 800-323-7164).
b. Acceptable Substitutions:
1) USG Interiors, Inc. (Chicago, IL; 800-874-4968).
2) Armstrong (800-207-2321).
2. Suspension System: Similar to System 650, or 670; ASTM C635 heavy duty classification.
a. Furring Runners: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick steel 1-3/8 inch wide with knurled face
by 1-1/2 inches high; factory punched cross tee slots, hanger holes, and non-directional
bayonet end tab couplings.
b. Furring Tees: Manufactured from 0.020 inch thick 1-3/8 inch wide with knurled face by 1-1/2
inches high; factory punched cross tee slots and hanger holes.
c. Furring Cross Channel: 0.020 inch thick steel; 1-3/8 Inch wide with knurled face by 7/8
inches high by 48 inches long with straight locking end tabs.
d. Cross Tees: 0.020 inch thick steel 15/16 inch wide by 1-1/2 inches high; with staked-on dip
end tab couplings, factory punched cross tee slots.
e. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard.
f. Channel beam splice clip: Manufacturer's standard.
C. Accessories:
1. Screws: Self tapping; low profile head; galvanized.
2. Hanger wire: ASTM A641; Class 1 zinc coating; soft temper; prestretched; 12 gage.
3. Resilient Channels: USG "RC-1," or approved.
4. Special Proprietary Backing: Dietrich Industries (Pittsburgh PA; 412-281-2805; Renton, WA;
425-251-1497) "Danback Flexible Wood Backing Plate;" model in accordance with stud spacing;
fire treated.
5. Partition Clips (for attachment of head channel to acoustical ceiling suspension system): "The
Revoe Clip" by Revoe Manufacturing Ltd. (Calgary, AB; 403-225-2170; 800-665-9419); "Donn
Partition Attachment Clip" by USG Corporation (Chicago IL; 877-874-4200), or approved; style to
accommodate edge design of acoustical tile specified in Section 095113.
D. Other Framing Materials: Provide other framing materials in accordance with ASTM C754. I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
1111
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Steel Decking:
1. Where fastening into bottom of steel decking is required, fasten only into lower flutes.
2. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which penetrate more than 1 inch.
B. Verify location of conduit in poured concrete construction before making attachments.
3.3 INTERIOR PARTITION FRAMING
A. Runners:
1. Secure runners with fasteners at maximum 24 inches oc.
2. At concrete floors, use powder driven fasteners or drilled in concrete anchors.
3. [Where indicated, attach top track to acoustical ceiling grid with two staggered #12-14 screws at
24 inches on center. Provide spacer strip between runner and ceiling suspension system to
allow tegular or reveal edge acoustical panels to clear partition. Use minimum 20 gage top track.] 111
TEMPLATE 092200-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092200—LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING
4. [Where indicated, attach top track to acoustical ceiling grid using specified partition clip at 24
inches on center. Provide spacer strip between runner and ceiling suspension system to allow
tegular or reveal edge acoustical panels to clear partition. Use minimum 20 gage top track.]
5. Top Runner: Secure head track to structure with allowance for structural deflection.
a. Non Rated Partitions: Use proprietary compensating channel or deep leg track at
Contractor's option, as necessary to accommodate building deflection.
6. Unless approved otherwise, at fire rated partition assemblies, use fire rated tracks, furnished
from Section 078500. Install fire rated tracks in accordance with the fire rated assembly
requirements.
B. Unless indicated otherwise, install studs vertically at 16 inches oc, and not more than 2 inches from
abutting construction, at each side of openings, and at corners.
C. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs.
D. Brace partition framing system and make rigid. Provide diagonal stud bracing at maximum 8 ft on
center at framing which does not extend to structure. At partitions attached to acoustical ceiling grid
with partition clip, screw attach bracing to clip. Brace shall allow placement of acoustical tile without
cutting.
E. Install double studs continuous from floor to ceiling track at the jamb of each door frame and cased
opening. Studs shall be no less than 20 gage. Provide diagonal steel stud bracing to structure at
each jamb at partitions which do not extent to structure.
F. Install minimum 20 gage studs at partitions indicated for support of modular wall-mounted casework
and counter support brackets. Install double studs and wood blocking at counter support brackets.
G. Where control joints are indicated in fire rated partitions, provide double stud and gypsum board
backing or other tested assembly in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations or Warnock-
Hersey WHI-651-0318-1. Coordinate with Section 092900.
H. Coordinate erection of studs with installation of service utilities. Align stud web openings.
I. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical, and mechanical work to be placed in or
behind stud framing.
J. Coordinate erection of stud system with requirements of door and window frames, fire extinguisher
cabinets, recessed toilet accessories, access doors, acoustical insulation, and other construction
within partition.
K. Coordinate the installation of framing with the gypsum board installer to ensure support at board
edges. Provide framing immediately either side of expansion joints.
L. Stud splicing not permissible.
M. At non-load bearing full height partitions subject to compression caused by overhead structural
deflection, and where proprietary compensating channel system is not used, cut studs 1/2 inch short
from full height. Do not rigidly connect stud to top runner.
N. Stud Bridging:
1. At interior partitions greater than 4 feet in length, and with rigid facing material on one stud flange
only, provide 3/4" bridging channels in horizontal rows at a maximum of 5'-0"on center for the full
height of the partition.
2. Interior full height partitions (studs extending from the floor to the structure above)with rigid
facing material stopping 3'-0"or more below top of studs - Provide one row 3/4" bridging channel
horizontally at termination of gypsum board material, and one additional row for each 5'-0" of
exposed studs.
3. Install stud bridging channels in long lengths, wire tying and lapping the joints a minimum of
12I inches. Attach bridging channel to each stud as shown in manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.4 BACKING
A. Provide steel or fire treated wood backing, unless indicated otherwise, for the support of wall mounted
items, including wood trim, casework, and toilet accessories.
TEMPLATE 092200-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092200— LIGHTGAGE METAL SUPPORT FRAMING
B. Unless indicated otherwise, steel backing shall consist of minimum 4 inch wide 16 gage steel plate
screwed rigidly to the studs.
C. Provide only wood blocking at handrails, guardrails and grab bars.
3.5 CEILING, SOFFIT, AND FASCIA FRAMING I
A. Coordinate locations of hangers and supports with the work of other Sections.
B. Ceiling framing shall consist of stud and runner framing or suspended framing, unless indicated or
specified otherwise.
C. Stud and Runner Framing:
1. Secure runners to structure above with fasteners at a maximum of 24 inches on center. Size
fasteners and use reinforcements as necessary to support the dead loads applied.
2. Screw fasten framing at each flange joint.
3. Space studs at 16 inches on center at horizontal locations.
4. Select members to meet the structural requirements specified.
D. Lightgage Suspended Framing:
1. Install in accordance with ASTM C754, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
2. Suspend ceiling from overhead structural elements only. Do not support from any electrical,
HVAC, plumbing, or sprinkler system components.
3. Space carrying channels 4 feet on center with splices lapped 12 inches and tied.
4. Support cold rolled carrying channels with hanger wires spaced at 3 feet on center for lath and
plaster ceilings and 4 feet on center for gypsum board ceilings. Loop hanger wire around
support element and tightly wrap around vertical wire 3 times; cut off neatly.
5. Space furring channels 16" o.c. with splices lapped 12", minimum and tied; clip or saddle tie to
runner channels with 16-gage tie wire.
6. Where overhead obstructions prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary
carrying members for indirect support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest
adjacent hangers and related framing components as required to span the required distance.
E. Proprietary Suspended Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. I
F. Stabilize suspended ceiling, soffit, and fascia framing against lateral movement by means of diagonal
bracing. At locations where partitions extend to ceiling, only, install supplementary bracing at
maximum 8'-0" o.c. along length of partition, and above each door hinge and strike jamb.
G. Form openings in ceilings and frame openings for recessed light fixtures, air diffusers, access doors,
hatches, etc.
H. Install supplementary hanger wires for support of ceiling mounted equipment, such as speaker111
support bracket, as required and as detailed.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Install members to provide surface plane with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any I
direction.
B. Locate assemblies within 1/4 inch of required locations.
C. Locate framing on the center of the joint between gypsum board panels, within a tolerance of 1/4 inch.
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 092200-5 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092843 - GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Gypsum sheathing.
B. Related Sections:
1. 042113- Brick Masonry: Brick masonry finish; building paper underlayment.
2. 054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Support framing.
3. 072700—Weather Resistive Barriers
4. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Interior gypsum products.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C1177- Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.
2. C1278- Standard Specification for Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Panel
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Product literature on gypsum sheathing and screw fasteners.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Gypsum Sheathing: One of the following:
1. G-P Gypsum Corporation "Dens-Glass Gold"; glass mat faced; ASTM C1177; 5/8 inch thickness.
2. Certainteed. "GlasRoc"; glass mat faced; ASTM C1177; 5/8 inch thickness.
3. USG "FIBEROCK®Brand Sheathing with Aqua-ToughTM"; ASTM C1278; 5/8 inch thickness.
B. Exterior Sheathing Screws: Complying with ASTM C1002, C954, and the following:
1. Self-drilling, self-tapping, Type S-12, bugle head, minimum length of 1-1/4 inch for 1/2 inch and
5/8 inch boards.
2. Organic-polymer, ceramic, or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of
more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.
3. Approved Product: Hilti (www.us.hilti.com)6 x 1-1/4 inch "PSH SD HCR Sheathing Screws", item
No. 00413489.
C. Joint and Penetration Sealant: Dow Corning 795 Building Sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. Verify that framing is ready for installation of sheathing.
TEMPLATE 092843-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092843 -GYPSUM SHEATHING
3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheathing boards parallel or perpendicular to framing. Install parallel to framing at fire rated
walls. Apply sheathing with vertical joints staggered. All edges shall be supported as follows:
1. Maximum span: 24 inches.
2. Maximum cantilever: 2 inches.
B. Install sheathing with coating towards exterior.
C. Screw to framing. Space fasteners 8 inches o.c. in field and 4 inches o.c. at ends along each framing
member.
D. Do not bridge expansion or seismic joints.
E. Coordinate with Division 26 work for cutouts for electrical penetrations. I
F. If sheathing is not to be covered by finish material within 6 months after purchase, cover the material
as necessary to maintain the manufacturer's warranty.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
TEMPLATE 092843-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS K COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
2. Gypsum soffit board.
B. Related Sections:
1. 054000- Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Exterior support framing.
2. 061000- Rough Carpentry: Wood framing.
3. 072100—Thermal Insulation.
4. 092200—Light gage Metal Support Framing: Support framing for gypsum board; tolerance
requirements.
5. 092843 - Gypsum Sheathing.
6. 093000 -Tiling: Finish materials; tile backer board.
7. 098100 -Acoustic Insulation.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction.
2. C557 -Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing.
3. C931 - Standard Specification for Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board
4. C1002 -Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.
5. C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
6. C1278-Specification for Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Panels.
7. C1395- Specification for Gypsum Ceiling Board
8. C1396- Specification for Gypsum Board
9. D3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
B. Gypsum Association (GA):
Ii. GA-214 - Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish
2. GA-216- Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Submit complete manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions for each of the
materials used.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with GA 216, unless specified otherwise, or required otherwise to meet
fire rating requirements.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Provide assemblies meeting the hourly fire ratings indicated and specified. Assemblies shall be
approved by the local jurisdictional authorities.
2. Fire rating requirements take precedence over the construction requirements indicated. In the
event of conflict, notify the Architect, and do not begin construction in the area of conflict until the
conflict has been resolved.
I
TEMPLATE 092900-1 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM BOARD I
C. Assembly Instructions: Contractor shall keep at the site and make available to installers a copy of the
following:
1. Installation requirements for each fire rated assembly.
2. GA 216.
D. The work of this Section is subject to special fire rated construction joint assembly requirements
specified in Section 078500.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS
A. Furnish boards of maximum permissible length for type of installation indicated, tapered edge for
boards to be exposed, taped and finished; square edge for boards in concealed applications; 5/8 inch
thick unless noted or specified otherwise; furnish type X for fire rated partitions.
B. Types:
1. Standard Board, Backing Board, Exterior Water Resistant Soffit Board: ASTM C1396; 5/8 inch
thickness unless otherwise indicated.
2. Water Resistant Board: ASTM C1396.
3. Ceiling Board: ASTM C1395; sag resistant.
4. Abuse Resistant/ Mold Resistant Board: ASTM C1278; USG Corporation "Fiberock Aqua-
Tough Interior Panels"; Georgia Pacific "DensArmor Fireguard Interior Guard", National Gypsum
Co. "Gold Bond Brand XP Fire-Shield Wallboard,"or approved;5/8 inch thickness; Type X;
surfaces shall be resistant to mold and mildew growth; score of 10 when tested in accordance
with ASTM D3273.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Gypsum Trim:
1. Conform to GA 216, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
2. Concealed flange crimp-on or tape-on type; metal or PVC at Contractor's option.
3. Control Joint Trim: USG 093 or approved.
4. Reveal Moldings: Fry Reglet Co., Pittcon Industries, Inc., Gordon Inc, or approved; aluminum
extrusions with taping flanges; shapes as indicated.
B. Joint Compound, Tape, and Finishing Compound: ASTM C475; furnish setting type joint compound
for use at water resistant and exterior soffit board.
1. Typical: USG "SHEETROCK Brand Taping, All-Purpose, and/or Topping Compound," or
approved.
2. Setting Type: USG "SHEETROCK Brand Easy Sand Setting-Type Joint Compound," or
approved.
C. Screws: ASTM C1002; galvanized or polymer coated at exterior locations.
D. Fire Rated Joint Compound: As specified in Section 078500. 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 216, and fire rated assembly requirements. I
TEMPLATE 092900-2 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM BOARD
B. Erect wallboard so that edges and corners are firmly supported.
C. Use screws to fasten gypsum board to metal furring or framing. Adhesive application of gypsum
board may be used if it is in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and meets fire
rating requirements.
D. Double Layer Applications:
1. Use backing board or standard board for first layer.
2. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer.
E. Trim:
1. Use longest practical lengths, with no piece less than 2 feet long for continuous runs greater than
8 feet. Securely fasten and align trim ends at joints.
2. Place concealed flange corner beads at external corners. At angles other than 90 degrees, bend
the flange to conform to the angle.
3. Place concealed flange type L trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
4. Use J trim at exposed gypsum board edges, and at joints where sealant is indicated.
F. Allow a 1/2 inch gap where gypsum board extends to overhead structure and deflection provisions are
incorporated into lightgage metal framing. Do not fasten gypsum board to top runner. Where the
ceiling is exposed in the finished work, finish top edge with a casing bead, and caulk with acrylic
sealant as specified in Section 079200.
G. Sealant Joints:
1. Coordinate installation of firestopping and sealants at concealed joints between partitions and
structure at fire rated and acoustically insulated partitions.
2. Where sealant joints are indicated at ends or edges of wallboard, install for uniform 1/8 inch joint,
unless otherwise indicated. Installation of sealant in exposed locations is specified in Section
079200.
H. Provide water resistant gypsum board as a substrate where tile is indicated to be installed over
gypsum board surfaces. Cement board backing for tile surfaces is specified in Section 093000.
111 I. Provide water resistant gypsum board at walls in restrooms, toilets, shower rooms,janitor closets and
other areas subject to similar damp conditions, unless cement board backing is indicated.
J. Install required number of layers of wallboard behind panel boards, fire extinguisher cabinets, and
other recessed elements as necessary to maintain fire rating of walls.
K. Fire Rated Construction:
1. At heads of fire rated metal stud and gypsum board partitions, install gypsum board in
accordance with the fire rated assemblies specified in Section 078500.
2. Fill joints between gypsum board surfaces and adjacent construction with fire rated joint
compound in accordance with the requirements of the fire rated construction joint assembly
manufacturer.
3. Provide continuous fire rated assemblies. Where adjacent construction interrupts fire rated
assemblies, provide additional construction as necessary to maintain the continuity of fire rated
assemblies.
3.3 CONTROL JOINTS
A. Discontinue gypsum board and use control joint trim at control joints.
B. Coordinate with the framing installer to ensure that framing is installed immediately on either side of
each control joint.
C. Space control joints as indicated. When not indicated, locate as follows:
1. At maximum 30 foot intervals along continuous wall planes.
2. At maximum 50 foot intervals at continuous ceilings with perimeter relief.
3. At maximum 30 foot intervals at continuous ceilings without perimeter relief.
4. At locations where expansion or control joints occur in the building structure.
5. Locate control joints to form rectangular or square sections, in "L," "U," "T," or other irregularly
shaped areas.
TEMPLATE 092900-3 10/12/18
TAR K COFFEE BUC S COF EE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 092900 -GYPSUM BOARD
6. Position control joints to intersect light fixtures, air diffusers, door openings, and other areas of
stress concentration.
7. Coordinate with Section 092200 for special requirements at fire rated assemblies.
D. Verify location with the Architect prior to installation. Give the Architect a minimum of 48 hours notice.
3.4 FINISHING
A. Provide finishing in accordance with GA 214.
B. Where necessary to sand, do so without damaging the face of the gypsum board.
C. Levels of Finish:
1. Level 5: Provide at the following locations:
a. Surfaces perpendicular and adjacent to or near(within 24 inches of) exterior windows and
surface mounted light fixtures.
b. Surfaces to receive deep tone colors.
2. Level 4: Typical, unless indicated or specified otherwise.
3. Level 3: Provide at the following locations: III
a. Surfaces to receive fabric wall covering.
4. Level 2: Provide at the following locations:
a. Storage rooms.
b. Mechanical rooms.
c. Janitor's closets.
d. Surfaces to receive tile or other thick finish materials applied to gypsum board surfaces.
5. Level 1: Provide at the following locations: II
a. Surfaces of fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished work ("fire-taping").
b. Surfaces of acoustical assemblies concealed form view in the finished work
6. Level 0: Provide at surfaces of non-fire rated assemblies concealed from view in the finished
work, including surfaces to be covered by casework, wood paneling,
D. Level 4 and 5 finishes: Return to the site after primer is applied, and touch-up surface defects.
E. Proprietary skim coat material may be used in lieu of joint compound as skim coat at surfaces
indicated for Level 5 finish.
F. Patch and finish existing gypsum board surfaces to match new surfaces. Finish to nearest joint,
corner, or other break line.
3.5 TOLERANCES
A. Install gypsum board with 1/8 inch in 10 feet maximum variation from plane in any direction.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 092900-4 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 093000 -TILING
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior wall tile.
2. Interior floor tile.
3. Crack isolation membranes.
4. Tile backing board.
5. Screeds.
B. Related Sections:
1. 024119 - Selective Demolition: Preparation of existing substrates.
2. 079200 -Joint Sealants: Expansion joint fillers.
3. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Substrate.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section
016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. A108.1 - Ceramic Tile Installed with Portland Cement Mortar.
2. A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile With Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland
Cement Mortar.
3. A108.6 - Installation of Ceramic Tile With Chemical-Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and
Grouting Epoxy.
4. A108.10- Installation of Grout in Tilework.
5. A108.13- Installation of Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic
Tile and Dimension Stone.
6. A118.3- Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and Grouting Epoxy.
7. A118.4- Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
8. A118.10 - Standard for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-set Ceramic Tile
and Dimension Stone Installation.
9. A137.1 - Ceramic Tile
10. B101.3 -Test Method for Measuring Wet DCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C144-Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
2. C150 - Portland Cement.
3. C206 - Finishing Hydrated Lime.
4. C207 - Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA):
1. Handbook of for Ceramic Tile Installation, current edition.
2. 137.1- Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Expansion Joints: Unless otherwise detailed, expansion joints in tile fields are sealant-filled joints to
accommodate expansion and contraction of tile and possible substrate movement at slab control and
construction joints.
B. Reinforced Waterproofing Membrane: Proprietary waterproofing membrane system installed in
combination with tile application, as part of the ceramic tile work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
TEMPLATE 093000-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 093000 -TILING
B. Product Data: Submit for each type of tile, grout, adhesive, additive, accessory, and membrane
specified.
C. Samples:
1. Tile: Submit samples of each type and color of tile. Include representative range of colors and
finishes to be expected.
D. Certifications:
1. For each type of tile indicated, submit master grade certificates prior to the arrival of the shipment
to the job site.
2. For each type of tile indicated, submit certification that tile has successfully passed ANSI B101.3.
3. Where required by jurisdictional authorities, for each type of tile indicated, submit certification that
tile has successfully passed ANSI 137.1 test method for measuring dynamic coefficient of friction. I
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to ANSI Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile.
B. Pre-Installation Conference: 111
1. In accordance with Section 013119, schedule and administer a meeting to review and discuss the
tile installation a minimum of one week (7 calendar days) prior to start of setting tile.
2. Require in attendance, the tile installer, and other parties affected by work of this Section.
3. Agenda: Address installation scheduling and procedures, coordination, preparation and
protection requirements, grout and expansion joint locations, tile quantities required, material and
installation tolerances, overage required for waste, overage for maintenance stock, sealant joint
locations.
C. Tile backing board shall be in compliance with requirements of local jurisdictional authorities.
D. Finished tile floor shall meet the dynamic coefficient of friction requirements specified.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
1.7 GUARANTY
A. In accordance with Section 017700, furnish from the tile installer, a two year written guaranty,
executed to the Owner, against defects in workmanship and materials.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Stock: Furnish extra stock as required by Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TILE
A. Tile Types:
1. Furnish tile manufactured in accordance with ANSI A137.1.
2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42 in accordance with ASNI B101.3.
3. Types as indicated on the drawings.
B. Special Shapes: Unless otherwise indicated or specified, furnish special shapes as standard with the
tile manufacturer for uniform transitions and concealed edges in the finished installation. Special
shapes include bullnoses, double bullnoses, corner bullnoses, and cove assemblies.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Setting Materials:
1. Thinset Mortar: Latex modified; "Kerabond"with "Universal Keralastic" by Mapei Corp., "211
Crete Filler Powder"with "4237 Latex Thin-set Mortar Additive," by Laticrete International, Inc.,
Hydroment"Tile-Mate Premium"with "447 Flex-a-lastic" by Bostik, or approved.
1
TEMPLATE 093000-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 093000 -TILING
I 2. Rapid-Set Thin Bed Mortar: Latex modified; "Grani/Rapid"with "KER 318" Flexible Admixture" by
Mapei Corp., Hydroment"Single Flex FS," by Bostik, or"211 Crete Filler Powder"with "4237
Latex Thin-set Mortar Additive" and "101 Rapid Set Latex"(proportions as recommended by the
I manufacturer for the setting time required)," by Laticrete International, Inc..
3. Medium Bed Mortar: "Grani/Rapid" by Mapei Corp., Hydroment"Medium Bed Mortar" by Bostik,
or"226 Thick Bed Mortar Mix"with "3701 Latex Mortar Admix," by Laticrete International, Inc., or
approved.
I 4. Rapid Set Medium Bed Mortar: "Grani/Rapid" by Mapei Corp., or"211 Crete Filler Powder"with
"3701 Latex Mortar Admix" and "101 Rapid Set Latex"(proportions as recommended by the
manufacturer for the setting time required), by Laticrete International, Inc., or approved.
I B. Cementitious Sanded Grout:
1. Fast Setting: "Ultra/Color" by Mapei Corp., "Floor Joint and Grout Filler"with "3701 Latex Mortar
Admixture"and "101 Rapid Set Latex", by Laticrete International, Inc. (proportions as
recommended by the manufacturer for the setting time required); sanded, except unsanded at
I joints scheduled at 1/16 inch wide.
2. Standard Grout: "Keracolor S" by Mapei Corp., or"1500 Series Sanded Grout"with "1776 Grout
Admix Plus;" "101 Rapid Set Latex", by Laticrete International, Inc., Hydroment"Ceramic Tile
Grout/Joint Filler"with "425 Flexible Grout Admixture" by Bostik; sanded, except unsanded at
I joints scheduled at 1/16 inch wide.
3. Colors: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard line.
C. Cementitious Unsanded Grout:
I 1. Standard Grout: "Keracolor U" by Mapei Corp., or"1600 Series Unsanded Grout"with "1776
Grout Admix Plus" or"101 Rapid Set Latex", by Laticrete International, Inc., Hydroment"Ceramic
Tile Grout/Joint Filler"with "425 Flexible Grout Admixture" by Bostik.
2. Colors: As selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standard line.
it.
D. Epoxy Grout: Mapei "Kerapoxy," Bostik Hydroment"100% Solids Epoxy Grout," Laticrete International
Inc. "Latapoxy SP100,"or approved. Colors as selected from manufacturer's standard.
I E. Crack Isolation Membrane: One of the following.
1. "NobleSeal CIS," by The Noble Company; reinforced CPE sheet membrane; 36"width;
NobleBond 21 adhesive.
2. "Dal-Seal CIS." By Dal-Tile Corp.
I 3. "ECB Membrane," by N.A.C. Products Inc.; self bonding reinforced modified asphalt sheet
membrane; 36"width.
4. "Mapelastic SM" by the Mapei Corp.
I F. Tile Backing Board and Accessories:
1. Cementitious Backing Board:
a. 1/2 inch nominal thickness aggregated portland cement panel, reinforced with glass fiber
mesh;
Rb. "Durock Brand Cement Board" by USG (800-874-8968, "Wonderboard" by Custom Building
Products (800-272-8786), or approved.
2. Gypsum Backing Board: Georgia Pacific (800-225-6119) "DensShield,"or approved; 5/8 inch
thickness.
I 3. Joint Tape: Open weave glass mesh joint tape, self-adhesive; 2-1/2 inches wide.
4. Fasteners: As recommended by the backing board manufacturer; thread forming self-drilling
wafer head screws; polymer coated or zinc plated; USG "Durock Screws,""Rock-On,"or
approved.
G. Grout Release: High-performance water-soluble; one of the following or approved:
1. "Ultra Care Grout Release" by Mapei.
2. "aqua Mix Grout Release" by Custom Building Products.
I H. Metal Screed: As manufactured by Schluter Systems, Inc. (800/225-8902), Ceramic Tool Company,
(800/236-5230), or Blanke Corporation (800/787-5055); anodized aluminum tile edging trim; sizes as
required for installation of top of screed flush with top of tile, as detailed.
RI. Curing Paper: Fortifiber"All Purpose Building Paper,"or approved; do not use polyethylene or
products containing bituminous materials.
ITEMPLATE 093000-3 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 093000 -TILING
PART 3 - EXECUTION I
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. Verify that locations of expansion joints, control joints, and construction joints in substrate correspond
to tile expansion joint locations. 111
D. Where cementitious backing board is indicated as substrate for wainscot, shim as necessary to align
with gypsum board above.
3.2 PREPARATION I
A. Clean substrate surfaces free of grease, dirt, dust, organic impurities, and other materials which would
impair bond. Where curing agents have been used mechanically abrade or shotblast substrate
surface.
3.3 TILE BACKING BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Use cementitious backing board, except where gypsum backing board is indicated.
B. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Install units with edges firmly supported.
D. Screw attach units with 1 inch long drywall screws spaced 6 inches on center along framing.
E. Install fiberglass reinforcing tape at joints between panels. Completely embed in a thin set mortar bed.
Trowel mortar smooth with adjacent surfaces.
3.4 SLAB LEVELING
A. Prior to installation of thinset floor tile, where local irregularities in the substrate surface would prevent
level installation of the tile, the substrate shall be brought to plane surface with variations not to exceed
1/8 inch in 4 feet(cumulative) and 1/4 inch in 10 feet(non-cumulative). Smooth abrupt changes in
plane.
B. Use thinset mortar or other cementitious filler for slab leveling. Other fillers are subject to
endorsement by the setting mortar manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's letter of approval to the
Architect, and the Owner's Representative.
C. Screed or float to appropriate thickness and specified surface tolerance. Allow to set prior to
proceeding with installation. Do not exceed the maximum thicknesses for thin bed mortar as
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A. Install crack isolation membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, unless indicated I
or specified otherwise.
B. Provide crack isolation membrane at following locations:
1. At control and construction joints in concrete floors.
2. At changes in substrate materials.
3. On each side of building floor joint cover assemblies installed in grouted pockets; extend a
minimum of 12 inches beyond grouted pocket.
4. Shrinkage cracks 1/16 inch or larger in slabs.
C. Extend a minimum of 12 inches each side of crack or joint.
D. Do not apply crack isolation membrane at joints which will be reflected as expansion joints in the tile.
TEMPLATE 093000-4 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 093000 -TILING
E. Omit crack isolation at floors indicated for waterproof membrane.
F. Substrate Examination:
1. Substrates are subject to examination by the Owner and the Architect prior to installation of tile or
slab leveling materials. Furnish a minimum of 7 days notice.
2. The examination will determine the need for additional crack isolation membrane at shrinkage
cracks and other special conditions.
3. Provide additional crack isolation membrane in locations as directed, in accordance with
provisions of Section 012200.
3.6 TILE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE INSTALLATION
A. Install waterproof membranes in strict accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and in
accordance with ANSI A108.13.
B. Install waterproof membranes at all locations with occupied space below, or when required by landlord
in a leased property.
C. At slab on grade locations, install waterproof membranes only along the perimeter of tile areas.
Extend the membrane up the wall and a minimum of 12 inches out onto the floor surface.
D. At above grade locations, install waterproof membrane completely over floor surfaces indicated, and
up the wall.
E. Where the waterproof membrane is extended up the wall, extend to one tile height. Do not expose the
waterproof membrane to view.
F. Protect waterproof membrane from damage until after tile installation is complete.
G. Install waterproof membrane into clamping ring of floor drain when applicable.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF TILE
A. Interior Floor Application -Thinset over Concrete Substrate and Concrete Substrates with Waterproof
or Crack Isolation Membrane.
1. TCNA System: F113 or F122 at Waterproof Membranes.
2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.5.
3. Setting Materials: Thinset mortar; 3/32 inch minimum thickness.
4. Use cementitious sanded grout unless indicated otherwise.
5. Use epoxy grout at service areas behind counters.
B. Interior Floor Application -Thickset Over Concrete Substrate:
1. TCNA System: F112.
2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.1.
3. Bond Coat: Thinset mortar over thickset mortar bed; 3/32 inch minimum thickness.
4. Slope the mortar bed evenly to the floor drains.
5. Use cementitious sanded grout unless specified otherwise.
6. Use epoxy grout at service areas behind counters.
C. Wall Application - Gypsum Board Substrate:
1. TCNA System: Similar to W243.
2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.5.
3. Setting Materials: Thinset mortar.
4. Use cementitious sanded grout unless indicated otherwise.
D. Wall Application -Tile Backing Board:
1. TCNA System: Similar to W244.
2. Installation Standard: ANSI A108.5.
3. Setting Materials: Thinset mortar.
1 4. Use cementitious sanded grout unless indicated otherwise.
E. Joint Pattern:
1. Lay out tile pattern prior to commencing tile installation.
2. Accurately locate grout joints on lines indicated; where not indicated, adjust grout joints within
specified tolerances to minimize use of cut tiles at field edges.
TEMPLATE 093000-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 093000 -TILING
3. Where cut tiles are necessary, position tile such that cut tile at each edge of each rectilinear field
is not less than half of a full size unit, unless indicated otherwise.
F. Tiles which exhibit directional patterns shall be set with grain direction as indicated on the shop
drawings, or, if not indicated, as directed by the Architect.
G. Install tiles aligned with adjacent finishes, where indicated. Provide mortar fill as necessary for proper
alignment.
H. Clean joints of mortar to minimum depth of 1/4 inch to allow subsequent grout installation. I
I. Provide temporary setting buttons and shims as necessary to maintain wall tiles in position until setting
mortar has set.
J. Tolerances: I
1. Joint Width Variation: Plus or minus 25% of the proposed joint width.
2. Taper: Plus or minus 25 percent from one end to the other.
3. No portion of a tile surface shall vary more than 1/16 inch above or below an adjacent tile surface.
4. Install tile fields level to within tolerance specified for finished substrate.
K. Special Requirements for Large Format Tiles (8 x 8 inch size or larger):
1. Wash backs of each tile to remove dust and soil that would compromise adhesion.
2. Dampen substrate as necessary to prevent excessive suction.
3. Key the mortar into the substrate with the flat side of the trowel.
4. Comb mortar over the previously keyed substrate in one direction using the notch side of the
trowel.
5. Firmly press each tile into the mortar. Press down and move the tile back and forth
111
perpendicularly across the ridges approximately 1/8 to 1/4 inch to flatten the ridges and fill in the
valleys of the combed mortar.
6. Set tiles in accurate alignment.
L. Screed Installation:
1. Install screeds at tile field edges at the locations indicated.
2. Accurately cut to length for flush tightly butted joints. Provide miter cut angle joints. Remove
burrs at field cuts.
3. Install in longest possible lengths, except that no screed section shall be longer than 12 feet or
shorter than 4 feet in length for continuous runs greater than 16 feet.
4. Install screeds free from waves and variations in height, flush with top of adjacent tile surfaces.
5. Set screeds directly in setting bed as the tile installation proceeds. Comply with screed
manufacturer's instructions to achieve mortar tightly compacted between screed and tile edge.
6. Grind screed joints as necessary to correct minor misalignment and to ease sharp outside
corners.
3.8 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Place expansion joints at maximum 30 foot intervals for interior installations.
B. Place expansion joints at control and expansion joints in concrete slabs, and at intersections with walls
and columns.
C. Joint Sizes: Set to match width of typical grouted joint; but in no case less than 1/4".
D. Leave expansion joints free of mortar.
E. Sealant materials and installation are specified in Section 079200.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Comply with provisions of ANSI A108.10.
B. Apply grout release to tiles prior to grouting. Use on all natural stone, non-glazed porcelain/ceramic
tiles, masonry and quarry tiles. Use also at rough, textured and other difficult-to-grout surfaces. Use at
all epoxy grout installations.
C. Mix grouts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
TEMPLATE 093000-6 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 093000 -TILING
I D. Grout joints, except expansion joints, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Float
joints to a slightly concave profile.
E. Remove excess grout from tile surfaces in accordance with the grout and tile manufacturer's
I
recommendations. Do not use excess amounts of water.
F. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage caused by cleaning agents. Do not use cleaners which would
damage tile or grout surfaces.
I G. Do not grout joints indicated to receive sealants, including inside right angle corner joints between
floors and walls of column bases. Grout joints perpendicular to expansion joints shall be finished flush
with tile edges.
IH. Remove grout release from affected tiles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Cured grout joints shall be made free of efflorescence, prior to sealing.
I J. Only use epoxy grout behind counters in service areas.
3.10 CURING
A. Cure installation in accordance with the grout manufacturer's recommendations. Protect tile and grout
I during curing operations.
B. Protect tile surfaces during curing. Keep traffic off tile surfaces for a minimum of 4 days, unless
I recommended otherwise by the grout or mortar manufacturer.
I C. Do not allow the operation of walk-in coolers and freezers for a minimum of 14 days after tile
installation in these areas.
3.11 PROTECTION
I� A. Protect tile installations from damage, in accordance with Section 015000.
B. Replace damaged tiles.
I 3.12 CLEANING
A. In accordance with Section 015000 and Section 017700.
B. Coordinate final cleaning with work of Section 079200. Do not begin cleaning operations until tile
Iexpansion joints sealants are fully cured.
C. Where grout staining has occurred, clean tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
ID. Prior to substantial completion, wash and thoroughly rinse tile. Leave tile surfaces clean.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
ITEMPLATE 093000-7 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Suspended acoustical ceilings.
B. Related Sections:
1. 092200—Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Adjacent overhead structure.
2. 092900- Gypsum Board: Adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000. Requests for substitution of ceiling panels shall be accompanied by samples of each
proposed panel.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A641-98 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire
2. E84 -Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
B. International Building Code (IBC)
C. Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA)
1. Recommendations for Direct Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings—Seismic
Zones 0-2.
2. Guidelines for Seismic Restraint Direct Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings—Seismic
Zones 3&4.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to the requirements of IBC, seismic design category as stated on construction documents
and the requirements of the jurisdictional code authorities.
B. Suspension system components shall be in compliance with requirements of local jurisdictional
authorities for ceiling suspension systems, as applicable
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature of 60 degrees F, minimum, and humidity of 70 percent, maximum, prior to,
during, and after installation.
1.6 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING
A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating
activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved.
B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
1.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Furnish 5 percent extra quantity of acoustical panel units under provisions of Section 017700.
B. Store above ceiling in Workroom.
I
TEMPLATE 095113-1 10/12/18
ISTARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
1,; SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
IPART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Exposed T System: ASTM C635, heavy duty classification; direct hung; exposed "T" design; factory
baked on finish to match acoustical panels. Furnish stabilizer bars, splices, edge and wall moldings,
and other items as necessary to complete suspended ceiling grid system.
1. Wall Moldings: 2 inch flange.
I 2. Furnish stabilizer bars, splices, edge moldings, and other items as necessary to complete
suspended ceiling grid system.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS
111 A. Acoustic panels are scheduled on the Drawings.
B. Panels shall meet a flame spread of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
I 2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Suspension Accessories:
1. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641; soft temper; prestretched; 12 gage; zinc coated.
I2. Carrying Channels: 16 ga x 1-1/2" cold rolled steel; galvanized.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Notify the Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
J B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
I conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. Ensure hangers are located to accommodate
I fittings and units of equipment which are to be placed after the installation of ceiling grid system.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEMS
A. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete.
I B. Install system in accordance with IBC as amended by local jurisdictional authorities, as stated on the
construction documents, the manufacturer's instructions, and as supplemented in this Section.
C. Install grid to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels indicated,within the specified tolerances.
ID. Install suspension systems in a manner to support all superimposed loads,with maximum permissible
deflection of 1/270 of span. At locations where partitions extend to ceiling, only, install supplementary
diagonal bracing to structure at maximum 8'-0"o.c. along length of partition, and above each door
I hinge and strike jamb
E. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where ducts or other
equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, provide secondary carrying members for indirect
I support of the suspension system, or reinforce the nearest adjacent hangers and related carrying
channels as required to span the required distance.
F. Center system on room axis according to reflected ceiling plans.
I G. Anchorage:
1. Provide all anchors required for the installation of the ceiling system.
2. Do not fasten to the upper flutes of metal decking. Do not use fasteners in steel deck which
I penetrate more than 1 inch.
3. Verify location of all conduit in poured concrete construction before making attachments.
1 TEMPLATE 095113-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 095113 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
H. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths.
Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Fabricate edge moldings toII
fit the surfaces encountered.
I. Form expansion joints as detailed. Maintain visual closure.
J. Fit acoustic lay-in panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to
appearance and function. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces. Scribe and mill recessed
tegular edge into partial border units supported at edge by wall molding.
K. Adjust sags or twists which develop in the ceiling system and replace parts which are damaged or
defective.
L. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 20 ft of an exterior door.
M. Tolerances:
1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 ft.
2. Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum.
3.4 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove fingerprints and soil from ceiling materials. Use cleaning materials recommended by the
manufacturer of the ceiling materials. I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 095113-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 097200 -WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Wall coverings.
B. Related Sections:
1. 092900- Gypsum Board: Substrate.
2. 099023— Interior Painting and Coating: Primer for substrates to receive wall covering.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitutions will be considered only under the terms and conditions of Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84-Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300, unless specified otherwise.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit product data on proposed adhesives and accessories.
2. Provide MSDS sheets or other evidence that shows compliance to sustainability requirements for
adhesives.
C. Samples: Submit minimum 12 x 12 inch samples of each wall covering proposed.
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certification: Submit certification that all fabric which does not meet flame spread requirements
has been fire retardant treated to meet the requirements specified.
E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit product information and maintenance instructions as a part of
Operation and Maintenance Data submittals specified in Section 017700.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Wall Covering Installer: Minimum of 3 years experience in wall covering installations of similar size
and scope. Able to show evidence of experience when requested by the Architect.
B. Pre-installation Meeting:
1. In accordance with Section 013119.
2. Schedule a conference a minimum of 10 calendar days prior to the installation of the wall
covering.
3. Review installation, including locations of each fabric type, substrate requirements, installation
procedures and methods, and scheduling. Address all conditions and situations which would
adversely affect the wall covering application.
4. Attendance: Contractor, wall covering installer, and all other parties affected by the work of this
section.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
B. Store wall covering materials flat, not upright, in a dry area. Maintain temperature of storage area at a
minimum of 45 degrees F., unless a higher temperature is recommended by wall covering
manufacturer.
TEMPLATE
097200-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 097200 -WALL COVERINGS I
1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS I
A. Temperature:
1. Do no wall covering work until surfaces and materials have been maintained at 60 degrees F.
minimum, or higher if recommended by wall covering manufacturer, for 3 days before work
begins.
2. Maintain minimum or above temperatures during the entire installing time and until adhesives
have fully dried or cured.
B. Lighting: During installation, maintain minimum lighting level of 15 foot-candles on the surfaces to
receive wall covering. Use temporary lighting, if necessary, to attain specified level.
C. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation during the work and until adhesives have fully
dried or cured.
1.7 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Materials: Furnish extra stock as required by the Construction Manager.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WALL COVERING I
A. Types as scheduled on the Drawings.
B. All wall coverings shall have a maximum flame spread of 75 or less when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84. Fire retardant treat all nonconforming wall covering. Treatment shall not alter the
appearance of the fabric.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Adhesives:
1. Use adhesives as recommended by the wall covering manufacturer for the application.
2. Sustainability Requirements: Adhesives shall meet the requirements of the Southern California
South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of
250 grams/liter, using the method of dividing the weight of the solvent in the adhesive by the
volume of the material, less water).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate and notify the Architect of unacceptable conditions which would prevent a 1
satisfactory installation. Unacceptable conditions include, without limitation, cracks, voids, ridges, oils,
grease, moisture, porosity, indelible and water soluble crayon, ball or felt tip pen marks, and foreign
materials.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
C. Ensure that surfaces to receive wall covering have received a coat of wall size as specified in Section
099023.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Schedule work such that the subsequent work of other sections will not damage the work of this
section.
B. Verify the type, pattern, color, and quantity of each type wall covering for each location scheduled to
receive wall covering.
C. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, registers, surface
hardware, fittings, and fastenings prior to starting work; store during and replace after work.
TEMPLATE 097200-2 10/12/18 I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 097200 -WALL COVERINGS
I D. Protection: Provide sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent wall covering
materials from fouling adjacent surfaces, and in particular at storage and preparation areas.
E. At existing painted surfaces, evenly roughen with a medium grit garnet paper, wash with well-diluted
Ihousehold detergent, wipe clear water, allow to dry, and size with wall covering adhesive.
3.3 WALL COVERING INSTALLATION
I A. Mix and apply adhesives in strict accordance with the adhesive manufacturer's directions for the type
of material being applied.
B. Install wall covering secure, smooth, clean, and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps.
IC.
Extend wall covering continuously behind such items as mirrors, and other items which are close to
but not touching walls.
D. Install wall covering where scheduled in strict accordance with the wall covering manufacturer's
I recommendations.
E. Provide double-cut seams on nonmatch patterns; butt seams on match patterns.
F. Install wall covering oriented vertically, unless otherwise indicated. Horizontal seams are not
Ipermitted.
G. Corner Seams: Make no seams within 6 inches of an inside or outside corner, except where a color or
pattern change is indicated. Lap wall coverings at inside corner seams to prevent substrate show
Ithrough.
H. Fabrics:
1. Use fabric rolls in consecutive numerical sequence of manufacture.
2. Place fabric sections consecutively in exact order in which they are cut from the roll including
Ifilling all spaces above or below windows, doors, or similar penetrations.
3. Trim patterned fabrics which are not factory pretrimmed on a work table with a straight edge and
an industrial razor blade for exact pattern match.
3.4 CLEANUP
A. Remove all adhesives, and other contaminants in a manner which will not damage the surface from
which it is removed.
IB. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
C. Replace all removed wall plates and other accessories.
I D. Repair to like-new condition, or replace as directed by the Construction Manager, all surfaces
damaged by work of this Section.
3.5 EXCESS YARDAGE
I A. Notify the Construction Manager prior to removing excess yardage from the job. The Construction
Manager will select the materials which are to be retained by the Owner.
B. Carefully wrap the excess yardage selected to be retained. Deliver to a location as directed by the
IConstruction Manager. Remove remainder from the site and dispose of legally.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
IlTEMPLATE 097200-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 097733—REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Reinforced plastic panel wall covering.
2. Adhesives, sealants, and related accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. 064000—Architectural Woodwork: Honeycombed resin panels
2. 092900- Gypsum Board: Substrate.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): E84-Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300. 1
B. Product Data:
1. Product literature on adhesives and sealants to be used in conjunction with panel system
installation.
2. Manufacturer's product literature for system components.
C. Samples:
1. Three samples of wall paneling material proposed for the work; 3 x 4 inch minimum size.
2. One each of each cap, corner, and division molding proposed for the work; minimum 4 inches in
length.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Panel system shall be USDA approved for use in food preparation and service areas.
1.5 SUBCONTRACTOR GUARANTEE
A. Furnish Subcontractor Guarantees in accordance with Section 017700. 1
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of Section 016000.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 60 degrees F and relative humidity as prescribed by the adhesive
manufacturer, during installation, and until installed adhesive is fully cured.
B. Allow no containers of adhesive to be opened until all potential sources of flame or spark have been
shut down or extinguished and until warnings against their ignition during adhesive application have
been posted. I
C. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of solvent based adhesive.
I
I
TEMPLATE 097733-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 097733— REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANEL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Panel Material:
1. Manufacturer/Type:
a. Marlite Brand Class I/A Fire Rated FRP by Marlite (Dover, OH 330/343-6621); color as
scheduled in the Finish Legend.
b. Fire-X Glasbord with Surfaseal, by Kemlite Company(Joliet, IL 800/435-0080); color as
scheduled in the Finish Legend.
2. Panel Type: Fiberglass reinforced polyester panels, with embossed textured face.
3. Thickness: 3/32 inch.
4. Size: 48 inches x length required for conditions indicated.
5. Fire Rating: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Moldings: Manufacturer's standard PVC cap, corner, and division moldings; color to match panels.
C. Adhesive:
1. Sustainability Requirements: Adhesives shall meet the requirements of the Southern California
South Coast Air Quality Management District(SCAQMD) Rule 1168. (maximum VOC content of
250 grams/liter, using the method of dividing the weight of the solvent in the adhesive by the
volume of the material, less water).
2. For Panel Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 or C-551 Construction Adhesive by Marlite, or 444
Non-Flammable F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company,
3. For Molding Installation: Marlite Brand C-375 C-551 Adhesive by Marlite, or 444 Non-Flammable
F.R.P. Panel Adhesive by W. W. Henry Company.
4. Furnish adhesive spreaders with 3/16 inch V-notches, 5/16 inch apart for application of adhesive
to panels.
1 D. Sealant: Flexible waterproof sealant for bedding panel edges, Marlite Brand Silicone Sealant MS-251
by Marlite, or Silicone Sealant S255C by Kemlite Company.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDITION OF SURFACES
A. Substrate: Verify that drywall substrate is clean, dry, solid, straight, and free from projections.
B. Where conditions require installation of paneling prior to installation of flooring, coordinate with other
trades to establish accurate location of top of base.
C. Do not start work until other work requiring penetration of wall covering has been completed, or
accurately located.
D. Commencement of plastic paneling wall covering work constitutes installer's acceptance of the
substrate.
3.2 CUTTING AND FITTING
A. Cut panels accurately to size with proper allowance for expansion and moldings.
B. Sand or file all edges smooth without chipping.
C. Cut openings for penetrations in accurate location with approximate 1/8 inch clearance around
penetrations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install base molding to wall at proper elevation, in solid bed of adhesive. Allow adhesive to set
thoroughly prior to installation of paneling.
B. Seal base molding to top of wall base.
I
TEMPLATE 097733-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY 1
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 097733—REINFORCED PLASTIC PANEL WALL COVERINGS 1
C. Establish centerline of each distinct flat area to be covered. Trim division moldings to mate with base
moldings; install in solid bed of adhesive, either on centerline, or offset 24inches from center, as
necessary to maximize panel widths at corners. Molding shall be installed straight and plumb.
D. Cut top cap and division or corner moldings to shape, with edges trimmed to fit to adjacent moldings.
E. Apply sealant into installed moldings in sequence with panel installation.
F. Apply adhesive to backs of panels in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Maintain lines and levels of panel edges and moldings. I
H. Allow 1/8 inch gap between top cap, corner, or division molding posts, and panel edge; all edges shall
be firmly bedded to the moldings in sealant.
I. Promptly remove sealant squeeze out with a damp cloth, as work progresses; remove adhesive with
appropriate solvent.
J. Install sealant behind flanges and at penetrations through paneling, and between top cap of panel and
substrate.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Inspect surfaces of paneling and remove excess adhesive from face of laminate using solvent
recommended by manufacturer.
B. Promptly remove unused cut pieces from the site.
C. Prior to substantial completion of each area where reinforced plastic panel wall covering is installed, I
clean all surfaces of plastic panels, using procedures recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 097733-3 10/12/18 1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 098100 -ACOUSTIC INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Acoustical insulation in walls.
2. Acoustical sealant.
B. Related Sections:
1. 072100 -Thermal Insulation: Thermal batt and blanket insulation.
2. 078400 - Firestopping: Fire rated penetration seals.
3. 078500 - Fire Rated Joint Assemblies: Fire rated joint assemblies at acoustical construction.
4. 092200—Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Support framing.
5. 095123—Acoustical Panel Ceilings.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C665- Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured
Housing.
2. E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product data for each product.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical insulation shall be in compliance with local jurisdictional authorities as applicable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665, Type I; unfaced glass fiber batts, blankets, or rolls; minimum fire
hazard classification rating of 25/50 per ASTM E84; minimum 3-1/2-inch thick, unless required
otherwise to meet the STC requirements indicated or specified; formaldehyde free.
1. For Installation in Stud Walls: Widths to friction-fit between studs
B. Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, low-shrinkage; for use in conjunction with gypsum board; similar
to USG "Sheetrock Brand Acoustical Sealant,"Tremco "Acoustical Sealant 30CTG," Quiet Solution
(Sunnyvale CA; ; 408-541-8000) "QuietSeal QS-350,"or approved; maximum VOC content 250g/L.
C. Accessories: Furnish other accessories such as fasteners and retainers, not specifically described,
but required for a complete installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.
B. Notify the Construction Manager in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
TEMPLATE 098100-1 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 098100 -ACOUSTIC INSULATION I
C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Verify that adjacent materials are secure, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.
B. Verify that mechanical and electrical services within spaces to be insulated have been installed and
tested.
I
C. Furnish acoustical insulation to hollow metal installer for installation in hollow metal frames in
acoustical partitions.
3.3 INSTALLATION i
A. Install insulation in stud cavities in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as indicated.
Coordinate with other trades as necessary to complete acoustical barriers at wall penetrations.
B. Install insulation without gaps or voids.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use insulation materials free of damage.
D. Sealant:
1. Install acoustical sealant continuously around perimeter of all acoustically insulated partitions; one
continuous bead at each side of framing member interface with substrate.
2. Except for penetrations in fire rated construction to receive firestopping or fire rated construction
joint assemblies, seal all penetrations through acoustical assemblies, including cutouts for lighting
fixtures, cabinets, pipes and plumbing, HVAC ducts, and electrical boxes.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 098100-2 10/12/18
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 099013—EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
II
PART 1 -GENERAL
I 1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Site applied exterior paint coatings.
B. Related Sections:
I 1. 055000- Metal Fabrications: Pre-primed metal surfaces.
2. 064000 -Architectural Woodwork: Shop finished materials.
3. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Preprimed metal surfaces.
4. 099023 - Interior Painting And Coating
IC. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
I D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
I A. Master Painters Institute (MPI): Architectural Painting Specification Manual
B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
IA. Sheen: Degree of luster of the dried paint film. Where terms such as "gloss," "semi-gloss," "low-
gloss," "matte," "satin," "eggshell,"or"flat," are used, it shall be subject to the Architect's interpretation,
regardless of manufacturer's nomenclature for any particular sheen level. The Architect reserves the
I right to select from any of manufacturer's published sheen levels for each paint system, if sheen of
initial paint finish sample is not approved.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
IA. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Contract Closeout Submittals: Record Paint Samples: In accordance with Section 017700, submit
three 8"x10" samples of each paint and color used, indicating paint manufacturer and formula number;
Ibind in identical sets. Deliver to on site location as directed.
C. Sustainability Submittals:
1. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013546.
I 2. Low-Emitting Materials—Paints and Coatings:
a. Submit a list of paints and coatings used inside the building. Include product name,
manufacturer, and VOC content.
b. For each product submit cut sheets, MSDS sheets, or letters from product manufacturers
Iclearly indicating VOC content.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of three years
documented experience.
B. Environmental Requirements for Solvent Based Paints: Comply with the Environmental Protection
Agency(EPA) requirements for volatile solvents content limitations, as applicable to each classification
Iof coating.
C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen,
orange peel, runs, sags, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches, dust, dirt, bugs, and other
Icontaminants.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
IA. In accordance with Section 016000.
ITEMPLATE 099013-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099013— EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING t
B. Delivery: Deliver paint materials to the jobsite in sealed, original, labeled containers, each bearing
manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and/or
reducing.
C. Storage: Store paint materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in a well ventilated
area. [Adequate storage facilities will be made available at the jobsite. ]
D. Toxic, acidic, and combustible materials: Take all necessary precautionary safety measures as
recommended by the material manufacturers and governing regulations.
E. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers
and daily remove from the site.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Conditions:
1. Do no exterior work on unprotected surfaces when raining, or other moisture is present or
expected, or before applied paints can dry or attain proper cure.
2. Allow wetted surfaces to dry and attain temperatures and condition specified hereinafter before 3
proceeding with previously started work.
B. Temperature:
1. Do not perform painting work when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or
below those temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used.
2. Minimum temperatures for latex finishes: 45 degrees F for interior work and 50 degrees F. for
exterior work, unless approved otherwise.
C. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of minimum 50 foot-candles on the surfaces to be painted or
finished.
D. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation. I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS I
A. Unless specified otherwise, furnish manufacturer's highest grade coating systems by one of the
following manufacturers:
1. Benjamin Moore Paint Company.
2. Pittsburgh Paints.
3. Pratt& Lambert.
4. The Sherwin-Williams Company
5. ICI Paints North America.
2.2 EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Exterior CMU Substrate:
1. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Block Filler: Super SpecMasonry Int/Ext Hi-Build Block Filler(206)
b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Block Filler: "Bloxfil 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler" (52901)
b. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Finish
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Block Filler: "Heavy Duty Block Filler" B42W46
b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat."
B. Exterior Concrete Substrate:
1. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Primer: Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer(169)
b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Primer: #3030 Ultra-Hide Bond Prep, pigmentent bonding primer 1
TEMPLATE 099013-2 10/12/18 1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099013—EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
I b. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Flat Finish
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Primer: "Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer,"A24W300
I b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat."
C. Exterior Wood Substrate (Opaque only)
1. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Primer: Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer(169)
I
b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Primer: "#2000 Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Wood Primer."
I b. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Flat Finish
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Primer: "A-100 Exterior Latex Wood Primer."
b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat."
I D. Cement Plaster or EIFS Substrate
1. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Primer: Super Spec Latex Exterior Primer(169)
I b. Finish: Ultra Spec Exterior Flat Finish (N447)
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Primer: #3030 Ultra-Hide Bond Prep, pigmentent bonding primer
b. Finish: "#2200 Dulux Professional Exterior 100%Acrylic Flat Finish
I 3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Primer: "Loxon Exterior Acrylic Masonry Primer,"A24W300
b. Finish: "A-100 Exterior Latex Flat."
I E. Galvanized Ferrous Metal - Epoxy/Polyurethane System: One of the following
1. Manufacturer: Tnemec Company Inc. (Kansas City, MO; 816-483-3400).
a. Epoxy Primer: "Hi-Build Epoxoline II" Series N69.
b. Polyurethane Finish Coats: Series 1075 "Endura-Shield II"; Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel;
I semi-gloss or satin sheen.
2. Manufacturer: Carboline Company(St. Louis, MO; 314-644-1000; 800-848-4645).
a. Epoxy Primer: "Carbolise 888 "
b. Polyurethane Finish Coats: Carboline 133 HB; semi-gloss or satin sheen.
I 3. Manufacturer: Ameron Protective Coatings (Brea, CA; 714-529-1951).
a. Epoxy Primer: "Amercoat 385."
b. Polyurethane Finish Coats: Amercoat 450SA"; semi-gloss or satin sheen.
I F. Materials not specifically noted and otherwise required for the work, such as linseed oil, shellac,
thinners and the like shall be of a quality not less than that required by manufacturers of the finish
materials used in the work.
1 G. Products for each general purpose shall be compatible. Each system shall be products of one
manufacturer where ever possible.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to
U the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Perform adhesion tests on factory
primed items. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
I B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
I
ITEMPLATE 099013-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099013—EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
3.2 MOISTURE CHECK I
A. Check for excess moisture using an electronic moisture meter. Do not paint materials with moisture
levels which would impair the bonding of finish coatings.
3.3 PROTECTION '
A. Adequately protect surfaces not to be painted, from spills, drips, over painting, and other damage
caused by this work. Include surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas.
B. Hardware and Miscellaneous Items:
1. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, surface hardware,
and fittings prior to starting work.
2. Store, clean and reinstall these items upon completion of work in each area. Use materials and
techniques as necessary to prevent damage to finishes on such items.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces by removing dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants which would I
impair finish adhesion.
B. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed under other Sections:
1. Solvent clean to remove oil and grease. Remove loose rust, and blistered and peeling paint to
bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3.
Immediately retouch damaged or abraded surfaces with compatible primers. Lightly sand all
shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish.
2. Zinc primer or epoxy tie-coat primer may be omitted from field application when same shop-or
mill-applied primer is in good condition and well-bonded.
C. Galvanized Ferrous Metal:
1. Undamaged Surfaces: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC-SP1; abrade surfaces with metal
preparation pad.
2. Damaged Surfaces: Remove loose rust to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in
accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Touch up damaged surfaces with zinc rich primer followed
by epoxy tie-coat.
3. Epoxy primer may be omitted from field application when same shop-or mill-applied primer is in
good condition and well-bonded.
D. Unprimed Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP-1.
2. Commercial blast per SSPC SP6.
E. Wood - Opaque paint finish:
1. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer.
2. Fill all nail holes and cracks. Sand filler smooth and level with wood surface.
F. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Remove all contaminants by washing and wire brushing.
Sandblast if necessary.
G. Concrete to Receive Exterior Concrete Coating System:
1. Remove all traces of efflorescence, oil, dirt, curing compounds, bond breakers, form release
agents, and other materials which would inhibit paint bond.
2. Power wash exterior concrete with non-sudsing bio-degradable detergent at a minimum 1500 psi
pressure, unless recommended otherwise by the coating system manufacturer.
3. Mask concrete panel surfaces to receive sealant.
H. Existing Finished Surfaces To Be Repainted:
1. Remove loose, blistered, scaled, or crazed finishes to bare substrate; feather new work into
existing work. Prepare surfaces to the nearest break line if necessary to blend new finishes with
old finishes.
2. Wash and rinse surfaces with trisodium phosphate and water or other solution required to
remove remaining film, wax, oil, grease, or foreign matter which would impair bond or cause
bleed through.
TEMPLATE 099013-4 10/12/18
ISTARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ISECTION 099013— EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
I 3. Lightly sand, or apply a liquid deglosser on existing semi-gloss and high-gloss finishes before
refinishing.
3.5 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
IA. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general
application procedures and coverage rates.
B. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and
Ihard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise.
C. Tint filler to match stain when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has
set, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface.
ID. Opaque Finishes:
1. Apply number of coats scheduled for each application, except that additional finish coats shall be
applied as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors.
I 2. Apply primer coats untinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each succeeding
coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade).
3. Sand lightly between coats if necessary to achieve required finish.
I E. Rollers for application and backrolling of latex paints shall have a nap of 3/8 inch or less.
F. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except as necessary for
patching damage to factory prime coating.
1
I
G. Epoxy/Urethane Systems: Brush or roller apply, except spray apply at small-dimensioned high-
visibility components such as railings.
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
I A. Concrete - Latex System:
1. System: Two coats: first coat acrylic primer, second coat 100% acrylic exterior latex paint.
2. Sheen: Flat sheen, unless indicated otherwise.
I 3. Application: Exterior concrete surfaces.
B. Concrete Masonry Units - Latex System:
1. System: Two coats: first coat acrylic primer or block filler, second coat 100% acrylic exterior latex
I paint.
2. Sheen: Flat, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Exterior concrete masonry surfaces.
C. Repainting of Cement Plaster and EIFS - Latex System:
I 1. System: Two coats: first coat acrylic primer, second coat exterior latex paint.
2. Sheen: Flat unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Repainting of existing exterior cement plaster or EIFS surfaces.
I D. Concrete - Exterior Concrete Coating System:
1. System: Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations; first coat Tnemec
concrete primer at 8 to 10 mils; second coat concrete finish coat at 3 mils thickness; spray
application.
I 2. Sheen: Flat, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Exterior concrete surfaces as indicated.
E. Non-Galvanized Ferrous Metal -Zinc/Epoxy/Urethane System:
I 1. System: Shop apply one coat of zinc-rich primer; shop-or field apply one coat of epoxy primer to
3 mil minimum thickness; field-apply one coat urethane finish in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Verify compatibility with shop applied primer.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss or satin, unless indicated otherwise.
I3. Application: Use on all exterior non-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces.
F. Galvanized Ferrous Metal - Epoxy/Urethane System:
1. System: Retouch welds and damaged galvanized coatings with zinc primer; apply one coat
Iepoxy primer, and two urethane finish coats in accordance with the manufacturer's
ITEMPLATE 099013-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099013— EXTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING '
recommendations. Verify compatibility with shop applied primer. Apply epoxy primer over all
shop applied primers, unless the specified primer was shop applied.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss or satin, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Use on all exterior galvanized ferrous metal surfaces.
G. Wood - Latex System:
1. System: Three coats; first coat exterior latex primer, second and third coats exterior latex.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Exterior wood trim and other exterior wood surfaces where opaque coating is
indicated.
3.7 CLEANUP
A. As the work proceeds and on completion of the work, promptly remove all sealers, primers, paints and
finishes where spilled, splashed or splattered in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is
removed.
B. Remove masking. 1
C. Clean, or replace with new, all lamps and electrical fixtures damaged by overspray; replace with new
identical components all lighting fixture louvers and reflectors damaged by overspray.
3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide paint colors to match those indicated on the drawings. Where a paint color is listed from a
specific manufacturer, paint products from other approved manufacturers may be used, provided the
color exactly matches the specified color, and the paint system meets the specified requirements.
Where no paint color is indicated, provide color and sheen as selected by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 099013-6 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
' SECTION 099023—INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Site applied interior paint coatings.
B. Related Sections:
' 1. 055000 - Metal Fabrications: Pre-primed metal surfaces.
2. 064000 -Architectural Woodwork: Shop finished materials.
3. 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Preprimed metal surfaces.
' 4. 081400-Wood Doors: Prefinished doors.
5. 097200-Wall Coverings: Finish material over primed surfaces.
6. 099013- Exterior Painting And Coating
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
' sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Master Painters Institute (MPI): Architectural Painting Specification Manual
B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
1.3 DEFINITIONS:
A. Sheen: Degree of luster of the dried paint film. Where terms such as "gloss," "semi-gloss,""low-
gloss," "matte," "satin," "eggshell," or"flat," are used, it shall be subject to the Architect's interpretation,
regardless of manufacturer's nomenclature for any particular sheen level. The Architect reserves the
right to select from any of manufacturer's published sheen levels for each paint system, if sheen of
initial paint finish sample is not approved.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
' B. Contract Closeout Submittals: Record Paint Samples: In accordance with Section 017700, submit
three 8"x10" samples of each paint and color used, indicating paint manufacturer and formula number;
bind in identical sets. Deliver to on site location as directed.
C. Sustainability Submittals:
1. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013546.
2. Low-Emitting Materials— Paints and Coatings:
a. Submit a list of paints and coatings used inside the building. Include product name,
' manufacturer, and VOC content.
b. For each product submit cut sheets, MSDS sheets, or letters from product manufacturers
clearly indicating VOC content.
' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with a minimum of three years
documented experience.
' B. Environmental Requirements for Solvent Based Paints: Comply with the Environmental Protection
Agency(EPA) requirements for volatile solvents content limitations, as applicable to each classification
of coating.
C. Visual Standards: Each distinct area of the finished work shall be free of variations in color and sheen,
orange peel, runs, sags, blistering, checking, cracking, scratches, dust, dirt, bugs, and other
contaminants.
TEMPLATE 099023-1 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099023—INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING '
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I
A. In accordance with Section 016000.
B. Delivery: Deliver paint materials to the jobsite in sealed, original, labeled containers, each bearing
manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, color designation, and instructions for mixing and/or
reducing.
C. Storage: Store paint materials at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F. in a well ventilated
area.
D. Toxic, acidic, and combustible materials: Take all necessary precautionary safety measures as
recommended by the material manufacturers and governing regulations.
E. Place cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers ,
and daily remove from the site.
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature:
1. Do no painting work when surface and air temperatures are below 40 degrees F or below those
temperatures recommended by the manufacturer for the material type used.
2. Minimum temperatures for latex finishes: 45 degrees F for interior work and 50 degrees F. for
exterior work, unless approved otherwise.
B. Lighting: Maintain a lighting level of minimum 50 foot-candles on the surfaces to be painted or
finished.
C. Ventilation: Provide adequate continuous ventilation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I I
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. Unless specified otherwise, furnish manufacturer's highest grade coating systems by one of the
following nationally available manufacturers:
1. Benjamin Moore Paint Company.
2. Pittsburgh Paints.
3. Pratt& Lam bert.
4. The Sherwin-Williams Company.
5. ICI Paints North America.
2.2 INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Interior CMU Substrate-One of the following; colors as scheduled on the Drawings.
1. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Block Filler: Super SpecMasonry Int/Ext Hi-Build Block Filler(206)
b. Finish: Ultra Spec 500 Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Finish (N538)
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Block Filler: "Bloxfil 4000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler" (52901)
b. Finish: LM9300 "Lifemaster 2000" Eggshell.
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Block Filler: "Heavy Duty Block Filler" B42W46
b. Finish: " Harmony 0 VOC B9 Series"
B. Interior Gypsum Board Substrate: One of the following; colors as scheduled on the Drawings. '
1. Manufacturer: ICI Devoe
a. Primer: DR3160 "Wonderpure Primer."
b. Finish: DR3249 "Wonderpure Eggshell."
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Primer: LM9116 "Lifemaster 2000" primer."
b. Finish: LM9300 "Lifemaster 2000" Eggshell."
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Primer: Harmony Primer 0 VOC B11 W900
TEMPLATE 099023-2 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
O
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099023—INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
' b. Finish: Harmony 0 VOC B9 Series; Eggshell sheen
4. Manufacturer: Benjamin Moore Paint Company
a. Primer: Ultra Spec 500 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer(N534)
b. Finish: Ultra Spec 500 Zero VOC Interior Eggshell Finish (N538)
C. Interior Trim Systems—Metal Substrate: One of the following.
1. Manufacturer: ICI Devoe
a. Metal Primer: "Mirrolac" DP 8502 WB; DTM waterborne primer.
b. Finish: DR3349 "Wonderpure SG."
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Metal Primer: "Devflex"4020 DTM waterborne primer.
b. Finish: LM9200 "Lifemaster 2000" S.G.
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Metal Primer: "Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl B66" Universal Acrylic Primer; 2.5—5.0 mils dft 138
g/I VOC
' b. Finish: Pro Classic Waterborne Semi-gloss dft 157 g/I VOC
c. Metal Primer: (DTM waterborne). Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (P29)
d. Finish: (Semi-Gloss) Super Spec HP D.T.M. Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel (P29)
4. Manufacturer: Ameron International.
' a. Metal Primer: "Amercoat 148,"Waterborne Acrylic Primer.
b. Finish: "Amercoat 220,"Waterborne Acrylic Topcoat; semigloss.
D. Acrylic Wall Size: One of the following.
' 1. ICI Devoe "Wonderprime" DR51701 vapor barrier primer/sealer.
2. ICI Dulux"Ultra-Hide" 1060 vapor barrier primer/sealer.
3. Sherwin-Williams "Harmony Primer 0 VOC" B11 W900 .
4. Benjamin Moore Paint Company Super Spec Latex vapor Barrier Primer Sealer(0260)
5. Parker Paint Mfg. Co., Inc. "Perm Gard" Interior Latex Vapor Barrier.
6. Zinsser Co, Inc. (Somerset NJ; (732)469-8100) "Shieldz Universal Pre-Wall Covering Primer";
acrylic primer/sealer
' E. Interior Waterborne Epoxy Systems: One of the following.
1. Manufacturer: Tnemec Company, Inc.
a. Gypsum Board Primer: "Series "151 Elasto-Grip"
b. Metal Primer: "Series 115 Unibond DF"
c. Finish Coat: "Series 113 Tnemec-Tufcoat".
2. Manufacturer: ICI Dulux
a. Gypsum Board Primer: "Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic Gripper Stain Killer Primer-Sealer 3210-
1200."
' b. Metal Primer: "Tru-Glaze-WB 4030 Waterborne Epoxy Primer"
c. Finish Coat: "Tru-glaze 4406 Waterborne Acrylic Epoxy Semi-Gloss."
3. Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams
a. Gypsum Board Primer: "Preprite Classic Primer."
b. Metal Primer: "Procryl Primer"
c. Finish Coat: "Epo-plex Multi-mil WB Epoxy".
2.3 SPECIAL INTERIOR COATINGS
A. Materials not specifically noted and otherwise required for the work, such as linseed oil, shellac,
thinners and the like shall be of a quality not less than that required by manufacturers of the finish
materials used in the work.
' B. Products for each general purpose shall be compatible. Each system shall be products of one
manufacturer where ever possible.
' PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to starting work, inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to
the point where work of this Section may properly commence. Perform adhesion tests on factory
' TEMPLATE 099023-3 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099023—INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
primed items. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable
conditions.
3.2 MOISTURE CHECK
A. Check for excess moisture using an electronic moisture meter. Do not paint materials with moisture
levels which would impair the bonding of finish coatings.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Adequately protect surfaces not to be painted, from spills, drips, over painting, and other damage
I
caused by this work. Include surfaces within the paint storage and preparation areas.
B. Hardware and Miscellaneous Items:
1. Remove electrical outlet and switch plates, mechanical diffusers, escutcheons, surface hardware,
and fittings prior to starting work.
2. Store, clean and reinstall these items upon completion of work in each area. Use materials and
techniques as necessary to prevent damage to finishes on such items.
3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces by removing dirt, dust, grease, oil, moisture, and other contaminants which would
impair finish adhesion.
B. Ferrous Metal Shop Primed under other Sections: Solvent clean to remove oil and grease. Remove
loose rust, and blistered and peeling paint to bare metal by scraping, sanding, and wire brushing in
accordance with SSPC-SP2 and SP3. Immediately retouch damaged or abraded surfaces with
compatible primer. Lightly sand all shop prime painted surfaces to receive paint finish.
C. Wood -Transparent Finish: In accordance with Section 099300.
D. Concrete and Concrete Masonry Units: Remove all contaminants by washing and wire brushing.
Sandblast if necessary.
E. Existing Finished Surfaces To Be Repainted:
1. Remove loose, blistered, scaled, or crazed finishes to bare substrate; feather new work into
existing work. Prepare surfaces to the nearest break line if necessary to blend new finishes with
old finishes.
2. Wash and rinse surfaces with trisodium phosphate and water or other solution required to
remove remaining film, wax, oil, grease, or foreign matter which would impair bond or cause
bleed through.
3. Lightly sand, or apply a liquid deglosser on existing semi-gloss and high-gloss finishes before
refinishing.
3.5 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Unless specified or indicated otherwise, follow paint manufacturer's label directions for general
application procedures and coverage rates.
B. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Make sure each coat of finish is dry and
hard before a following coat is applied unless the manufacturer's directions state otherwise.
C. Tint filler to match stain when clear finishes are specified; work filler well into grain and, before it has
set, working perpendicularly to the grain, wipe the excess from the surface.
D. Opaque Finishes:
1. Apply number of coats scheduled for each application, except that additional finish coats shall be
applied as necessary for complete hiding of substrate colors.
2. Apply primer coats untinted. Where more than one coat of paint is required, tint each succeeding
coat up to the final coat similar in tint, but slightly lighter in value (shade).
TEMPLATE 099023-4 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099023— INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
3. Sand lightly between coats if necessary to achieve required finish.
E. Rollers for application and backrolling of latex paints shall have a nap of 3/8 inch or less.
F. Where roller texture is scheduled for application to gypsum board surfaces, finish coats may be roller-
applied, or spray applied and backrolled at Contractor's option.
G. Factory Primed Surfaces: Apply scheduled finish system, less primer coat, except at metal
' fabrications scheduled for low VOC Acrylic/Polyurethane System or as necessary for patching damage
to factory prime coating.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SYSTEMS
A. Gypsum Board, Gypsum Plaster, and GFRG - Latex System:
1. System: Three coats -first coat latex primer sealer(untinted), second and third coat latex paint.
2. Sheen: Roller texture, satin sheen, except provide flat sheen at light coves, ceilings, skylight
areas, clerestory areas, interior fascias, and other light sensitive surfaces. Verify locations of
' each sheen with Architect before proceeding with work.
3. Application:
a. Use on all exposed gypsum board, plaster, and GFRG surfaces, including the exposed
portions of wall surfaces between adjacent fabric covered panels and mirrors.
' b. Provide prime coat only behind permanently mounted mechanically anchored mirrors, fabric
panels, and similar elements.
c. Do not apply primer or paint coatings to surfaces to receive adhesively mounted mirrors or
tile.
B. Gypsum Board -Surfaces to Receive Wall covering: Apply one coat of acrylic wall size.
C. Gypsum Wall Board - Epoxy System:
I1. System: Three coats -first coat manufacturer's recommended primer sealer, and second and
third coats epoxy coating.
2. Sheen: Semi-Gloss, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Gypsum board wall surfaces as scheduled on the Drawings.
D. Ferrous Metal and Galvanized -Acrylic System:
1. System: Three coats; first coat acrylic DTM primer; second and third coats latex finish. The
primer may be omitted at factory primed surfaces unless otherwise indicated, except as
' necessary to recoat damaged or abraded preprimed surfaces.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Interior ferrous metal surfaces including hollow steel metal doors and frames,
overhead doors and frames, access doors and panels, and fire extinguisher cabinets.
E. Ferrous Metal and Galvanized -Acrylic System:
1. System: Three coats; first coat acrylic DTM primer; second and third coats latex finish. The
primer may be omitted at factory primed surfaces, except as necessary to recoat damaged or
abraded preprimed surfaces.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Interior ferrous metal surfaces including hollow steel metal doors and frames,
overhead doors and frames, access doors and panels, and fire extinguisher cabinets.
F. Concrete Masonry Units- Latex System:
1. System: 2 coats-first coat alkyd or latex primer or block filler, second coat exterior latex.
2. Sheen: Semi-gloss sheen, unless indicated otherwise.
3. Application: Interior exposed CMU walls, except as specified otherwise.
3.7 CLEANUP
A. As the work proceeds and on completion of the work, promptly remove all sealers, primers, paints and
' finishes where spilled, splashed or splattered in a manner not to damage the surface from which it is
removed.
B. Remove masking.
TEMPLATE 099023-5 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 099023—INTERIOR PAINTING AND COATING
C. Clean, or replace with new, all lamps and electrical fixtures damaged by overspray; replace with new
identical components all lighting fixture louvers and reflectors damaged by overspray.
3.8 COLOR SCHEDULE
A. Provide paint colors to match those indicated on the drawings. Where a paint color is listed from a '
specific manufacturer, paint products from other approved manufacturers may be used, provided the
color exactly matches the specified color, and the paint system meets the specified requirements.
Where no paint color is indicated, provide color and sheen as selected by the Architect.
END OF SECTION
1
t
TEMPLATE 099023-6 10/12/18
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2. Cabinets.
B. Related Sections:
1. 092200—Lightgage Metal Support Framing: Rough framing.
2. 092900 - Gypsum Board: Adjacent finishes.
3. 099023— Interior Painting and Coating: Field paint finish.
C. Drawings, the provisions of the Agreement, the General Conditions, and Division 1 specification
sections apply to all work of this Section.
D. Substitutions: Substitute products will be considered only under the terms and conditions of
Section 016000.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers.
B. Underwriter's Laboratory(UL).
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers.
B. Extinguishers shall be Factory Mutual approved and UL listed.
C. Provide fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories from a single manufacturer.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Make submittals in accordance with Section 013300.
B. Product Data: Submit product literature for fire extinguisher brackets, fire extinguisher cabinets, and
each type of extinguisher proposed for the work. Indicate valve and standpipe sizes and
configurations as appropriate for valve cabinets.
C. Contract Closeout Submittal: Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance data under
provisions of Section 017700. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re-
certification requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
A. Larsen's Manufacturing Company(Minneapolis, MN; 612-571-1181).
B. J.L. Industries Inc. (Commerce, CA; 323-726-9070).
C. Potter Roemer(Santa Ana, CA; 714-430-5300, 800-366-3473).
D. Williams Brothers Corporation (Scarborough, Ontario; 540-636-4444; 800-255-5515).
2.2 EXTINGUISHERS
A. Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type (FE): Heavy Duty DOT Steel tank; UL rating 2A-10B: C, 5 lb
capacity, with pressure gage; red enamel finish; metal valves and siphon tubes.
2.3 TYPICAL INTERIOR CABINETS
A. Semi-recessed models in locations as indicated on the Drawings. All cabinets shall be semi-recessed
unless otherwise indicated.
TEMPLATE 104400-1 10/12/18
111
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 104400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
1
B. Furnish sizes as necessary to accommodate extinguishers, at locations indicated on the Drawings. ,
C. Trim: Formed Sheet Steel, minimum 20 gage; 1-1/4 to 1-3/4 inches wide face; square edge
configuration.
D. Door: Formed Sheet Steel, minimum 20 gage; reinforced for flatness and rigidity; satin zinc or
aluminum pull, roller catch, and continuous hinge; clear glass vision panel.
E. Cabinet Finishes:
1. Cabinet Trim and Door: Manufacturer's standard primed finish to receive paint coatings as
specified in Section 099000.
2. Cabinet Interior: Manufacturer's standard white epoxy or white baked enamel.
F. Signage: Pressure sensitive letters "FIRE EXTINGUISHER"; red; font as directed by the Architect;
vertical ascending.
G. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Wall mount type, appropriate to the size of the extinguisher, equipped
with strap and quick release clip.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION '
A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is
complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence. Notify the Architect, in
writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Do not begin installation until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes
acceptance of conditions as satisfactory.
3.2 INSTALLATION '
A. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings and secured to framing in locations as indicated.
Unless otherwise indicated, install 30 inches from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet.
B. Coordinate with Section 099000 for installation of signage on cabinets.
C. Install fire extinguisher in each fire extinguisher cabinet by brackets mounted at back of cabinet.
D. Where fire extinguishers are indicated for wall mounting, secure bracket to wall through finish to
framing or blocking.
E. Fire extinguishers shall be installed, charged, tagged, and dated, not more than 30 days prior to
Substantial Completion.
111
END OF SECTION
1
TEMPLATE 104400-2 10/12/18
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. The general conditions, supplementary conditions and instructions to bidders shall apply to and
be part of this specification.
B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable codes, rules and regulations.
C. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits, certificates of inspection and approvals required.
D. The base bid shall include furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and installation of all
work required to provide complete plumbing systems as outlined in Division-22.
' E. Examine the drawings, specifications, and visit the site prior to submitting a bid.
1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS
A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall govern:
B. American Society for Test Materials (ASTM);
C. American Standards Association (ASA);
' D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL);
E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA);
F. State Building Code.
' G. State Plumbing Code.
H. The installation of all plumbing work shall conform to the applicable local plumbing codes and
'
1.3 statutes.
PLANS
A. Plans are diagrammatic indicating required size, points of termination of piping and suggested
' routes. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets. Install piping in
such manner as to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions and preserve headroom. All
piping shall be run as straight as possible and symmetrical with architectural items. Piping shall
' be concealed in pipe shafts, pipe spaces, and furring wherever possible. Piping fabricated
before coordination with the other trades will be done at contractors' own risk.
B. In the event of inconsistencies or conflict within or between the Contract Documents, provide
the better quality, more costly or greater quantity of work and comply with the more stringent
' requirements. Seek the direction of the Engineer of Record for clarification of conflicts as soon
as a conflict is identified. (Prior to installation)
' PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DEMOLITION
A. Contractor shall include all necessary cutting and patching required to perform their work.
B. Care shall be taken when working in existing spaces so as not to damage existing walls and
ceilings where work is being performed.
C. Provide non-destructive concrete structural scanning or concrete x-ray prior to drilling, cutting or
coring.
i
TEMPLATE 22 0500 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
D. Saw cut all slab penetrations.Seal around all wall, floor and ceiling pipe penetrations with NFPA
approved sealant material to maintain the fire resistant and watertight integrity of the assembly.
E. Disconnect, demolish, and remove from site all plumbing systems, equipment, and components
1
indicated to be removed and as necessary to perform the described scope of work. No unused
plumbing systems, equipment, and components shall be abandoned.
F. No means of demolition shall be used that would result in damage to structures, materials,
equipment or components indicated to remain or endanger the health, safety and welfare of the
general public.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL '
A. Perform all excavation and backfilling required for this work. Contractor shall consult with utility
company prior to beginning excavation.
B. At a minimum, all piping shall be laid on a bed of sand, 6" deep, well tamped into place and
properly graded to permit the pipe to have an even bearing throughout its entire length. Sand
shall be installed around the piping and to a point 6" above the piping.
3.3 PIPE JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS
A. Any minor adjustment in location of alignment of new work or connection to existing utilities
shall be performed as directed by the engineer without additional cost to the owner.
B. The contractor shall be responsible for damages to the grounds, walks, road, building, piping
systems, electrical systems, and their equipment and contents, caused by leaks in the piping
systems being installed or having been installed by him. The contractor shall repair at his
expense all damaged so caused. All repair work shall be done as directed by and in such
manner as satisfactory to the architect.
C. Owner reserves the right to make emergency repairs as required to keep equipment in
operation without voiding the contractor's guarantee bond nor relieving the contractor of his
responsibilities during the bonding period.
3.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where new plumbing systems are required to be connected to existing plumbing systems, it is
the contractor's responsibility to verify the location, size, invert elevation, pressure, condition,
and they shall verify that the existing plumbing system is indeed the correct and appropriate
plumbing system before any work is done. Provide all necessary camera scoping and dye
testing as necessary. If there is any need for concern, if it is determined that the existing
plumbing system is not a correct or appropriate plumbing system or not connected to a correct
or appropriate plumbing system, if the condition of the existing plumbing system is not viable for
re-use, or any other condition that would not allow the proper functioning of the new plumbing
system, the contractor shall notify the engineer in writing immediately via RFI and wait for
direction before proceeding.
B. Interruption of Existing Plumbing Services: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to
provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:
C. Notify, Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of
proposed interruption of service.
D. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.
1
TEMPLATE 22 0500 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0500 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
3.5 WARRANTY
A. This contractor shall warrant that all work under this section shall be free of defective work,
materials and parts for a period of one year after acceptance of the work and shall repair,
revise, and replace, at no cost to the owner, any such defects occurring within the warranty
period.
' END OF SECTION
I
1
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 22 0500 -3 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0503 -SUBMITTALS FOR PLUMBING
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Where submittals are required by the Contract Documents, they shall be prepared and supplied
in accordance with the Contract Documents. In addition to Division 01, the Contractor is advised
to review and comply with the requirements articulated within each Division and within each
section of that Division.
B. The contractor is not relieved of responsibility for providing specified or drawn scope of work
should any errors or omissions in submittal information not be noted by the Design Professional
during submittal reviews or site observations.
C. Some Divisions may include a division-specific"Submittal Requirements for ...." section. Where
this section exists, it articulates additional requirements for submittals that apply to the work of
that Division.
D. The submittal requirements help to identify, track and keep the project organized for all parties
involved. They are necessary to ensure a timely turnaround and an appropriate technical review.
Submittals that do not conform to the administrative requirements are rejected and returned,
without technical review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION '
A. Reference Specification Section 01 33 00.00 for a full list of submittal procedures and required
formats.
3.2 USE OF ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS FROM THE OWNER'S DESIGN TEAM
A. Plan drawings for the Project were created with Revit.
B. If expressly permitted by the Owner and the terms of the Contract, editable electronic versions of
standard-scale, AutoCAD-based plan drawings may be made available for the creation of shop
and as-built drawings.
C. Upon request, when available, electronic versions of standard-scale, Navisworks (.dwf) and
(.nwc)or AutoCAD 360 (.dwg)files may be made available for coordination purposes.
D. Due to the proprietary nature of internal design systems, editable native-software versions of
some drawings, including but not limited to system diagrams and details, will not be made
available in an editable form. In these cases, electronic versions of the drawings may be made
available only in PDF, JPG, or similar non-editable electronic form, at the sole discretion of the
Design Professional.
END OF SECTION
1
TEMPLATE 22 0503 - 1 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0523 -GENERAL DUTY VALVES
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
I1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Valves on domestic water piping shall be ball valves.
B. Ball valves -2 inch and smaller: Lead-Free, 2-piece body, 600 psi CWP, 100 psi at 300OF, cast
' bronze body, full port, Teflon seats, blowout-proof stem, adjustable packing gland, chrome
plated bronze ball, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends. Provide extended valve
stems for valves used on insulated lines. Provide equal to Nibco series 585-80-LF.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: American Valve, Inc.,
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves., Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.,
Hammond Valve., Milwaukee Valve Company., NIBCO INC., Red-White Valve Corporation.,
IWatts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc
2.2 CHECK VALVES
A. Spring check valves - class 125, cast bronze body and cap, horizontal swing, y-pattern, with a
bronze disc, and having threaded or solder ends. Provide solder ends for domestic hot and cold
water service. Provide equal to Nibco T-480-Y-LF.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
' A. Provide stops or isolation valves on domestic water supplies to isolate hot and cold water to
each fixture, including all equipment and equipment provided by others.
B. Fixtures, item or units furnished by the manufacturer with integral stops or stops specified with
the fixture are considered to be properly valved at the fixtures.
C. Access shall be provided to all valves.
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 22 0523 - 1 2/28/19
i
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
i
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
B. General
1. Support all piping and equipment by hangers or brackets. Provide structural steel
members where required to support piping and equipment. No portion of piping or valves
shall be supported by equipment.
C. Delegated Design
1. For equipment supports, this contractor shall retain a qualified professional engineer to
provide support calculations of static and dynamic loading due to operating equipment
weight, seismic and wind forces. The signed and sealed calculations and details shall be
submitted by the retained professional engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
2.1 PIPING
A. Individual pipe hangers to be Anvil International Clevis Hanger Fig. 260, Elcen, or approved
equal.
B. Rod sizes to conform to the following: 3/8" rods for 3/4"to 2" pipe; 1/2" rods for 2-1/2" to 3" pipe;
5/8" rods for 4"to 5" pipe; 3/4" rods for 6" pipe.
C. Hangers shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through unobstructed, provide saddle support
for insulation at all hangers.
D. Hanger spacing for steel piping unless otherwise noted is to be as follows: 1-1/4" or smaller to
be 8' on center; 1-1/2" to 2" to be 10' on center; 2-1/2" and larger to be 12' on center and at
each change of direction.
E. Hanger spacing for copper pipe to be as follows: 1" or smaller 6' on center; 1-1/4" or larger 8'
on center.
F. Hanger spacing for cast iron piping shall be 5'-0" on center.
G. Hanger space for CPVC and PVC pipe to be as follows: 1" and smaller to be 3' on center; 1-1/4"
or larger to be 4' on center.
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Provide hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Support from the decking above is prohibited. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of
horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where
possible. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space
hangers for smallest pipe size or provide intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as
specified above for individual pipe hangers.
B. Piping shall also be supported at each change in direction, valves and equipment.
END OF SECTION
1
TEMPLATE 22 0529 - 1 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0548 -VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
I
I PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I2.1 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide seismic bracing of equipment and components where required by code.
I2.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall provide seismic restraint systems to meet total design lateral force
requirements for support and restraint of piping, ductwork, equipment and other similar systems
Iand equipment where required by the applicable building code.
B. Seismic Bracing and Support of Systems and Components
C. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the structural engineer of
record. Provide engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design.
D. Seismic restraint designer shall provide visual inspection after installation and approve
installation of seismic design components.
E. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of
materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure.
I F. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth.
G. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces calculated per
the applicable building code.
IH. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
I. Fire protection systems shall meet the requirements of NFPA-13 and NFPA-14 for the building
seismic requirements.
IPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
IA. The contractor shall subcontract a licensed structural engineer for the design of all seismic
restraint systems required by the presiding jurisdiction. The structural engineer shall provide
engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design and submit as deferred submittal to
111
supplement the permit drawings.
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall provide seismic restraint systems to meet total design lateral force
requirements for support and restraint of piping, conduit, cable trays and other similar systems
and equipment where required by the applicable building code.
' END OF SECTION
I
TEMPLATE 22 0548 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0719 - PLUMBING SYSTEM INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.2 GENERAL
A. Insulation shall be listed and labeled per ASTM E 84 for plenum installations employing slip on
techniques.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS REQUIRING INSULATION
A. Insulate domestic cold water piping, associated fittings and valves with flexible elastomeric 1/2"
wall thickness insulation.
B. Insulate domestic hot water piping, associated fittings and valves with 1" thick flexible
elastomeric, 1-1/2"thick fiberglass insulation or per local energy code, whichever greater. I
C. Insulate domestic hot water return piping, associated fittings and valves with 1" wall thickness
insulation or per local energy code, whichever greater.
D. Insulate waste piping above ceilings that receive condensate with 1/2"wall thickness insulation. I
E. Insulate exposed sanitary drains, domestic water, domestic hot water, and stops for plumbing
fixtures for people with disabilities.
2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for
tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
B. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Aeroflex USA, Inc.;
Aerocel., Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex., K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
2.3 FIBERGLASS INSULATION111
A. Fiberglass piping insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1
B. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers.
C. Vapor Barrier Material: Paper-backed aluminum foil, except as otherwise indicated, strength
and permeability rating equivalent to adjoining pipe insulation jacketing.
D. Staples, Bands, Wires, and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
E. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for
applications indicated.
F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Armstrong World
Industries, Inc., Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., Keene Corp., CertainTeed., Johns Manville.
I
TEMPLATE 22 0719 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 0719 -PLUMBING SYSTEM INSULATION
2.4 ADHESIVES
' A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Insulation for handicap accessible fixtures
' C. All handicap lavatory p-trap and angle stop assemblies shall be insulated with trap wrap
protective kit manufactured by Proflo model PF202WH or equal. Abrasion resistant, anti-
microbial vinyl exterior cover shall be smooth. For traps, the insulation shall have a cleanout nut
cap to allow service to the trap without disassembly. For stops, the insulation shall have a lock
lid that prevents tampering but allows access without removal of the insulation. Fasteners shall
remain substantially out of sight.
D. Manufacturers: subject to compliance with requirements: Proflo, Truebro, Plumberex
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Provide insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
END OF SECTION
I
I
1
r
1
I
TEMPLATE 22 0719 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 220800 - PLUMBING COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 22.
B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned including all scope of work outlined
in Division 22 specifications including but not limited to, plumbing systems and equipment,
controls and piping distribution. A Commissioning Agent (CxA) appointed by the owner will
manage the commissioning process.
1.2 SUMMARY 1
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the plumbing systems, subsystems and
equipment.
B. The commissioning activities have been developed to support code & LEED outlined delivery of
an efficient project in accordance with the Contract Documents developed by the design team
evolved from the Owner's Project Requirements (OPR).
1.3 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division is part of the construction process
and required by OPR and/or code (IECC). The commissioning process for these systems is
required in cooperation with the Owner, Construction Manager and the Commissioning Agent.
B. The following systems, components, and equipment are the focus of the commissioning process
on the Project:
1. Domestic Water Heating System and Controls
a. New domestic water heating equipment
b. Relocated existing domestic water heating equipment
c. Modified existing domestic water heating equipment
d. Associated domestic water heating controls
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of Submittals for equipment and systems that are
part of the commissioning scope of work. The Construction Manager will be responsible for
delivering these submittals to the CxA for their review.
B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review.
1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. The commissioning team shall consist of members appointed by the Owner, including members
of the design team, and members appointed by Contractor(s). Each individual shall have the
authority to act on behalf of the represented entity and shall be organized to implement the
commissioning process through coordinated actions and be dedicated to remain involved in the
Project until completion.
1. Members Appointed by Owner:
a. CxA: The designated person, company or entity that plans, schedules and
coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process.
Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract.
b. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
c. Architect and engineering design professionals (i.e., design team).
2. Members Appointed by Contractor(s):
a. Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she
represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through
TEMPLATE 220800 - 1 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 220800 -PLUMBING COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
Icoordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of each Contractor, including Project superintendent and
I subcontractors, installers, suppliers and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA.
1.6 COMMISSIONING PLAN
Prior to permit issuance a commissioning plan shall be completed to document how the project
IA.
will be commissioned and shall be started during the design phase of the building project.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
I Contractor shall provide support and work as specified, needed and required to conduct and
facilitate Starbucks staff building commissioning efforts. This work will be comprised of three
distinct efforts:
I 1. Support Starbucks commissioning agent (CxA) during installation verification and correct
disclosed deficiencies.
2. Perform testing, adjusting, balancing and system startup and support functional
performance testing by Starbucks CxA;
I3. Correct deficiencies disclosed by functional performance testing and submit reports.
A. Systems subject to commissioning may include, but are not limited to domestic hot water
generation.
I B. Contractor shall provide written responses to all CxA's reviews and comments. Responses shall
be provided in a timely manner.
I C. Contractor shall include commissioning activities in project schedule and show intervals for
performance of work for which contractor is responsible and intervals for work performed by
Starbucks CxA. Contractor shall show resources for performing all work related to commissioning
activities on a line item in the schedule of values.
I D. Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and all
contract documents. Ensure that all equipment is installed totally complete and accessible to
Starbucks CxA for installation verification and functional performance testing prior to the
I scheduled start of installation verification.
E. Contractor shall complete manufacturer's startup procedures prior to commissioning coordination
with CxA.
I F. Contractor shall be readily available during installation verification to correct any deficiencies or
defects is closed by the installation verification process. Corrections shall be made in a timely
manner without disruption of the construction schedule.
I G. Provide a list of all factory and field settings that have been programmed into the equipment(such
as setpoints, schedules, dip switch settings, condenser and evaporator operating
pressure/temperature, etc...).
I H. Contractor shall inform Starbucks CxA when equipment is ready for functional performance
testing. All equipment shall be ready for functional performance testing prior to starting testing.
This includes rehearsing all functional performance tests before demonstrating to the CxA.
Contractor shall operate equipment for Starbucks CxA and verify by demonstrating the correct
I operation of equipment, sensor calibration, temperature, sound and control response. Provide
any security access, hardware, software or other support as needed for the Starbucks CxA to
efficiently witness and document all equipment testing. Starbucks CxA will record the equipment
I
TEMPLATE 220800 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 220800 -PLUMBING COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
operation and response to testing sequences and prepare a list of any deficiencies disclosed by
the functional performance tests for correction by the contractor. Equipment includes, but is not
limited to, domestic water heating systems, etc... Deliverables: provide completed copies of all
start up reports, filled out on the manufacturer's forms, to the Starbucks CxA.
Contractor is responsible for correcting any issues or deficiencies disclosed during the functional
performance testing process. Corrections should be made in a timely manner without disruption
to the system and construction schedule.
J. Contractor shall be readily available for any re-testing of equipment deemed necessary by
Starbucks CxA during installation verification and functional performance testing. Contractor is
responsible for correcting any issues or deficiencies found in the system during any and all re-
testing. Corrections should be made in a timely manner without disruption to the system and
construction schedule. Deliverables: final balance report, deficiencies list noting corrective
actions performed by contractor in response to installation verification and functional performance
test results.
K. Construction and post construction testing: additional testing may be required by LEED and other
processes that may occur out of sequence with commissioning service. Contractor shall conduct.
Document, support and schedule this testing as directed by Starbucks CxA.
L. Contractor shall provide a training plan for each trade (mechanical, electrical, plumbing,
renewable systems)for the CxA's approval. The training plan shall outline all the topics that are
111
to be covered along with the time duration for each topic. It shall also include the instructor's
name, qualifications and company logo.
M. The contractor is responsible for recording attendance for each training session. Copies of these
shall be submitted to the CxA.
N. Contractor shall submit O&M manuals for all pieces of equipment at least 6 weeks in advance of
the training sessions.
3.2 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Equipment Verification Checklists (EVC'S)
1. The Contractor shall complete EVC's to verify systems, subsystems, and equipment
installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems start-up and Functional
Performance Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare all EVC's to be used by the
installing contractors to document equipment verification and installation.
2. The installing personnel shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be
submitted to the CM. The CM is responsible for sending all completed copies to the
Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample of
completed checklists for completion and accuracy. If the Commissioning Agent determines
that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the Commissioning Agent
will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction and resubmission. If the
Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of completed checklists for
similar equipment are not accurate,the Commissioning Agent will select a broader sample
of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number
of the broader sample of checklists is also inaccurate, all checklists for that type of
equipment will be returned to the Contractor for correction and resubmission.
B. Functional performance testing:
1. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 22 shall be scheduled and
documented in accordance with the applicable sections. The Commissioning Agent will
work with the CM to incorporate the Functional Performance Testing schedule into the
master construction schedule. The CxA will conduct and witness all Functional
Performance Testing performed by the Contractors. The commissioning process includes
I
TEMPLATE 220800 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 220800 - PLUMBING COMMISSIONING SPECIFICATION
111
Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance
under steady state conditions, reactions to changes in operating conditions and
performance under emergency conditions. The contractors shall review and comment on
the functional performance tests prior to testing.
C. Training Of Operations And Maintenance Personnel
1 1. Training operations and maintenance personnel on the proper operation, maintenance and
any emergency situations is required. Provide competent, factory authorized personnel to
provide instructions to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the location,
operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems.The instruction shall be scheduled
in coordination with the CxA after submission and approval of formal training plans. The
CxA will review the training plans and observe the training performed by the factory
personnel and installing contractors.
D. Final Commissioning Report
1. A complete report of commissioning process activities from design through post-
construction phases of the building project shall be completed by the CxA and provided to
I
2. the Owner.
The final commissioning report shall include the following:
a. Executive summary of process and results of commissioning program — including
observations, conclusions and any outstanding items.
b. A history of all deficiencies and issues and how they were resolved
1) Includes outstanding issues and a plan for resolution
2) Include plans for seasonal testing schedule for a later date
c. Functional performance test results and evaluations
d. Summary of training process
e. Cx Process Documents
1) Cx Plan
2) OPR
3) BOD
4) Equipment Verification Checklists/Installation Checklists
5) Functional Performance Test Checklists
1 6) Recommendations for end-of-warranty review activities
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 220800 -4 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
A. Domestic Water Piping Above Ground:
1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; and soldered
joints.
2. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys.
3. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable.
4. PEX and CPVC is approved for interior water piping. Type "L"; copper pressure-seal joint;
and pressure-seal joint systems.
B. Cathodic Protection
1. Provide dielectric insulation at points where copper or brass pipe comes in contact with
ferrous piping, reinforcing steel or other dissimilar metal in structure.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION I
A. Install piping concealed from view unless noted otherwise, free of sags and bends. Do not
enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping using
approved procedures by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install at right angles; diagonal runs are prohibited unless otherwise shown. Install piping above
accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Coordinate all piping with
all other trades.
C. Provide water pressure regulators where necessary to limit the incoming water pressure to 80
psi inside the building.
END OF SECTION
111
1
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 22 1116 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1119 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REDUCED PRESSURE BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow preventer(2"and smaller) - Provide a reduced pressure backflow preventer on water
service main where the water service enters the building. Reduced pressure backflow preventer
shall be sized equal to the size of the water service and conform to ASSE 1013. Pipe backflow
I
2.2 preventer discharge to approved place of disposal.
DOUBLE CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A. Backflow preventer (2" and smaller) — Provide a double check valve assembly backflow
' preventer on tenant water service downstream of main building reduced pressure zone backflow
preventer. Double check valve assembly backflow preventer shall be sized equal to the size of
the tenant water service and conform to ASSE 1015.
RB. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Ames Fire & Waterworks; a
division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc., Conbraco Industries, Inc., Watts; a division of Watts
Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products
I Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2.3 BEVERAGE DISPENSING EQUIPMENT BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Provide a continuous pressure backflow preventer with stainless steel body, threaded
connections and complies with ASSE 1022.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Ames Fire & Waterworks; a
division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc., Conbraco Industries, Inc., Watts; a division of Watts
Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products
Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2.4 CARBONATED BEVERAGE DISPENSER BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Provide a continuous pressure dual check valve backflow preventer with stainless steel body,
threaded connections and complies with ASSE 1032.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Cash Acme, a division of
Reliance Worldwide Corporation, Lancer Corporation, Watts; a division of Watts Water
I Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
2.5 DUAL CHECK VALVE BACKFLOW PREVENTER
A. Provide a dual check valve backflow preventer that complies with ASSE 1022 at connection of
domestic water supply to any permanently connected potable water dispensing equipment such
as ice makers, coffee machines, and beverage dispensers or where indicated in the contract
documents.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following:Ames Fire & Waterworks; a
division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc., Conbraco Industries, Inc.
I
TEMPLATE 22 1119 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
C. FEBCO;a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc., Flomatic Corporation., Watts;a division of
Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing
Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.
2.6 BALANCING VALVES
A. Provide balancing valves where required for proper balancing of water systems as shown on the
contract documents.
B. Balancing valves shall be equal to Red-White Valve Corporation model 9517AB (NPT) or model
9519 (solder). Valve shall have brass body, globe valve regulation and isolation properties,
fixed orifice design for precise measurement, integral memory stop to ensure repeatable setting, 111
full shutoff without affecting memory settings, high and low pressure metering points, precision
indicator windows, rugged top set hand-wheel assembly, pressure rating of 300 psi, and
temperature rating of 15 deg. F to 260 deg. F.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, and are limited to, the following:
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves., Hammond Valve.
D. Milwaukee Valve Company., NIBCO Inc., Watts, Red-White Valve Corp.
2.7 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Vacuum breakers shall be equal to Watts model LF288A for piping connections or Watts LF8 1
series for hose connections. Vacuum breakers shall comply with ASSE 1001 for piped
connections, ASSE 1011 for hose connections, bronze body and threaded connections with
rough bronze finish.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and limited to, the following: MIFAB,
Inc., Prier Products, Inc., Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator
Company., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products., Zurn
Industries, LLC;Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products
2.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
A. Provide pressure reducing valve to regulate incoming domestic water pressure in excessive of 111
80 psig. Pressure reducing valve shall be equal to Watts model LF223S, comply with ASSE
1003, initial working pressure of 300 psig, integral strainer, lead-free brass body with threaded
connections.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and limited to, the following: Cash
Acme; a division of Reliance Worldwide Corporation., Conbraco Industries, Inc., Honeywell
International Inc., Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator
Company, Zurn Industries, LLC;Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products
2.9 STRAINERS U
A. Provide lead-free wye-pattern strainer equal to Watts model LFS777S rated for 125 psig
minimum, bronze body, threaded connections, stainless steel screen with round perforations of
0.020 inch and pipe plug drain. Provide strainers on supply side of each pressure reducing
valve, solenoid valve and pump.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and limited to, the following:, MIFAB,
Inc., Prier Products, Inc., Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator
1
TEMPLATE 22 1119 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1119 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
Company., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products., Zurn
Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products
2.10 HOSE B/BBS
A. Where applicable and possible, install all hose bibs 24"-30" above finished floor to facilitate
filling of mop bucket without a hose. Furnish to owner with receipt one valve key for each key
operated hose bob installed.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and limited to, the following: Josam
Company, MIFAB, Inc., Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc., Tyler Pipe;
Wade Div., Watts Drainage Products., Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM
Industries, Inc., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.,
I
2.11 Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.
WALL HYDRANTS
A. Provide non freeze wall hydrants equal to Woodford model 8-67 with chrome finish on brass
casting with box and hinged door. Conceal within interior partitions. Furnish to owner with
receipt one valve key for each key operated wall hydrant installed.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and limited to, the following: Josam
Company, MIFAB, Inc., Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc., Tyler Pipe;
Wade Div., Watts Drainage Products., Woodford Manufacturing Company; a division of WCM
Industries, Inc., Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Products.,
Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.
2.12 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER DEVICE
A. The plumbing contractor shall provide trap primers for all floor drains and floor sinks that do not
regularly receive waste water. Trap primer shall be equal to Mifab MR-500 trap primer valve.
Provide access panel in wall or ceiling for all concealed trap primers. Install trap seal primer
valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1% and connect to floor
drain body, trap or inlet fitting. Coordinate exact location with architect prior to installation.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, and limited to, the following:, MIFAB,
Inc., Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc., Smith, Jay
R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc., Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies,
Inc.; Watts Regulator Company.
' 2.13 WATER TAB METERS
A. Displacement-Type Water Meters:
B. Plumbing contractor to coordinate with[landlord]owner for exact model and manufacturer.
C. Description:Displacement-Type Water Meter complying with AWWA C700.
D. Remote Registration System: Direct-reading type complying with AWWA C706; modified with
signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly as
required by landlord or owner. Mount reader in an accessible location.
2.14 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
1 A. Provide water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.
B. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201.
TEMPLATE 22 1119 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1119 -DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
C. Type: Metal bellows or copper tube with piston.
D. Size: ASSE 1010, sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, sizes a through F.
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following:
Amtrol, Inc., Josam Company., Precision Plumbing Products, Inc., Sioux Chief Manufacturing
Company, Inc., Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.;Division of Smith Industries, Inc., Watts Drainage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION I
A. Installation: Install per manufacturer's published installation and operation manual.
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 22 1119 -4 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
IGUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1123 -RECIRCULATION DOMESTIC WATER PUMP
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
1 1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
I 2.1 GENERAL
A. Pump shall be an in-line, seal-less, and centrifugal type. Factory-assembled and tested, close-
coupled, canned motor, overhung-impeller centrifugal pump.
I
B. Pump and motor assembly to be hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and
impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.
C. Pump casing to be bronze with threaded or companion-flange connections.
ID. Pump impeller to be plastic in material.
E. Pump motor to be single speed unless noted otherwise.
I F. Pump working pressure to be a minimum 125 psig with a maximum continuous operating
temperature of 220 degree F temperature.
G. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
I products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following:
Armstrong Pumps Inc., Barnes; Crane Pumps & Systems, Bell & Gossett; ITT Corporation,
Grundfos, Peerless Pump Inc., TACO Incorporated
IPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
I A. Pump control to be Thermostat and Time Clock.
1. During occupied mode, the pump shall run based on return water temperature. When the
return water temperature drops below setpoint, the pump shall energize. Return water
setpoint shall be 135 deg. F (adjustable) During unoccupied mode, the pump shall be off.
I 2. Thermostat: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation. Water immersion
type temperature sensor for installation in piping.
3. Timer: Electric; for control of hot-water circulation. Programmable type, seven day,
I twenty-four hour clock with manual override on-off switch. Program up to two on-off
cycles each day for seven days.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Install recirculation pump on hot water return piping at the end of the hot water loop back to the
water heating system as detailed.
B. Install piping adjacent to pump to allow service and maintenance. Provide unions and shutoff
I valves on each side of pump. Provide check and balancing valves. Provide strainer upstream of
pump and downstream of shutoff valve. Install pressure and temperature gage connectors at
suction and discharge of each pump.
I C. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and
time-delay relay.
IEND OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 22 1123 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1316 -SANITARY,WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
1.2 GENERAL
A. Provide a complete soil, waste and vent system in the building and on the site as indicated on
the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Above ground soil, waste and vent piping within buildings including soil stacks, vent stacks,
horizontal branches, traps, and connections to fixtures and drains.
C. Underground building drain piping including mains, branches, traps, connections to fixtures and
drains, and connections to stacks, terminating at connection to existing sanitary sewer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR PIPING
A. No-Hub cast iron soil, waste, and vent piping and fittings 1-1/2" and larger shall conform to
ASTM A-888.
B. Hub and Spigot cast iron soil, waste, and vent piping and fittings 2" and larger shall conform to
ASTM A-74 with ASTM C-564 gasketed joints.
C. Soil, waste and vent piping smaller than 1-1/2" shall be Type "M" copper and conform to ASTM
B-306.
D. No-hub cast iron pipe and fittings may be used aboveground for soil, waste, and vent piping.
E. Hub and spigot cast iron pipe may be used underground for soil, waste, and vent piping.
F. Piping alignment shall be as indicated on the drawings using approved wye branches or eight
bands for direction changes and shall be surely supported or secured to maintain such
alignment.
2.2 EXTERIOR PIPING
A. Poly (vinyl chloride) pipe (PVCPP): ANSI/ASTM D 3033, Type PSP or ASTM D 3034, Type 1
PSM SDR-35.
B. Contech construction products a-2000 PVC sewer pipe
C. Install top of cleanout and cap 6" above finished grade.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Piping alignment shall be as indicated on the drawings using approved wye branches or eighth
bends for direction changes and shall be surely supported or secured to maintain such
alignment.
B. Pitch of sanitary piping shall be uniform at a minimum of 1/8" per foot for building drains,
drainage piping greater than 2" and as indicated on the drawings. Pitch of sanitary piping shall
be uniform at a minimum of 1/4" per foot for drainage piping 2" and smaller and as indicated on
the drawings.
I
TEMPLATE 22 1316 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1316 -SANITARY,WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
C. Protection shall be given all footings, other structural elements during underground work
adjacent to such items. Refer to architectural and/or structural drawings for locations.
D. Vent all fixtures, connect branch vents to main vent risers at least six inches above flood rim of
fixtures. Pitch vent lines back to soil or waste pipe, free of drops and sags.
E. Cleanouts shall be full size of pipe up to 4", and 4" for larger sizes. For underground and
concealed lines, provide cleanouts in accessible positions at each right angle turn and at
intervals not to exceed fifty feet. In floors, install flush with finish floor with extension pipe from
cleanout wye.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 22 1316 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1319.13 -SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 FOG (FATS/OILS/GREASE) INTERCEPTORS
A. Fog Interceptors Standards:
1. ASME A112.14.3 Appendix A and/or PDIG101 for interior interceptors intercepting and
retaining fats, oils and greases from food-preparation or food-processing wastewater;
IAPMO/ANSI Z1001 for gravity interceptors located outdoors with a volume of 500
gallons or greater. The FOG Interceptor shall be of size and capacity as indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Polyethylene Interceptor(Hydromechanical):
1. The FOG Interceptor shall be constructed using seamless, rotationally-molded High
Density Polyethylene with minimum 1/2" uniform wall thickness. Interceptor shall be
furnished for above or below grade installation. Interceptor shall be built in accordance to
ASME A112.14.3 (type C), with internal flow control, built-in test caps, and three outlet
options. Interceptor grease capacity shall be at least four times its rated flow. Cover shall
be gasketed and have minimum H2O load capacity. Provide with cleanout on inlet and
outlet. Where installed outside, provide an extension collar and frame and cover to allow
access for removal of FOG. Product shall include a minimum 30-year warranty against
leakage and structural failure. The interceptor shall be installed per the manufacturer's
recommendations. FOG interceptors shall be provided with a vent connection sized per
the plumbing code.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the
following: Canplas Endura., MIFAB, Inc., Schier Products Company.
C. Steel Interceptor:
1. The solids interceptor shall be large capacity, acid-resistant coated interior and exterior
fabricated steel for on-floor installation. Furnished with a removable acid resistant coated
fabricated steel bucket having removable primary (3/8 inch diameter holes) and
secondary (3/32 inch diameter holes) flow diffusing/intercepting brass screens and
complete with a top access gasketed secured cover.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the
following: Josam Company, MIFAB, Inc., Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Wade., Watts Drainage
Products Inc., Zurn Plumbing Products.
D. Concrete Interceptor:
1. The FOG Interceptor shall be of size and capacity as indicated on the Drawings, Class
'C' concrete, 5000 psig minimum at 28 days, cast iron man way, bolted and gasketed,
grade adjusting rings as required, Poly-Lock II pipe seal, all interior corners grouted and
concave and epoxy coating on all exposed interior and exterior surfaces. FOG
interceptors shall be provided with a vent connection sized per the plumbing code.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the
following:E.C. Babbert, O.C. Adams, Jensen Precast.
I
TEMPLATE 22 1319.13 - 1 2/28/19
S
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1319.13 -SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Installation: Install interceptors per manufacturer's published installation and operation manual.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
1
I
r
I
TEMPLATE 22 1319.13 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1319 -SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Floor cleanout equal to Zurn Z-1400 adjustable floor cleanout.
B. Wall cleanout equal to Zurn Z-1443 with smooth nickel bronze square wall access panel and
frame.
C. Grade cleanout equal to Zurn Z-1400 adjustable cleanout.
D. Provide a sanitary tee and threaded cap cleanout plug in suspended waste piping.
E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Josam, Jay R Smith, Watts
Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc, Mifab, Zurn
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Provide floor drains in compliance with ASME A112.6.3. Provide floor drains with trap-seal
primer fitting. All floor drains located in rooms with tile floors shall be provided with
manufacturer's standard square grate, unless noted otherwise.
B. Refer to plumbing drain schedule for project specific floor drain manufacturers and models.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: Jay R Smith MFG. Co.,
Josam, Mifab, Watts Drainage Products Inc., Zurn Plumbing Products Group
2.3 FLOOR SINKS
A. Install floor sinks in compliance with ASME A112.6.7. All floor sinks shall have a cast iron body
unless noted otherwise. All floor sinks located in a commercial kitchen to have a half grate cover
unless noted otherwise.
111
B. Refer to plumbing drain schedule for project specific floor drain manufacturers and models.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Installation Instructions:
1. Install per manufacturer's published installation and operation manual. 1
END OF SECTION
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 22 1319 - 1 2/28/19
S
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1613 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
I1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
2.2 BUILDING DISTRIBUTION PIPING:
A. All piping from meter/regulator to gas fired equipment connections shall be black steel.
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
C. Pipe size 2" and smaller: Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings
D. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
E. Pipe size 2-1/2" and larger:Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings for butt welding and socket welding.
F. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding.
2.3 GENERAL DUTY VALVES:
A. Metallic valves 2 inches and smaller shall comply with ASME B16.33, cold working pressure of
I 125 psig.
B. Metallic valves larger than 2 inches shall comply with ASME B16.38, cold working pressure of
125 psig.
C. Provide one-piece ball valves with bronze body, chrome-plated brass ball, blowout proof stem
and seat, and bronze trim complying with MSS SP-110.
D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, and limited to, the following:
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company, Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.,
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc., McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co., Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of
American Meter Company.
2.4 PRESSURE REGULATORS:
A. Provide pressure regulators to conform with ANSI Z21.80, cast iron or die-cast aluminum body,
1 interchangeable zinc-plated steel springs and diaphragm plate, single port, self-contained
regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet and no pressure
sensing piping external to the regulator.
B. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150
percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
C. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
D. Regulator shall include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection and piping, if approved
by authorities having jurisdiction.
2.5 NATURAL GAS METERS:
IA. Service meters shall comply with the requirements of the utility supplying gas to the facility.
I
TEMPLATE 22 1613 - 1 2/28/19
1
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 1613 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEMS
2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR GAS APPLIANCES
A. Provide indoor, fixed-appliance flexible connector that complies with ANSI Z21.24.
B. Provide indoor, movable-appliance flexible connector that complies with ANSI Z21.69.
C. Flexible connector shall be corrugated stainless steel tubing with yellow polymer coating,
operating pressure of 0.5 psig and zinc coated threaded steel connections complying with
ASME B1.20.1. Maximum length shall be 72 inches.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Plumbing contractor shall be responsible for installing gas piping run-outs to all gas-fired
equipment, including equipment supplied by the HVAC and electric contractors. Piping shall be
installed full-size (as indicated on the drawings) to each units' gas inlet connection, burner, 111
regulator, etc. Plumbing subcontractor shall provide gas cock and make final connections.
Connections to each gas-fired equipment item shall include a drip leg and shutoff gas cock.
Comply with equipment manufacturer's instruction. For connections to gas-fired rooftop
equipment, plumbing contractor shall be responsible for the roof penetration and shall install the
gas piping through the roof in a location that has been coordinated with the HVAC contractor.
Contractor shall be responsible for all the costs associated with work provided by the utility
company, including tap fees, installation costs, materials, equipment, road cuts, and bores if
applicable.
B. Field prepare and paint exterior natural gas piping, fittings, etc... with alkyd anticorrosive metal
primer and topcoat with exterior alkyd enamel flat. Color to match building exterior and111
approved by the architect
END OF SECTION
1
I
1
1
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 22 1613 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 3000 -COMMERCIAL WATER HEATERS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NATURAL GAS TANK TYPE
A. Provide commercial fuel-fired tank type water heater as scheduled. Comply with UL 2523
Standard.
B. Provide corrosion resistant metal drain pan with raised edge sized not less than the base of the
water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.
C. Provide field fabricated piping heat trap arrangement according to ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
D. Provide combination temperature and pressure relief valve, ASME rated and stamped with
relieving capacity at least as great as heat input and pressure setting less than water heater's
rated operating pressure.
E. Provide water heater stands or mounting brackets with manufacturer's factory fabricated steel
capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Provide steel pressure-rated expansion tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed
butyl rubber diaphragm, pre-charged to minimum system operating pressure at tank.
G. Provide field-fabricated piping-type heat traps in accordance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1
H. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following: AO
Smith, Bock Water Heaters, Bradford White Corporation., Lochinvar Corporation., State
Industries.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Installation: Install per manufacturer's published installation and operation manual.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 22 3000 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 3001 - POINT OF USE THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Thermostatic mixing valves shall be provided for all public hand washing sinks and lavatories
and shall be ASSE 1070 listed, lead free, sweat connections, 125 psi operating pressure.
B. Point-of use thermostatic mixing valves shall be equal to Powers LFG480.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the work include, and are limited to, the following:
Symmons, Lawler, Leonard, Powers, Bradley
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Mount under sink or lavatory. Set outlet temperature of thermostatic mixing valve to 105
degrees F. Route tempered water to hot water side of sink and lavatories.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 22 3001 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 22 4000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. [Flush Valve Water Closets:
1. Provide floor mounted single cast, flush valve, elongated bowl with open front seat less
cover.
2. Electronic or Non-Electric Single-flush valve; 1.28 gal (4.8 L) per flush max.
' B. If using a non-standard fixtured i.e. Starbucks sourced and warehoused) include the following
in the Specification for the specific non-standard fixture(s):>NON-STANDARD FIXTURES:
1. DIPPERWELL 2.2 GPM/METERED
2. PRE-RINSE VALVE.65 GPM MANUAL
3. RESTROOM HAND SINK 0.5 GPM/MANUAL
4. BACKLINE HAND SINK 0.5 GPM/MANUAL]
5. WORKROOM HANDSINK 0.5 GPM/MANUAL
2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturers: Refer to plumbing fixture schedule for basis of design. Subject to compliance
with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
work include, and are limited to, the following: American Standard America., Crane Plumbing,
LLC., Kohler Co., Toto USA, inc., Zurn Industries, LLC; Commercial Brass and Fixtures.,
Sterling; a Kohler Company., Eljer Inc
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Install per manufacturer's published installation and operation manual.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
r
TEMPLATE 22 4000 - 1 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230501 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL I
A. General Provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and
General Requirements apply to work of this section.
1.2 SCOPE
A. The base bid includes furnishing all materials, labor, tools, and equipment and the performance
of all work required to install a complete heating and air conditioning system as outlined herein.
1.3 GUARANTEE
A. The contractor shall provide a guarantee in written form stating that all work under this section
shall be free of defective work, materials, or parts for a period of one year from the date of
owner's final acceptance and shall repair, revise or replace at no cost to the owner any such
defects occurring within the guarantee period. Contractor shall also state in written form that
any items or occurrences arising during the guarantee period will be attended to in a timely
manner and will in no case exceed four(4)working days from date of notification by owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 WORK IN EXISTING SPACES
A. General: I
1. Care shall be taken when working in existing spaces so as not to damage existing walls
and ceilings where work is being performed.
B. Ceilings: I
1. Where work is being performed above ceilings, and the architectural drawings do not
indicate ceiling modifications by the general contractor, it shall be the responsibility of this
contractor to remove and replace existing ceilings where work is being performed. In
those instances, all repair and installation of new grid, ceiling panels, etc shall be the
responsibility of this contractor. Match existing finishes.
C. Walls & Floors:
1. It shall be the responsibility of this contractor to patch existing walls and floors and match
existing finishes where work is being removed or installed and patching is being
performed, unless noted otherwise on the architectural drawings.
3.2 DEMOLITION I
A. Any Equipment to be demolished shall also include the demolition of any and all ductwork,
piping etc serving or served by the equipment, all accessories, air devices, wiring, gas piping,
venting, control wiring and power wiring associated with the equipment.
B. Demolition shall be coordinated with all trades. All materials shall be turned over to the owner or
disposed at the owner's direction.
C. Contractor is responsible for reclaiming any refrigerant in association with the demolition in
accordance with all local, state and federal regulations.
D. Any roof or wall penetration shall be patched watertight to the satisfaction of the architect.
I
TEMPLATE 230501 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230501 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
I3.3 TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
I A. No ducts, piping, fixtures or equipment shall be concealed or covered until they have been
inspected and approved by the Architect and the inspector who shall be notified by the
contractor when the work is ready for inspection.
B. Work shall be completely installed, tested and leak tight before inspection is required. All tests
Ishall be repeated to the satisfaction of those making the inspection.
3.4 ARCHITECTURAL COORDINATION ITEMS
I A. Cutting and Patching:
1. Cut and drill all openings in walls and floors required for the installation. Secure approval
of Engineer before cutting and drilling. Neatly patch all openings cut.
I B. Fire Caulking:
1. Patching through fire rated walls and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of that wall
or enclosure. Patch shall be equal to rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch.
I C. Access Panels and Pathways:
1. Furnish all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide access
panels for all concealed valves, vents, controls, cleanout doors, and sprinkler devices
required by NFPA. Provide access panels for all fire and/or fire & smoke dampers.
I Provide frame as required for finish. Furnish panels to General Contractor. Exact
locations to be approved by the Architect. Minimum size to be 12" x 12", units to be 16
gauge steel, locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks.
I 3.5 PROJECT EXISTING CONDITIONS
A. Where new HVAC systems are required to be connected to existing HVAC systems, it is the
contractor's responsibility to verify the location, size, pressure, condition, and they shall verify
I that the existing HVAC system is indeed the correct and appropriate HVAC system before any
work is done. Provide all necessary camera scoping and dye testing as necessary. If there is
any need for concern, if it is determined that the existing HVAC system is not a correct or
appropriate HVAC system or not connected to a correct or appropriate HVAC system, if the
I condition of the existing HVAC system is not viable for re-use, or any other condition that would
not allow the proper functioning of the new HVAC system, the contractor shall notify the
engineer in writing immediately via RFI and wait for direction before proceeding.
I B. Interruption of Existing HVAC Services:
1. Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under
the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service
I according to requirements indicated:
2. Notify, Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than seven days in
advance of proposed interruption of service.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Architect's written permission.
IEND OF SECTION
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 230501 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230503 -SUBMITTALS FOR HVAC SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 REQUIREMENTS I
A. Where submittals are required by the Contract Documents, they shall be prepared and supplied
in accordance with the Contract Documents. In addition to Division 01, the Contractor is
advised to review and comply with the requirements articulated within each Division and within
each section of that Division.
B. The contractor is not relieved of responsibility for providing specified or drawn scope of work
should any errors or omissions in submittal information not be noted by the Design Professional
during submittal reviews or site observations.
C. Some Divisions may include a division-specific"Submittal Requirements for ...." section. Where
this section exists, it articulates additional requirements for submittals that apply to the work of
that Division.
D. The submittal requirements help to identify, track and keep the project organized for all parties
involved. They are necessary to ensure a timely turnaround and an appropriate technical
review. Submittals that do not conform to the administrative requirements are rejected and 111
returned, without technical review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION I
A. Reference Specification Section 01 33 00.00 for a full list of submittal procedures and required
formats.
3.2 USE OF ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS FROM THE OWNER'S DESIGN TEAM
A. Plan drawings for the Project were created with Revit.
B. If expressly permitted by the Owner and the terms of the Contract, editable electronic versions
of standard-scale, AutoCAD-based plan drawings may be made available for the creation of
shop and as-built drawings.
C. Upon request, when available, electronic versions of standard-scale, Navisworks (.dwf) and
(.nwc) or AutoCAD 360 (.dwg)files may be made available for coordination purposes.
D. Due to the proprietary nature of internal design systems, editable native-software versions of
some drawings, including but not limited to system diagrams and details, will not be made
available in an editable form. In these cases, electronic versions of the drawings may be made
available only in PDF, JPG, or similar non-editable electronic form, at the sole discretion of the
Design Professional.
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 230503 - 1 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND DUCTWORK
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal Requirements
I 1.
2. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
Shop Drawings: Fabrication and installation details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (COMBINED WITH PART 3 -EXECUTION)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Support all piping, ductwork and equipment by hangers or brackets properly from the building
structure. Support from decking above is prohibited. Furnish structural steel members where
required to support piping and equipment. No portion of piping or valves shall be supported by
equipment.
B. Ductwork- Support by means of hangers as follows:
Duct Width Hanger Size and Type Max. Spacing
30 or less (#16 gage) 8
31 to 60 (#14 gage) 8
61 to 90 3/8"dia. Rod 8
C. A pair of hangers shall be located at every transverse joint and elsewhere according to the
table.
3.2 PIPING
A. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building
structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-
fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Where piping of various sizes is
supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install
intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.
B. Individual pipe hangers to be Anvil International Clevis Hanger Fig. 260, Elcen, or approved
I equal.
C. Rod sizes to conform to the following: 3/8" rods for 3/4"-2"pipe; 1/2" rods for 2-1/2"-3"pipe;
5/8"for 4"-5"pipe and 3/4"for 6"pipe.
D. Hangers shall be sized to allow insulation to pass through unobstructed, provide saddle support
for insulation at all hanger.
E. Hanger spacing for steel piping unless otherwise noted is to be as follows: 1-1/4"or smaller to
be 8'on center; 1-1/2"-2"to be 10'on center; 2-1/2"and larger to be 12'on center and at each
change of direction. Hanger spacing for copper pipe to be as follows: 1" or smaller 6' on
center; 1-1/4"or larger 8'on center.
F. Piping shall be also supported at each change in direction, at valves, and at equipment.
END OF SECTION
I
TEMPLATE 230529 -1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230548 -SEISMIC CONTROL FOR HVAC
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall subcontract a licensed structural engineer for the design of all seismic
restraint systems required by the presiding jurisdiction. The structural engineer shall provide
engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design and submit as deferred submittal to
supplement the permit drawings.
3.2 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide seismic bracing of electrical components where required by code.
3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE I
A. The contractor shall provide seismic restraint systems to meet total design lateral force
requirements for support and restraint of conduit, cable trays, equipment, and other similar
systems and equipment where required by the applicable building code.
3.4 DELEGATED DESIGN
A. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the structural engineer of
record. Provide engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design.
B. Seismic restraint designer shall provide visual inspection after installation and approve
installation of seismic design components.
C. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of
materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure.
D. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth. I
E. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces calculated per
the applicable building code.
F. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces. 1
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 230548 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
IGUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and
signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the
systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced
standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a
I true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities
measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Final Report: Upon
verification and approval prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted
Ias specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final report to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
IPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
I1. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:
2. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges.
3. Return air systems.
4. Exhaust air systems.
1 5. Verify temperature control system operation.
6. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.
3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I A. Codes and Standards:
1. AABC: "National Standards for Total System Balance".
2. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 2011 Applications, Chapter 38, Testing, Adjusting, and
I Balancing.
3.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The contractor shall procure the services of an independent Balance and Testing Agency,
I approved by the Engineer, and a member of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or NEBB,
which specializes in the balancing and testing of heating, ventilating and air conditioning
systems, to balance, adjust and test all air and water systems and equipment as herein
I specified. All work by this agency shall be done under direct supervision of a qualified heating
and ventilating Engineer employed by this agency. All instruments used by this agency shall be
accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order.
3.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
IA. General:
1. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating
systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside
I conditions within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition,
and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final
temperature readings during seasonal operation.
I 2. Check all filters for cleanliness, provide new as required. Check dampers (volume and
fire) for correct and locked position, and temperature control for completeness of
installation before starting fans. Place outlet dampers in full open position. Lubricate all
motors and bearings. Check fan belt tension. Check fan rotation.
I
TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 - 1 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230593 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
111
3. Air balance and testing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full
working order. The Contractor shall put all heating, ventilating and air conditioning
systems and equipment into full operation and shall continue the operation of same
during each working day of testing and balancing. The contractor shall submit within 30
days after receipt of contract, 8 copies of submittal data for the testing and balancing of
the air conditioning, heating, and ventilating systems. The Air Balance and Testing
Agency shall provide proof of having successfully completed at least five projects of
similar size and scope.
4. The air balancing contractor shall include the additional cost to change every fan factory
installed sheave, pulley and/or belt of in order to obtain the design air flows.
3.5 Performing testing, adjusting and balancing
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the
detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards. I
B. Cut insulation, ductwork, and piping for installation of test probes to the minimum extent
necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.
C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed. I
D. Seal ducts and piping, and test for and repair leaks.
E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.
F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions; valve indicators, fan speed control
levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification materials.
G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications, and
resubmit test results.
END OF SECTION
I
I
f
I
I
I
1
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230713 -DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
' 1. For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
1 A. All liners, insulation and adhesives shall have a flame spread index not more than 25 and a
smoke developed index of not more than 50. Insulation shall have a minimum installed thermal
resistance value of(R6](R8]or code minimum, whichever higher.
B. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply
with ASTM C 612, Type IB, without facing and with vapor barrier all-service jacket manufactured
from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
C. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing and with vapor barrier all-service jacket
manufactured from kraft paper, reinforcing scrim, aluminum foil, and vinyl film.
D. Vapor Barrier Material for Ductwork: Paper-backed aluminum-foil, except as otherwise
indicated; strength and permeability rating equivalent to factory-applied vapor barriers on
adjoining ductwork insulation, where available; with following additional construction
characteristics:
E. High Puncture Resistance: Low vapor transmission (for ducts in exposed areas: Mech. Rooms,
etc.)
F. Moderate Puncture Resistance: Medium vapor transmission (for ducts in concealed areas).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. All ductwork shall be insulated except:
1. Double wall ductwork
2. Fabric ductwork
3. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code.
4. Factory insulated flexible ductwork
5. Factory insulated plenums and casings
6. Flexible connectors
7. Vibration control devices
8. Factory insulated access panels and doors
9. Supply ductwork exposed in conditioned spaces excluding mechanical rooms, server
rooms and electric equipment rooms
10. Toilet exhaust, general exhaust and return ductwork in an insulated joist or attic space.
B. Installation: Install per manufacturer's published installation manual.
END OF SECTION
I
TEMPLATE 230713 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Provide 3/4"armaflex on refrigerant piping. I
B. Provide 1"fiberglass insulation on concealed condensate drain piping.
C. Insulation shall have a minimum thickness as required by Code. 1
D. All insulation and adhesives shall have a flame spread index not more than 25 and a smoke
developed index of not more than 50.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Provide insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; I
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 230719 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230800 -COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 23.
' B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned including all scope of work
outlined in Division 23 specifications including but not limited to, HVAC systems and equipment,
ductwork distribution and controls. A Commissioning Agent (CxA) appointed by the owner will
manage the commissioning process.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements for commissioning the HVAC systems, subsystems and
U equipment.
. The commissioning activities have been developed to support code & LEED outlined delivery of
an efficient project in accordance with the Contract Documents developed by the design team
evolved from the Owner's Project Requirements (OPR).
1.3 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. Commissioning of a system or systems specified in this Division is part of the construction
process and required by OPR and/or code (IECC). The commissioning process for these
systems is required in cooperation with the Owner, Construction Manager and the
' Commissioning Agent.
B. The following systems, components, and equipment are the focus of the commissioning
' process on the Project:
1. Air Handling Systems - Roof Top Units
2. Fans - Exhaust Fans, Fan Motors, Variable Speed Drives, Controls and Safeties
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. The commissioning process requires review of Submittals for equipment and systems that are
part of the commissioning scope of work. The Construction Manager will be responsible for
delivering these submittals to the CxA for their review.
B. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review.
1.5 COMMISSIONING TEAM
A. The commissioning team shall consist of members appointed by the Owner, including members
of the design team, and members appointed by Contractor(s). Each individual shall have the
authority to act on behalf of the represented entity and shall be organized to implement the
commissioning process through coordinated actions and be dedicated to remain involved in the
Project until completion.
1. Members Appointed by Owner:
a. CxA: The designated person, company or entity that plans, schedules and
coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process.
1
b. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract.
Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.
c. Architect and engineering design professionals (i.e., design team).
2. Members Appointed by Contractor(s):
TEMPLATE 230800 - 1 2/28/19
111
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230800 -COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
a. Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she
represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through
coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to,
representatives of each Contractor, including Project superintendent and
subcontractors, installers, suppliers and specialists deemed appropriate by the
CxA.
1.6 COMMISSIONING PLAN
A. Prior to permit issuance a commissioning plan shall be completed to document how the project I
will be commissioned and shall be started during the design phase of the building project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY
Contractor shall provide support and work as specified, needed and required to conduct and
facilitate Starbucks staff building commissioning efforts. This work will be comprised of three
distinct efforts:
1. Support Starbucks commissioning agent (CxA) during installation verification and correct
disclosed deficiencies.
2. Perform testing, adjusting, balancing and system startup and support functional
performance testing by Starbucks CxA;
3. Correct deficiencies disclosed by functional performance testing and submit reports.
A. Systems subject to commissioning may include, but are not limited to domestic hot water
generation, HVAC systems, rooftop units, exhaust fans, HVAC controls, lighting controls, air
curtains, built-in refrigeration, equipment and renewable energy systems.
B. Contractor shall provide written responses to all CxA's reviews and comments. Responses
shall be provided in a timely manner.
C. Contractor shall include commissioning activities in project schedule and show intervals for
performance of work for which contractor is responsible and intervals for work performed by
Starbucks CxA. Contractor shall show resources for performing all work related to
commissioning activities on a line item in the schedule of values.
D. Contractor shall install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements and all
contract documents. Ensure that all equipment is installed totally complete and accessible to
Starbucks CxA for installation verification and functional performance testing prior to the
scheduled start of installation verification.
E. Contractor shall complete manufacturer's startup procedures prior to commissioning
coordination with CxA.
F. Contractor shall be readily available during installation verification to correct any deficiencies or
defects is closed by the installation verification process. Corrections shall be made in a timely
manner without disruption of the construction schedule.
G. All HVAC exhaust fan and air curtain equipment shall be tested, adjusted and balanced by the
contractor's testing, adjusting and balance agent (see testing adjusting and balancing) after the
system is verified to be complete and correct by Starbucks CxA, in accordance with the
requirements of these documents. All HVAC control systems shall be tested to ensure that
control devices, components, equipment and systems are calibrated, adjusted and operate in
TEMPLATE 230800 -2 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230800 -COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
accordance with these plans and specifications. Sequences of operation shall be tested to
ensure that they operate in accordance with the contract requirements. Deliverables:
' preliminary, written testing and air balance report conforming to the requirements specified
herein, documenting the information specified, etc... To the Starbucks CxA immediately upon
completion of the work.
' H. Provide a list of all factory and field settings that have been programmed into the equipment
(such as setpoints, schedules, dip switch settings, condenser and evaporator operating
pressure/temperature, etc...).
Contractor shall inform Starbucks CxA when equipment is ready for functional performance
testing. All equipment shall be ready for functional performance testing prior to starting testing.
This includes rehearsing all functional performance tests before demonstrating to the CxA.
Contractor shall operate equipment for Starbucks CxA and verify by demonstrating the correct
' operation of equipment, sensor calibration, response of actuators and proper execution of
HVAC control and lighting sequences, including but not limited to air movement, temperature,
sound and control response. Provide any security access, hardware, software or other support
as needed for the Starbucks CxA to efficiently witness and document all equipment testing.
Starbucks CxA will record the equipment operation and response to testing sequences and
prepare a list of any deficiencies disclosed by the functional performance tests for correction by
the contractor. Equipment includes, but is not limited to, air handling units, rooftop and split
type, condensing units, exhaust fans, lighting controls, etc... Deliverables: provide completed
copies of all start up reports, filled out on the manufacturer's forms, to the Starbucks CxA.
J. Contractor is responsible for correcting any issues or deficiencies disclosed during the
' functional performance testing process. Corrections should be made in a timely manner
without disruption to the system and construction schedule.
K. Contractor shall be readily available for any re-testing of equipment deemed necessary by
' Starbucks CxA during installation verification and functional performance testing. Contractor is
responsible for correcting any issues or deficiencies found in the system during any and all re-
testing. Corrections should be made in a timely manner without disruption to the system and
construction schedule. Deliverables: final balance report, deficiencies list noting corrective
' actions performed by contractor in response to installation verification and functional
performance test results.
L. Construction and post construction testing: additional testing may be required by LEED and
' other processes that may occur out of sequence with commissioning service. Contractor shall
conduct. Document, support and schedule this testing as directed by Starbucks CxA.
M. Contractor shall provide a training plan for each trade (mechanical, electrical, plumbing,
' renewable systems)for the CxA's approval. The training plan shall outline all the topics that are
to be covered along with the time duration for each topic. It shall also include the instructor's
name, qualifications and company logo.
' N. The contractor is responsible for recording attendance for each training session. Copies of
these shall be submitted to the CxA.
O. Contractor shall submit O&M manuals for all pieces of equipment at least 6 weeks in advance of
'
3.2 the training sessions.
GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Equipment Verification Checklists (EVC'S)
' 1. The Contractor shall complete EVC's to verify systems, subsystems, and equipment
installation is complete and systems are ready for Systems start-up and Functional
Performance Testing. The Commissioning Agent will prepare all EVC's to be used by the
installing contractors to document equipment verification and installation.
TEMPLATE 230800 -3 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230800 -COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS
2. The installing personnel shall complete the checklists. Completed checklists shall be
submitted to the CM. The CM is responsible for sending all completed copies to the
Commissioning Agent for review. The Commissioning Agent may spot check a sample of
completed checklists for completion and accuracy. If the Commissioning Agent
determines that the information provided on the checklist is not accurate, the
Commissioning Agent will return the marked-up checklist to the Contractor for correction
and resubmission. If the Commissioning Agent determines that a significant number of
completed checklists for similar equipment are not accurate, the Commissioning Agent
will select a broader sample of checklists for review. If the Commissioning Agent
determines that a significant number of the broader sample of checklists is also
inaccurate, all checklists for that type of equipment will be returned to the Contractor for
correction and resubmission.
B. Functional performance testing:
1. Contractor tests as required by other sections of Division 23 shall be scheduled and
documented in accordance with the applicable sections. The Commissioning Agent will
work with the CM to incorporate the Functional Performance Testing schedule into the
master construction schedule. The CxA will conduct and witness all Functional
Performance Testing performed by the Contractors. The commissioning process includes
Functional Performance Testing that is intended to test systems functional performance
under steady state conditions, reactions to changes in operating conditions and
performance under emergency conditions. The contractors shall review and comment on
the functional performance tests prior to testing.
C. Training Of Operations And Maintenance Personnel
1. Training operations and maintenance personnel on the proper operation, maintenance
and any emergency situations is required. Provide competent, factory authorized
personnel to provide instructions to operation and maintenance personnel concerning the
location, operation, and troubleshooting of the installed systems. The instruction shall be
scheduled in coordination with the CxA after submission and approval of formal training
plans. The CxA will review the training plans and observe the training performed by the
factory personnel and installing contractors.
D. Final Commissioning Report '
1. A complete report of commissioning process activities from design through post-
construction phases of the building project shall be completed by the CxA and provided
to the Owner.
2. The final commissioning report shall include the following:
a. Executive summary of process and results of commissioning program — including
observations, conclusions and any outstanding items.
b. A history of all deficiencies and issues and how they were resolved
1) Includes outstanding issues and a plan for resolution
2) Include plans for seasonal testing schedule for a later date
c. Functional performance test results and evaluations
d. Summary of training process
e. Cx Process Documents
1) Cx Plan
2) OPR
3) BOD
4) Equipment Verification Checklists/Installation Checklists
5) Functional Performance Test Checklists
6) Recommendations for end-of-warranty review activities
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 230800 -4 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230993 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
1. Provide written sequences of operation for each controlled system and piece of
equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNIT
A. All setpoints listed in this section are adjustable through the Energy Management System
(EMS). Control& Monitoring points shall include but not be limited to the following:
' 1. Startup
a. The unit shall operate on an occupied/unoccupied cycle as controlled from the
EMS. Occupancy shall be predetermined by the owner and programmed into the
1
b. EMS.
During startup, the fan shall run with the dampers in the full recirculation position.
Provide occupied changeover sequence with optimum start function. When the
return air temperature reaches occupied setpoint (adjustable), the minimum
' outside air damper shall open to the controlled minimum outdoor air position.
Supply
2. Fan Control
a. The supply fan speed shall be constant, run continuously during occupied mode
' and set to the required CFM.
3. Space Temperature Control
a. Space temperature sensor furnished by EMS vendor.
4. Minimum Outside Air Control
' a. During occupied mode the minimum outside air damper shall be open. Provide
motorized outdoor air damper.
b. Provide carbon dioxide sensors in the space to measure carbon dioxide levels.
Outside air damper shall modulate to maintain maximum carbon dioxide level
' setpoint at all times during occupied mode. CO2 levels shall be held below 1000
ppm (adjustable). When CO2 levels are below setpoint, outside air damper shall
be at a minimum position, which equates to the sum of the "OA SQFT" multiplied
by the room areas of each room in the "HVAC Ventilation Schedule" during
occupied mode.
5. by
Control
a. Provide dual enthalpy economizer control. Economizer control shall be enabled
' whenever the outside air enthalpy is lower than the return air enthalpy. Enthalpy
shall be calculated from sensors which are tied to the same controller for accuracy.
During economizer mode, the outside air damper shall modulate to 100% open.
' The economizer damper shall modulate open on a call for cooling and modulate
closed on a call for heating. The return damper shall modulate inversely with the
economizer damper.
6. Cooling Control
a. Cooling shall be controlled to maintain space temperature setpoint. On a call for
cooling, the heating shall be off. On a further call for cooling, enable the
economizer mode. On a further call for cooling, the mechanical cooling shall be
staged on. Provide Low Ambient Controls for operation down to-20 degrees F.
TEMPLATE 230993 - 1 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230993 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
7. Heating Control '
a. Heating shall be controlled to maintain space temperature setpoint. On a call for
heating, the mechanical cooling shall be off. On a further call for heating, the
economizer mode shall be disabled. On a further call for heating the gas heating
shall be staged on.
8. Dehumidification
a. Provide a hot gas reheat coil or duct mounted electric reheat coil for
dehumidification. Provide space humidity sensor. When the space humidity rises
above 60% (adjustable), provide full cooling and modulate the hot gas reheat coil
to maintain space temperature setpoint. When the space humidity reaches
setpoint, resume with normal heating &cooling operation.
9. Smoke Detector
a. When the smoke detector is alarmed, the system shall be alarmed and the air
handler shall fail safe with manual reset.
10. Unoccupied Mode
a. During the unoccupied mode of operation, the RTU shall go into night setback
mode.
11. Night Setback/Shutdown
a. At night setback/shutdown the RTU shall go to fail safe position. Fail safe position
is defined by the following: The supply fan is off, the outdoor air intake damper is
closed, the heating is off and the mechanical cooling is off. The supply fan shall
cycle in conjunction with either the heating or cooling system to maintain a
minimum/maximum space temperature depending on the season.
3.2 TOILET EXHAUST FANS (EMS)
A. Exhaust fan operation shall be controlled by the Energy Management System. During occupied
mode the exhaust fan motor damper shall open and fan shall start. During unoccupied mode the
exhaust fan motor damper shall be closed and fan shall be off. A current transducer shall
indicate status thru the EMS.
3.3 CONTROLS
A. Electrical contractor will provide power wiring. HVAC contractor shall provide all the low voltage
wiring of HVAC units and controls, thermostats and controllers. Coordinate controls
requirements with EMS vendor. Provide plastic protective cover for all thermostats. Replace
controls on existing unit, adjust and calibrate controls.
3.4 TEMPERATURE SENSORS TIED TO EMS
A. Sensors shall be furnished, installed and wired by the Temperature Control Contractor. The
electrical contractor shall provide 4" square x 1- 1/2" deep wall outlet boxes at 54" above
finished floor (with single-gang rings)for all thermostats/sensors. The electrical contractor shall
provide one 3/4" empty conduit from each thermostat/sensor location, turned out above
accessible ceilings (in joist space or against overhead slab/deck). The Temperature Control
Contractor shall provide all other necessary conduit, raceway and wiring related work. Conduit
shall be identified in ceiling cavity and shall be provided with sweep bends, bushings and
dragline.
B. The HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor to
ensure thermal envelope is maintained at these locations.
3.5 CARBON DIOXIDE SENSORS
A. Carbon dioxide sensors shall be non-dispersive infrared (NIDR)type with a measurement range
of 0-2000 ppm, repeatability of+/- 20 ppm and a measurement accuracy of+/- 75 ppm.
B. The recommended calibration interval shall be a minimum of 5 years.
TEMPLATE 230993 -2 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 230993 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
C. Space mounted applications shall utilize diffusion through an attractive, satin finish, high impact
housing.
3.6 GENERAL CONTROL WIRING REQUIREMENTS AND INSTALLATION METHODS
A. Except where specifically indicated otherwise above, the HVAC/Temperature Control Contractor
shall provide all electrical work as required for all temperature control related wiring (i.e. conduit,
raceway, outlet boxes, junction boxes, wiring, etc.) in accordance with Electrical Specifications
requirements. All conduit shall be 3/4" minimum.
B. Coordinate all thermostat/sensor locations in field (case by case) with Architect, Owner and
Electrical Contractor to ensure that they are placed in locations that will not interfere with
furniture, equipment, artwork, wall-hung specialties, room finishes, etc. All thermostat/sensor
wall locations indicated on HVAC drawings are schematic only and must be verified case-by-
' case prior to rough-in.
C. All electrical work as described in this specification shall be per the latest edition of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable state and local codes.
D. Where "free-air" installation methods (either exposed above the ceilings, in bridle rings or in
cable trays) are permitted under Electrical Specifications above ceilings, provide plenum-rated
cables wherever plenum ceilings (if any) exist and install as defined under Electrical
' Specifications. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and masonry walls, in
inaccessible locations, or exposed in occupied areas, in electrical conduit regardless of what
wiring methods are permitted under Electrical Specifications.
E. Where cable trays or bridle rings are provided by the electrical contractor for low voltage cables,
these raceways may be utilized for control wiring by this contractor (provide special color coded
jackets, label cable jackets per Electrical Specifications and group control wiring cables
together). Provide conduit drops from cable tray/bridle ring paths to wall outlet boxes and
' equipment unless directed otherwise under Electrical Specifications.
F. Regardless of permitted methods in Electrical Specifications, all cables/wiring installed
concealed by gypsum board, masonry or other inaccessible materials in walls or above ceilings
shall be installed in conduit, 3/4" minimum.
G. All conduit, bridle rings, raceway, outlet boxes, etc. necessary for complete operational
installation of control wiring shall be provided (furnished and installed) by the temperature
' control contractor in strict compliance with Electrical Specifications documents. Coordinate all
work with all other applicable trades including the electrical contractor.
H. Provide all required conduit work to and between equipment in a manner compliant with that
' described above (i.e. between VAV boxes, to boilers, starters, condensing units, etc. as
applicable).
I. Install control wiring without splices between terminal points, color-coded. Install in neat
' workmanlike manner, securely fastened. Install in accordance with National Electrical Code
and per Electrical Specifications.
J. Install circuits over 25 volt with color-coded No. 12 wire in electrical metallic tubing, per
' Electrical Specifications. Install circuits under 25 volt with color-coded No. 18 wire with 0.031"
high temperature (105 degs. F) plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all.
Install electronic circuits with color-coded No. 22 wire with 0.023" polyethylene insulation on
each conductor with plastic-jacketed copper shield over all.
TEMPLATE 230993 -3 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
I
SECTION 230993 -SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS
3.7 SMOKE DETECTOR I
A. All duct smoke detectors will be furnished by electrical contractor, installed by the HVAC
I
contractor, and wired by the electrical contractor per local codes. HVAC contractor will
interlock fan with smoke detector.
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 230993 -4 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Submittal Requirements
' 1. Product Data: For liners, adhesives, sealants and gaskets.
2. Shop Drawings: Sheet metal thickness, reinforcing details, duct layouts indicating sizes,
configuration, liner material, elevation and static pressure class.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Exposed Ductwork Materials:
1. Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials
which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks,
stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair
painting. Exposed ductwork which is to be painted shall have paint grip applied.
B. Sheet Metal:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel, lock
t forming quality; with G 90 zinc coating and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
Minimum gauge shall be 24.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS
A. Volume Dampers:
1. Provide volume dampers in all branch ducts or as required for balancing to required air
flows.
' B. Fittings:
1. Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 deg. change
of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 deg. laterals and
' 45 deg. elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg. branches are indicated,
provide conical type tees.
C. Duct Sealant:
1. Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type applicable for
fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer
specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
D. Duct Cement:
' 1. Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for
fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer
specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.
' E. Ductwork Support Materials:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors,
rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
2. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support materials.
3. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materials are
electrolytically separated from ductwork.
t 2.3 FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Either spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, or corrugated aluminum.
Unless specifically mentioned, the maximum length of flex duct on the supply equals 5 feet. Flex
is not allowed for return, relief or exhaust applications. The flexible ducts indicated for use in the
TEMPLATE 233113 - 1 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
H.V.A.C. system shall conform to the requirements of UL 181 for Class 0 or Class 1 flexible air 111
ducts and shall be so identified.
B. Where installed in unconditioned spaces other than return air plenums, provide 1" thick 1-1/2 lb.
continuous flexible fiberglass sheath with vinyl vapor barrier jacket.
C. Installation is not permitted above drywall ceilings and inaccessible ceilings.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to
complete runs. All ductwork shall be Pittsburgh Construction with a minimum of thickness of 24
gauge. In addition, ductwork used in systems over 3" W.G. shall have cold sealant applied.
Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards".
2.5 LINED DUCT I
A. The following ductwork shall be lined with duct liner: Return ductwork in ducted return systems
10 feet downstream of HVAC unit. Exhaust ductwork 10 feet upstream and downstream of
fans. Transfer air ducts.
B. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate
liner to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of
lining and adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. Duct liner to be 3-lb density
for acoustic requirements 1" thick or as noted. Size of ductwork shown on the drawings
is free net area, outside dimension of ducts will need to be increased if lined duct is
used.
C. Size of ductwork shown on the drawings is free net area, outside dimension of ducts will
need to be increased if lined duct is used.
D. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass of thickness indicated. 3-lb density. All liners, insulation and
adhesives shall have a flame spread index not more than 25 and a smoke developed
index of not more than 50.
E. Duct Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with
NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.
F. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
2.6 DOUBLE WALL DUCTS 1
A. Exposed round and rectangular ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured or shop-fabricated
double wall a minimum G-90 galvanized steel ductwork with 1"fiberglass insulation between the
solid outer shell and perforated inner liner. All ducts and fittings shall be construction for
SMACNA's latest standards. All gaskets shall be UL listed to conform to ASTM E84-91a and
NFPA 90A.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ductwork of one of the
following: United-McGills K-27, Lindab Safe, Semco or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK
A. General:
1. Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which
will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated
over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each
TEMPLATE 233113 -2 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233113 -METAL DUCTS
indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork
accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces
' smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type
which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at
every floor.
' B. Sealing:
1. Seal all longitudinal seams, S's and drives and all joints with mastic or cement. Install
according to SMACNA standards.
' C. Balancing Dampers:
1. The sheet metal contractor shall be fully responsible for installing balancing dampers in
the ductwork, (whether shown on the drawing or not) in order to arrive at the intended air
flow. The balancing sub-contractor shall provide direction and assistance in determining
locations where dampers are required. Additional dampers, if required shall be installed
at no additional cost to the owner.
D. Wall Penetrations:
I1. Seal and pack around all ducts and piping sleeves which pass through walls that extend
to bottom side of structure and rated walls.
E. Field Fabrication:
' 1. Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and
accommodate installation requirements.
F. Routing:
' 1. Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and avoid
diagonal runs wherever possible. Run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct
useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close
' to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure
elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure or
concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate
insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished
' and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts,
hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in
solid partitions, except as specifically shown.
2. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.
G. Electrical Equipment Spaces:
1. Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces
and enclosures.
' H. Penetrations:
1. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view,
conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
' flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to
duct and substrate.
2. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide fire dampers and
firestopping between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division-7
' Section "Firestopping".
3. All dampers integral to or utilized as part of an engineered smoke control system shall be
listed and comply with UL 555S.
4. All fire dampers shall be listed and comply with UL 555.
5. All dampers shall be low leakage with edge and blade seals. Damper manufacturers are
subject to specification compliance. Provide products by one of the following: Greenheck
Fan Corporation, Nailor Industries, Ruskin Company, Young Regulator Company
TEMPLATE 233113 -3 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
Coordination:
1. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames,
equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER
A. General:
1. Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards. Size
of ductwork shown on the drawings is free net area, outside dimension of ducts will need
to be increased if lined duct is used.
2. Store internally lined ductwork up off of the floor. Protect internally lined ductwork from
water and dust. "Butter the leading edge of all internal duct lining with the manufacturer's
recommended adhesive.
3. Inspect and repair all damaged lining prior to installation of ductwork.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A. Maximum Length:
1. For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 5' - 0" extended length.
Installation shall have smooth full radius turns down to diffuser.
2. Installation not permitted above inaccessible ceilings.
3.4 ACCESS PANELS
1. Furnish all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment. Provide access
panels for all concealed valves, vents, controls and cleanout doors, and sprinkler devices
required by NFPA. Provide frame as required for finish. Furnish panels to General
Contractor. Exact locations to be approved by the Architect. Minimum size to be 12" x
12", units to be 16 gauge steel, locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
TEMPLATE 233113 -4 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
t GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS
A. Provide centrifugal roof type, curb mounted, power ventilators of type, size, and capacity as
scheduled, and as specified herein.
B. Type: Centrifugal fan, direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide aluminum, galvanized steel,
' or fiberglass weatherproof housings as scheduled. Provide square base to suit roof curb.
Provide permanent split-capacitor type motor for direct driven fans; capacitor-start, induction-run
type motor for belt driven fans.
' C. Provide the Following Types of Housing Design: Hooded dome type.
D. Electrical: Provide factory-wired non-fusible type disconnect switch at motor in fan housing.
Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical
' connection.
E. Provide NEMA 1 disconnect factory mounted. For single phase fractional HP fans use a toggle
type disconnect switch. On three phase integral HP fans use a NEMA 1 safety switch.
F. Bird Screens: Provide removable bird screens, 1/2" mesh, 16-ga aluminum or brass wire.
G. Dampers: Provide motor-actuated louvered dampers in curb bases. Damper motor shall be
120V/ 1 phase unless otherwise noted. Provide local disconnect switch.
' H. All dampers integral to or utilized as part of an engineered smoke control system shall be listed
and comply with UL 555S.
I. Duct Lining: Provide 1"thick, 3-lb density duct liner a minimum of 10' (ten feet) up stream of fan.
J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal roof ventilators of
one of the following: Acme, Cook (Loren) Co., Greenheck., Twin City Fan & Blower
2.2 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard shop-fabricated units, modified if necessary to
comply with requirements. Roof curb to be insulated.
B. Fabricate structural framing for units of structural quality sheet steel, formed to manufacturer's
standard profiles for coordination with roofing, insulation and deck construction. Include 45 deg.
cant strips and deck flanges with offsets to accommodate roof insulation. Weld corners and
seams to form watertight units.
C. Clean and paint units with manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive metal primer paint.
D. Reinforce continuous runs of over 3'-0" length, by inserting welded stiffeners of heavy gage with
' flanges as required to provide sufficient rigidity and strength to withstand maximum lateral
forces in addition to superimposed vertical loads.
E. Sloping Roof Decks: For deck slopes of 1/4" per foot and more, fabricate support units to form
' level top edge.
1. Gage and Height: Fabricate units of metal gage and to height above roof surface as
indicated.
1
TEMPLATE 233423 - 1 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
2. Where gage or height are not indicated, fabricate units of 14-ga metal, and nominal
height of 14".
3. Provide pressure treated wood nailer, not less than 1-5/8" thick and of width indicated,
but not less than width of support wall assembly. Anchor nailer securely to top of metal
frame unit.
4. Provide lumber pressure treated with water-borne preservatives for"above ground" use.
5. Insulate units inside structural support wall with rigid glass fiber insulation board of
approximately 3-lb. density and 1-1/2" minimum thickness, except as otherwise indicated.
6. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide prefabricated roof curbs
of one of the following: Custom Curb, Inc., Equipment Manufacturer., MicroMetl, Pate
Co., Shipman., Thycurb.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION ,
A. General:
1. Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators are to be
installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate ventilator work with work of roofing, walls, and ceilings, as necessary for proper
interfacing.
B. Provide access door in duct below ventilator to service damper.
C. Solder bottom joints and up 2" of side joints of duct under roof ventilator to retain any moisture
entering ventilator.
D. Access: Provide access and service space around and over fans as indicated, but in no case
less than that recommended by manufacturer.
E. Roof Curbs: Furnish roof curbs to roofing Installer for installation. Install according to roofing
manufacturer's recommendation and specifications.
F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
G. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in direction indicated
and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with centrifugal fan start-up until wiring
installation is acceptable to fan Installer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1
A. Testing:
1. After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate
proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field
correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units, which
cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Cleaning:
1. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with
manufacturer's touch-up paint. '
TEMPLATE 233423 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
t GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
3.5 SPARE PARTS
1
A. General:
1. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one spare set of belts for each belt drive power ventilator.
' END OF SECTION
I
1
1
t
I
1
TEMPLATE 233423 -3 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233433 -AIR CURTAINS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS '
A. Product Data:
1. For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. General: Provide air doors of size and capacity as noted on drawings. Air doors shall operate
at a low sound level and meet OSHA standards.
1. Construction:
2. Wheels: Talc-filled polypropylene or aluminum.
3. Housing: Galvanized steel.
4. Motorboard: Galvanized steel.
B. Velocity Control: Provide adjustable louver damper controls for regulating rate of air flow.
When louvers are completely closed air velocity shall reduce to sixty percent.
C. Directional Control: Provide adjustable vanes at outlet nozzle for directing air where needed
and readily set to compensate for possible draft conditions through door openings. Vanes shall
have a forty percent girth sweep front to back.
D. Motors: Provide totally enclosed shaded-pole, or permanent-split capacitor motors, Class "B"
insulation, resiliently mounted, tap wound with built-in thermal overload protection, and with
permanently lubricated type sleeve or ball bearings. Select motors with the voltage as
scheduled.
E. Extended Motor Oilers: Provide plastic tubes for lubricating motor bearings which are installed
beneath grille.
F. Motor Controls: Provide multi-speed motor control switch with OFF position, mounted behind
access door.
G. Fans: Provide double width, double inlet centrifugal fans, which are balanced statically and
dynamically, of indicated capacity. Select fans with single or double extended motor shaft, with
fan housing and motor fastened as an integral assembly to a motorboard.
2.2 ELECTRIC AIR CURTAINS
A. Heating Elements: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard heating
elements of types, sizes, capacities and ratings for duty indicated; consisting of resistance
elements enclosed in steel sheath with extended fins, or with spirally finned sheath.
B. Electric Heating Capacity: Size elements for indicated fan speed, CFM, room heating load
(BTUH), entering air temperature, and electric input(watts, voltage, phase).
C. Internal Electrical Wiring: Provide units with high temperature, electrical heat-resistant wiring in
flexible metal conduit from terminal junction box to electrical devices. Provide fusing for motor
and control circuit wiring. Provide all required control transformers.
D. Devices: Provide air doors with the following devices:
1. Thermally activated fan switch to keep fan motor operating until residual heat is
dissipated.
2. Disconnect switch.
3. Automatic reset, high limit cut-out switch located in discharge air stream.
4. Manual "Summer-OFF-Winter" switch.
I
TEMPLATE 233433 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233433-AIR CURTAINS
5. Unit-mounted line voltage thermostat
6. Remote-mounted line voltage thermostat
' 7. Automatic door switch: Plunger type installed in door area to activate air curtain when
doo opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
8. Control Power Transformer
' 9. Magnetic Contactor(Relay Kit)
10. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric air doors of
one of the following:, Mars Sales Company, Inc., King National, Raywall
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air curtains are to be installed. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
' A. General:
1. Install air doors as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation
instructions.
2. Locate air doors as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size
'
3. for recessed units.
Install piping as indicated.
4. Provide disconnect at side or unit for installation in recessed ceiling.
5. Provide trim piece to finish linear slot supply in ceiling for recessed units.
6. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.
7. Install electric heating terminal units including components as indicated, in accordance
with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry
' practices; complying with applicable installation requirements of NEC and NECA's
"Standard of Installation".
8. Coordinate with other electrical work, including wiring/cabling, as necessary to properly
interface installation of heating terminal units with other work.
9. Clean dust and debris from each heating terminal as it is installed to ensure cleanliness.
10. Comb out damaged fins where bent or crushed before covering elements with
enclosures.
11. Touch-up scratched or marred heating terminal enclosure surfaces to match original
finishes.
12. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors.
' Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and
terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Provide equipment grounding connections for electric heating terminals as indicated. Tighten
connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL Std 486A to assure
permanent and effective grounding.
1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon completion of installation of electric heating terminals, and after building circuitry has been
energized, test heating terminals to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.
B. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance;
otherwise, remove and replace with new units and proceed with retesting.
I
TEMPLATE 233433 -2 2/28/19
p
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233433 -AIR CURTAINS
C. Replace electric heating terminals and accessories which are damaged and remove damaged
items from construction site.
3.5 ELECTRICAL WIRING '
A. General:
1. Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-
mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.
2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of the electrical specifications. Do not proceed with equipment
start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. General:
1. After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces, vacuum
clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.
2. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish
materials furnished by manufacturer.
3. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
1
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 233433 -3 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND LOUVERS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data
I1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company, Carnes, Metalaire, Inc., Nailor Industries Inc.,
Price Industries, Titus, Tuttle & Bailey, Warren Technologies.
2.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS, GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Refer to schedules for basis of design.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts,fittings,and
accessories. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in
lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other
items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
I
r
I
1
1
I
1
TEMPLATE 233713 - 1 2/28/19
t
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND LOUVERS
B. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and I
maintenance of dampers and air extractors.
END OF SECTION 1
I
1 I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
1
1
1
TEMPLATE 233713 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 237433— ROOFTOP PACKAGED UNIT HVAC
r
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data:
I1. For each type of product indicated.
1.2 WARRANTY
A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger:
Ii. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within
warranty period, compressors and heat exchangers with inadequate and defective
materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure
to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing,
protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period.
Replacement is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for
removal and reinstallation.
B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of owner acceptance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP CONSTANT VOLUME PACKAGED UNIT HVAC
A. General: Rooftop unit shall be factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof or slab
installation and, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and
evaporator fans, refrigeration and temperature controls, filters, and dampers. Capacities and
electrical characteristics are scheduled. Casing manufacturer's standard casing construction,
having corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Casings shall have removable panels
or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts, a minimum of 1" thick thermal
insulation, knockouts for electrical and piping connections, and an exterior condensate drain
connection, and lifting lugs.
1. Unit casing shall have double wall construction with foam injected panels.
2. Roof Curbs: Manufacturer's standard construction, insulated and having corrosive
protective coating, complete with factory-installed wood nailer and drain nipple.
Construction shall be in accordance with NRCA Standards.
3. Evaporator Fans: Forward-curved, centrifugal, belt-driven fans with adjustable sheaves;
and permanently lubricated motor bearings.
4. Condenser fans: Propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings.
5. Coils: Aluminum plate fin and seamless copper tube type. Fins shall have collars drawn,
belled and firmly bonded to the tubes by means of mechanical expansion of the tubes.
No soldering or tinning shall be used in the bonding process. Coils shall have a
galvanized steel casing. Coils shall be mounted in the coil casing with same end
connections accessible for service. Coils shall be removable from the unit through the
roof or through the piping enclosure. Coil section shall be completely insulated.
6. Phenolic Coating (Recommended for locations within 10 miles from coastline) — Finned
tube coils shall be protected with a pure phenolic thermosetting resinous coating. The
coating shall withstand dry heat up to 205 degrees Celsius (400 degress Fahrenheit), and
show no sign of attack after 3,000 hours of salt spray test to A.S.T.M. Specification 8117.
7. Refrigerant cooling coils: have an equalizing type vertical distributor to ensure each coil
circuit receives the same amount of refrigerant. Coils shall be proof (450 psig) and leak
(300 psig) tested with air pressure under water, then cleaned, dehydrated, and sealed
with a holding charge of nitrogen.
I
TEMPLATE 237433 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 237433— ROOFTOP PACKAGED UNIT HVAC
8. Condensate Pan: Provide IAQ stainless steel, double sloping drain pain. Provide high
condensate in primary condensate pan to de-energize unit upon detection of high
condensate levels.
9. Compressors: Serviceable, semi-hermetic, or hermetic compressors with integral
vibration isolators, and crankcase heaters, which de-energize during compressor
operation. Units shall also have: 11110. Hot gas reheat coil: Coil shall have copper tubes with maximum 12 corrugated aluminum
fins per inch. The multiple coil circuits shall be interlaced. Coil shall have 18 gauge
galvanized casing and end plates. Coil shall be factory leak tested at pressures not less
than 400 psig in a water bath. Coil shall be UL listed.
11. Thermal expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, compressor isolation service
valves, liquid line service valves; minimum of 2 refrigerant circuits for units having 2 or
more compressors; suction line accumulators and fan-cycling control for low ambient
control to 0 deg F (-18 deg C).
12. Lead compressor shall be 2-stage.
13. Safety Controls: low pressure cutout, manual reset; high pressure cutout, manual reset;
compressor motor overload protection, manual reset; anti-recycling timing device;
adjustable low-ambient lockout; oil pressure switch.
14. Features: redundant gas valves; electronic spark ignition system; high limit cutout;
forced draft proving switch; flame roll-out switch.
15. Economizer:
Enthalpy Controlled Economizer: Provide return and outside air dampers, outside air
filter, fully modulating electric control system with dry control, and adjustable mixed-air
thermostat. System shall be capable of driving 100% closed for unoccupied mode,
minimum outside air position and modulation to 100 percent open outside air capability.
Provide automatic changeover through adjustable control device.
16. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics — Provide fault detection and diagnostics to
monitor outside airflow temperature, return airflow temperature, supply airflow
temperature, refrigerant gas and liquid pressures. Unit controller shall provide status of
available free cooling, enabled economizer, enabled compressor(s), enabled heating,
mixed air low limit cycle and current value of all sensors. Provide manual override of
each operating mode (occupied and unoccupied heating and cooling, economizer and
shutdown) for testing and verification. System shall be able to detect air temperature
sensor failure, not economizing when unit should be or shouldn't be, dampers not
modulating and excessive outside air. Temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of+/-
2 deg. F across the range of 40. deg F to 80 deg. F. Refrigerant pressure sensors shall
have an accuracy of+/-3%. Faults shall be annunciated at unit's thermostat.
17. Heating Types:
a. Heat exchangers: Provide manufacturer's construction of aluminized steel gas-
fired heat exchangers and burners, designed for minimum of 2-stage operation.
Provide single gas connection.
18. Temperature Controls: Provide controls interface with EMS.
19. Relief:
a. [Barometric Relief - Shall include relief damper section with mist eliminator.
Dampers open to relieve positive pressure within the building. Available only with
economizer.]
b. [Power Exhaust Fan — Shall be factory installed for units larger than 5 tons. Shall
include relief damper section with mist eliminator. Dampers open to relieve
positive pressure within the building. Available only with economizer.]
20. Filters:
21. Provide air filters to fit in filter box, with a Maximum filter face velocity of 500 fpm, of the
following type:
22. Disposable Type: 30% efficient disposable pleated filters (ASHRAE Standard 52.1)
TEMPLATE 237433 -2 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 237433— ROOFTOP PACKAGED UNIT HVAC
or MERV 8 filters (ASHRAE 52.2), consisting of viscous coated fibers with filtering media
encased in fiberboard cell sides having perforated metal grids on each side to provide
' media support.
23. Provide filters with clean resistance not exceeding 0.10" w.g. at face velocity of 300 fpm,
and ASHRAE weight arrestance efficiency of 70-82%, based on final operating resistance
I of0.5"w.g.
Options:
24. Low Ambient Control - Shall allow compressor operation for cooling down to 0 F outside
air temperature.
25. Hail Guards: Provide hail guards around the condenser coil to protect the condenser fins
against hail.
26. National Account Information: Owner has engaged Trane and Carrier national account
agreements. GC shall purchase, receive and install equipment. Purchasing will be
through the national account agreement only. Coordinate with owner construction
manager for additional information. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide rooftop units of one of the following: Carrier Air Conditioning; Div.
' of Carrier Corp., Trane Co.,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
' 3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop units are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install rooftop units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install
units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's
recommended clearances.
B. The rooftop unit(s) shall be installed a minimum of 10'-0" from any roof edge regardless of
location indicated on plans, unless a screen wall or railing is installed per the local building
' code. See the architectural plans for coordination.
C. Support: Install and secure roof curb to roof structure, in accordance with National Roofing
Contractor's Association (NRCA) installation recommendations and shop drawings. Install and
' secure rooftop units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing.
D. Condensate Piping: Provide Type L copper condensate piping with trap.
E. Electrical Connections: Refer to Electrical Specifications- Electrical Connections for Equipment
I for final connections to equipment and installation of loose shipped electrical components.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
' A. Start-Up Services:
1. Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to start-up rooftop
units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and
demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
I controls and equipment.
. ING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
' A. Provide services of manufacturer's service representative to instruct Owner's personnel in
operation and maintenance of rooftop units. Training shall include start-up and shut-down,
servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, and troubleshooting
procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technical assistance. Review
I
TEMPLATE 237433 -3 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 237433— ROOFTOP PACKAGED UNIT HVAC
operating and maintenance data contained in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals '
specified in Division One.
B. Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day prior notice to the Architect/Engineer. '
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
r
1
I
I
1
1
I
1
I
1
TEMPLATE 237433 -4 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260501 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRIC
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Closeout
1. Operation and Maintenance Manual: For equipment and systems to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
B. Shop Drawings
Ii.1.2 As-Built Drawings: For recording installed conditions that deviate from design documents.
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to all sections.
B. Obtain the latest Design and Construction Standards document(s) from the Owner. Comply
with all Owner-specific requirements in addition to requirements set forth in these specifications
and accompanying drawings. Should there be a conflict, the Owner's standards shall take
precedence, unless prevailing codes and regulations mandate otherwise.
1.3 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Submittal of a bid indicates that the contractor has examined the drawings, specifications, and
had an opportunity to visit the site to be able to provide a comprehensive complete bid.
B. The intent of these specifications and the accompanying drawings is to provide complete and
workable systems as shown, specified and required by applicable codes. Interpret these
specifications in conjunction with the drawings and provide all work described. If work is shown
on drawings and not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, it is to be included in the
work the same as though clearly set forth by both. Should there be a conflict between the
specifications and drawings, provide the greater quantity or better quality. Immediately notify
owner's representative and design professional of such conflicts.
C. Provide all labor and material, tools and equipment necessary to render all systems complete
' and operational, and ready for turnover to Owner. Work defined within this section applies for all
Division 26 work, including work of Division 26 that is provided in support of work of other
divisions. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in documents of other construction divisions,
products to be installed shall also be furnished under Division 26.
D. During mobilization or construction, if an abnormal condition is uncovered either with existing
conditions, equipment loads, submittal data, etc. bring these to the attention of the Design
Professional for review.
E. Phasing -Where the scope of work dictates that the project shall be constructed in phases, all
costs shall be incurred by this contractor for any temporary work required so that previous
I
1.4 phases can be operational while construction is being done to adjacent spaces.
GENERAL STANDARDS
A. Provide work in compliance with applicable provisions of the following standards. Provide listing
and labeling for all electrical materials, marked for respective intended uses, from UL or other
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) that is acceptable to applicable Authorities
Having Jurisdiction (AHJs).
B. Provide materials, installation methods, workmanship, testing, etc., in strict accordance with the
latest adopted edition of applicable national standards and local adopted codes.
I
TEMPLATE 2605011 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260501 -COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRIC
1.5 PERMITS AND REGULATIONS
A. Obtain and pay for permits, fees, certificates of inspection and approval, etc. required for this
branch of the work. Furnish Owner with certificates of final inspection and approval prior to final
acceptance of this branch of the work.
B. Laws and regulations which bear upon or affect the various branches of this work shall be
complied with by this contractor and are hereby made a part of this contract.
1.6 DEFINITIONS
A. Furnish - Procure, supply and deliver to project site, ready for installation, install and warrant
(unless indicated otherwise on documents). Include warranty expenses.
B. Install - Assemble, wire and connect loose-shipped components on site. Place in position for
service or use, including material, labor, accessories, services, and testing. Wire, connect, and
render fully operational for intended use.
C. Provide - Furnish and Install. Similar Terms: "include", "shall", "equip with", "consisting of"
PART 2 - PRODUCTS I
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Should deviation from basis of design equipment impact other contractors scope of work it shall
be the responsibility of this contractor to coordinate with and cover these costs in addition to
their own.
PART 3 -EXECUTION I
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Unless specifically indicated, provide all specified and drawn work as required to render all
equipment and systems fully operational, including all ancillary, accessory, and support work.
3.2 UTILITY VERIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Field verify locations of underground and aboveground utilities, or those otherwise obscured
from view, in the vicinity of work prior to commencing work. Utilize "811" call before you dig and
hire locating service to identify, locate and mark remaining utilities and private lines. Obtain on-
site approval from local utility prior to connecting services. Failure to perform the above shall
result in contractor proceeding at their risk and accepting full responsibility for incorrect
connections.
3.3 INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES
A. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by
Owner or others without notification to Owner's Representative and written permission. Arrange
for and provide temporary electric service meeting requirements of owner. Notify Owner's
Representative no fewer than fourteen days in advance of proposed interruption of electric
service.
3.4 TEMPORARY SERVICE
A. Where required, provide temporary electrical service. Make necessary arrangements with local
utility companies for temporary electrical service and pay associated fees for inspections,
connections, initiation, etc.
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 2605011 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260502 -COMMON ELECTRIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Mounting Heights: Outlet mounting heights as indicated on the plans are approximate. Determine
' the exact mounting heights(and locations)of outlets in the field with relation to architectural detail
and equipment being served. Coordinate outlet location with equipment, with furniture plans and
with architectural elevation plans. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned,
contact the Owner's Representative for direction. Prior to rough-in, coordinate final mounting
heights of system outlet boxes in field with Owner's Representative. Install boxes at heights as
follows, to center of box, unless directed otherwise in field or otherwise noted on E-series
drawings or architectural plans. In cases where using center of box for measurement would result
' in a switch-height device having an operable component higher than 48 inches above finished
floor, install boxes lower as needed so that uppermost part of operable component is no higher
than 48 inches. Height of boxes dimensioned from ceiling apply to rooms having ceilings 9' or
less; in rooms having higher ceilings, locate these as directed in the field.
Switches—Counters: 44" (field verify& match recept. heights)
Switches— Elsewhere: 46"
Occupancy Sensors, Wallbox: 46"
Occupancy Sensors, Elsewhere: As recommended by manufacturer
Receptacles—Counters: 44" (field verify)
Receptacles— Elsewhere: 18"
Starters: 46"
Disconnects: 46"
Circuit Breaker Panelboards: 72" to top unless code dictates otherwise
Wall Mounted Luminaires: As noted on plans or directed by Design Prof.
Control Stations: 46"
Communication Outlets: 18"
Fire Alarm Manual Pull Stations: 46"to top of operating handle
Fire Alarm NV Annunciators: 80"to bottom of outlet box
Fire Alarm Door Holders: 84"
Other Outlets/Fixtures/Equipment: As directed by Design Professional
B. Lock-Out Tag-Out Devices: Provide permanently installed lock-out tag-out devices compliant with
NFPA 70 and OSHA, with padlocking provisions, at source overcurrent devices for the following
applications.
1. Where the normal NFPA 70-compliant location of the disconnecting means is impracticable
or introduces additional or increased hazards to persons or property.
' 2. Where required by NFPA 70.
3. Where required by OSHA.
4. Where required by any other authority having jurisdiction.
C. Electrical Installations:
1. Install conduit, wiring, outlet box and junction box type work in finished areas concealed.
Such work installed in unfinished areas may be exposed only at the discretion of the
Owner's Representative.
2. All new electrically related work shall be supported directly from building structural
members. New electrically related work shall not be supported from ductwork, ductwork
hangers, ceiling supports, existing conduit supports, etc. All conduits (and cable
assemblies, where applicable) shall be routed parallel to building structural
members. Noncompliant work installed by the electrical contractor shall be removed and
reinstalled to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and the Design Professionals,
at the expense of the electrical contractor.
I
TEMPLATE 2605022 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260502 -COMMON ELECTRIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
3. Provide systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data,
including coordination drawings,to greatest extent possible. Install systems, materials, and
equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
architectural/structural components. Provide factory-furnished filler plates in unused
spaces of manufactured equipment.
4. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair and replacement
of equipment components. Install equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of
interference with other installations. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-
of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. Protect the structure,
furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials.
5. Verify dimensions by field measurements. Take measurements and be responsible for
exact size and locations of openings required for the installation of work. Where detailed
method of installation is not indicated or where variations exist between described work
and approved practice, follow direction of the Owner's Representative.
6. Do not install device wall outlets directly back to back, where located on opposite sides of
common walls. Offset outlets by at least two feet for applications in fire rated walls and
smoke rated walls and applications in acoustically treated walls. Offset outlets by at least
one foot for other applications.
7. Provide wires continuous from outlet to outlet and properly splice joints. Provide insulation
value for joints 100% greater than that of the wire. Mechanical wire splicers may be used.
Where friction and rubber tape is used, provide tape conforming to Federal Specifications
HH-T-11 and HH-T-111. Where plastic electrical tape is used, provide Scotch #33, or
approved equal. Provide minimum 8" tail for conductors terminating at each wired outlet
at their outlet fittings to facilitate installment of devices, luminaires, etc.
8. Use of synthetic or plastic "tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire ties" and similar products are not
permitted as a permanent means of anchoring, securing, supporting or otherwise installing
any cables, conductors, conduits, raceways, devices, equipment or other electrical work.
9. If during construction it becomes apparent that some specific minor changes in layout will
result in a neater job or better arrangement, make such alterations without additional
compensation and without having to offer credit. Obtain Design Professional's review
before making such changes. Provide workmanship throughout that conforms to the
standards of best practice. Marks, dents and finish scratches are prohibited on exposed
materials, luminaires, fittings, etc. Clean inside of panels and equipment boxes.
D. Connectors and Connections:
1. Provide complete assembly of materials for each type of required electrical connection,
including but not limited to, pressure connectors,terminals(lugs), electrical insulating tape,
heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as
needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections
that match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables that are supplying electrical power.
Provide electrical connectors and terminals that mate and match, including sizes and
ratings, with equipment terminals, and that are recommended by equipment manufacturer
for intended applications. Provide connectors that are specifically UL listed and labeled for
the exact splicing/termination application, including for instances where solid conductors
are spliced/connected to stranded conductors. Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-
shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, wirenuts, cable ties, etc. as recommended for use
by accessories manufacturers for intended applications.
3. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match
conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies
and installed equipment. Cover splices with electrical insulating material to achieve
insulation at least 100 percent in excess of electrical insulation rating of those conductors
I
TEMPLATE 2605022 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260502 -COMMON ELECTRIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
beingspliced. Prepare cables and wires, bycuttingand strippingcovering armor, jacket,
and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires
are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on
conductors. Do not"ring"copper conductors while skinning wire.
4. Ground metal frames of portable and stationary direct-wired electrically operated
equipment by connecting frames to the circuit equipment grounding conductor and to
grounded metal raceway. Provide necessary electrical connections between the specified
equipment and junction boxes, disconnect switches, and starters near equipment with
flexible metallic conduit and matched connectors. Do not expose flexible conduit in finished
I
5. areas.
Wire and connect electrical equipment furnished under this branch of work, other branches
of work and by the Owner. Review documents of other trades to identify electrically
operated/controlled equipment that is furnished or installed by the Owner, or by other
trades. Provide power connections and local disconnects for same. Provide control wiring
(including relays, starters, etc.), as required to render equipment fully operable unless
indicated otherwise on drawings or in project manual. Determine exact requirements in
field from respective equipment installer.
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
I
1
1
M
1
I
TEMPLATE 2605022 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260503 -SUBMITTALS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL I
A. Where submittals are required by the Contract Documents, they shall be prepared and supplied
in accordance with the Contract Documents. In addition to Division 01, the Contractor is advised
to review and comply with the requirements articulated within each Division and within each
section of that Division.
B. The contractor is not relieved of responsibility for providing specified or drawn scope of work
should any errors or omissions in submittal information not be noted by the Design Professional
during submittal reviews or site observations.
C. Some Divisions may include a division-specific"Submittal Requirements for ...." section. Where
this section exists, it articulates additional requirements for submittals that apply to the work of
that Division.
D. The submittal requirements help to identify, track and keep the project organized for all parties
involved. They are necessary to ensure a timely turnaround and an appropriate technical review.
Submittals that do not conform to the administrative requirements are rejected and returned,
without technical review.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL DIRECTION I
A. Reference Specification Section 01 33 00.00 for a full list of submittal procedures and required
formats.
3.2 USE OF ELECTRONIC DRAWINGS FROM THE OWNER'S DESIGN TEAM
A. Plan drawings for the Project were created with Revit.
B. If expressly permitted by the Owner and the terms of the Contract, editable electronic versions of
standard-scale, AutoCAD-based plan drawings may be made available for the creation of shop
and as-built drawings.
C. Upon request, when available, electronic versions of standard-scale, Navisworks (.dwf) and
(.nwc)or AutoCAD 360 (.dwg)files may be made available for coordination purposes.
D. Due to the proprietary nature of internal design systems, editable native-software versions of
some drawings, including but not limited to system diagrams and details, will not be made
available in an editable form. In these cases, electronic versions of the drawings may be made
available only in PDF, JPG, or similar non-editable electronic form, at the sole discretion of the
Design Professional. '
END OF SECTION
1
I
SUBMITTALS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260503 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data
1. For each type of conductor and cable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
• 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below, or by an NRTL listed
equivalent manufacturer.
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.
2. Alpha Wire.
3. Belden Inc.
4. Encore Wire Corporation.
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
6. Southwire Incorporated.
7. American Insulated Wire Corp
8. Republic Wire
B. Conductor Insulation and Multiconductor Cables: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.
Refer to Part 3 of this section for allowable types specific to this project.
C. MC Cable (Metal-Clad):
1. Provide Type MC Cables that are minimum 90 degrees C rated, with components and
fittings listed for grounding, compliant with NEC Articles 250 and 330.
2. Provide cable formed from continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc coated or
galvanized (inside and outside) strip steel or aluminum jacket. Provide cables with full
parity insulated equipment ground conductor.
3. Provide compatible steel fittings with integral red plastic insulated throat bushings,
compliant with NEC 330.
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed below, or by an NRTL listed
equivalent manufacturer.
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Gardner Bender.
3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.
4. Ideal Industries, Inc.
5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.
6. NSi Industries LLC.
7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.
8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.
9. Tyco Electronics.
10. Square D, a Schnieder Electric Company
11. Thomas & Betts
12. Arrow-Hart Div, Crouse-Hinds Co
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,
and class for application and service indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to
or greater than those of the wires upon which used.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -
1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
II
3.1 APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION
A. Feeders: Stranded copper conductors.
B. Branch Circuits: Stranded copper conductors.
C. Provide conductor insulation rated at 600VAC and 90 degrees C. Provide wire, cable and I
connectors suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed. Provide
THHN/THWN-2 insulation for conductors for wiring indoors, above grade, and in dry locations.
Provide XHHW-2 insulation for wiring below grade and for wiring subject to moisture conditions.
D. Grounded ("Neutral") Conductors: Provide dedicated parity sized grounded ("neutral") conductor
for each branch circuit phase conductor. Provide grounded ("neutral") conductor in all lighting
control device(switch, dimmer, occupancy sensor, etc.)wall outlet boxes, even if not immediately
used. Provide grounded ("neutral") conductor for all multi-pole feeders. Provide grounded
("neutral") conductor(s) for all multi-pole feeders and branch circuits unless this contractor
determines in field that the affected load(s) will never have need for a grounded ("neutral")
conductor and NEC does not mandate otherwise.
E. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points prior to pulling
conductors and cables. Use manufacturer UL approved pulling compound or lubricant where
necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use
pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not
damage cables or raceway.
F. Install wire in raceway unless specifically permitted otherwise in this specification section, under
other Division 26 sections, or on electrical drawings. Identify each spare conductor at each end
with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor.
Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install exposed
cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface
contours where possible.
G. Do not pull wire until raceways are complete, plastering is complete, and raceways are free of
moisture. Install joints and splices only at NEC approved panels, accessible junction boxes, or
accessible outlet boxes. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed
in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary to prevent
damage to conductors. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave
wire/cable grips that will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling
attachment to wire or cable. Conceal work in finished spaces.
H. Support cables according to Section 260529"Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." Use
of synthetic or plastic "tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire ties" and similar products are not permitted as
a permanent means of anchoring, securing, supporting or otherwise installing any cables,
conductors, conduits, raceways, devices, equipment or other electrical work.
Neatly dress work. Install work parallel and perpendicular to surfaces and exposed structural
members, and follow surface contours where possible. Keep conductor splices to minimum.
Install splice and tap connectors that possess equivalent, or better, mechanical strength and
insulation rating than conductors being spliced. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible
with conductor material. Install wires continuous from outlet to outlet. Provide insulation value of
joints at least 100 percent more than that of the wire insulation. Provide adequate length of
conductors within electrical enclosures,and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than #10 AWG cabled in individual circuits.
Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -
2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
IJ. De-rate cables per NFPA 70 where bundled, where passing through insulation, and where
otherwise required to be compliant with NFPA 70 based on field conditions and/or means and
I methods that will be used. De-rate conductors per NFPA 70 where required based on quantities
of conductors within raceways, and where otherwise required to be compliant with NFPA 70
based on field conditions and/or means and methods that will be used.
I K. Type MC cable may be utilized only if NEC approved and if approved by local authority having
jurisdiction and if included in the limited applications defined below.
1. Provide for final connections to luminaires that are installed in accessible tile ceiling
systems (limited to "whips" from building electrical system junction boxes down to
luminaires). Do not install Type MC cable from fixture to fixture unless a special properly
listed and labeled UL approved system is specifically indicated.
2. Type MC cable may be utilized for new concealed 15 through 60 ampere branchnch circuit
I work
3. Provide only where concealed (install wiring for exposed applications in raceway).
4. Route cables perpendicular and parallel to the building architectural lines, surfaces, and
structural members, keeping offsets to a minimum and following surface contours where
I possible. Maintain a uniform elevation for cable runs wherever possible. Support and
anchor cables at maximum 4-foot intervals and within 12" of box or outlet in a manner that
prevents sagging. Install cables in a manner that prevents overheating. Fasten cables
I directly to the structure using factory clamps and clips specifically designed for the
respective cable (Caddy or equal).
3.2 CONNECTIONS
I A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-
tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A-486B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor
material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than
Iun-spliced conductors. Install conductor at each outlet with at least 8 inches of slack.
B. Provide complete assembly of materials for each type of required electrical connection, including
but not limited to, pressure connectors, terminal (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat shrinkable
I insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to
complete splices and terminations of types indicated.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical connections that
I match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables that are supplying electrical power. Provide
copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 90 degrees. Provide factory splice
kits (U.L. approved for submersion in water and direct burial) for wire splicing in outdoor grade,
I or slab on grade,junction boxes and for all other wet locations.
D. Provide electrical connectors and terminals that mate and match, including sizes and ratings,with
equipment terminals, and that are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended
applications. Connect wires #6 AWG and larger to panels and apparatus by means of approved
lugs or connectors large enough to enclose all strands of the conductors. Provide solderless type
connectors
E. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with
I equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors
of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed
equipment. Cover splices with electrical insulating material to achieve insulation at least 100
I percent in excess of electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. Prepare cables
and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure
uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid
III
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -
3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
111
cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Do not "ring" copper conductors while
skinning wire.
F. There may be cases where circuit or feeder conductor sizes are too large or too small to fit into I
the lugs normally supplied with the power distribution equipment or end-use equipment, due to
circumstances such as increasing conductor sizes to offset voltage drop, unusual breaker frame
sizes, type of conductors used, etc. In such cases provide appropriate factory lug kits for affected
equipment if recommended by manufacturer; elsewhere provide insulated butt-splices with tails
sized to fit respective lugs.
G. Ground metal frames of portable and stationary direct-wired electrically operated equipment by
connecting frames to the circuit equipment grounding conductor and to grounded metal raceway.
Provide necessary electrical connections between the specified equipment and junction boxes,
disconnect switches, and starters near equipment with flexible metallic conduit and matched
connectors. Do not expose flexible conduit in finished areas. I
3.3 CONDUCTOR SIZING
A. Conductor sizes indicated in Division 26 documents are based on copper unless specifically
indicated otherwise on single-line diagram on drawings.
B. Unless specifically indicated otherwise on drawings, provide grounded ("neutral")conductors that
are at least parity-sized with corresponding phase/line conductors for all applications.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 -
4 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. Comply with
ANSI/TIA/EIA-607, "Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for
Telecommunications. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper electrical grounding and bonding
systems and materials with assembly of materials including but not limited to cables/wires,
connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding
jumper braid, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where materials or
components are not indicated, provide products that comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE
requirements, and with established industry standards for those applications indicated. Utilize
compatible metallic materials throughout system to eliminate galvanic action.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide conductors and connectors as specified in Section 260519. Subject to
being equivalent and subject to compliance with requirements, provide other grounding related
materials by Erico (as a standard of quality), or other equivalent available manufacturers where
not otherwise specified in Division 26.
2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CONNECTORS AND ELECTRODES
A. For insulated conductors, provide copper or tinned-copper wire or cable insulated (green-
colored) conductors, insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or
authorities having jurisdiction. For bare copper conductors, provide: Solid Conductors,
ASTM B 3; Stranded Conductors, ASTM B 8; Tinned Conductors, ASTM B 33.
B. Provide connectors listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and
other items connected. Provide copper or copper alloy bolted connectors for conductors and
pipes, pressure type with at least two bolts. Provide clamp type pipe connectors, sized for pipe.
Use exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being
joined and installation conditions.
C. Provide copper-clad steel (copper molecularly bonded to nickel-sealed high-strength steel core)
ground rods, 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length (sectional rods may be used when rods
are longer than 10 feet). Provide sheet copper plate electrodes that are 20-gage by 36" by 36",
made from high-conductivity sheet, with cable attachments (minimum quantity of 2), sized for
cables as necessary to fulfill project grounding requirements, where ground rods cannot or
should not be used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Provide green-colored insulation, unless indicated otherwise. Provide solid conductors for No. 8
AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise
indicated. Provide bare copper conductors below grade, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Provide tinned
TEMPLATE 260526 - 1 2/28/19
r
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
conductors in corrosive areas.Where to be installed underground, bury at least 36 inches below
grade.
3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors as required by NFPA 70 and as otherwise
required. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition
to those required by NFPA 70: all feeders; all branch circuits; expansion couplings; flexible
raceway runs.
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct
and connected metallic piping.
C. Water Heaters: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each water I
heater. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
D. Heat-Tracing Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor for bonding
to each heat-tracing cable. I
E. Signal and Communication Equipment: In addition to grounding and bonding required by NFPA
70, provide a separate grounding system complying with requirements in TIA/ATIS J-STD-607-
A. For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other communication equipment, provide No. 4
AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to
each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location. Terminate
grounding conductors on grounding busses or cabinet grounding terminals as applicable.
F. Lighting Poles and Standards Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide grounding
electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding
conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance
except where routed through short lengths of conduit. Bond straps directly to basic structure,
taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to
rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a
disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are at least 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final I
grade unless otherwise indicated. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor
below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging
coating if any. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-
rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding
electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor. Use driving sleeves or
couplings when driving ground rods into the earth.
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except if otherwise indicated.
3. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors. I
E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
TEMPLATE 260526 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260526 -GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange using one of
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or
sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Gas Piping: Bond each above ground portion of gas piping system downstream from
equipment shutoff valve.
F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond
across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
G. Service Entrance Grounding Requirements
1. Provide a parity sized insulated grounded conductor (neutral) for each set of service
entrance feeder phase/line conductors, terminated and bonded to service equipment (i.e.
to each and every service disconnect where applicable). This applies whether or not
downstream loads require a neutral conductor. Install these neutral conductors unspliced
I
2. and unbroken.
Ground and bond service entrance neutrals to room ground busbar, to effectively
grounded structural steel member, to effectively grounded metallic water pipe, and to
I
3. grounding electrode system as required per NFPA 70 and as applicable.
Provide an enclosed single ground busbar at electrical service entrance locations,
bonded to the enclosure, and bonded to service ground with full parity sized green
insulated ground conductor (sized same as service ground conductor). Provide quantity
and sizes of lugs on busbars as required to accommodate bonding to service grounding
electrode system, service neutrals, structural steel, effectively grounded metallic water
pipe, and other grounding requirements set forth in project manual and in NFPA 70.
Provide UL listed lugs for use with copper and aluminum conductors.
4. Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1-inch diameter, or greater, metallic Cold-
water pipe at service entrance using a suitably sized ground clamp. Provide connections
to flanged piping at street side of flange. Ground electrical service system neutral at
service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes. Install braided type bonding
jumpers with code-sized ground clamps on water meter piping to electrically bypass
water meters and water service entrance valves.
5. Contact AHJ electrical inspector in advance of installing service grounding work.
Determine locally approved methods that must be used for re-bar grounding that the AHJ
considers compliant with NFPA 70 Article 250.52.
H. Telecommunications Grounding Requirements
1. At minimum, bond together telecommunications racks, cabinets, tray, ladder rack, and
risers at telecommunications equipment to the ground busbar in the nearest electric
panel. Bond additional points where indicated in the drawings and where required by
NFPA 70.
2. Bond the Main telecommunication service entrances to the electrical service equipment
ground using the most direct route possible to minimize conductor length.
3. Provide copper grounding conductor from main building grounding electrode system at
I
4. service entrance to ground bus at the Telecommunications Entrance Facility.
Provide copper bus bars on plywood backboard. See Division 27, Section 270526.00 for
bus bar specifications.
TEMPLATE 260526 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5. Provide isolation for grounding busbars from the structure support with a 2 inch minimum I
separation using manufacturer's recommended insulating stand-offs and hardware.
END OF SECTION 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 260526 -4 2/28/19 1
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly. Construct with 9/16" dia. holes, nominal 2" o.c. on top surface, with standard factory
finish, and with the all necessary fittings which mate and match with U-channel. Select channel
dimensions for applicable load criteria. Metallic Coatings shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and threading, and applied according to MFMA-4. Manufacturers offering products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allied Tube &Conduit
2. Caddy
3. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries
4. ERICO International Corporation
5. GS Metals Corporation
6. Hilti
7. Powers
8. Thomas & Betts Corporation
9. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
10. Wesanco, Inc.
11. Perma-Cote
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed
for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
1. Riser clamps for supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel;with 2 bolts and nuts, and
4" ears.
2. Clevis hangers: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel;with 1/2"dia. hole for
round steel rod.
3. Galvanized steel clamps; 1/2" rod size.
4. Galvanized steel clamps, 1-1/4"x 3/16"stock; 3/8" cross bolt; flange width 2".
5. One-hole conduit straps for supporting 3/4" rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel.
6. Two-hole conduit straps for supporting 3/4"rigid metal conduit, galvanized steel; 3/4"strap
width; and 2-1/8" between center of screw holes.
7. Offset conduit clamps for supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel.
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser
conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to
suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M,steel plates, shapes,
and bars; black and galvanized.
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their
supports to building surfaces include the following.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that
may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
b. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
I c. Hilti, Inc.
d. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
e. MKT Fastening, LLC.
f. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -
1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2. Capacities: Provide materials and installed systems with tension, shear, and pullout
capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used, plus 100%
safety factor.
111
3. Adverse and/or Corrosive Environment Areas: Provide stainless steel anchors. Provide
hot-dipped galvanized (after fabrication) product and material versions of what is specified
in this section for steel hangers, supports, systems, etc. (supported from stainless steel
anchors), unless stainless steel is specified or otherwise indicated. Such applications and
areas include, but are not limited to:
a. Outdoors.
b. Unconditioned Areas.
c. Coolers/Freezers.
d. Miscellaneous high-humidity or otherwise corrosive environments.
4. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors in Dry Conditioned Areas: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated
steel, for use in hardened Portland cement Provide stainless steel anchors where located
in areas subject to moisture or corrosion.
5. Drop-In Anchors: AISI Type 303 stainless steel, drop-in, shell or flush type, equivalent to
Hilti HDI series.
6. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
7. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
8. Through Bolts: Steel structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
9. Toggle Bolts: All-steel galvanized springhead type, minimum 3/16"x 4".
10. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel, Galvanized steel rods; 1/2" minimum diameter.
11. Clevis hangers: For supporting rigid metal conduit; galvanized steel; with 1/2" minimum
diameter hole for round steel rod.
12. Galvanized steel rod reducing couplings: 1/2"x 5/8" minimum.
13. Galvanized steel clamps: 1/2" minimum rod size; Galvanized steel clamps: Minimum 1-
1/4"x 3/16" stock; minimum 3/8"cross bolt; minimum flange width 2".
14. Hexagon nuts: Galvanized steel.
15. Expansion anchors: Minimum 1/2". 1
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 APPLICATIONS AND INSTALLATION
A. Provide supports, anchors, sleeves and seals furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment
as required.
B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment and components with other construction that
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors
and panels.
C. Provide supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents, plus minimum 100% factor of safety. Provide equipment supports111
capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected
systems and components. Provide rated strengths adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force
to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this project, with a minimum structural safety
factor of five times the applied force.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -
2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Contractor is responsible for repairing all damage to structural elements resulting from the scope
of this work. Anchor hole dimensions shall be per manufacturer recommendations. Select and
apply anchor products based on collective weight being supported, plus 100%factor of safety.
E. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application and installation requirements of hangers and
supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
I Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M.
F. Install equipment and enclosures on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated,
and by bolting units to structural wall or mounting on structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For
equipment and enclosures not at walls, provide freestanding structural-steel channel racks that
are anchored to floor structure and overhead structure.
G. Use of synthetic or plastic"tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire ties" and similar products are not permitted
as a permanent means of anchoring, securing, supporting or otherwise installing any cables,
conductors, conduits, raceways, devices, equipment or other electrical work. Provide metal
clamps, clips, etc.that are manufactured for use for respective applications where they are used.
Use of perforated straps is not permitted.
H. Route all conduits, raceways and cables (where applicable)parallel and perpendicular to building
structural members. Any and all noncompliant work installed by the electrical contractor shall be
removed and reinstalled by the electrical contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner's
Representative and the Design Professionals, at the expense of the electrical contractor.
I. Fasteners shall be zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required for a neat finished installation.
J. Coordinate with installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations as
applicable. Install work so that no raceway or cable is within six inches below roof deck(s).
Suspend and support overhead electrical work from roof trusses and joists/joist girders only at
panel points, at top chord only, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Do not suspend overhead hangers, or support any other overhead electrical work, from non-
poured-concrete roof decks.
L. Support overhead hangers supported from poured-concrete decks using stainless steel threaded
inserts..
M. Field-verify lengths of stems, pendants, cables, suspensions, etc. for all suspended luminaires
with Owner's Representative.
N. Strength of Support Assemblies: Minimum static design load used for strength determination
shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. or 100 percent factor of safety, whichever
is greater.
O. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Use supported
equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions
furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper
attachment to supported equipment. Provide female expansion anchors, and install studs and
nuts after equipment is positioned. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by
equipment manufacturer. Provide anchor bolt bushing assemblies for wall-mounted equipment to
allow for resilient media where equipment and equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through-bolts. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade
boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB
rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried
to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. Provide marine grade products where
subject to moisture conditions. Provide Simpson Strong Tie (or equal) expansion screw
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -
3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
anchors. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting
wood members. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
2. To Wood Structural Members: Provide bolts installed through members.
3. To New Concrete: Provide channel-type concrete inserts and bolt to inserts, or provide
expansion anchors for applications where inserts are not practical.
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
5. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid
reinforcing bars and other structural elements. Review proposed means, methods,
locations, etc. in advance with Owner and Design Professionals.
6. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
7. To Steel: Welded threaded steel studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock
washers and nuts, or beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with
MSS SP-69, clamped to flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists.
8. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
9. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces in finished areas:
Provide blocking between studs behind finished wall surface. Mount equipment, devices
and boxes with backs of enclosures flush to front of finished wall surface.
10. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces in unfinished areas:
Mount equipment on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
11. Do not use powder/gas-actuated driven methods.
P. Coordinate all work with all other trades prior to commencement of the work.
2.2 [CONCRETE BASES
A. Provide dowel rods to connect concrete bases to concrete floors/slabs/substrates. Unless
111
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on maximum 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of
concrete base.
B. Provide epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural
concrete floor/slab/substrate. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
C. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge
of the base. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Cast galvanized or stainless-steel anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
D. Indoor bases shall be at least 4" thick. Reinforcing steel bars shall be placed in both directions
of the bases.
E. Outdoor bases shall be at least 6"thick. Perimeter of pads shall extend down below the frostline.
Reinforcing steel bars shall be placed in both directions of the bases and a mesh overlay shall be
provided.
F. Unless indicated otherwise in specifications or on drawings, use minimum 3000-psi, 28-day
compressive-strength concrete. Size and provide concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a
minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base.
2.3 PLYWOOD EQUIPMENT BOARDS
A. Plywood Equipment Boards: Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-
2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent. Provide plywood panels;APA
C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue; thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less than
3/4 inches deep. Provide marine grade plywood where subject to moisture conditions. Provide
Simpson Strong Tie (or equal)expansion screw anchors.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -
4 2/28/19
r
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Unless otherwise noted, boards shall be painted with two coats of good grade weatherproof flat
gray non-conductive fire-retardant paint on all sides and edges (prior to mounting) and plumbed
in a true vertical position. Provide nominal 1/2" rustproof spacers between back of plywood and
wall. Maintain at least 4 inches from bottom of plywood equipment boards and the finished floor
surface.
C. Unless directed otherwise in field, plywood equipment boards shall be 8 feet high by 3/4 inches
deep by length shown on drawings (as dimensioned or as scaled) or length as required to
accommodate equipment if not indicated on drawings. Unless directed otherwise in field, provide
plywood equipment boards for all indoor surface mounted panelboards and systems "head-end"
equipment for all applications where located in mechanical or electrical rooms/areas and only
where specifically shown on drawings for all other applications
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 -
5 2/28/19
r
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1 MANUFACTURERS I
A. Products: Metal conduits, tubing, boxes and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.2 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS
A. EMT: Comply with FS WW-C-563, ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.
B. GRC/RMC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. Provide steel conduit, galvanized/fused to
inside and outside walls of conduit and fittings after fabrication and after threading.
C. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.
1. Provide liquid-tight flexible metal conduit formed from continuous length of spirally
wound, interlocked, double-wrapped hot-dipped zinc-galvanized (inside & outside) steel
core. Provide liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) that is fully
weatherproof, flame-retardant, heat resistant, oil resistant, sunlight resistant and that
resists heat, oil and chemical breakdown.
2. Provide smooth-wall type jackets (not a corrugated look) for furniture whip (and similar)
applications in indoor finished areas. II
3. Provide Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings compliant with FS W-F-406, Type 1,
Class 3, Style G. Provide cadmium plated, malleable iron fittings with compression type
steel ferrule and neoprene gasket sealing rings, with insulated throat.
4. Provide full parity size green insulated ground wire for all applications, regardless of
length.
5. Provide installed LFMC systems using materials and installation methods that result in
IP67 compliance.
D. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 111
1. EMT: Provide steel, galvanized or zinc-coated water/concrete-tight fittings; do not use
die-cast fittings. Provide Compression type for outdoor applications, and applications in
other wet locations. Provide Compression or set screw type for indoor applications.
2. GRC/RMC: Zinc-Galvanized Steel (after fabrication/factory-threading), threaded (fused-
galvanized after threading.)
3. Expansion Fittings: Material to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.
4. Provide locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with sharp edge for digging into
metal, and ridged outside circumference for proper fastening. Provide screw type
grounding terminal for metal bushings of standard or insulated type.
E. Joint Compound for Threaded Conduit: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.
1.3 [NONMETALLIC CONDUITS AND FITTINGS
A. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with NEMA TC 3 for fittings; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
1. Provide electrical plastic conduit equal to Carlon Plus 40. Provide heavy wall electrical
plastic conduit that is Schedule 40, 90 degrees C rated, constructed of polyvinyl chloride,
in conformity with NEMA TC-2, in conformity with NFPA 70 Article 354, and is UL listed
and labeled for direct burial, concrete encasement, and above ground use.
2. Provide horizontal elbows for service entrance conduits that are maximum 45-degree.
Provide minimum 24-inch radius. Provide larger minimum radius where indicated on
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1 2/28/19
r
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
IGUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
ETION260533 - RAEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
drawings, or if directed in field. Provide multiple units as necessary to obtain required
offset (i.e. provide two 45-degree elbows to obtain a 90-degree offset where needed).
Provide 90-degree maximum elbows.
3. Provide couplers, adapters, "O" rings, sealing, and other accessory components as
required for a complete installation. Provide miscellaneous fittings that have been
specifically designed and manufactured for their particular application.
1.4 [SURFACE RACEWAYS
A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by the Design Professional or Prime
coated, ready for field painting, Design Professional's choice. Provide factory fittings, dividers,
clips, and other accessories as required for a neatly installed complete and operable
installation. Provide factory-applied finish in color(s) and texture(s) as directed by Design
professionals.
1. Plugmold: Provide "plugmold" equal to Legrand #2000 series with single NEMA 5-15R
receptacles on nominal 9-inch centers.]
1.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets
installed in wet locations shall be UL listed and labeled for use in wet locations, including cover
plates and doors. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in damp and areas subject to
moisture shall be UL listed and labeled for use in damp locations, including cover plates and
doors. All other applications shall be UL listed and labeled for the location in which they are
installed. Provide galvanized (after fabrication and after threading) boxes with galvanized or
stainless-steel accessories, hardware and cover plates.
B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. Provide
galvanized-coated flat rolled code-gage non-gangable sheet-steel outlet/junction/pull boxes, of
shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for
installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes and with cable
and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides where applicable. Provide boxes with
threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface
and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding. Provide outlet box accessories
as required for each installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard
hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps, and metal straps for supporting outlet
boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for
individual wiring situations. Provide with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.
C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with
gasketed cover. Only use for special applications with prior case-by-case approval from Design
Professionals.
D. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Comply with outlet box specifications above; nonadjustable, designed
for attachment of luminaire weight (50 lb, minimum) plus 100 percent factor of safety. Outlet
boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and
marked for the maximum allowable weight, including 100 percent factor of safety.
E. Floor Boxes: See Drawings and Section 262726"Wiring Devices".
F. Bushings, knockout closures and locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout closures,
conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to
suit respective installation requirements and applications.
G. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 1-1/2 inches deep or 4 inches square by 2-1/8
inches deep, depending on device depths and wiring fill, with single-gang plaster/"mud" rings
where only one device is being installed. Provide wider boxes for applications where more than
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
two devices will be installed. Provide internal metal dividers where required under NFPA 70 for
varying voltages, multiple circuits, etc. Gangable boxes (using multiple single-gang boxes to
assemble multi-gang boxes) are prohibited.
H. Weathertight outlet boxes and covers:
1. Provide corrosion-resistant weathertight/raintight outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes
and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical
conduit, suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and
corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and
exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.
2. Provide weatherproof covers that mount on a single gang horizontal or vertical
(depending on application) junction box to ensure weather protection for a standard
outlet.
3. Provide minimal profile assemblies that are rated NEMA 3R While In Use and that
employ recessed box and cover design, equal to Thomas & Betts "Red Dot" series.
Provide trim color(s)to match surrounding finished wall surface.
1.6 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes: Boxes and handholes for use in underground
systems shall be designed and identified as defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and
application. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Provide
weatherproof cover, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load
rating consistent with enclosure and handhole location. Provide nonskid cover finish, with a
minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50, and with molded or embossed lettering to indicate
contents.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes/Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a
combination of the two. Design for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated. 111
1. Outdoor junction and pull boxes for branch-circuit-scale applications: Provide flush
grade-mounted junction/pull box assemblies, equal to Quazite #PG1212-BG-12, 12
inches deep, with bolted cover and open bottom. Provide larger sizes where required by
NFPA 70 based on conduit quantities/sizes and wire fill.
2. Outdoor handhole/pull boxes for feeder-scale applications: Provide flush grade mounted
junction/pull box assemblies, equal to Quazite #PG2436-BG-24, 24" deep with bolted
cover and open bottom. Provide larger sizes where required by NFPA 70 based on
conduit quantities/sizes and wire fill. Provide larger sizes where required by NFPA 70 or
field conditions.
PART 2 - EXECUTION I
2.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: GRC/RMC.
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground in Dry and Noncorrosive Locations Not Subject to
Physical Damage: EMT.
3. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground in Damp Locations, Wet Locations, Corrosive
Locations: GRC/RMC.
4. Underground Conduit For Services, Feeders, branch circuits, and Similar Scale Work :
RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC. See details and/or notes on drawings for applications where
concrete or other encasement is required.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment or equipment that is subject to any degree of motion
in its normal operation (Including But Not Limited To Transformers, Electric Solenoids,
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
and Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. Leave sufficient slack in flexible conduit to permit
movement from vibration without adversely affecting conduits and connections.
6. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:
1. Exposed: EMT.
2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: GRC/RMC.
3. Concealed in Cavities of Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.
4. Above-Grade Damp or Wet Locations: GRC/RMC.
5. Below-Grade (and for special conditions if so noted on drawings or other Division
Sections): RNC.
6. Vertical Risers from Below-Grade: GRC/RMC.
7. Cells of Precast Concrete Panels and/or within Movable Partitions: LFMC (Leave
sufficient slack in flexible conduit to permit movement from expansion and contraction.)
8. Connections From Outlet Boxes/Raceways to Systems Furniture: LFMC.
9. Embedded in Concrete or Masonry: GRC/RMC.
10. Final 72 inches from accessible outlet/junction boxes to recessed luminaires that are
located in accessible ceiling systems: Type MC cable.
11. Final 24-72 Inches at Connections to Vibrating Equipment or equipment that is subject to
any degree of motion in its normal operation (Including But Not Limited To Transformers,
Electric Solenoids, and Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. Leave sufficient slack in
flexible conduit to permit movement from vibration without adversely affecting conduits
and connections.
C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with (Listed accordingly) raceways and suitable for use and
location.
1. EMT: Comply with NEMA FB 2.10 and with requirements of these specifications.
2. GRC/RMC and IMC: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated.
I
3. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with
NEMA FB 2.20.
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation.
1. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
2. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space
supports for Conduits and raceways required by NFPA 70 as a minimum.
3. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.
4. Do not install aluminum products in contact with, or near proximity to, concrete or earth.
5. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.
6. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where
requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter.
7. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies
and number of floors.
8. Locate all structural elements within concrete prior to pre-drilling anchors. Contractor is
responsible for repairing all damage to structural elements resulting from the scope of
this work.
9. Provide fittings as needed for a complete installation.
10. Provide flexible connections or expansion fittings where all conduits cross building
expansion joints. Coordinate exact quantity & location with Architectural plans prior to
installation of work.
11. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) separation
in general, not less than 16" separation for acoustically rated walls and not less than 24"
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -4 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
separation for the following applications: fire walls, fire barriers, smoke barrier walls, and
fire partitions. Where outlet boxes are shown back-to-back on common walls, offset
accordingly when installed.
12. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.
13. Neatly cut openings for boxes so that standard size (not "midway" or "jumbo") cover
plates will cover all parts of the opening. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to
allow for surface finish thickness. Do not use round boxes.
14. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates and structural surfaces to which
attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry as applicable. Provide
box supports that are independent of conduit. Protect boxes from construction debris and
damage subsequent to installation of boxes.
15. Use of synthetic or plastic "tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire ties" and similar products are not
permitted as a permanent means of anchoring, securing, supporting or otherwise
installing any cables, conductors, conduits, raceways, devices, equipment or other
electrical work. Do not use perforated straps.
16. Consider the outlet, junction, and pull box locations indicated on drawings approximate
unless there are prevailing codes that require specific spacings or locations. Study the
general construction with relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet, and
neatly install outlets accordingly.
17. Install wiring for different power voltages in raceway systems separate from each other.
Install wiring for the various electrical systems in raceway systems that are separate from
each other.
18. Provide steel conduit and steel fittings for indoor above-slab applications, as specified in
this section.
19. Provide maximum of 40 percent fill for raceways, or a threshold of less if required by
NFPA 70 or project conditions.
20. Keep raceways at least 12 inches away from parallel runs of flues, hot-water pipes, and
other sources of heat. Install horizontal raceway runs above liquid and steam piping.
Where the lines are not insulated, the clearances shall be increased until the temperature
of the conduit, with no live conductors enclosed, does not rise above the ambient
temperature of the installation area.
21. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations and heights.
22. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished grade or
slab.
23. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run. Support
within 12 inches of changes in direction.
24. Support conduit within 12 inches of enclosures to which attached. Properly support and
anchor raceways for their entire length using structural materials. Do not span any space
unsupported.
25. Conceal conduit and tubing within finished walls, ceilings, and floor cavities unless
otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
26. Install exposed conduits, and extensions from concealed conduit systems, neatly parallel
and perpendicular to walls, and plumb on walls. Secure to walls at intervals not
exceeding six feet, supported by approved straps and fasteners. Secure to overhead
structure at intervals not exceeding six feet. Support conduit by approved straps,
fasteners and hangers. Provide hangers suspended from rods. Space wall brackets
supporting conduits not more than 4 feet 6 inches on center. Install exposed conduit work
so there is no interference with ceiling inserts, lights, or ventilation ducts or outlets.
1I
!I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -5 2/28/19
!I
i
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
27. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with
not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull
wire. Cap underground raceways designated as spare above grade alongside raceways
in use, using properly selected and attached manufactured cap (tape of any sort is not
permissible). Provide finished wall/cover plate on unused outlet boxes.
28. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them
with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel
box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces.
Install raceway sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.
29. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings and elsewhere in Division 26
specifications. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to
ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise
indicated. In cases where using center of box for measurement would result in a switch-
height device having an operable component higher than 48 inches above finished floor,
install boxes lower as needed so that uppermost part of operable component is no higher
than 48 inches.
30. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry
block (do not over-cut), and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces
to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or
supported equipment and box.
31. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the
same vertical channel. Coordinate all such separations with Design Professional in
advance to ensure boxes are located properly for each application.
32. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.
33. Support boxes from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting
on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.
34. Fasten junction and pull boxes to, or support from, building structure. Do not support
boxes by conduits.
35. Do not use dissimilar metals throughout the systems to eliminate possibility of
electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals will be unavoidably in contact, coat surfaces with
corrosion inhibiting compound before assembling.
36. Do not use electrical "handy/handee" boxes.
37. Where moisture conditions within conduits are encountered above grade, drill a hole at
the lowest point in the conduit run so that drainage will not interfere with conditions
I below.
38. Where conduit is capped at wall for future additions, do not extend more than threads-
length past wall (maximum of 3/4-inch past wall for EMT).
39. Where conduits for outlets on waterproof walls must be installed exposed, set anchors for
supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement.
40. Requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits installed in space above hung
ceilings, and in crawl spaces.
41. Provide a 4-inch reinforced casing of concrete (3000-PSI minimum) around conduits that
are installed in cinders or cinder concrete, to protect them.
42. Support raceway components directly from structural building systems, not from ceiling
suspensions systems. Provide supplemental supports for junction or pull boxes.
43. Conduit Routing: If specific routing information appears on the Drawings, route and
maintain conduits as shown. Should interference or a conflict arise, consult the Design
Professional before proceeding with the Work. If specific routing information does not
appear on the Drawings, or if routing shown on Drawings is schematic in nature,
determine the best route for the conduit in accordance with code and other project
guidelines.
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -6 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 -RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
44. Conduit bends: Bends shall be made so that the conduit will not be flattened or kinked I
and so that the internal diameter of the conduit is not reduced. The radius of the curve of
the inner edge of any bend shall not be less than indicated by the National Electrical
Code and TIA/EIA-569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces. Constructing an outside entrance to a building from buried conduit to
penetrate above the ceiling line will allow an exception for a 4 inches LB fitting at one end
to allow placement of the conduit flat to the building outside wall; apply this only if conduit
could not be concelaed.
45. Install above-ceiling conduits as high as possible, with a minimum of 8 inches above
ceiling tiles so as to permit ceiling tile removal.
46. Install each branch of power in separate raceways from each other. 111
B. Stub-ups To Above Accessible Ceilings (TAAC):
1. Use EMT, or GRC/RMC for raceways as applicable for respective locations.
2. Provide sweep bends and drag line for each application.
3. Use a conduit bushing or insulated-throat fitting to terminate stub-ups.
4. Extend conduits to joist space above an accessible ceiling system.
5. Permanently identify the purpose of the conduit stub at the end of the conduit above the
ceiling.
C. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes:
1. Provide each pull box indicated on the Drawings.
2. Provide additional pull boxes: Every 180 degrees of raceway bend; Every 100 feet of
raceway; As additionally required by Code.
3. Provide pull and junction boxes in areas that will be accessible after installation.
Accessible areas include spaces above removable tile ceilings and behind access doors
that are installed expressly for this purpose. Do not install pull-boxes in locations that will
not be accessible after construction is complete and is not accessible after permanently
installed work is complete.
4. Size boxes in accordance with the NFPA 70 (NEC). Use larger boxes where so
specified.
5. Support boxes rigidly. Land conduits on the boxes so that conduits enter and exit across
from each other on opposite sides of the box so as to facilitate straight line pulling of
cable through the box. Do not use pull boxes in lieu of conduit bends, except as
necessary by design or to meet constructability constraints.
6. When directional transition of the cables is necessary through a box, land conduits on the
box so that they permit the largest possible bending radius for those cables that will pass
through the box.
7. Coordinate all work with all other trades prior to commencement of the work. Do not use
access doors unless special prior written permission is granted from the Owner's
Representative. Install pull boxes, junction boxes, etc. in areas that are accessible after
construction. Do not install pull boxes or junction boxes above gypsum board, plaster or
similar ceiling systems, nor above ductwork or equipment that renders them inaccessible.
8. Record junction and pull boxes on record drawings. Permanently mark and label (using
methods approved by Owner's Representative) junction/pullboxes as to which types of
electrical services are within.
D. Repair and Patching: Holes and other penetrations into building surfaces or structure that are
created to facilitate pathway installation but that are not ultimately used shall be filled, repaired,
and restored to their original strength, appearance and integrity. Damage to building or property
that occurs during the course of pathway installation shall be repaired and restored to its original
I
condition prior to damage. Obtain review and approval of penetration sizes, means and
methods from Design Professional and Owner's Representative for all proposed penetrations of
structural elements prior to commencing with any related work.
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -7 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E. Seals for Common Conduit and Raceways in Dissimilar Environments: Install devices to seal
raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or boxes are between the
seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all raceways at the
following points: Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of
refrigerated spaces; Where an underground service raceway enters a building or structure;
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
F. Insulation for Common Conduit and Raceways in Dissimilar Environments: Provide insulation
on the exterior of conduit on the warm side of penetrations between dissimilar environments to
prevent condensation from forming. Insulate with 1.5-inch polyisocyanurate closed cell pipe
insulation with an overall PVC jacket for a minimum distance of 48" from the penetration.
Applications include, but are not limited to, the following: Where conduits pass from warm to
cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces; Where otherwise required by
NFPA 70.
G. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of
flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed luminaires, for equipment subject to vibration,
' noise transmission, or movement, and for transformers and motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
2.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED CONDUIT/RACEWAY SYSTEMS
1 A. General:
1. Review proposed installation materials, methods, routing, etc. case-by-case and area-by-
area for each application with the Design Professional and Owner prior to installation.
Accordingly, prepare installation drawings and submit to Design Professionals for review
and comment. Revise and resubmit as required based on comments from Design
Professionals. Coordinate with all trades while preparing the installation drawings. Show
elevations and routes relative to adjacent work of all trades.
2. Group conduits together in tight banks when routed in the same direction in a given
space. Coordinate with mechanical trades and route the conduit banks along common
paths wherever possible, and at common elevations unless the conduit banks can be
installed directly above or below the mechanical work. Review proposed routes and
I
3. elevations with Design Professionals prior to installation.
Install conduits that peel off from banks in a manner that results in the conduits being
progressively taken off from the sides of the banks, one at a time without crossing over or
I under other conduits in the bank. Rise and drop conduits at the same elevation in areas
with common visibility.
4. Provide clean, tight and uniform bends and offsets for all conduits and conduit banks.
5. Route overhead work perpendicular and parallel to architectural and structural building
lines in the respective surrounding space. Do not install work below skylight assemblies
or in front of clerestory window assemblies.
6. Provide surface conduit and raceway for wall-mounted applications only where it is
impossible to fish or cut/patch, or only where specifically indicated on drawings, or only
where specifically directed by Design Professional. Improper sequencing of work at walls
shall not be used as a reason to surface-mount conduit, boxes or raceways; install all
such work concealed as the walls are constructed. Provide conduit in areas that are
exclusively utilitarian, such as dedicated mechanical or electrical rooms. Provide finished
surface raceway systems for applications in all other areas. Consult with Design
Professionals in advance of any installation for final direction on where to use conduit
versus surface raceway systems.
7. Install conduits and raceways in a manner that minimizes detrimental effects on room
aesthetics. For instance, as applicable, rise from below for wall switches, general
receptacle outlets and communications wall outlets; drop from above for wall mounted
I
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -8 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
lights, and other system outlets that are installed high on wall; make drops near corners,
window casings, door casings, etc.).
8. Install conduits and raceways as out-of-site as reasonably possible. For instance if an
receptacle outlet needs to be installed at the center of a wall and there is no possibility of
feeding from below the floor, route the drop in a corner of the room then transition and
run horizontally to the outlet location.
9. Install conduit and raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.
10. Secure conduit and raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not
exceeding 48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight section. Support
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
11. Utilize supports for wall-mounted applications that cleanly conform to the shape of the
conduit or raceway and do not in any way protrude out past the outer contours of the
conduit or raceway. As an example, install wall-mounted conduit using two-hole straps
instead of conduit hangers. Tape, glue, tie-wraps, clips, wedges, etc. are not acceptable
support methods.
12. Review all proposed mounting means and methods with Design Professionals for
luminaires, devices, outlets, equipment, etc. that will be suspended overhead.
13. Do not use "trapeze" mounting methods for suspensions unless case-by-case permission
is granted by Design Professionals.
2.4 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED CONDUIT OUTDOORS
A. Only install conduit exposed outdoors when it is impossible to do otherwise, or only if
specifically indicated for such installation case-by-case elsewhere in documents. Installation
convenience, financial considerations, lack of coordination with other trades and similar
rationale are not sufficient reasons for doing so. In cases where conduits must be installed at
outdoor locations, de-rate conductors and modify conduit sizes per NFPA 70 (National Electrical
Code, NEC). Provide expansion fittings, which are Listed and labeled for the respective
applications, at all building expansion joints and at maximum distances of 100 feet. Paint all
such conduits with at least two coats of UV-resistant weatherproof paint. Provide colors to
match respective surrounding surfaces; submit colors to Design Professional for review in
advance of procuring paint.
2.5 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED CONDUIT ON ROOFS I
A. Only install conduit exposed on rooftops when it is impossible to do otherwise, or only if
specifically indicated for such installation case-by-case elsewhere in documents. Installation
convenience, financial considerations, lack of coordination with other trades and similar
rationale are not sufficient reasons for doing so. In cases where conduits must be installed on
rooftops, de-rate conductors and modify conduit sizes per NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code,
NEC). Provide expansion fittings, which are Listed and labeled for the respective applications,
at all building expansion joints and at maximum distances of 100 feet. Paint all such conduits
with at least two coats of UV-resistant weatherproof paint. Provide white paint on flat rooftops
that have finishes white in color, and for otherwise-colored roof finishes that are not visible from
the building interior or from the ground outdoors. Elsewhere select colors to match surrounding
surfaces; submit colors to Design Professional for review in advance of procuring paint.
2.6 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Coordinate trench locations in reference to other underground utilities. Ensure no other
utilities are placed directly above or below, when parallel to conduits.
2. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.
3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Also see details
and/or notes on drawings for additional trench-related information and for applications
where concrete (or other) encasement is required.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 -9 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling
'
5. with normal compaction.
Install manufactured RNC duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at
building entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Provide GRC/RMC for
risers, beginning below grade or slab and excluding the 90 degree fittings that connect to
horizontal conduits below grade or slab, to above grade and slab except where
terminating at utility poles, in utility pad-mounted transformer enclosures and cable pits,
and in utility company pedestals. Couple GRC/RMC conduits to RNC ducts with adapters
designed for this purpose.
6. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
7. Provide underground conduits at minimum of 24" below grade, slab or pavement as
applicable (deeper where required by local utility company or prevailing codes and
regulations), securely mounted on chairs when banked, with base in newly disturbed
earth. Properly align ducts on chairs before backfilling. Provide heavy nylon pull-
cord/drag-line (200 pound minimum strength) in empty conduits. Do not embed in slabs
I
8. or pavement. Do not"scratch-in"just below slab or pavement.
Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length with factory bases and
intermediate spacers. Provide spacers at each coupling location, at each termination
1 location, and at maximum five foot intervals between. Do not span any space
unsupported. Provide end bells with rounded pulling surfaces at manholes, pull boxes
and other end points of underground raceways.
9. Apply corrosion inhibiting compound before couplings are assembled for applications
' where metallic raceways are installed underground, in floors below grade, or outside.
Draw up couplings and conduits sufficiently tight to ensure water-tightness. Provide steel
rigid metallic conduit for applications where metallic conduits are installed below grade or
slab.
' 10. Extend underground conduits that are capped at wall for future additions five feet beyond
building.
11. Arrange excavation for exterior conduits so that:
a. The lines are straight and true
b. Grades required for drainage are maintained
c. The tops of buried raceways are not less than 24" below finished grade
12. Seal PVC joints with product equivalent to Carlon Cement. Make solvent cemented joints
in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.
13. Install work in accordance with NFPA 70 and in compliance with local utility practices.
14. Provide full parity size green insulated ground wire in PVC runs, except for those used
' exclusively for optical fiber cables.
15. Encasement: See details and/or notes on drawings for applications where encasement is
required.
16. Pressure or vacuum test below-grade conduits before and after concealing the conduits
' to ensure resistance to moisture ingress.
2.7 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
' connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Unless
otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-
inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth. Install
so cover surfaces will be flush with finished grade or pavement as applicable. Install
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 10 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260533 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
service/feeder scale handholes with bottom below frost line below grade. Field-cut openings for
conduits in closed-bottom units and in walls of units according to enclosure manufacturer's
written instructions. Cut enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for
terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
END OF SECTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 11 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260537 -J-HOOK PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 GENERAL
A. Conduit/Raceway/Pathway: "Conduit", "raceway", "pathway" and similar terms shall be taken
I to mean "conduit" unless specifically indicated otherwise in project manual documents, or
unless specifically directed otherwise in field by Owner or Design Professionals. All such terms
shall be considered synonymous for the general purposes of installation means and methods.
I B. Provide J-Hook pathway systems only for the following limited applications: Class 2 ("low-
voltage") control wiring, except for fire alarm system wiring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I2.1 J-HOOK PATHWAYS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
I
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below, or equivalent NRTL
listed and labeled equivalent.
1. Cooper B-Line (basis of design, model numbers as specified further below)
2. Mono-Systems, Inc.
I B. Materials Description:
1. Provide J-Hook system components that are plenum-rated (regardless of whether air
plenum ceilings exist on the project). Provide J-Hooks, not Cable Fasteners, and not
I Bridle Rings. Provide open-top hooks, so cables can be laid into the J-Hooks rather than
threaded through. Provide tool-less cable retainer clips (do not use cable ties). Provide
hooks sized for maximum 40% fill (in cross section) based on outside diameter of cables.
Accordingly, provide multiple sets of J-Hooks along any given pathway as applicable.
I 2. Provide necessary factory hooks, cable retainers, fasteners, attachment kits, etc. as
required for complete installations, including and equal to the following:
Part Cooper B-Line, Inc.#
1-5/16" Hooks BCH21 (30 4-pair UTP)
I
2" Hooks BCH32. (70 4-pair UTP)
4" Hooks BCH64 (280 4-pair UTP)
1-5/16" Cable Retainers BCHR21
2" Cable Retainers BCHR32
4" Cable Retainers BCHR64
J-Hook to Beam Fasteners (spring-clip) BCH -U (select hook size, flange thickness)
J-Hook to Beam Fasteners (spring-clip) BCH_-E (select hook size, flange thickness)
I J-Hook to Beam Fasteners (set-screw) BCH -C (select hook size, flange thickness)
J-Hook to Flange Fasteners (spring-clip) BCH -F (select hook size, flange thickness)
J-Hook to Strut Fasteners BCH -SM series
I J-Hook to ATR (all-thread rod) Fasteners BCH -AB series
J-Hook Angle Bracket Fasteners BCH RB series
J-Hook to Floor Support Fasteners BCH_-L1410 series (select for hook size)
Multi-Tier Attachment Kits BCHK series
I Double-Sided Multi-Tier Fasteners BCH -1D or BCH_2D series as required
Single Sided Multi Tier Fasteners BCH -2S3S/4S/5S/6S series as required
2.2 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
IA. Provide steel units with rolled hook edges to prevent damage to cable jackets and insulation
I
J-HOOK PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260537 - 1 2/28/19
I
i
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260537 -J-HOOK PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Cable hooks for non-corrosive areas shall be pre-galvanized steel, ASTM A653. Where
additional strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc-plated finish, ASTM
B633, SC3.
C. Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel, AISI Type 304.
PART 3 -EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide J-Hook support along "free-air" cable pathway routes. Provide J-Hooks at four-foot
intervals and at offsets. Route J-Hooks above ceilings through corridors and similar open areas
wherever possible to minimize above-ceiling wall penetrations.
B. Layout and install all electrical work in strict compliance with Chapter 1, Part B, Section 110.26
of the latest adopted edition of NFPA 70.
C. Keep pathways at least 24 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water
pipes. Install horizontal runs above liquid and steam piping. Level and square runs, and install
at proper elevations and heights. Do not begin installation of cables until J-Hook pathway
installations are complete and until installation locations (end to end) are in a weatherproof
environment. Install pathways so that they are accessible for cable installation after construction
is complete. Install pathways with enough workspace to permit access for installing cables.
Strictly adhere to factory load capacities and fill capacity. Provide factory cable retainers,
fasteners, attachment kits, and other accessories as required for a complete installation.
D. Securely anchor (mechanical, not adhesive) J-Hooks directly to structural components of the
building. Do not anchor J-Hooks to ductwork, conduit, piping, fixtures, equipment, ceiling
supports (rods, wires, t-bars), etc. Comply with requirements in Section 260529 and related
sections for hangers and supports. Support using factory-approved methods. Fasten cables on
horizontal runs with factory cable clamps, retainers, fasteners, attachment kits or flexible Velcro-
secured wraps compliant with to NEMA VE 2. Tighten clamps/wraps only enough to secure the
cable, without indenting the cable jacket. Use of synthetic or plastic "tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire
ties" and similar products are not permitted as a permanent means of anchoring, securing,
supporting or otherwise installing any cables, conductors, conduits, raceways, devices,
equipment or other electrical work. Do not use perforated strap.
E. Coordinate work prior to rough-in with respective equipment and cable installers, and with
Owner's Representative. Carefully coordinate proposed routing, including elevations, with
affected installers and entities prior to rough-in. Neatly route paths parallel and perpendicular to
building architectural lines, plumb on walls, and at a consistent elevation wherever possible.
Install paths in a uniform plane/elevation wherever possible. Keep horizontal and vertical offsets
to an absolute minimum. Route paths so that a minimum of 24 inches exists between cables
and potential EMI sources such as lighting ballasts, motors, power wiring, dimmer circuits, etc.
F. Provide a minimum of two (2) 4-inch bushed conduit sleeves where pathway is routed above
inaccessible ceilings, and at penetrations of floors, masonry walls, fire rated walls, smoke-tight
partitions, smoke-rated partitions, and similar elements. Provide smoke and fire stopping at
such penetrations as applicable in (see Section 260502). Provide EMT conduit for "drops" from
paths to outlets and equipment, with sweep bends, insulated throat fittings and 200-pound pull
string.
END OF SECTION ,
J-HOOK PATHWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260537 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
I1.1 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Backfill and Fill Materials: Use excavated or borrowed material for backfill. Prior to backfilling,
remove rock and gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials,
I
vegetable matter, and other deleterious matter. Use gravel or stone where so specified on details
on drawings, or otherwise included in specifications.
I
B. Non-shrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Provide premixed,factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive,
nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Subbase: Subbase refers to the compacted layer used in pavement systems between the
subgrade and the pavement base course material. Provide subbase consisting of graded mixture
I
of crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or sand.
1.2 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM —"FLOWABLE BACKFILL")
I A. Description: Controlled-Low-Strength-Material (CLSM) is a material that has a specified
compressive strength of 1200 pounds per square inch (PSI) at 28 days. This material is not
concrete and is in a flowable state at the time of placement.
I B. Materials: Provide CLSM mixture consisting of water, Portland Cement (Type I or II conforming
to ASTM C-150, Type "F"fly ash, and fine aggregate. If fly ash is not used, provide CLSM using
high dosages of an air entraining admixture to help flowability and lower strength for removability.
Non-standard materials may be used only after receiving special permission from Owner's
I Representative. Provide water used in mixing and curing that is as clean and free of oil, salt, acid,
alkali, sugar, vegetable, and other substances injurious to the finished product as possible. Test
water in accordance with the requirements to AASHTO T 26.Water known to be of potable quality
may be used without testing. Use fine aggregates conforming to ASTM C 33 in CLSM.
IC. Mix Design: Provide proportion of materials used in CLSM as follows.
1. Cement: 50-100 pounds (lbs) per cubic yard (cy)
2. Type "F", Fly Ash: 250-300 lbs/cy
I 3. Sand: 2700-2800 lbs/cy
4. Water: 400-500Ibs/cy
5. Other proportions may be used only after receiving special permission from Owner's
I Representative.
6. Conform to the following flowability test: Fill a 3-inch diameter by 6-inch long open-ended
cylinder with the mixture, then strike off to level. Remove the cylinder by pulling straight up
and ensure the diameter of the CLSM, after spreading, is a minimum of 8-inches.
1.3 CONCRETE MATERIAL
A. Reinforcement: Provide the following where reinforcement is specified or if reinforcement is
I deemed necessary by Owner's Representative due to special field conditions.
1. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185.
2. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40.
3. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 40.
I B. Concrete Mix, Design and Testing: Design mix to produce normal-weight concrete consisting of
Portland Cement, aggregate, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce the following
properties.
I 1. Aggregate: 3/8"
2. Compressive Strength: 3000 PSI, minimum at 28 days.
3. Slump Range: 7" to 8" (provide just enough slump to flow to the bottom of the formation
and yet not be so wet as to cause the ducts to float).
IUNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 -
1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4. Air Content: 5% to 8%. I
5. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I.
PART 2 - EXECUTION '
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Subsurface conditions may have been investigated during the design of the project. If so, review
reports of these investigations. Follow recommendations of these reports. Locate existing
underground utilities in excavation areas, which are to remain. Support and protect these services
during excavation operations. Contact utility owner immediately for instructions if unchartered or
incorrectly charted utilities are encountered.
B. General Installation.
1. Coordinate trench locations in reference to other underground utilities. Ensure no other
utilities are placed directly above or below, when parallel to conduits.
2. Locate junction and pull boxes so they remain accessible after all construction work is
complete. Coordinate all work with all other trades prior to commencement of the work.
3. Layout and install all electrical work in strict compliance with Chapter 1, Part B, Section
110.26 of the latest adopted edition of NFPA 70. Locations and routing that may be shown
on plans are schematic and diagrammatic in nature.
4. Use of synthetic or plastic "tie-wraps", "zip ties", "wire ties" and similar products are not
permitted as a permanent means of anchoring, securing, supporting or otherwise installing
any cables, conductors, conduits, raceways, devices, equipment or other electrical work.
C. Pathway Evacuation and Protection: Seal and protect raceways and boxes from moisture
infiltration. Provide watertight fittings. Pressure or vacuum test below-grade conduits before and
after concealing the conduits to ensure resistance to moisture ingress.
D. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by
settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation
operations. Properly restore streets, sidewalks, concrete and blacktop surfaces that were broken
for installing piping.
E. Comply with codes in jurisdiction. I
F. Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during a period of 12 months after
Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add
backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore
appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.
2.2 EXCAVATION
A. Protection: Protect excavated openings with substantial railings, fencing, signage, shoring, and I
steel roadway plates in strict compliance with OSHA/NIOSH, with local Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards, with authorities having jurisdiction, and as directed by Owner's
Representative in field. Provide traffic detours per DOT standards during active construction work
shift time periods. Provide related barricades, signage, portable flashing lights, etc. (per DOT
standards) at specific locations as determined in field. Provide steel roadway plates, properly
installed and anchored per DOT standards, over roadway cuts during inactive periods (i.e.
between construction work shifts, while concrete is curing, and while flowable backfill is curing).
Finish work affecting the roadways, and restore/pave roadway cuts, as quickly as possible after
starting those segments of work. Carefully coordinate scheduling for roadway related work to
allow adequate time for inspections and curing, while keeping overall related time to a minimum.
B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply with local
codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 -
2 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Iexcavations will be open. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances.
Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation. Remove shoring and bracing when no
I longer required. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes
and ordinances.
C. Dewatering: Prevent surface water, subsurface water, and ground water from flowing into
I excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to
accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of bearing materials. Provide and
maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits
I
to convey surface water to collecting/run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary
drainage ditches.
D. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until required for
I backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. Locate and retain soil
materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees. Remove from site,
and legally dispose of, excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as
Ibackfill or fill.
E. Trenching: Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working
room. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or otherwise necessary to full project requirements.
I All trench widths indicated on drawings are minimum required widths.
F. Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric
temperature is less than 35 degrees Fahrenheit.
I G. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required elevations for each area
classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section. Backfill excavations
as promptly as work permits.
H. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8 inches in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose
depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. Before compaction, moisten or aerate
each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
I percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified
below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, that are frozen, that
contain frost, or that contain ice. Compact each layer of backfill or fill material to 95 percent
standard compaction.
I I. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before
compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve
required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to,
Icompaction operations.
J. Separately stockpile excavated topsoil adjacent to the excavated areas and trenches and utilize
it in the final stage of backfilling operation. Grade exposed earth and other erodible areas to a
Ireasonably uniform, and satisfactory, cross section and slope, as soon as practicable.
K. Excavation for Underground Electrical Structures: Conform to elevations and dimensions shown
within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and
I removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and inspections.
Excavate by hand areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system from damage and
dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root
I cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint. Take care not to disturb
bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is
placed.
' UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 -
3 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260543 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.3 INSTALLATION OF CLSM AND CONCRETE
A. General: See details and/or notes on drawings for applications where encasement is required for
underground conduits/duct banks. Transport product by mixer truck. Provide continuous agitation
from mixing to placement. Retain records of all mixes, tests, etc. and include in Operation and
Maintenance Manuals. Submit copies during construction if requested.
B. Forms: In general, unless directed otherwise in field or required otherwise by OSHA and/or other
prevailing codes, regulations and standards,the sides of the excavated trenches may be used as
forms for encasement. Otherwise, provide forms made of steel, wood, or other suitable material
of size and strength to resist movement during encasement product placement, and to retain
horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Do not remove forms for at least 48 hours after
encasement product has been placed.
C. Expansion Joints: Provide pre-molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting any structure, and
as otherwise recommended by concrete supplier.
D. Placement: Remove loose material from subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.
Check subbase and forms for line and grade before placing concrete. Moisten subbase if required
to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Place product directly from
the truck chute or pump it. Place product using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Use
splash boards to divert the flow of product away from the trench sides, and to avoid dislodging
soil and stones. Do not backfill until a minimum of 48 hours have passed. Exclude traffic over
affected areas for at least 14 days after placement.
END OF SECTION
I
t
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260543 -
4 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260544 -SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
PART 1 - EXECUTION
1.1 GENERAL DIRECTION
A. Cutting and Patching:
1 1. Hold cutting and patching to a minimum by arranging with other trades for sleeves and
openings before construction is started.
2. Cut and drill all openings in roofs, walls, and floors required to perform the work. Neatly
patch all openings cut. Hold cutting and patching to a minimum by arranging with other
' contractors for all sleeves and openings before construction is started. When drilling /
cutting concrete slabs, utilize ground penetrating radar (GPR) and/or X-ray scanning
equipment to verify the location is free from obstruction, including but not limited to:
structural rebar / strands / tendons and electrical conduit / wiring. Repair all damage to
structural elements that may occur. Provide temporary partitions, dust barriers, vacuums
to keep all dust to a minimum. Allow inspection by owner's rep and inspection by
authority having jurisdiction prior to concealing any work or uncover and restore work to
allow for observation.
B. Fire Caulking:
1. Fire stopping requirements/locations are not indicated on electrical drawings. Review
architectural and other drawings to determine where there will be fire/smoke rated walls,
floors, membranes, etc. and rating requirements of same. Provide required fire stopping
work associated with electrically related penetrations. Patching through fire rated walls
and enclosures shall not diminish the rating of wall or enclosure. Patch shall be equal to
rockwool, firestop, caulk or approved "rated" patch / sealant / pillow / grommet /
compound / etc. Clean affected surfaces, joints, etc. immediately before applying fire
stopping and only apply under recommended temperature and humidity. Apply primer as
required by manufacturer. Properly tool sealants for clean look. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Fire Stop Pillows: Nelson PLW, STI, Hilti, 3M
b. Fire Stop Putty: Nelson FSP, STI, Hilti, 3M
' c.
d. Latex Intumescent Sealant: Nelson LBS3, STI, Hilti, 3M
Outlet boxes: Nelson FSP, STI, Hilti, 3M
C. Access Panels:
1. Provide all access panels required for proper servicing of equipment or access to junction
boxes as a last resort after first searching out locations for equipment and junction boxes
in accessible areas. All access panel locations and sizes must be coordinated with and
approved by design team and owner's representative. Provide fire rated and smoke rated
' access panels where required. Provide frame as required for finish. Coordinate
installation with General Contractor as they may elect to install access panel. Exact
location(s) must be approved by the Architect. Minimum size to be 12" x 12" for junction
' boxes and 22" x 22" for equipment, units to be 16-gauge steel, primed for paint, door
opens beyond 90 degrees and locking device shall be screwdriver cam locks.
2. For equipment or junction boxes above gypsum board or "hard ceilings", provide
equipment access panels sized to permit complete holistic removal of the unit in its
entirety. Access panel shall also be sized to accommodate removal of the largest piece of
equipment in the case where such access panel is used as a removal pathway for
multiple pieces of equipment. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
' a.
b. Bar-Co., Inc.
J.L. Industries.
c. Karp Associates, Inc.
d. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc.
TEMPLATE 260544- 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260544 -SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING
e. Nystrom, Inc. ,
D. Conduit Sleeves:
1. Aboveground, exterior wall penetrations: rigid steel pipe sleeve.
2. Below grade, exterior wall and floor penetrations: schedule 40 cast iron pipe sleeve
3. PVC Pipe Sleeves where allowed: ASTM D 1785, Gray, Schedule 40.
4. Rectangular opening sleeves: Galvanized Sheet Steel, thickness min 0.1 inches.
5. Sleeve Seal Systems: Provide modular sealing device designed for field assembly,
EPDM, Nitrile or Silicone based on installation environment with stainless steel bolts and
polymer pressure plates. Install type and number recommended by manufacturer for a
water tight seal. Provide by one of the following:
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. CALPICO, Inc.
c. Metraflex Company(The).
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
e. Proco Products, Inc.
f. OZ/Gedney
g. Link-Seal
6. Sleeve Seal Fittings: Provide manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly
made for embedding in concrete slab or wall. Install in wall or slab as constructed and
grout area around fitting. Provide by one of the following:
a. Presealed Systems
b. Bio FireShied
c. MetaCaulk
7. Sleeves shall be cut flush with both faces of wall. Deburr all sleeves. Floor sleeves shall
extend one inch above floor top elevation. Maintain all fire ratings. Use joint compound
for around gypsum sleeves. Roof penetrations shall be with flexible boot-type flashing
unit or within a pipe curb assembly equal to Pate Co. Curb and flashing per roofing
manufacturer's requirements to maintain warranty. '
E. Grout:
1. Provide non-shrink grout, recommended for sealing openings in non-fire-rated walls or
floors, ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout. Provide 5000-psi strength design mix, premixed and factory
packaged.
F. Silicone Sealants:
1. Provide single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealant for exterior
work. Provide pourable (self-leveling) grade formulation for openings in non-fire rated
floors and other horizontal surfaces. Install only in temperature and humidity as 111recommended by manufacturer. Colors of all visible sealants to be clear or color
approved by owner's rep or design team.
G. Acrylic Sealants:
1. Provide one-part, non-sag, mildew-resistant, paintable recommended for exposed
applications of interior and protected exterior locations
END OF SECTION
I
t
TEMPLATE 260544 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260548 -VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed
and sealed by the qualified engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
IPART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
I A. The contractor shall subcontract a licensed structural engineer for the design of all seismic
restraint systems required by the presiding jurisdiction. The structural engineer shall provide
engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design and submit as deferred submittal to
I supplement the permit drawings.
3.2 SEISMIC BRACING
A. Provide seismic bracing of electrical components where required by code.
I3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The contractor shall provide seismic restraint systems to meet total design lateral force
I requirements for support and restraint of conduit, cable trays, equipment, and other similar
systems and equipment where required by the applicable building code.
3.4 DELEGATED DESIGN
I A. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the structural engineer of
record. Provide engineered stamped and signed drawings of seismic design.
B. Seismic restraint designer shall provide visual inspection after installation and approve
I installation of seismic design components.
C. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and capacity of
materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the structure.
ID. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, and embedment depth.
E. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces calculated per
the applicable building code.
IF. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 260548 - 1 2/28/19
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE ,
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1(and IEEE C2 as or if applicable). Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with
29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.
Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks
used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
B. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway and cable size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RACEWAY AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS 1
A. Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear
adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. Provide black letters on an orange field, and
indicate voltage and system or service type.
2.2 CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil thick flexible label with I
acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-
laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that
the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1
to 2 inches wide (where permitted by NEC for large feeder and sub-feeder conductors). 111
B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil thick flexible label with
acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant, self-
laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such
that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
C. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification
legend machine printed using indelible process. '
2.4 [UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify and
locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
4. Provide tape with printing that most accurately indicates respective type of service of
buried cable.
B. Color and Printing:
1. Comply with ANSI Z535.1 through ANSI Z535.5.
2. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE.
3. Inscriptions for Orange-Colored Tapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE.]
I
TEMPLATE 260553 - 1 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260553 -IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I2.5 SELF-ADHESIVE LABELS
A. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels,
configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise
indicated, installed level and plumb.
2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq.
inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes, installed level and plumb.
' 1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
' 2.7 EQUIPMENT AND FIELD NAMEPLATE IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting, black
' letters on a white background for normal applications, minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch,
installed level and plumb. Provide 1/16" thickness for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8" length; provide
1/8"thickness for larger units.
B. Provide white letters on a black background for normal power distribution system equipment.
2.8 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.
' B. Arc-Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Provide pre-printed "as-built" labels on power distribution
and like equipment to warn of potential electric arc flash hazard. Provide in compliance with
Article 110.16 of NFPA 70.
C. Warning labels and signs shall also include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD -
EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
11112. Workspace Clearance Warning for 0-150 volts to ground equipment: "WARNING -
OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE
KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."
3. Workspace Clearance Warning for 151-600 volts to ground equipment: "WARNING -
' OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE
KEPT CLEAR FOR 48 INCHES."
2.9 FIELD IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Identification of Disconnecting Means: Provide pre-printed "as-built" nameplate identification
labels at all service equipment, power distribution equipment, and each disconnecting means to
indicate the maximum available fault current and exact source of the power supply that serves
' the respective equipment. Provide in compliance with Articles 408.4 (B), 110.22(A) and 110.24
(A)of NFPA 70.
B. Circuit Directory/Identification: Provide pre-printed "as-built" identification at circuit sources,
' using directory cards intended for the purpose, for all circuits. Provide in compliance with Article
408.4 (A)of NFPA 70.
C. In addition to other labelling required herein or by NFPA 70, provide pre-printed "as-built"
' identification of the following at all service entrance equipment.
1. Potential Electric Arc Flash Hazards compliant with Article 110.16(A) of NFPA 70.
2. Nominal System Voltage.
3. Single-Phase, Three-Phase/Three-Wire or Three-Phase/Four-Wire as applicable.
TEMPLATE 260553 -2 2/28/19
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4. Available fault Current at Overcurrent Protective Devices.
5. The Clearing Time of Service Overcurrent Protective Devices based on the available fault
current at the service equipment.
6. The Date that the label was applied.
2.10 CABLE TIES
A. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties
1. Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight, self extinguishing,
one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
2. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
3. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.
4. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
5. Color: Black.
B. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties
1. Self-extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.
2. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
3. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.
4. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.
5. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.
6. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine
screws with nuts and flat lock washers. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
111
A. All equipment & system identification nomenclature shown on drawings and listed herein may
be shown for general design and installation reference only. Field-verify the actual
nomenclature prior to fabrication. Prepare record documents accordingly.
B. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Locate bands at changes
in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs,
and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
D. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Cut off excess lengths after installing ties. Use general-purpose
type, except the following: Outdoors, UV-stabilized nylon; Indoors: Plenum rated.
E. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous
underground-line warning tape directly above line at 8 inches below finished grade. Use
multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or
envelope/encasement exceeds 16 inches overall. Install line marker for every buried cable,
regardless of whether direct-buried or installed in conduit.
F. In accessible ceiling spaces and where exposed in unfinished areas, label conduit with panel
and circuit numbers of conductors routed through the conduit. Label conduit at all wall
penetrations and connections to all panels,junction boxes, and equipment served.
I
TEMPLATE 260553 -3 2/28/19
1
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1 3.2 IDENTIFICATION DEFINITION
IA. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl
label. Locate at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum
intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. Do not install in
finished occupied areas.
I
B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify raceways, cables. junction and pull
boxes of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and
system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: Power.
IC. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in pull and junction
boxes, and handholes, use color-coding to identify the phase. Color shall be factory applied to
conductor insulation or field applied for sizes No. 4 AWG and larger, if authorities having
I
jurisdiction permit. These colors apply for factory-assembled cables as well as for individual
insulated conductors. Use colors listed below for conductors.
1. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:
a. Phase A: Black
I b.
c. Phase B: Red
Phase C: Blue
d. Neutral: White
2. Color for Equipment Grounding: Green
D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and
signal connections. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions,
terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker
I
tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-
installed connections. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring
diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
1 E. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground-line warning tape. Install
underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in raceway. Install
detectable tape at trenches containing empty conduits and conduits containing optical fiber
I
cable.
F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. Identify system voltage with black
I
letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. For
equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of equipment including.
G. Operating and Warning Instruction Signs: Provide pre-manufactured operating and warning
I
signage if indicated on drawings and where required by NEC or local authority having
jurisdiction. Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical
systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where
instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.
I
H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label
that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
I. Fire Alarm Systems: Provide permanent identification for boxes, enclosures, etc. that are
associated with fire alarm system work. Paint and identify fire alarm system pull boxes,junction
boxes, and other access/pull points (boxes and covers) in accordance with NEC/NFPA.
Provide red color on jacket of all fire alarm cables associated with the fire alarm system.
I
Provide red-colored breaker handle and red-colored lock-on device at source circuit breakers
that feed fire alarm related equipment. Provide red coloring for all fire alarm system junction
boxes, along with identification.
I
TEMPLATE 260553 -4 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
111
SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
END OF SECTION '
1
I
I
r
f
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 260553 - 5 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260584 -MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to documents of other divisions for further requirements associated with equipment and
I devices that are addressed in this section. This section includes supplemental information
related to electrical work associated with mechanical equipment and other equipment furnished
and/or installed under all other divisions or by others. Information included in this section applies
not only to traditional mechanical equipment, but also to equipment of any kind that is furnished
Iand/or installed by any supplier or installer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.1 GENERAL
A. Common Requirements:
1. Provide all necessary electrically related work as required to render all mechanical
I equipment (including plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditioning equipment) fully
operational and fully compliant with NEC.
2. Refer to Coordination Schedules on drawings. Provide disconnects, controllers, starters,
accessories, wiring, connections, services, etc. where defined as "EC" in the schedule.
I Information in this section supplements the information in the HECS.
3. Provide power wiring and connections for all equipment (including motor dampers,
accessories, etc. as applicable) as required to render equipment fully operational.
I 4. Install local disconnects and/or controllers at 48 inches to top of outlet box or enclosure
as applicable above finished floor/slab/grade; provide flush mounted units in finished
areas. Provide key operated controllers where accessible to general staff and/or general
public.
I 5. Drawn locations of equipment and devices are shown only for schematic indication of
wiring requirements. Coordinate with locations and rough-in requirements as required to
determine actual locations and termination requirements. Refer to all contract documents
for additional electrical requirements and concerns, and for further representation of this
work.
6. Provide disconnect switch ahead of all equipment, including controls, unless the
mechanical equipment comes with integral NEC-compliant disconnect(s). Provide NEMA
3R enclosures where installed outdoors and where installed indoors in areas subject to
moisture. Where mechanical equipment lugs cannot accommodate conductor sizes
shown on drawings, provide ILSCO ClearTap Insulated Multi-Tap Connectors.
7. Sizes, electrical ratings, etc. of equipment and wiring shown on drawings are based on
I the respective equipment design base manufacturers. If different manufacturer(s) or
model(s) are actually supplied, provide necessary coordination in field (prior to ordering
materials and prior to rough-in) and provide the necessary size of related electrical
I
equipment, wiring, conduit, etc.
8. Coordinate in field with the respective trades and determine case by case, which
equipment is factory listed for use with Heating and Air Conditioning Rated (HACR)
breakers. In an effort to minimize requirements for stocking of fuses by the Owner, utilize
I HACR breakers at the source panelboards as the NEC required overcurrent protection
wherever possible (in lieu of fusing local disconnect switches).
9. Disconnect Switch and/or Starter Locations: Locations shown on drawings are indicated
for schematic purposes only. Determine exact locations in field so that they are compliant
I with NEC Article 110.26.
10. Supplemental Work for Aluminum Conductor Electrical Equipment Connections
(regardless of who furnishes the equipment): Provide local disconnect at or near
I
equipment (external to the equipment) and terminate aluminum conductors to the line-
TEM PLATE 260584- 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260584 -MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
side lugs/terminals of the disconnect switch. Provide copper conductors from load-side
lugs/terminals of the disconnect switch to the respective equipment factory disconnect or
lugs/terminals as applicable. Coordinate all related work with all affected installers.
B. Maintenance Receptacles for Equipment: Provide duplex receptacle within 25 feet of all
electrically operated equipment of any nature that requires periodic testing or maintenance.
Provide Type WR duplex GFCI weatherproof receptacle for outdoor applications (including
rooftops) and for applications subject to high humidity or moisture.
C. Equipment and Systems:
1. Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers (VFC) / Variable Frequency Drives (VFD): Install
VFD in coordinated location. Provide power, wiring, and connections. Provide local
non-fused disconnect switch at each VFCNFD, wired ahead of the VFCNFD. Provide
local non-fused disconnect at respective controlled mechanical equipment for all
applications where the VFCNFD and its disconnect are not within sight of the respective
equipment, or where not within 50 feet of the equipment, or where not readily accessible.
Provide these local disconnect switches with electrical interlock kits, with (2)#14 interlock
wiring from interlock kit to respective VFCNFD so that VFC's/VFD's are automatically de-
energized when the respective equipment disconnect switch is opened.
2. Control Wiring:
a. General: Unless specifically indicated as empty conduit on drawings or herein,
provide electrical control and interlock work as shown on drawings. Provide
additional control work as specifically indicated herein. Coordinate HVAC
thermostat and sensor locations in field (case by case) with Design Professionals,
Owner's Representative and equipment installer to ensure that they are placed in
locations that will not interfere with furniture, equipment, artwork, wall-hung
specialties, room finishes, etc. Field-verify these wall locations case by case, prior
to rough-in, since locations shown on drawings are schematic only.
b. Schematic Thermostat and Sensor Locations: Refer to HVAC drawings and
documents to determine locations and quantities if locations are not shown on
electrical drawings, and to confirm locations and quantities even if locations are
shown on electrical drawings.
c. Low Voltage Thermostats and Sensors: Provide 4-inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep
wall outlet boxes at 46 inches above finished floor to center of outlet box (with
single-gang rings) for each unit. Provide one 3/4-inch empty conduit from each
location, turned out above accessible ceilings (in joist space or against overhead
slab/deck). Identify conduit in ceiling cavity; provide sweep bends, bushings and
drag line.
d. Line Voltage Thermostats and Sensors: Provide 4-inch square by 2-1/8 inch deep
wall outlet boxes at 46 inches above finished floor to center of outlet box (with
single-gang rings) for each unit. Provide line voltage power wiring, in 3/4-inch
conduit, and connections from thermostats and sensors to respective equipment
that is to be controlled by same. Install thermostats and sensors.
e. Motor Operated Dampers: Provide wiring associated with interlock of motors to
associated motor dampers for exhaust fans. Provide local disconnect at each
motor damper if fan is not furnished with one. Where HVAC equipment or exhaust
fans are controlled by VFC/VFD units, wire motor operated dampers (MOD's) back
to the respective VFC/VFD unit separately from the respective exhaust fan power
wiring, with (2) #12 AWG in 3/4 inch conduit. Provide local disconnect for each
such MOD.
3. Domestic Water Heaters (Gas): Provide electrical 120VAC power connection. Provide
interlock wiring with circulating pumps, flow switches and aquastat controls as applicable.
Refer to wiring diagrams on drawings for further definition where applicable.
TEMPLATE 260584 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
' GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260584- MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
4. Domestic Water Heaters (Electric): Provide local disconnect switch, and power wiring and
connections. Provide interlock wiring with circulating pumps, flow switches and aquastat
controls as applicable. Refer to wiring diagrams on drawings for further definition where
applicable.
5. Domestic Hot Water Circulating Pumps (Return Line): Provide manual starter with pilot
I light, and wire pump to operate through the aquastat. Refer to wiring diagrams on
drawings for further definition.
6. Electric Water Coolers (Surface): Provide 120V duplex receptacle. Provide GFCI circuit
breaker to feed the circuit that serves electric water coolers, even if not indicated on
panelboard schedule. Install at height and location as directed by water cooler installer.
Conceal outlet within water cooler enclosure if enclosure is designed for such an
installation. Assemble and connect cord if needed. Coordinate all specifics with water
cooler installing contractor prior to rough-in of related work.
7. Electronic Plumbing Fixture Valves: Provide electrical wiring and connections as required
for full automatic operation of direct-wired electronic sensor operated lavatory, urinal and
water closet valves. Install and wire 120VAC/24VAC remote box mounted transformers.
' Install above nearby accessible acoustical tile ceiling and provide local single-pole switch
above ceiling at the transformer to switch primary power. Provide secondary fusing if not
integral to the transformer (verify in field). Provide required 24VAC wiring (#14 AWG
"MC" Cable with ground), concealed. Field coordinate work carefully prior to rough-in.
8. Heat Trace:
a. Review documents of all mechanical trades to determine extent and specifics
related to heat trace requirements for the project. Any loads, quantities, circuits,
connection locations, etc. that may be indicated on electrical drawings are shown
for design-phase schematic representation only. Coordinate with all installers that
may have heat trace for their piping or equipment to determine loads, quantities,
required circuits, connection locations, etc. for each application. Provide such
coordination prior to furnishing submittals and prior to commencing with any rough-
in work. Provide power wiring and connections as required to render all heat trace
fully operational.
b. Receptacle-Fed Heat Trace: Provide dedicated circuit(s) and dedicated
receptacle(s) as required. Provide receptacles that are ground fault equipment
protection circuit interrupter type (GFEPCI, per NEC Article 427-22). Provide cover
plate for each receptacle that is weatherproof type, rated NEMA 3R While In Use.
I Provide this special type cover plate whether installed outdoor or indoor (to help
deter personnel from inadvertently unplugging the heat trace).
. Direct-Connected Heat Trace: Provide power wiring (ground fault protected per
NEC). Provide identified local weatherproof non-disconnect and related field
wiring/connections. Provide Type XHHW-2, low-leakage, branch circuit
conductors. Keep branch circuit wire splices to an absolute minimum and properly
insulated to prevent leakage. Provide Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP)
' type circuit breakers at source panelboards for these branch circuits, per NEC
Article 427, even if not shown as such on schedules.
END OF SECTION
TEMPLATE 260584 -3 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260590 - ELECTRICAL SPECIALTIES
1
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1 ELECTRICAL SPECIALTIES I
A. Door Bell System
1. Provide Edwards#660 flush strap-mounted bells,or equivalent by Federal Signal, Jenkins,
NuTone or others, 8-10VAC, 15 VA. Provide 2-1/8 inch deep wall outlet back-boxes.
2. Provide Edwards #852 pushbuttons, or equivalent by Federal Signal, Jenkins, NuTone or
others, flush "panel" mounted type rated at 10A at 12VAC/24VAC. Provide descriptive
instructional engraving as directed by Design Professional. Provide 3-1/2 inch deep wall
outlet back-boxes.
3. Provide Edwards #88-250 transformer, or equivalent by Federal Signal, Jenkins, NuTone
or others, rated 120V primary and 4/8/12/16/20/24V secondary (40/80/125/160/200/250
VA). Install accessible (concealed in finished areas) per NFPA 70 and in a manner which
permits proper cooling of the transformer. Provide power VA rating of the transformer as
required for the loads plus 100% spare capacity for future addition of audible devices.
Provide local primary switch at the transformer as a local disconnect and provide
secondary fusing. Provide low voltage cable that is#16 AWG minimum.
B. Commercial/Institutional Kitchen Equipment
1. Provide a complete wiring system to kitchen equipment. Refer to food service series
drawings and specifications for further definition of work required. Determine exact
location, mounting height and termination requirements from the kitchen equipment
contract drawings and from manufacturer's equipment submittals. Provide either direct
connections or cord & plug connections (including cords, plugs and receptacles) as
determined in field; verify case by case prior to rough-in. Verify electrical ratings in field
prior to rough-in. Make final connections to equipment.
2. Provide disconnect switches for direct-wired equipment and receptacles for cord & plug
equipment.
3. Provide wiring and connections to equipment, controls, defrosters, condensers,
compressors, lights, fans, heaters, heating elements, etc., which may not be detailed on
plans, as applicable.
4. Refer to kitchen equipment drawings for additional details and provide related electrical
work as required to render equipment fully operational.
5. Provide GFCI protection receptacles throughout the kitchen in compliance with NFPA 70.
Utilize GFCI receptacles for all accessible receptacles and GFCI branch circuit breakers
for all inaccessible receptacles.
END OF SECTION
1
r
TEMPLATE 260590 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
IGUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260800 -COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
I1.1 SUMMARY
A. The requirements of this Section apply to all sections of Division 26.
I B. Copies of all commissioning documentation shall be given to the Owner and made available to
the code official upon request in accordance with the Preliminary Commissioning Report and
Documentation Requirements.
I 1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. As a quality process, commissioning provides tools to the Owner and to the Code Official to verify
that building systems meet the design and code Requirements and that the systems,
I components, and equipment to be commissioned have been installed and operate within the
performance guidelines identified in the design documents and applicable energy codes.
B. The commissioning process shall not remove or reduce the responsibility of the design team,
I 1.3 contractors, subcontractors, vendors, manufacturers, or suppliers to provide a finished product.
SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT TO BE COMMISSIONED
A. The following systems, components, and equipment are the focus of the commissioning process
I for the Project:
1. Electrical Lighting and Controls
1.4 COMMISSIONING PLAN
IA. The Commissioning Plan is developed by the Commissioning Agent (CxA) and includes the
following:
1. A narrative description of the activities that will be accomplished during each phase of
I commissioning, including the personnel intended to accomplish each of the activities.
2. Lists the specific equipment and systems to be tested and a description of the tests.
3. Functions to be tested.
4. Conditions under which the test will be performed.
I5. Measurable criteria for performance.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
I A. The commissioning process requires review of Submittals for equipment and systems that are
part of the commissioning scope of work. The Construction Manager will be responsible for
delivering these submittals to the CxA for their review.
IB. The commissioning process requires Submittal review simultaneously with engineering review.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I 3.1 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. The systems and equipment to be commissioned shall be tested through different modes of
operation to verify that the systems function within the performance criteria identified in the
I Contract Documents.
B. Before functional performance test procedures are finalized, the contractors shall provide to the
CxA all requested documentation and a current list of changes affecting equipment or systems.
The CxA will provide the Commissioning Team members and others, as required, the functional
I performance testing checklists electronically. The functional performance testing provides all
team members with documentation to verify the operation of the systems and equipment at
I
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260800 - 1 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260800 -COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
turnover. This testing process will be documented utilizing functional performance testing
checklists.
1. Equipment functional performance testing will demonstrate the installations and operation
of components, systems, and system to system interfacing relationships such that
operation, function and maintenance serviceability for each of the commissioned systems
is confirmed.
2. Testing will include all modes, sequences of operation, and emergency conditions.
C. Prior to passing final inspection, the registered design professional shall provide evidence that
the lighting control systems have been tested to ensure that control hardware and software are
calibrated, adjusted, programmed and in proper working condition in accordance with the
construction documents and manufacturer's instructions. Functional testing shall be in
accordance with adopted energy code for the applicable control type.
D. Where occupant sensor controls are provided, the following procedures shall be performed:
1. Certify that the occupant sensor has been located and aimed in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations.
E. For occupant sensor controls to be tested, verify the following:
1. Where occupant sensor controls include status indicators, verify correct operation.
2. The controlled lights turn off or down to the permitted level within the requested time.
3. For auto-on occupant sensor controls, the lights turn on to the permitted level when an
occupant enters the space.
4. For manual-on occupant sensor controls, the lights turn on only when manually activated.
5. The lights are not incorrectly turned on by movement in adjacent areas or by HVAC
operation. '
F. Where time-switch controls are provided, the following procedures shall be performed:
1. Confirm that the time-switch control is programmed with accurate weekday, weekend and
holiday schedules.
2. Provide documentation to the owner of time-switch controls programming including
weekday, weekend, holiday schedules, and set-up and preference program settings.
3. Verify the correct time and date in the time switch.
4. Verify that any battery back-up is installed and energized.
5. Verify that the override time limit is set to not more than 2 hours.
6. Simulate occupied condition. Verify and document the following:
a. All lights can be turned on and off by their respective area controls switch.
b. The switch only operates lighting in the enclosed space in which the switch is
located.
7. Simulate unoccupied condition. Verify and document the following:
a. Nonexempt lighting turns off.
b. Manual override switch allows only the lights in the enclosed space where the
override switch is located to turn on or remain on until the next scheduled shutoff
occurs.
8. Additional testing as specified by the registered design professional.
G. Where daylight responsive controls are provided, the following shall be verified:
1. Controls devices have been properly located,field calibrated and set for accurate set points
and threshold light levels.
2. Daylight controlled lighting loads adjust to light level set points in response to available
daylight
3. The locations of calibration adjustment equipment are readily accessible only to authorized
personnel.
H. Contractors shall provide 2 weeks' notice to the CxA regarding the completion of equipment and
system installation to schedule installation verification and functional performance testing. The
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260800 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260800 -COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Icommissioning team shall oversee, direct,witness, and document the performance of equipment
and systems to be commissioned. Functional performance testing shall be conducted after startup
I of all equipment and systems have been satisfactorily completed and Controls have been
completed.
I. Contractors are required to provide the CxA with a signed equipment/system readiness form
I before the CxA will visit the site to perform Functional Performance Testing (FPT). All time and
expenses for FPT visits when equipment or systems are not ready to be tested will be invoiced
to the responsible party.
I J. Skilled technicians shall be provided by the appropriate contractors familiar with the system,
components, equipment, and the facility in order to execute the functional performance testing of
the system,subsystems,associated systems, components,and equipment. Each contractor shall
be responsible to operate the systems to be commissioned and assist the CxA who will be
Iverifying the functional performance testing procedures.
K. During the functional performance testing, each responsible contractor or subcontractor, at the
discretion of the CxA, may address minor problems discovered as may be necessary in order to
I successfully complete the testing procedure. In such cases, the deficiency and resolution shall
be documented on the procedure form or an attached sheet.
L. Contractors are responsible to resolve, correct, and retest deficiencies or other issues discovered
I during functional performance testing.
3.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
I A. The documents below specifying that the installed lighting controls meet documented
performance criteria shall be provided to the building owner within 90 days of the date of receipt
of the certificated of occupancy.
B. Manuals
I 1. The commissioning process requires detailed operations and maintenance manuals and
shall include the following information:
a. Submittal data stating equipment size and selected options for each piece of
I equipment requiring maintenance.
Manufacturer's operation manuals and maintenance manuals for each piece of
equipment requiring maintenance, except equipment not furnished as part of the
project. Required routine maintenance actions shall be clearly identified.
c. Name and address of at least one service agency.
d. A narrative of how each system is intended to operate, including recommended set
points.
e. Submittal data indicating all selected options for each piece of lighting equipment
and lighting controls.
f. Operation and maintenance manuals for each piece of lighting equipment. Required
routine maintenance actions, cleaning and recommended relamping shall be clearly
I identified.
g. A schedule for inspecting and recalibrating all lighting controls
2. For equipment and systems in the commissioning scope of work, operation and
maintenance manual information shall be submitted to the CxA in electronic format by the
Icontractor responsible for the respective equipment and systems.
C. A report of test procedures and results identified as "Final Commissioning Report" shall be
delivered to the building owner and shall include:
I1.
2. Results of functional performance tests.
Disposition of deficiencies found during testing, including details of corrective measures
used or proposed.
I
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260800 -3 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260800 -COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3. Functional performance test procedures used during the commissioning process including ,
measurable criteria for test acceptance, provided herein for repeatability.
a. Exception: Deferred tests that cannot be performed at the time of report preparation
due to climatic conditions.
END OF SECTION '
r
r
I
I
1
r
I
I
I
I
I
COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS260800 -4 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260919 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
I1.1 ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
I requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below.
1. Allen-Bradley Co.
2. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
3. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
I 4. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Enclosed Contactors:
II. Provide NEMA standard equipment, rating as indicated on drawings or application
dependent, including those incorporated as an integral part of a factory/shop pre-
fabricated piece of equipment. Do not use IEC standards for equipment.
2. Provide units as indicated on drawings and as indicated under Division 26 sections.
I 3. Provide contactors equipped with externally-visible pilot lights and externally-operated
Hand-Off-Automatic (HOA)selector switches in front cover of enclosure.
4. Wire contactors for lighting applications so that the "AUTO" position is the normal
I activated condition (i.e. photocell controlled, photocell/time-clock controlled, remote
switch controlled, BAS controlled, etc.); so that the "OFF" position is manual override to
turn lighting off; and so that the "HAND" position is manual override to turn lighting on.
5. Provide contactors with field convertible N.O./N.C. contacts and descriptive nameplates.
I 6. Provide lugs, lug kits and related accessory work as required to accommodate the
conductor sizes and quantities needed for each application. Coordinate with associated
installers, single-line diagram, field conditions, etc.
7. Electrically Held Contactors
I a. Provide contactors equal to Square D Class 8903 (or Allen-Bradley Bul. 500L-
BA*94 series) for small resistance heating loads. Provide contactors that are
electrically operated and electrically held (EOEH). Provide contactors in factory
I NEMA 1 minimum enclosures, with 120V coils (unless indicated otherwise
elsewhere or otherwise required to render controls fully operable).
b. Provide "dry" contacts rated at 30A, unless otherwise indicated on drawings,
minimum 250V (600V if required by application). Provide number of poles
I (minimum of three poles) and number of contactors as required for each
application or as indicated on drawing, whichever is larger. Determine coil voltage
ratings in field.
I 8. Mechanically Held Contactors
a. Provide magnetic (mechanically latched) contactors equal to Square D Class 8502
(or Allen-Bradley Bul. 500-BA*930 series) for heating loads, capacitor loads,
transformer loads, motor loads, and similar loads. Provide contactors with factory
I enclosures, with 120V coils (unless indicated otherwise elsewhere or otherwise
required to render controls fully operable). Provide starters with holding circuit
contacts (provide related interlock wiring). Provide magnetic contactors in
enclosures that are NEMA Size 1 minimum.
I b. Provide "dry" contacts rated at 30A, unless otherwise indicated on drawings,
minimum 250V (600V if required by application). Provide number of poles
(minimum of three poles) and number of contactors as required for each
I application or as indicated on drawing, whichever is larger. Determine coil voltage
ratings in field.
I
TEMPLATE 260919 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260919 - ENCLOSED CONTACTORS
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads. Size units according to load being
served or as noted on drawings, whichever requirement is larger.
B. Provide NEMA 3R enclosures for units that are installed outdoors, in moist areas, and in other
atmospheres subject to similar moisture or exposure. Provide other NEMA enclosure types if
indicated on drawings.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
r
I
I
1
I
t
r
I
I
TEMPLATE 260919 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
I1.1 MANUAL LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES—SEE SECTION 262726.00
1.2 AUTOMATED LIGHTING CONTROL - EMS
I A. EMS System
1. Venstar Surveyor system including a lighting control board, lighting contactors, push-
button controls, photosensors, motion detectors, security interface, and dial timer. Refer
to EMS installation guide for more information.]
1.3 AUTOMATED LIGHTING CONTROL—STAND-ALONE (NO EMS)
A. Photocells
Ii. Provide Tork #2107 (for 120/277 volt applications) and Tork #2104 (for 208/277 volt
applications) photocells or equal by Intermatic, 2000W tungsten rated, 1800VA ballast
rated, -40 to 140 degree F rated, fail-on, with contacts that remain closed from dusk to
dawn (on at 1 to 5fc, off at 3 to 15fc). Provide delay of up to two minutes to prevent false
I switching due to vehicular lights or lightning. Provide mobile light level selector. Provide
gasketed heavy duty die cast zinc housing and base. Determine exact mounting
locations and adjustment requirements in field relative to structural and site conditions.
I Aim northward wherever not conflicting with artificial light sources.
2. Provide Sensor Switch #CM-PC-ADC or equal. Provide all required low voltage wiring
and necessary power packs, relays, etc. for a complete system. Coordinate installation
location and setting with manufacturer recommendations for daylight harvesting.
I B. Digital Timer Switches: Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper TS-400. Provide time
range as indicated on drawings or as directed in field based on specific applications. Provide
wall plates and finish colors to match color and style specified in section 262726 "Wiring
I Devices."
C. Multi-Purpose Time Clock (365 Day): Provide Intermatic #ET90415CR series Multi-Purpose
Time Clock (or equal by Tork), which is programmable 365-day/24-hour with override controls.
I Provide four-channel unit. Provide required external contactors, relays, etc. to render the
control systems fully operational. Verify zone control requirements in field prior to rough-in.
Provide 100-hour carryover carryover. Provide Ethernet module.
I 1.4 OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A. General
1. Provide labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire, junction boxes
I and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of
completely operational occupancy sensor lighting controls, as described herein.
2. Provide products supplied from a single manufacturer that has been continuously
involved in manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years.
I 3. Provide occupancy sensors for entire project that are all made by the same
manufacturer, regardless of where the materials are specified in Division 26 documents.
Provide components that are all made by the same manufacturer in cases where
occupancy sensor components are also connected to a building lighting control system,
I regardless of where the materials are specified in Division 26 documents.
4. Provide components that are U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet state and
local applicable code requirements.
I 5. Provide products manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility with a
defect rate of less than one-third of one percent.
1
TEMPLATE 260923 -1 2/28/19
I
1
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
6. Provide sensors with coverage that remains constant after sensitivity control has been
set. Automatic reduction in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans
is not permitted.
7. Provide sensors with readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and
sensitivity. Locate settings on the sensor (not the control unit) and recess to limit
tampering.
8. Provide bypass manual override on each sensor to accommodate failures. Configure so111
that when bypass is utilized, lighting remains on constantly or control diverts to a wall
switch until sensor is replaced. Recess this control to prevent tampering.
9. Provide sensors with an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that
motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation.
10. Where specified, provide sensor with internal additional isolated relay with Normally
Open, Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging
and other control options. Do not use sensors that utilize separate components or
specially modified units to achieve this function.
11. Provide sensors with UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below. If not listed, submit as
substitution.
1. Cooper Greengate CA
2. Hubbell
3. LC&D
4. Leviton
5. Lutron
6. Sensor Switch
7. Phillips
8. Wattstopper
C. Ceiling Sensors: Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: DT-300, DT-305, or DT-
355, series.
D. Wall Switch Sensors: Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: PW-100, PW-100-24,
PW-200, DW-100, DW-100-24 or DW-200 series. Provide wall switch products that utilize Zero
Crossing Circuitry to increase relay life, protect from the effects of inrush current, and increase
sensor's longevity. Provide wall switch sensors that have no leakage current to load, in manual
or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes, and that have voltage drop protection. Where
specified, provide wall switch sensors with field selectable option to convert sensor operation
from automatic-ON to manual-ON. Where specified, provide vandal resistant wall switch
sensors that utilize hard lens with minimum 1.0mm thickness. Do not provide products that
utilize a soft lens.
E. Power and Auxiliary Packs: Provide Standard of Quality equal to WattStopper: B120E-P,
B277E-P, or BZ-100 series.
F. Momentary-Contact Toggle Switches: Provide Standard of Quality equal to Legrand: LVS-1, 3
Amp, 24 VAC/VDC, single-pole, double-throw with center rest, designed to fit conventional
toggle switch openings.
PART 2 - EXECUTION 111
2.1 GENERAL
A. Installation: Provide grounded ("neutral") conductor in all lighting control device (switch, dimmer, ,
occupancy sensor, etc.)wall outlet boxes, even if not immediately used.
B. Occupancy Sensors
TEMPLATE 260923 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
1. Locate and aim sensors in the correct location required for complete and proper
volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the
manufacturer's recommendations. Provide ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent
coverage in rooms to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all
occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the rooms. The
locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate
only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. Provide additional sensors if
required to properly and completely cover the respective room.
2. Arrange a pre-installation meeting with manufacturer's factory authorized representative,
1
3. at Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.
Exercise proper judgment in executing the installation to ensure the best possible
installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space
limitations or interference of structural components.
4. Provide, at the Owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the Owner's
personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the
occupancy sensing controls.
5. Upon completion of the installation, provide complete commissioning for controls by the
manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify adjustments and sensor
placement to ensure trouble-free occupancy-based lighting controls. Provide the Owner
and Design Professionals with ten working days written notice of the scheduled
commissioning date. Upon completion of related work, including fine tuning, provide
factory authorized technician training to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment and
maintenance of the sensors.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 260923 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262113 - LOW-VOLTAGE OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICE I
A. The electric service includes utility company transformer as indicated on drawings, furnished by
local utility company, with secondary voltage as indicated on drawings.
B. Furnish and install all work in strict compliance with all requirements set forth by the utility
company providing electrical service for the project. Procure all needed details and information
directly from the utility company as required for complete operational installations. Furnish and
install all electrical work accordingly. Such work includes, but is not limited to: Insulators,
weatherheads, metering, supports, conduit, wiring, connections, maintaining clearances,
testing, inspections and ancillary work as applicable.
C. Determine available fault current from electric utility company and provide appropriately rated
electrical service and distribution equipment to accommodate not only the initial transformer
proposed by the utility company, but also a future larger transformer if applicable to allow for full
usage of the electrical service capacity.
D. Where indicated in project manual, or where indicated on drawings, or where required by NEC,
install ground-fault protection devices complying with electrical winding polarities indicated. Set
field-adjustable GFP devices and circuit breakers for pickup and time-current sensitivity ranges
as indicated, after installation of devices and CB's.
E. Provide secondary conduit(s) and wiring from outdoor weatherhead to service disconnect(s).
Coordinate insulator locations, weatherhead locations and conductor tail lengths with utility
company prior to commencing with any related work. Provide meter base, associated
conduit(s), and current transformer cabinet if required. Provide all work per utility company
requirements and standards. Utility company will furnish and install the transformer and the
overhead drop, and will make final overhead connections. Coordinate with drawings for number
of spans, poles, special conditions, etc.
1.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE(S)
A. Provide conduit(s) and wiring from outdoor weatherhead to demarcation point. Coordinate
insulator locations, conduit sizes, conduit quantities, weatherhead locations, etc. with utility
company prior to commencing with any related work.
B. Provide minimum of one #6 AWG green-insulated ground conductor (in 3/4 inch EMT) from
electrical power service entrance ground to each plywood equipment board. Terminate as
directed by utility provider that is providing service.
C. Provide related work in compliance with state building codes, with local building codes, with
National Electrical Code, with National Electric Safety Code, with EIA/TIA 569 (Commercial
Buildings Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces), and with other codes and
authorities having jurisdiction. 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface
installation of service entrance equipment work with other work. Provide service entrance
conduits with sweep L's. Properly seal conduits, immediately upon installation, to prevent water,
moisture, dirt, rodents, insects, etc. from entering ducts.
1
TEMPLATE 262113 - 1 2/28/19
M
r
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262113 - LOW-VOLTAGE OVERHEAD ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
B. Prior to commencing with any service entrance related work, carefully coordinate installation of
service work with affected utility companies, with Owner's Representative, with other trades,
with affected entities, and with authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide tight system and equipment grounding and bonding connections for service-entrance
equipment, and wiring.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 262113 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262116 - LOW-VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SERVICE I
A. The electric service includes utility company transformer as indicated on drawings, furnished by
local utility company, with secondary voltage as indicated on drawings.
B. Furnish and install all work in strict compliance with all requirements set forth by the utility
company providing electrical service for the project. Procure all needed details and information
directly from the utility company as required for complete operational installations. Furnish and
install all electrical work accordingly. Such work includes, but is not limited to: Pads, bases,
vaults, pits, manholes, metering, supports, conduit, wiring, connections, maintaining clearances,
testing, inspections and ancillary work as applicable.
C. Determine available fault current from electric utility company and provide appropriately rated
electrical service and distribution equipment to accommodate not only the initial transformer
proposed by the utility company, but also a future larger transformer if applicable to allow for full
usage of the electrical service capacity.
D. Where indicated in project manual, or where indicated on drawings, or where required by NEC,
install ground-fault protection devices complying with electrical winding polarities indicated. Set
field-adjustable GFP devices and circuit breakers for pickup and time-current sensitivity ranges
as indicated, subsequent to installation of devices and CB's.
E. Provide minimum of two 4-inch empty primary conduits from utility distribution source to the
pad. Provide concrete pad. Provide secondary ducts and cable. Provide a minimum of one
spare secondary duct. Provide meter base, associated conduit(s), and current transformer
cabinet if required. Provide all work per utility company requirements and standards. Utility
company will furnish and install the transformer and the primary cables, and will make service
transformer connections.
1.2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICE(S)
A. Provide two (2) 4" empty conduits (privately owned) per service (field-verify quantities and sizes
with respective utility company), with drag lines, from the building plywood equipment board
demarcation location(s) to the outdoor utility pole(s), as otherwise directed by utility operating
company for service entrance(s) to building. Extend conduits at utility pole(s) 4 inches above
final grade.
B. Provide a minimum of 12 inches of earth separation between telephone related conduits and
other conduits, or minimum of 4" separation where encased in concrete. Provide minimum 200-
pound test pull line in conduits. Install conduit at a minimum depth of 24 inches, and a maximum
depth of 36 inches. Provide record documentation. Provide long sweeping bends for offsets,
with radii not less than ten times the internal diameter of conduit, and with a maximum of 270
degrees of bends between pulling points. Provide flush grade mounted pull box (approved by
local telephone company) if required bends exceed 270 degrees. Extend conduit entering the
building interior 4 inches above finished floor elevation. Provide one (1) 3-cell fabric innerduct
assembly, equal to MaxCell Style 4G, in each conduit. Provide pre-lubricated incrementally
marked lengths, and integral 1,250-pound pull tape (incrementally marked and color coded).
C. Provide minimum of one #6 AWG green-insulated ground conductor (in 3/4 inch EMT) from
electrical power service entrance ground to each plywood equipment board. Terminate as
directed by utility provider that is providing service.
D. Provide related work in compliance with state building codes, with local building codes, with
National Electrical Code, with National Electric Safety Code, with EIA/TIA 569 (Commercial
I
TEMPLATE 262116 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262116 - LOW-VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE
111
Buildings Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces), and with other codes and
authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with other electrical work, including utility company wiring, as necessary to interface
installation of service entrance equipment work with other work. Provide service entrance
conduits with sweep L's. Properly seal conduits, immediately upon installation, to prevent water,
moisture, dirt, rodents, insects, etc. from entering ducts.
B. Prior to commencing with any service entrance related work, carefully coordinate installation of
service work with affected utility companies, with Owner's Representative, with other trades,
with affected entities, and with authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Provide tight system and equipment grounding and bonding connections for service-entrance
equipment, and wiring.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 262116 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS I
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data
1. For each type and size include rated nameplate data, capacities, weights, dimensions,
minimum clearances, location and size of each connection, performance, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below. If not listed, submit as
substitution.
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Energy&Automation, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide terminal enclosure, with cover, to accommodate primary and secondary coil wiring
connections, and to accommodate electrical supply raceway terminal connectors. Provide
terminal leads with connectors installed. Provide wiring connectors suitable for copper or
aluminum wiring. Cushion-mount transformers with external vibration isolation supports.
B. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps, one leg per phase, with brazed or
pressure type internal coil connections. Provide Aluminum coils.
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20, and list and label as complying with UL 1561.
B. Taps for Transformers: Two 2.5 percent taps above and four 2.5 percent taps below normal full
capacity.
C. Features:
1. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a
maximum of 150-degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient temperature.
2. Provide transformers with 10kV BIL ratings.
3. Energy Efficiency for Transformers: Complying with DOE 2016 Efficiency standard, and
tested according to DOE 10 CFR Part 431: 2016, including Appendix A.
4. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250 Type 1 for indoor applications and Type 3R for exterior
applications. Finish Color: Gray.
D. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.
E. Low-Sound-Level Requirements: Maximum sound levels, when factory tested according to
IEEE C57.12.91, as follows:
1. 9 kVA and Less: 45 dB
2. 30 to 50 kVA: 45 dB
3. 51 to 150 kVA: 50 dB
4. 151 to 300 kVA: 55 dB
5. 301 to 500 kVA: 60 dB
6. 501 to 750 kVA: 62 dB
7. 751 to 1000 kVA: 64 dB
I
TEMPLATE 262200 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262200 - LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IPART 3 -EXECUTION
S 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-mounting and overhead-mounting transformers level and plumb with brackets
fabricated by transformer manufacturer, or other means and methods specifically approved by
I or recommended by transformer manufacturer for the affected transformer, and install as
recommended by transformer manufacturer. Also, provide companion vibration isolators
procured from transformer manufacturer. Submit specific proposed installation means, methods,
weights, sketches, details, etc. to Design Professionals for review and comment prior to
commencing with any related work.
B. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at location of transformer.
C. Construct concrete housekeeping pad bases, and anchor floor-mounting transformers
I according to manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in Section 26 05 29.00 "Hangers
and Supports for Electrical Systems", and other related sections. Cushion-mount transformers
with external vibration isolation supports.
D. Transformers locations are shown for schematic purposes. Determine exact location in field
based on surrounding building conditions, work of other trades, factory recommendations,
ventilation requirements, maintenance access, and requirements of the NFPA 70 (including
I working clearance requirements).
E. From the time of manufacture, through shipping/storage phases, keep transformers dry, free of
condensation, and free of rapid temperature fluctuations. Do not store transformers outdoors.
I Maintain transformers at temperatures above ambient while in storage.
F. Provide local primary disconnect switch for each transformer, and local secondary overcurrent
protection. Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for
Electrical Systems." and in accordance with NFPA 250. Provide flexible metal grounding strap
I for grounding of core and coils. Provide final connections with an accurate torque wrench, and
tighten to factory published torque values, and submit written documentation showing factory
recommendations and actual values. Provide final connections to primary and secondary taps
I 3.2 as necessary to fulfill project voltage requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and Inspections: Provide testing and keep written and dated log for the following
I 1.
2. "Hi-Pot" or"Megger", at factory at time of shipping.
"Megger", at job site, immediately prior to final connections.
3. Secondary voltage under no load, after installation.
I 4. Secondary voltage under full load, after installation.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Record transformer secondary voltage at each unit for at least 48 hours of typical occupancy
I period. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum voltage conditions at secondary terminals.
Optimum is defined as not exceeding nameplate voltage plus 10 percent and not being lower
than nameplate voltage minus 3 percent at maximum load conditions. Submit recording and tap
settings as test results.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
TEMPLATE 262200 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
r
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Product Data
1. For each provide bus configuration, current ratings, voltage ratings, SCCR Ratings,
overcurrent protective device(s),surge suppression device(s),accessory, and components
indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features,
performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution
3. Siemens Industry, Inc.
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric
B. Enclosures: Refer to electrical drawings and coordinate with field conditions for cabinet mounting
types (i.e. flush, surface, flush and surface).
1. Rate for environmental conditions at installed location.
2. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box, and with standard door within hinged
trim cover. Provide concealed hinges, secured with flush latch with tumbler lock and keyed
alike.
3. Panel, Back Box and Trim Finish: Galvanized steel, factory finished immediately after
cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting
of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.
4. Directory Card: Provide neatly typewritten circuit directory card for each panelboard upon
completion of installation work. Include the actual room names/numbers that are selected
for interior signage/designation.
C. Incoming Mains Location: Provide incoming main locations (top or bottom, or top and bottom)
based on means and methods and conduit/raceway layouts that are planned for installation.
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: Refer to electrical drawings, single line diagram and
schedules for additional information on requirements for buses, as applicable.
1. Material: Tin-plated copper or aluminum.
2. Grounded ("Neutral") Bus: Provide 100% rated bus with sufficient lugs to accommodate
grounded conductors for all circuits and pole spaces.
3. Equipment Grounding Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding
conductors; bonded to box; minimum 50 percent rated. Bond to grounded ("neutral") bus
for service entrance applications only.
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum
2. Main, Neutral, and Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type.
3. Feed-Through Lugs and Sub-feed (Double) Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with
conductor material
F. Service Equipment Label: NRTL/ULSE labeled for use as service equipment for units with one
or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.
G. Fault Current Ratings
I
TEMPLATE 262416 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
1. Provide electrical distribution related equipment with appropriately braced bussing and
properly rated breakers, fuses, etc. for the available fault currents.
I 2. In existing buildings where fault current values are not indicated on drawings, coordinate
with existing "upstream" distribution equipment, and provide equipment AIC ratings that
meet or exceed same.
I H. Provide panelboard branches as scheduled on the drawings. Provide circuit breaker panelboard
bus assemblies with distributed (sequence) type bussing throughout, so that any two adjacent
single-pole breakers, or spaces, are replaceable by a two-pole internal common trip breaker, and
I so that any three adjacent single-pole breakers, or spaces, are replaceable by a three-pole
internal common trip breaker. This applies for branch breakers sized 15-amp through 70-amp
inclusive, without disturbing any other breaker.
I. Provide dead-front safety type panelboards as indicated. Provide with lug connectors approved
for use with copper or aluminum conductors. Provide lugs, lug kits and related accessory work as
required to accommodate the conductor sizes and quantities needed for each application.
Coordinate with single-line diagram, schedules, field conditions, etc.
I2.2 PANELBOARDS
A. Provide Distribution Panel construction for panelboard applications where indicated on drawings
or where otherwise required based on power distribution requirements. Provide Panelboard
Iconstruction for branch panelboards.
B. Provide circuit breaker panelboards unless indicated otherwise on drawings.
1. Circuit Breaker Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on type, replaceable without
I disturbing adjacent units.
2.3 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES
II A. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet
available fault currents.
1. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting
I for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.
2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).
3. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault
protection (30-mA trip).
1 I 4. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker(MCCB) Features and Accessories:
a. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor
materials.
I b. Application Listing: Appropriate for application;Type SWD for switching fluorescent
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)
lighting circuits.
c. Shunt Trip: Trip coil voltage as required to achieve intended control scheme with
I coil clearing contacts (or equivalent configuration), energized from separate circuit
d. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a
single unit.
e. Handle Padlocking "Lock-Out/Tag-Out" Device: Fixed attachment, for locking
I circuit-breaker handle in off position.
f. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on position.
g. Mounting: Designed to be mounted and operated in any physical position, and to be
I operated in a minimum ambient temperature of 40 degrees C.; with mechanical
screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.
h. Size: Full size, no "tandem"or"split" breakers.
I
TEMPLATE 262416 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS
i. Common Trip: Common trip for multi pole breakers so overload on one pole will trip
all poles simultaneously. Provide multi-pole breakers with common trip (or with
handle-ties, only if needed because breakers are existing) for applications where it
is determined that a common disconnecting means is required for multi-wire branch
circuits serving, or within, the same enclosure, outlet box, equipment, or device.
j. SWD Type: Provide for 15 and 20 ampere branch circuit breakers (UL Listed).
k. HACR Type: Provide for HVAC, motor, and Refrigeration loads
I. Spares: Place all spare circuit breakers in the 'OFF' position, provide with breaker
locks, and schedule them as "Spare"on directory card.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 1
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless top-most breaker handle would end up
being above 78 inches in which case the top of trim shall be mounted so that the top-most breaker
handle will be below 78 inches. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already
factory installed. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges and other applicable settings.
Arrange conductors in gutters into groups. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
B. Provide neatly computer-typed/printed circuit directory card for each panel upon completion of
installation work. Include the actual room names/numbers that are selected for interior signage
and/or designation. Scheduling shown on drawings is shown to indicate feeder and branch
circuiting requirements. Determine exact numbering sequence of circuits in field after performing
final balancing.
C. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from recessed branch panelboards into accessible ceiling space
or overhead structural space in areas with no finished ceilings.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 262416 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262713 -ELECTRICITY METERING
I
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
I1.1 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY UTILITY COMPANY
A. General
1. Furnish and install all work in strict compliance with all requirements set forth by the utility
I company providing electrical service for the project. Furnish and install all electrical work
accordingly. Such work includes, but is not limited to: CT cabinets (bussed if necessary),
meter bases/sockets, supports, conduit, wiring, connections, maintaining clearances,
I testing and inspections. Coordinate installation and connection of utilities and services.
Locate and position meters in locations approved by the utility company, Design
Professionals and Owner.
2. Provide lugs, lug kits and related accessory work as required to accommodate the
i conductor sizes and quantities needed for each application. Meter will be furnished and
installed by utility company. Provide metering-related work in strict accordance with utility
company requirements.
I 3. Current-Transformer Cabinets: Provide current-transformer cabinets. Comply with
requirements of electrical-power utility company, including providing bussed cabinets for
large services if required.
I B. Metering at Building or Structure
1. Where applicable for projects requiring metering current transformer cabinets ("CT
cabinets"), provide in strict compliance with utility company requirements. Provide bussed
CT cabinets, constructed per utility company requirements, wherever more than three
I sets of paralleled service entrance conductors exist, or will exist based on provisions
indicated for future growth. Provide (1) 2" empty conduit with 200-lb pull string from CT
Cabinet to the meter enclosure. Provide supports for CT cabinet and meter base. Do not
exceed 25 feet in length for the conduit between the CT cabinet and the meter base.
I1.2 EQUIPMENT FOR ELECTRICITY METERING BY OWNER("SUB OR TAB METERING")
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Provide all meters on this project by the same manufacturer to
ensure commonality and ease of Owner maintenance. Subject to being equivalent and subject
to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below.
1. E-Mon; a division of Hunt Power(basis of design).
2. Electro Industries/GaugeTech (Shark series)
I 3. National Meter Industries.
4. Osaki Meter Sales, Inc.
5. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
I 6. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
7. Siemens Industry, Inc.
8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. General Requirements and Specifications for Owner's Meters:
I 1. Provide E-Mon D-Mon Class 3000 Series metering systems and equipment. Provide
digital meter and current transformers (CT's), rated at amperes and voltages as
necessary for each particular application. Provide conduit, wiring and connections
1 between CT's and meters per manufacturer's instructions as required to render the
metering fully functional.
2. Provide Demand (kW) reading, which shows and records the highest peak demand and
date and time peak occurred.
I 3. Meters used for billing shall have an accuracy of 0.5 percent of reading, complying with
requirements in ANSI C12.20.
I
TEMPLATE 262713 -1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262713 - ELECTRICITY METERING
4. Provide meter that is UL listed and labeled, CSA Approved and certified by a nationally
recognized independent test facility to ANSI C12.1 and C12.16 specifications with split-
core current sensors.
5. Enclosure: Provide heavy-duty JIC steel enclosure suitable for indoor installation and
Nema type 4X enclosures with hasp for padlocking or sealing for exterior installations
(exterior installation is preferred).
6. Memory Backup: Self-contained, non-volatile, to maintain memory throughout power111
outages of 72 hours, minimum.
7. Sensors: Allow for paralleling of sensors and/or mounting up to 500 feet from the meter.
Provide sensors of split-core configuration to allow installation without powering down,
with sensors available from 25 amp to 4,000 amp.
8. Power Factor: 0.5 leading or lagging.
9. Accuracy: Certified to ANSI C12.1 and C12.16 National Accuracy Standards.
10. Temperature Range: -20 degrees C to +50 degrees C.
11. Current Overload: Can be overloaded 100% without damaging meter.
C. Provide the following features.
1. Easy-to-read cycling 4-line by 20-character backlit LCD display that shows kWh, kW (with
peak date and time), power factor per phase, real-time load in kW, amps per phase, and
volts per phase.
2. Records kWh and kVARh data for two channels. Data stored in 15-minute intervals for up
to 36 days or 5-minute intervals for up to 12 days.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide Series Combination Warning Labels, if applicable: Self-adhesive type, with text as
required by NFPA 70.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
TEMPLATE 262713 -2 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES
I
PART 1 -PRODUCTS
1.1 GENERAL
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below.
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper)
2. FSR Inc. (FSR)
3. Hubbell Incorporated (Hubbell)
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell)
5. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Bryant(Hubbell)
6. Legrand
7. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton)
8. Lutron Electronics, Inc. (Lutron)
9. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour)
10. Wiremold/Legrand (Wiremold)
B. For receptacle circuits protected with 15A breakers, provide NEMA 5-15R equivalents for the
devices specified in this section.
C. Provide equivalent quality devices by manufacturers listed in subparagraphs hereafter for cases
where voltage, amperage and/or NEMA configurations that are indicated on drawings or, are
otherwise required based on project conditions, differ from those specified herein.
D. Provide Weather-Resistant Receptacles with UL "WR" marking, compliant with NEC 406.8, for
all applications in wet or damp locations.
E. Where GFI protected receptacles are shown on drawings, provide a separate GFI receptacle for
each one shown. Do not feed downstream receptacles from load-side (GFI-protected)terminals
I of upstream receptacles.
F. Provide corrosion-resistant versions of receptacles specified below for industrial applications
and applications in corrosive or potentially-corrosive environments.
G. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted
under the following conditions: Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with
stranding building wire; connectors are NRTL listed for intended use; connectors comply with
I
1.2 the requirements in this Section; connectors are permitted by Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R (20A) or 5-15R (15A), UL 498, and FS W-C-596. Provide duplex and single
specification grade receptacles, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding, self-grounding, green grounding
screw, ground terminals and poles internally connected to mounting yoke, color coded base, 20-
amperes, 125-volts, with metal plaster ears, back & side wiring, NEMA configuration 5-20R.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following (catalog numbers in
subparagraphs below are for 20-A, heavy-duty, specification-grade, nylon-face devices; revise
catalog numbers to require other configurations and ratings):
I 1.
2. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex)
Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex)
3. Bryant; 5351 (single), 5352A(duplex)
4. Leviton; 5351 (single), 5362 (duplex)
' 5. Pass & Seymour; 5351 (single), 5362 (duplex)
I
TEMPLATE 262726 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES
B. GFCI Receptacles, 125V, 20A: Straight blade, feed-through or non-feed-through type
depending on application. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A,
and FS W-C-596. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Cooper; VGF20
2. Hubbell; GF20#LA
3. Bryant; GF20#LA
4. Pass & Seymour; 2097
5. Leviton; 6490
C. [Combination USB Type A Charger, USB Type C Charger and Tamper-Resistant Convenience
Receptacles: Square/rectangular face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A, and UL 1310. Provide one 20 Amp, 125
Volt, Decora Tamper-Resistant Receptacle, NEMA 5-20R. Provide one Type A USB Charger,
and one Type C USB Charger, minimum 15.5W 5VDC power supply. Provide grounding, and
Side-Wired and Back-Wired features. Provide integral smart chip that recognizes and optimizes
the charging power of the plugged-in device. Label to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles,
Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in
Dwelling Units" Section. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may
be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to, the following.
1. Legrand; PTTR20ACUSB series
2. Leviton equivalent
3. Hubbell equivalent]
1.3 CORD AND PLUG SETS
11
A. Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected; Rubber-insulated cord with stranded-copper conductors,
Type SOW-A jacket, green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent
of the equipment rating; Nylon body plug with integral cable-clamping jaws (match cord and
receptacle type for connection).
1.4 TOGGLE SWITCHES
A. General: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. I
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Single Pole:
a. Cooper; AH 1221.
b. Hubbell; HBL1221.
c. Bryant; 1121.
d. Leviton; 1221-2.
e. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.
2. Three Way:
a. Cooper; AH 1223.
b. Hubbell; HBL1223.
c. Bryant; 4903.
d. Leviton; 1223-2.
e. Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.
1.5 WALL-BOX DIMMERS
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. Provide continuously adjustable slider
control, with single-pole or three-way switching equal to Lutron "Diva" series. Comply with
UL 1472. Do not break off side heat-sink sections when ganging. Provide dimmer and wall plate
TEMPLATE 262726 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES
colors that match other wiring devices in the respective room. Multiple wall-box dimmers may be
used sporadically throughout the project on common circuits; provide compatible dimmers
accordingly. Provide dedicated neutrals for circuits serving loads controlled by dimmers. Subject
to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following manufacturers':
1. Lutron
I 2. Cooper
3. Hubbell
4. Leviton
5. Wattstopper
B. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are
listed for that application. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers
according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions. Provide low-
voltage control wiring, where applicable, as required to render all dimming functionality fully
operational.
C. LED Dimmer Switches: Specification grade; modular; thin profile; compatible with dimming
drivers; dimmer-driver combination capable of consistent full-range dimming. Provide low-
voltage control wiring, in addition to branch circuit wiring, as required to render dimming fully
operational.
1.6 COMMUNICATION, INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY AND SIMILAR OUTLETS
A. Provide the following for communication, information technology and similar outlets that are
shown on electrical drawings.
1. Provide 4-inch square by minimum 2-1/8 inch deep outlet box with single-gang ring.
2. Provide single-gang blank wall plate of material and color to match wiring devices in the
respective room/area.
3. Provide at least one 3/4" empty conduit from outlet box to accessible ceiling cavity, or to
overhead joist/structure space in areas with no finished ceilings. Provide sweep bends
and insulated throat fittings (or plastic bushings) at each end of the conduit
4. Provide 200-pound pull string within conduits, easily accessible at both ends.
5. Provide neat permanent marking at the end of the overhead stub that clearly states the
purpose of the conduit and the room where the respective outlet is located.
6. Coordinate all locations, heights and other specifics with the respective device/system
installers and provide all work accordingly.
1.7 WALL PLATES
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. Provide metal plate-
securing screws with head color to match plate finish. Provide factory markings on faces of
I receptacles that are controlled for energy management or building automation that are
compliant with Article 406.3(E), including symbol and the word "Controlled". Provide engraved
wall plates where required by prevailing codes, indicated on drawings or indicated in Division 26
specifications.
1. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic
2. Material for Unfinished Spaces with surface-mounted outlet boxes: Galvanized steel
3. Material for Indoor Kitchens, Bar Areas, Damp Locations: Gasketed satin finish stainless
steel, equal to Leviton Type 430 series, with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-
!'
1.8 resistant. Refer to Section 26 05 33.00.
FLOOR OUTLETS
A. Refer to"FLOOR OUTLET DEVICE SCHEDULE" on drawings for specifications for floor boxes.
I
TEMPLATE 262726 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES
B. Products: Floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing
agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with UL 514 and NFPA 70
scrub water exclusion requirements. Provide UL listed and labeled rating(s) for fire and smoke
rating of floor(and ceiling-below where applicable) assembly.
1.9 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES ("PLUGSTRIPS")
A. Provide two-piece surface metal raceway, with factory-wired multioutlet harness. Components
shall be products from single manufacturer designed for use as a NRTL listed complete,
matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. Provide metal construction, with
manufacturer's standard finish. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following:
1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems
2. Wiremold/Legrand
B. Multioutlet Harness: I
1. Receptacles: 15-A, 125-V, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles complying with
NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.
2. Receptacle Spacing: 6 inches.
1.10 FINISHES AND INDICATORS
A. Device Color(unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing):
1. General Wiring Devices Connected to Normal-Utility Branch of Power System: Verify with
Architect and Owner .
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
C. Illuminated Indication: Provide illuminated face or indicator light versions of wiring devices
specified herein where indicated as such on drawings and/or where required by prevailing
code(s), to indicate that there is power to the device.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordination with Other Trades: Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, I
mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway
system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover
plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install
wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
B. Conductors: Provide grounded ("neutral") conductor in all lighting control device (switch,
dimmer, occupancy sensor, etc.)wall outlet boxes, even if not immediately used. Strip insulation
evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of
solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for
devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Pig-tailing existing
conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
C. Device Installation:
1. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect
conductors. 111
2. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
3. Use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly
clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.
4. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.
5. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
I
TEMPLATE 262726 -4 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262726 -WIRING DEVICES
6. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
7. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
I
8. device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
Consider locations indicated on the drawings to be approximate (unless specifically
dimensioned on drawings, or unless spacings must comply with prevailing codes). Study
the general construction with relation to spaces and equipment surrounding each outlet.
9. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which
attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Support boxes
independent of conduit.
10. Provide feed-through-type GFCI receptacles where downstream receptacles are fed from
the line side of the GFCI receptacle.
11. Adjust locations of outlets, devices, etc. to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
12. Arrangement of Devices: Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.
Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical. Install receptacles
so that the ground pin is oriented in a consistent manner throughout the facility, so that
the orientation is compliant with all prevailing codes and regulations, and so that the
orientation is acceptable to the electrical inspector. Where there is no existing building
standard or other project requirement, install receptacles with ground pin up. Where
receptacles are installed horizontally, install so that neutral connection faces up.
13. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and
remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough
wall opening.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 262726 -5 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262813 -FUSES
I
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.1 EXTRA MATERIALS I
A. Fuses: Furnish fuses equal to 10% of project quantity not exceeding (10)for each fuse size and
type. Furnish no fewer than (2) for single phase applications and (3) for three phase
applications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work:
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.
3. Mersen, Inc.
4. Littelfuse, Inc.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Characteristics:
1. 50 through 60 Hz., with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.
2. Voltage: Rate based on voltage of protected feeders, circuits and loads.
3. Provide rejection type fuses for fuses 1 ampere through 600 amperes.
4. Provide Hi-Cap, bolt type fuses for fuses 601 amperes through 6000 amperes. 1
5. Cartridge Fuses: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings
consistent with circuit voltages.
6. Provide each fuse with clear factory markings indicating classification, characteristics,
ampere ratings, voltage ratings, etc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FUSE APPLICATIONS I
A. For protecting service entrances, and distribution feeders 600 amperes and below: Provide UL
Class RK-1 Current-Limiting/Time-Delay fuses. Provide fuses that are current-limiting, time-
delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman #LPS-RK1 (600V) or
Bussman #LPN-RK-1 (250V) as applicable.
B. [For protecting general duty motors: Provide UL Class RK-5 Current-Limiting/Time-Delay fuses.
Provide fuses that are time-delay, dual-element type (with pure silver links), equal to Bussman
#LPS-RK5 (600V) or Bussman #LPN-RK-5 (250V) as applicable. Provide fuses that are rated
60 Hz, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.]
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 262813 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262813 -FUSES
I
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door
of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder.
END OF SECTION
r
I
I
I
I
I
r
I
1
1
I
I
TEMPLATE 262813 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262816.16 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - PRODUCTS
1.1 SWITCHES I
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with
requirements, provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below. If not listed, submit as
substitution.
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer& Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
3. Siemens Industry, Inc. 11
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Characteristics:
1. 50 through 60 Hz., with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.
2. 250VAC rated, for projects with service-entrance line to line voltage not exceeding 240V.
3. 600VAC rated, for projects with service-entrance line to line voltage not exceeding 600V.
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to
accommodate required fuses where applicable, lockable handle with capability to accept three
padlocks, interlocked with cover in closed position, single or double throw as indicated on
drawings.
D. Accessories: I
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground
conductors.
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled
for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.
4. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.
5. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
1.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Enclosed Switches: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with
environmental conditions at installed location. Refer to drawings for NEMA type. Provide the
following enclosure types if not noted on drawings, or if not noted otherwise on drawings.
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
111
3. Commercial Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, Stainless Steel.
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: Type 3R.
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:
NEMA 250, Type 12.
PART 2 -EXECUTION
2.1 INSTALLATION I
A. Install individual wall-mounted units with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, or
unless units must be stacked vertically, or unless field conditions otherwise dictate.
B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
C. Install fuses in fusible devices.
D. Comply with NECA 1.
E. Install disconnect switches within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated.
I
TEMPLATE 262816.16 - 1 2/28/19
r
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
I GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 262816.16 -ENCLOSED SWITCHES
F. Size units according to load being served or as noted on drawings, whichever requirement is
larger. Provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads where applicable. Install fuses
I and accessories as necessary to fulfill requirements of each application as applicable.
G. Subsequent to completion of installation of equipment, energize circuits and demonstrate
capability and compliance with requirements. Begin by demonstrating switch operation through
I six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure and inspect
interiors, inspect mechanical and electrical connections, inspect fuse installations, and verify
accuracy of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate
compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.
H. Provide fuses of types specified in Section 262813.00, and of ratings as indicated on drawings.
IEND OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 262816.16 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 264313 -SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS I
A. Product Data
1. For each type include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, maximum continuous operating voltage, weights and dimensions, wiring
requirements, tested values, required OCPD and accessories, warranty, etc.
1.2 DEFINITIONS:
A. SPD: Surge protective/protection device.
B. SPD Type: Used to describe the intended application location of the SPD, either upstream or
downstream of the main overcurrent protective device of the facility.
1. Type 1 SPD — Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation between the
secondary of the service transformer and the line side of the service equipment
overcurrent device, as well as the load side, including watt-hour meter socket enclosures
and intended to be installed without an external overcurrent protective device.
2. Type 2 SPD — Permanently connected SPDs intended for installation on the load side of
the service equipment overcurrent device; including SPDs located at a branch panel.
3. Type 4 SPD — Recognized Component SPDs, including discrete components as well as
component assemblies, which bear specific conditions of acceptability.
C. Enhanced EMI/RFI Filtering: The performance of filtering circuitry is defined by the level to
which it mitigates Ring Wave transients and can be demonstrated in the test results of IEEE
C62.41.2-2002, Category A Ring Wave (2kV).
D. VPR (Voltage Protection Rating): A rating selected from a list of preferred values as detailed in
the latest edition of UL 1449 and assigned to each mode of protection. The value of VPR is
determined as the nearest highest value taken from a list of preferred values as detailed in the
latest edition of UL 1449 to the measured limiting voltage determined during the transient-
voltage surge suppression test using the combination wave generator at a setting of 6 kV, 3 kA.
E. MCOV(Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage): The maximum designated root mean-square
(rms) value of the power frequency voltage that may be continuously applied to the mode of
protection of an SPD.
F. Nominal Discharge Current (In): Peak value of the current, selected by the manufacturer from a
list of values specified in the latest edition of UL 1449, through the SPD having a current wave
shape of 8/20 where the SPD remains functional after 15 surges using the test procedure
described in the latest edition of UL 1449.
G. Modes of Protection: Electrical paths where the SPD offers defense against transient
overvoltages. e.g. Each Line to Neutral (L-N), Line to Ground (L-G), Line to Line (L-L) and
Neutral to Ground (N-G).
H. Per Phase Ratings: `Per-Phase' ratings for a three-phase Wye-connected SPD is the total surge
current capacity connected to a given phase (Line to Neutral mode plus Line to Ground mode).
I. MOV: Metal-oxide varistor; an electronic component with a significant non-ohmic current-
voltage characteristic.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of field installed SPDs to allow adequate clearances for maintenance and
proximity to electrical bus in protected power distribution equipment. SPDs shall be rated for the
I
TEMPLATE 264313 - 1 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 264313 -SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
111
I ss and category of service necessaryfor the application. Preferred location is on the wall
ca g y
directly above the main panel.
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SPDs that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period. Warranty Period: Minimum five (5) years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Provide all SPDs on this project by the same SPD manufacturer to ensure
commonality and ease of Owner maintenance. Provide products manufactured by Emerson
Surge Protection. Subject to being equivalent and subject to compliance with requirements,
provide product by one of the manufacturers listed below.
1. Emerson Surge Protection
2. Advanced Protection Technologies Inc. (APT)
3. ASCO Power Technologies (APT)
4. Current Technology
5. Eaton Corporation
6. General Electric
7. LEA International
8. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc.
9. Siemens Industry, Inc.
10. Square D
11. Surge Suppression Incorporated
2.2 GENERAL SPD REQUIREMENTS
A. SPD with Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency,
and marked for intended location and application. Comply with latest editions of NFPA 70 and
I UL 1449.
2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE SPD'S
A. Basis of Design:
1. Surge Suppression Incorporated, Advantage Series
2. Emerson Surge Protection, 400 Series
3. Current Technology, Current Guard Plus Series
B. SPDs: Listed and labeled UL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with
UL 1449 Type 1. Comply with UL 1283.
C. Peak Surge Current Rating: The minimum single-pulse surge current withstand rating per mode
shall not be less than 200 kA. This value shall be independently tested by a 3rd party testing
agency.
D. SPD shall have a Nominal Discharge Current Rating of 20 kA per mode for all modes. The
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV)shall be at a minimum as follows:
1. 120/208 Wye shall be 150V
E. The SPD shall have Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs)for modes shown above as follows:
1. 120/208 Wye
a. L-N: 700V
b. L-L: 1,200V
c. L-G: 700V
I
TEMPLATE 264313 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS i
SECTION 264313 -SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
d. N-G: 700V 1
F. SPDs shall be or have the following features and accessories:
1. Indicator light display for power to device and protection status.
2. Form-C contacts rated at 5 A and 250-V ac, one normally open and one normally closed,
for remote monitoring of protection status.
3. Surge counter.
4. Permanently-mounted, parallel connected.
5. Solid-state clamping components to limit the surge voltage and divert the surge current.
SPD components that "crowbar" (e.g. spark gaps, gas tubes, SCR's, etc.) are not
allowed.
6. Capable of sustaining 115% of nominal RMS voltage continuously without degrading.
7. The SPD shall be tested and listed by an UL as a complete assembly to a symmetrical
fault current rating greater than or equal to the available fault current at the location of
installation at the protected power distribution equipment, in accordance with NEC Article
285 and shall be marked with the short circuit current rating (SCCR). If the available fault
current is unknown, then the SCCR of the SPD shall be 200 kAIC.
8. SPD system shall provide protection for all modes for a three-phase Wye-connected
SPD.
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. Indoor Enclosures: NEMA 1 or better; Outdoor Enclosures: NEMA 4 or better. 1
B. Wire SPDs to a disconnecting switch or breaker, rated for minimum 30 amps (higher if/as
recommended by equipment manufacturer), in the protected power distribution equipment per
manufacturer's installation instructions to ensure a means of disconnecting the SPD from the
power source without de-energizing the protected power distribution equipment or the
connected loads. Size circuit breaker rating so that breaker does not open prematurely when
removing surge suppression from the circuit. The use of direct bus bar connected SPDs is
expressly prohibited and will be rejected unless integral means is included to disconnect and
remove SPD without having to de-energize respective protected equipment or upstream
equipment.
C. Service Entrance Equipment: Provide externally-mounted. Install SPD components to the
service entrance equipment as near as possible to the interior connection points; position the
related branch breakers accordingly. Provide dual shielded, triple insulated multi-core power
conductor from connection lug to SPD to minimize cable impedance. I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install SPDs in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the NEC. Comply with
NECA 1.
B. Externally Mounted Units and Similar Applicable Installations: Install SPDs with conductorsII
between suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible, and adjust
circuit-breaker positions to achieve shortest and straightest leads. Do not splice and extend
SPD leads unless specifically permitted by manufacturer in writing. Do not bond neutral and
ground. Install conductors with direct paths to and from SPD devices avoiding sharp bends,
loops and excessive lengths. Install externally mounted SPD components to the boxes of
protected equipment as near as possible to the interior connection points; position or reposition
the related branch breakers accordingly. Cut factory and field leads as required to minimize
cable lengths for externally mounted units.
C. Wiring:
I
TEMPLATE 264313 -3 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 264313 -SURGE PROTECTION FOR LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CIRCUITS
1. Install SPDs at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.
2. Use crimped connectors and splices only. Wire nuts are unacceptable.
3. Power Wiring: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables."
4. Controls: Comply with wiring methods in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
5. Provide overcurrent protection (OCP) compliant with NFPA 70 for each SPD. Such
OCP's that may be shown on drawings are shown for schematic purposes. Provide
OCP's at ratings as recommended by SPD manufacturer for each application.
D. Do not perform insulation-resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with SPDs
installed. Disconnect SPDs before conducting insulation-resistance tests, and reconnect them
immediately after the testing is over. Energize SPDs after power system has been energized,
stabilized, and tested.
E. The SPD installation shall be certified by a licensed electrician that the installation is in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, NEC requirements and the
requirements of the specification above. Any deficiencies noted shall be corrected by the
Contractor. Provide written documentation of this inspection as part of the closeout
documents/manual.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 264313 -4 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
I
1.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, equipment, programming, services, etc. as required for
complete and fully operational lighting and lighting control systems.
B. Definitions:
1. BF: Ballast factor.
2. CCT: Correlated color temperature.
3. CRI: Color-rendering index.
4. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.
5. Lumen: Measured output of lighting source, luminaire, or both.
6. Luminaire: Complete lighting unit consisting of lighting source or sources, and some or
all of the following components: optical control devices, contacts, mechanical
components to support or attach the luminaire, and electrical and electronic components
to start, operate, dim or control and maintain the operation of lighting source, and driving
and transformation components.
7. Lighting Source: LED boards or equivalent LED assembly or, lamp ('bulb") for insertion
into compatible socket, etc.
8. THD: Total harmonic distortion
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which I
manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace
components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for all Emergency Lighting Batteries: five years from date of Substantial
Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the
remaining years.
PART 2 -PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES AND COMPONENTS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings. I
Provide products of one of the manufacturers listed in this section for products that are not
defined on the Luminaire Schedule. Provide specification grade luminaires that comply with
minimum requirements as stated therein. If a particular"type" does not include basis of design
manufacturer or model number, provide "pre-approved equivalent" manufacturer's and model
numbers compliant with, and equivalent to: quality, performance, dimensions, and aesthetics as
the respective basis of design for Design Professional review no less than five business days
prior to bid due date.
B. Luminaires designated by letters are defined as indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.
C. Provide luminaires, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to,
housings, energy-efficient light sources, contacts, reflectors, wiring, etc.. Ship luminaires
factory-assembled, with components required for a complete operating installation.
D. Recessed Luminaires:
1. Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed luminaires.
2. Provide recessed luminaires with necessary gypsum board, plaster frames, and surface
trim.
3. Provide recessed luminaires that are constructed without rolled edges and that are post-
painted.
4. Provide door frames on troffer style luminaires with spring latches on door frames.
I
TEMPLATE 265100 - 1 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
5. Provide static air function for luminaires unless otherwise noted.
6. Provide luminaires that are non-IC constructed unless otherwise noted.
7. Provide junction boxes and serviceable components (driving and transformation
component types, thermal protection devices, fuses, etc.)for recessed luminaires that are
accessible for service and replacement from below the ceiling, without removing ceiling
I
8. components.
Where plaster frames are inferred for luminaires (either by narrative, or by catalog
number, or by application) interpret the actual function to mean for mounting within
gypsum board, wet plaster or similar type inaccessible ceiling system. Field verify related
I
9. requirements and provide required accessories, such as frames, accordingly.
Provide UL approved (listed and labeled) thermal protection per latest edition of
NFPA/NEC for recess mounted luminaires.
E. Surface Luminaires: Install surface mounted luminaires with air spaces between luminaire and
surface per latest edition of NFPA/NEC. Provide factory luminaire wiring that is per NEC, #16
AWG minimum. Wire luminaires having medium base and mogul base sockets with not smaller
than No. 16 or No. 14 wire respectively in accordance with the latest requirements of the
National Electric Code.
F. Review drawings and specifications of other trades to verify ceiling types, modules, and
suspension systems appropriate to installation.
G. Luminaires: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5, 5A,
5B, etc. as applicable.
H. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
I. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
J. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit replacing lighting source(s) without use of tools.
Design to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling
accidentally during servicing and when secured in operating position. Fabricate luminaires with
concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed
as to dampen generated noise.
K. Diffusers and Globes: Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High
resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation, UV
stabilized. Provide at least 0.125 inch minimum lens thickness unless otherwise indicated.
Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.
L. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lighting sources, and
driving and transformation components. Labels shall be located where they will be readily
visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lighting sources are
in place.
1. Label shall include the following characteristics:
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.
2.2 EXIT SIGNS
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance,
and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Internally Lighted Signs:
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.
2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained
power pack.
TEMPLATE 265100 -2 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type.
b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage
drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored,
relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and
floated on charger.
d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal
power and demonstrates unit operability.
e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle
charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. General Requirements for Emergency Lighting Units:
1. Self-contained units complying with UL 924.
2. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, lead-acid type.
3. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay.
4. Operation: Relay automatically turns lamp on when power-supply circuit voltage drops to
80 percent of nominal voltage or below. Lamp automatically disconnects from battery
when voltage approaches deep-discharge level. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
5. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and
demonstrates unit operability.
6. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge;
bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
2.4 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) SYSTEMS
A. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Systems
1. LED Sources: Provide factory installed LED modules that are specifically designed for,
and matched and mated to, the respective luminaire in which they are used. Provide LED
modules that can easily be replaced in the field and are readily accessible for
replacement. Provide color temperature as indicated in Luminaire Schedule.
2. LED Drivers; Provide factory installed driver(s) for the LED source utilized that are
specifically coordinated to the LED source and luminaire in which they are used. Provide
driver(s) having specific operating characteristics defined in the Luminaire Schedule.
Provide driver(s) that can easily be replaced in the field and are readily accessible for
replacement. Provide specification sheet for the specific driver as part of the Luminaire
Submittal.
3. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) Rating: Less than 20 percent. Provide factory-installed
I
integral filtering system to ensure THD does not exceed 20 percent regardless of
quantities and/or mixes with other manufactured LED systems.
2.5 LUMINAIRE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A. Support fixtures in compliance with NEC. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports
for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle
supports.
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish
same as luminaire. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed
to mount a single luminaire. Finish same as luminaire.
C. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage. Wires for Humid 1
Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage.
I
TEMPLATE 265100 -3 2/28/19
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 -LIGHTING
D. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. Hook
Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to luminaire and line voltage and equipped with
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
E. For open ceiling spaces where fixtures are suspended and subject to damage or impact,
provide an additional air craft cable support securely fastened to luminaire and structure to act
as a safety chain providing a redundant support. Select cable based on manufacturer's
recommendations, accounting for weight of luminaire assembly, external forces that could be
applied, minimum 200% factor of safety, etc. Decorative pendants in finished spaces are
exempt from this requirement.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Luminaires: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.
Install lighting sources in each luminaire.
B. Temporary Lighting: If it is deemed necessary, and permitted by Owner's Representative and
Design Professionals, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize
the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is substantially complete,
remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and
reinstall.
C. Remote Mounting of Driving and Transformation Components: Distance between the driving
and transformation components and luminaire shall not exceed that recommended by the
luminaire and driving and transformation components manufacturer. Verify, with manufacturers,
maximum distance between driving and transformation components and luminaire.
D. Lay-in Ceiling Luminaires Supports: Unless required otherwise under other sections or unless
project requirements and conditions require otherwise, grid may be used as a support element,
subject to coordinating installations with ceiling system installer to ensure the ceiling system
installer accounts for the weights of each luminaire and of all luminaires collectively, and installs
specially marked and designated ceiling support components.
1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension
devices, for each luminaire. Locate not more than 6 inches from luminaire corners.
2. Support Clips: Fasten to luminaires and to ceiling grid members at or near each
I
3. luminaire corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Luminaires of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans
or center in acoustical panel, and support luminaires independently with at least two 3/4-
inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.
E. Suspended Luminaire Support:
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches brace to limit swinging.
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Luminaires: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for
suspension for each unit length of luminaire chassis, including one at each end.
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to
building structure.
F. Install surface and recessed ceiling luminaires on grid and tile ceilings to agree with module of
ceiling either displacing a tile, or unit on center of tile, or centered on grid lines. Install flush
mounted luminaires properly to eliminate light leakage between luminaire frame and finished
surface.
I
TEMPLATE 265100 -4 2/28/19
i
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
G. Do not locate splice or tap within an arm, stem, or chain. Provide wiring continuous from splice
in outlet box of the building wiring system to driving and transformation component terminals in
luminaires.
H. Provide Type MC Cable or wiring in minimum 1/2" diameter flexible metal conduit (with full
parity sized green insulated equipment ground wire) for "drops" from building wiring system
junction boxes to suspended ceiling mounted luminaires. Limit the length of these "drops" to
72". Install "drops"to luminaires in gypsum board, and similar inaccessible ceiling systems, from
identified accessible junction boxes.
I. Connect luminaires utilized for emergency egress lighting and exit signage ahead of switching
and other controls. The only exceptions to this are photocell-only controls for outdoor
emergency egress luminaires.
J. Provide luminaires and luminaire outlet boxes with hangers to properly support luminaire
weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein,
for review by Owner's Representative and review by ceiling installer. Anchor luminaires installed
in, or on, suspended ceiling systems in strict compliance with NEC, including advance
coordination with the ceiling installer. Support surface mounted luminaires greater than 2 feet in
length at a point in addition to the outlet box luminaire stud. Fasten electrical luminaires and
brackets securely to structural supports. Install luminaires level and plumb.
K. Where special mounting conditions are encountered, such as mounting to rounded columns or
similar special circumstances, provide special custom factory-fabricated mounting means (i.e.,
brackets designed to conform with curvature of rounded columns, or to conform with similar
special surfaces).
L. Provide stems and chains for luminaires as designated by the Owner's Representative where
deemed necessary by the Owner's Representative to achieve a functional and neat installation.
Contact Owner's Representative to determine pendant, stem, and chain lengths if mounting
height is not indicated.
M. Provide plaster frames, or gypsum board frames, or similar kits for recessed luminaires installed
in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to
prevent distortion during handling.
N. Wear clean white cotton gloves when handling the luminaires reflective and diffusing surfaces.
Clean surfaces including dust, finger prints, paint, etc. with a clean dry cheesecloth after interior
work has been completed. Remove plastic shipping bags from luminaires only after work in the
respective area is complete.
O. Where applicable, verify that measured illuminance values comply with respective isolux (or
equivalent) plot diagram values.
P. Provide full assembly for luminaires that are shipped with any loose components, regardless of
who furnishes the luminaires.
Q. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to emergency source and retransfer to normal.
R. Burn-in all light sources that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to
occupancy by Owner.
S. Make adjustments and perform settings/programming to lighting controls and control systems
so that all luminaires are fully operational compliant with design requirements and to the
satisfaction of the Owner and Design Professionals. I
I
TEMPLATE 265100 -5 2/28/19
I
I
STARBUCKS COFFEE COMPANY
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 265100 - LIGHTING
T. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, clean, re-lamp and maintain
equipment, devices, controls, instrumentation, and accessories, and to use and reprogram
lighting control systems as applicable.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
TEMPLATE 265100 -6 2/28/19
I